Garmin Software Version 1633 A7

2015-05-27

: Garmin Garmin-Software-Version-1633-A7-720602 garmin-software-version-1633-a7-720602 garmin pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 628

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300
Pilot’s Guide

Embraer Phenom 300

Copyright © 2013 Garmin Ltd. or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
This manual reflects the operation of System Software version 1633.A4 or later for the Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300. Some differences
in operation may be observed when comparing the information in this manual to later software versions.
Garmin International, Inc., 1200 East 151st Street, Olathe, Kansas 66062, U.S.A.
Tel: 913/397.8200 Fax: 913/397.8282
Garmin AT, Inc., 2345 Turner Road SE, Salem, OR 97302, U.S.A.
Tel: 503/391.3411 Fax 503/364.2138
Garmin (Europe) Ltd, Liberty House, Bulls Copse Road, Hounsdown Business Park, Southampton, SO40 9RB, U.K.
Tel: 44/0870.8501241 Fax: 44/0870.8501251
Garmin Corporation, No. 68, Jangshu 2nd Road, Shijr, Taipei County, Taiwan
Tel: 886/02.2642.9199 Fax: 886/02.2642.9099
For after-hours emergency, aircraft on ground (AOG) technical support for Garmin panel mount and integrated avionics systems, please
contact Garmin’s AOG Hotline at 913.397.0836.
Web Site Address: www.garmin.com
Except as expressly provided herein, no part of this manual may be reproduced, copied, transmitted, disseminated, downloaded or stored
in any storage medium, for any purpose without the express written permission of Garmin. Garmin hereby grants permission to download
a single copy of this manual and of any revision to this manual onto a hard drive or other electronic storage medium to be viewed for
personal use, provided that such electronic or printed copy of this manual or revision must contain the complete text of this copyright notice
and provided further that any unauthorized commercial distribution of this manual or any revision hereto is strictly prohibited.
Prodigy® is a registered trademark of Embraer-Empresa Brasileira de Aeronautica S.A.
Garmin® is a registered trademark of Garmin Ltd. or its subsidiaries. WATCH®, FliteCharts®, and SafeTaxi® are trademarks of Garmin Ltd.
or its subsidiaries. These trademarks may not be used without the express permission of Garmin.
Bendix/King® and Honeywell® are registered trademarks of Honeywell International, Inc.; NavData® is a registered trademark of
Jeppesen, Inc.
SiriusXM Weather and SiriusXM Satellite Radio are provided by SiriusXM Satellite Radio, Inc.
AC-U-KWIK® is a registered trademark of Penton Business Media Inc.
AOPA Membership Publications, Inc. and its related organizations (hereinafter collectively “AOPA”) expressly disclaim all warranties,
with respect to the AOPA information included in this data, express or implied, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties
of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. The information is provided “as is” and AOPA does not warrant or make any
representations regarding its accuracy, reliability, or otherwise. Under no circumstances including negligence, shall AOPA be liable for any
incidental, special or consequential damages that result from the use or inability to use the software or related documentation, even if
AOPA or an AOPA authorized representative has been advised of the possibility of such damages. User agrees not to sue AOPA and, to
the maximum extent allowed by law, to release and hold harmless AOPA from any causes of action, claims or losses related to any actual
or alleged inaccuracies in the information. Some jurisdictions do not allow the limitation or exclusion of implied warranties or liability for
incidental or consequential damages so the above limitations or exclusions may not apply to you.

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

AC-U-KWIK and its related organizations (hereafter collectively “AC-U-KWIK Organizations”) expressly disclaim all warranties with
respect to the AC-U-KWIK information included in this data, express or implied, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties of
merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. The information is provided “as is” and AC-U-KWIK Organizations do not warrant or
make any representations regarding its accuracy, reliability, or otherwise. Licensee agrees not to sue AC-U-KWIK Organizations and, to the
maximum extent allowed by law, to release and hold harmless AC-U-KWIK Organizations from any cause of action, claims or losses related
to any actual or alleged inaccuracies in the information arising out of Garmin’s use of the information in the datasets. Some jurisdictions
do not allow the limitation or exclusion of implied warranties or liability for incidental or consequential damages so the above limitations
or exclusions may not apply to licensee.

March, 2013

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

Printed in the U.S.A.

190-01537-00 Rev. B

LIMITED WARRANTY
LIMITED WARRANTY
Within the warranty period, Garmin will, at its sole discretion, repair or replace any components that fail in normal use. Such repairs or
replacement will be made at no charge to the customer for parts and/or labor incidental to the direct repair of said product. Garmin may,
at its discretion with prior approval, reimburse an authorized Garmin Service Center for associated labor costs incurred for removal and
replacement of the panel mount product installed in an aircraft. The customer shall be responsible for any transportation or other cost. This
warranty does not apply to: (i) cosmetic damage, such as scratches, nicks and dents; (ii) consumable parts, such as batteries, unless product
damage has occurred due to a defect in materials or workmanship; (iii) damage caused by accident, abuse, misuse, water, flood, fire, or
other acts of nature or external causes; (iv) damage caused by service performed by anyone who is not an authorized service provider
of Garmin; or (v) damage to a product that has been modified or altered without the written permission of Garmin. In addition, Garmin
reserves the right to refuse warranty claims against products or services that are obtained and/or used in contravention of the laws of any
country.
THE WARRANTIES AND REMEDIES CONTAINED HEREIN ARE EXCLUSIVE AND IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, WHETHER EXPRESS,
IMPLIED OR STATUTORY, INCLUDING ANY LIABILITY ARISING UNDER ANY WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, STATUTORY OR OTHERWISE. THIS WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS, WHICH MAY VARY FROM
STATE TO STATE.
IN NO EVENT SHALL GARMIN BE LIABLE FOR ANY INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, WHETHER
RESULTING FROM THE USE, MISUSE, OR INABILITY TO USE THIS PRODUCT OR FROM DEFECTS IN THE PRODUCT. Some states do not
allow the exclusion of incidental or consequential damages, so the above limitations may not apply in every case.
Garmin retains the exclusive right to repair or replace (with a new or newly-overhauled replacement product) the product or offer a full
refund of the purchase price at its sole discretion. SUCH REMEDY SHALL BE YOUR SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY FOR ANY BREACH OF
WARRANTY.
To obtain warranty service, contact your local Garmin Authorized Service Center. For assistance in locating the nearest Service Center, call
Garmin Customer Service at one of the numbers listed below.
Products sold through online auctions are not eligible for warranty coverage or rebates or other special offers from Garmin. Online auction
confirmations are not accepted for warranty verification. To obtain warranty service, an original or copy of the sales receipt from the original
retailer is required. Garmin will not replace missing components from any package purchased through an online auction.
Garmin International Inc.
1200 East 151st Street, Olathe, Kansas 66062
Telephone:
(913)397-8200
Telephone Toll Free:
(888)606-5482
Facsimile:

(913)397-8282
Facsimile Toll Free:
(800)801-4670
E-mail: orders@garmin.com
avionics@garmin.com
warranty@garmin.com

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Garmin (Europe) Ltd.
Liberty House, Bulls Copse Road, Southampton, SO40
9RB, UK
Telephone:
++44 (0) 870-8501243
Telephone Toll Free:
++44 (0) 0808 238 0000
(option 5)
Facsimile:

++44 (0) 238052004
E-mail: avionics.europe@garmin.com

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

iii

WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, AND NOTES

WARNING: Navigation and terrain separation must NOT be predicated upon the use of the terrain avoidance

feature. The terrain avoidance feature is NOT intended to be used as a primary reference for terrain avoidance
and does not relieve the pilot from the responsibility of being aware of surroundings during flight. The
terrain avoidance feature is only to be used as an aid for terrain avoidance. Terrain data is obtained from
third party sources. Garmin is not able to independently verify the accuracy of the terrain data.
WARNING: The displayed minimum safe altitudes (MSAs) are only advisory in nature and should not be

relied upon as the sole source of obstacle and terrain avoidance information. Always refer to current
aeronautical charts for appropriate minimum clearance altitudes.
WARNING: Do not use outdated database information. Databases used in the system must be updated

regularly in order to ensure that the information remains current. Pilots using any outdated database do so
entirely at their own risk.
WARNING: Do not use basemap (land and water data) information for primary navigation. Basemap data is

intended only to supplement other approved navigation data sources and should be considered as an aid to
enhance situational awareness.
WARNING: Traffic information shown on system displays is provided as an aid in visually acquiring traffic.

Pilots must maneuver the aircraft based only upon ATC guidance or positive visual acquisition of conflicting
traffic.
WARNING: Do not use data link weather information for maneuvering in, near, or around areas of hazardous

weather. Information contained within data link weather products may not accurately depict current
weather conditions.
WARNING: Do not use the indicated data link weather product age to determine the age of the weather

has a very high degree of functional integrity. However, the pilot must recognize that providing monitoring
and/or self-test capability for all conceivable system failures is not practical. Although unlikely, it may be
possible for erroneous operation to occur without a fault indication shown by the system. It is thus the
responsibility of the pilot to detect such an occurrence by means of cross-checking with all redundant or
correlated information available in the cockpit.
WARNING: For safety reasons, system operational procedures must be learned on the ground.

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, AND NOTES

WARNING: The United States government operates the Global Positioning System and is solely responsible

for its accuracy and maintenance. The GPS system is subject to changes which could affect the accuracy and
performance of all GPS equipment. Portions of the system utilize GPS as a precision electronic NAVigation
AID (NAVAID). Therefore, as with all NAVAIDs, information presented by the system can be misused or
misinterpreted and, therefore, become unsafe.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of unsafe operation, carefully review and understand all aspects of the Prodigy®

Touch Pilot’s Guide documentation and the Embraer Phenom 300 Airplane Flight Manual. Thoroughly
practice basic operation prior to actual use. During flight operations, carefully compare indications from the
system to all available navigation sources, including the information from other NAVAIDs, visual sightings,
charts, etc. For safety purposes, always resolve any discrepancies before continuing navigation.
WARNING: The illustrations in this guide are only examples. Never use the system to attempt to penetrate
a thunderstorm. Both the FAA Advisory Circular, Subject: Thunderstorms, and the Aeronautical Information

Manual (AIM) recommend avoiding “by at least 20 miles any thunderstorm identified as severe or giving an
intense radar echo.”
WARNING: Lamp(s) inside this product may contain mercury (HG) and must be recycled or disposed of

according to local, state, or federal laws. For more information, refer to our website at www.garmin.com/
aboutGarmin/environment/disposal.jsp.
WARNING: Because of variation in the earth’s magnetic field, operating the system within the following

areas could result in loss of reliable attitude and heading indications. North of 72° North latitude at all
longitudes. South of 70° South latitude at all longitudes. North of 65° North latitude between longitude
75° W and 120° W. (Northern Canada). North of 70° North latitude between longitude 70° W and 128° W.
(Northern Canada). North of 70° North latitude between longitude 85° E and 114° E. (Northern Russia).
South of 55° South latitude between longitude 120° E and 165° E. (Region south of Australia and New
Zealand).
WARNING: Do not use GPS to navigate to any active waypoint identified as a ‘NON WGS84 WPT’ by a

system message. ‘NON WGS84 WPT’ waypoints are derived from an unknown map reference datum that
may be incompatible with the map reference datum used by GPS (known as WGS84) and may be positioned
in error as displayed.
CAUTION: The PFD and MFD displays use a lens coated with a special anti-reflective coating that is very

sensitive to skin oils, waxes, and abrasive cleaners. CLEANERS CONTAINING AMMONIA WILL HARM THE
ANTI-REFLECTIVE COATING. It is very important to clean the lens using a clean, lint-free cloth and an
eyeglass lens cleaner that is specified as safe for anti-reflective coatings.
CAUTION: The system does not contain any user-serviceable parts. Repairs should only be made by an

authorized Garmin service center. Unauthorized repairs or modifications could void both the warranty and
the pilot’s authority to operate this device under FAA/FCC regulations.

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, AND NOTES

NOTE: All visual depictions contained within this document, including screen images of the panel and

displays, are subject to change and may not reflect the most current system and databases. Depictions of
equipment may differ slightly from the actual equipment.
NOTE: This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two

conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: This product, its packaging, and its components contain chemicals known to the State of California

to cause cancer, birth defects, or reproductive harm. This notice is being provided in accordance with
California’s Proposition 65. If you have any questions or would like additional information, please refer to
our web site at www.garmin.com/prop65.
NOTE: Interference from GPS repeaters operating inside nearby hangars can cause an intermittent loss of

attitude and heading displays while the aircraft is on the ground. Moving the aircraft more than 100 yards
away from the source of the interference should alleviate the condition.
NOTE: Operating the system in the vicinity of metal structures or electro magnetic fields can cause sensor

differences that may result in large heading errors during start-up, shut down, or while taxiing. This may
result in heading miscompare or no compare annunciations.
NOTE: Use of polarized eyewear may cause the flight displays to appear dim or blank.

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

REVISION INFORMATION
Record of Revisions
Part Number Revision
Date
190-01537-00
A
March, 2013
B

190-01537-00 Rev. B

March, 2013

Page Range
Description
All
Initial production release.
Pages 62, 63 Added missing callout numbers on Figures 2-1 and 2-2.

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

vii

REVISION INFORMATION

Blank Page

viii

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 1 SYSTEM OVERVIEW
1.1 System Description.................................................. 1
1.2 System Power-up...................................................... 4
1.3 Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Controls.............. 6
PFD Controls................................................................. 6
Touchscreen Controller................................................. 13
1.4 System Operation................................................... 32
Normal Display Operation............................................ 32
Reversionary Display Operation.................................... 32
Touchscreen Controller Failure...................................... 36
AHRS Operation.......................................................... 36
GPS Receiver Operation............................................... 37
Annunciations............................................................. 41
1.5 System Management............................................. 42
Avionics Settings......................................................... 42
Crew Profiles............................................................... 50
Avionics Status............................................................ 52
SiriusXM Information................................................... 54
Screen Cleaning........................................................... 54
1.6 Utilities.................................................................... 55
Timer.......................................................................... 55
Trip Stats.................................................................... 56
1.7 Secure Digital Cards.............................................. 59
2.1

2.2

2.3

2.4

SECTION 2 FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Flight Instruments.................................................. 64
Airspeed Indicator....................................................... 64
Attitude Indicator........................................................ 66
Altimeter.................................................................... 69
Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI)........................................ 71
Vertical Deviation........................................................ 72
Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI)............................... 74
Course Deviation Indicator (CDI)................................... 78
Garmin SVT™ (Synthetic Vision Technology)....... 85
SVT Operation............................................................. 86
SVT Features............................................................... 87
Field of View............................................................... 96
Supplemental Flight Data..................................... 97
Temperature Displays................................................... 97
Wind Data.................................................................. 98
Vertical Navigation (VNAV) Indications.......................... 99
PFD Annunciations and Alerting Functions....... 100
Marker Beacon Annunciations.................................... 100

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Traffic Annunciations................................................. 100
Terrain Annunciations................................................ 101
Altitude Alerting........................................................ 101
Low Altitude Annunciation......................................... 102
Minimum Descent Altitude/Decision Height Alerting..... 102
Radar Altimeter......................................................... 103

2.5 Abnormal Operations.......................................... 105
Abnormal GPS Conditions.......................................... 105
Unusual Attitudes...................................................... 106
Garmin SVT Troubleshooting....................................... 107
SVT Unusual Attitudes................................................ 107
SECTION 3 ENGINE AND AIRFRAME SYSTEMS
3.1 Engine Indication System (EIS)........................... 111
Takeoff Data Set Window........................................... 112
Engine Indications..................................................... 113
Fuel and Electrical Indications..................................... 115
Cabin Pressurization.................................................. 116
Spoiler and Landing Gear........................................... 117
Flaps and Trim........................................................... 118
3.2 Synoptics............................................................... 119
System Status............................................................ 120
Environmental Control System (ECS)........................... 121
Electrical................................................................... 123
Fuel.......................................................................... 124
Ice Protection System................................................. 125
Engine Maintenance.................................................. 127
3.3 Crew Alerting System (CAS)................................ 128
CAS Message Prioritization......................................... 128
3.4 Abnormal Operations.......................................... 129
Engine...................................................................... 129
Cabin pressurization.................................................. 130
Flaps........................................................................ 131
Trim.......................................................................... 131
SECTION 4 AUDIO AND CNS
4.1 Overview............................................................... 133
PFD COM/NAV display and Controls............................ 133
Touchscreen Controller Audio and CNS Controls........... 134
4.2 COM Operation..................................................... 136
COM Transceiver Selection and Activation.................... 136
COM Frequency Tuning............................................... 139
Frequency Spacing..................................................... 146
Automatic Squelch..................................................... 147

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Volume..................................................................... 148
HF COM Transceiver Selection and Activation............... 149
HF COM Volume........................................................ 150

4.3 NAV Operation...................................................... 151
NAV Radio Selection and Activation............................ 151
NAV Receiver Tuning.................................................. 152
Marker Beacon Receiver............................................. 158
ADF/DME Tuning....................................................... 159
4.4 Mode S Transponder............................................ 164
TCAS II Transponder Controls...................................... 164
TCAS II Transponder Mode Selection............................ 165
Entering a Transponder Code...................................... 166
IDENT Function......................................................... 168
Flight ID Reporting.................................................... 168
4.5 Additional Audio Functions................................. 169
Mono/Stereo Headsets............................................... 169
Speaker.................................................................... 169
Intercom................................................................... 170
Passenger Address (PA) System................................... 176
Clearance Recorder and Player.................................... 177
Simultaneous COM Operation..................................... 178
Entertainment Inputs................................................. 179
4.6 Controller Pilot Data Link Communications
(CPDLC)............................................................................ 180
Connecting to the CPDLC System................................ 180
Creating a Message................................................... 183
Responding to an ATC Message.................................. 185
Viewing CPDLC Message Dialogs................................ 185
Deleting Message Dialogs.......................................... 186
Disconnecting from the CPDLC System........................ 186
4.7 Abnormal Operation............................................ 187
Stuck Microphone...................................................... 187
COM Tuning Failure.................................................... 187
Emergency Mode....................................................... 187
Audio Controller Fail-Safe Operation........................... 188
SECTION 5 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
5.1 Introduction.......................................................... 189
Navigation Status Bar................................................ 191
5.2 Using Map Displays.............................................. 193
Map Settings Sync..................................................... 193
Map Orientation........................................................ 194
Map Range............................................................... 196

Map Panning............................................................. 198
Topography............................................................... 203
Map Symbols............................................................ 206
Airways.................................................................... 212
Track Vector.............................................................. 214
Wind Vector.............................................................. 215
Fuel Range Ring........................................................ 216
Field of View (SVT)..................................................... 217
Selected Altitude Intercept Arc.................................... 218
Obstacles.................................................................. 219

5.3 Waypoints.............................................................. 220
Airports.................................................................... 221
Intersections............................................................. 227
NDBs........................................................................ 230
VORs........................................................................ 233
User Waypoints......................................................... 236
5.4 Airspaces............................................................... 244
5.5 Direct-to-Navigation ........................................... 248
5.6 Flight Planning...................................................... 254
Flight Plan Creation................................................... 255
Adding Waypoints to an Existing Flight Plan................. 260
Adding Airways to a Flight Plan.................................. 264
Adding Procedures to a Stored Flight Plan................... 266
Flight Plan Storage.................................................... 273
Flight Plan Editing..................................................... 275
Along Track Offsets.................................................... 278
Parallel Track............................................................. 279
Activating a Flight Plan Leg........................................ 282
Inverting a Flight Plan................................................ 283
Closest Point of FPL................................................... 285
User-Defined Holding Patterns.................................... 286
5.7 Vertical Navigation.............................................. 289
Altitude Constraints................................................... 293
5.8 Procedures............................................................ 296
Departures................................................................ 296
Arrivals .................................................................... 298
Approaches .............................................................. 300
5.9 Trip Planning......................................................... 307
Weight and Fuel........................................................ 307
Trip Planning............................................................. 312
5.10 Navigating a Flight Plan...................................... 316
5.11 Abnormal Operation............................................ 342

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 6 HAZARD AVOIDANCE
6.1 SiriusXM Weather................................................. 346
Activating Services..................................................... 346
Accessing SiriusXM Weather Products......................... 347
6.2 Airborne Color Weather Radar........................... 373
System Description.................................................... 373
Principles of Airborne Weather Radar........................... 373
NEXRAD and Airborne Weather Radar ........................ 374
Antenna Beam Illumination........................................ 374
Safe Operating Distance............................................. 377
Basic Antenna Tilt Setup............................................. 378
Weather Mapping and Interpretation.......................... 380
Ground Mapping and Interpretation............................ 394
Additional Radar Displays........................................... 395
System Status............................................................ 397
6.3 TAWS-A.................................................................. 399
Displaying TAWS-A Information.................................. 400
TAWS Pane............................................................... 403
System Status............................................................ 417
TAWS-A Abnormal Operations.................................... 417
6.4 TCAS II TraffiC....................................................... 419
TCAS II Alerts............................................................ 420
Displaying TCAS II Traffic............................................ 422
Operation................................................................. 425
System Status............................................................ 429
SECTION 7 AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
Basic Autopilot Operation........................................... 432
7.1 AFCS Controls....................................................... 433
7.2 Flight Director Operation.................................... 435
Activating the Flight Director...................................... 435
Flight Director Selection............................................. 436
AFCS Status Box........................................................ 436
Command Bars.......................................................... 437
Flight Director Modes................................................. 438
7.3 Vertical Modes...................................................... 439
Pitch Hold Mode (PIT)................................................ 440
Selected Altitude Capture Mode (ALTS)........................ 441
Altitude Hold Mode (ALT)........................................... 441
Vertical Speed Mode (VS)........................................... 443
Flight Level Change Mode (FLC).................................. 444
Vertical Navigation Modes (VPTH , ALTV)..................... 445
Glidepath Mode (GP)................................................. 450

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Glideslope Mode (GS)................................................ 452
Takeoff (TO) and Go Around (GA) Modes..................... 453

7.4 Lateral Modes....................................................... 454
Roll Hold Mode (ROL)................................................ 455
Low Bank Mode........................................................ 455
Heading Select Mode (HDG)....................................... 456
Navigation Modes (FMS, VOR, LOC, BC)....................... 457
Approach Modes (FMS, VAPP, LOC).............................. 459
7.5 Autopilot and Yaw Damper Operation.............. 461
Flight Control............................................................ 461
Engaging the Autopilot and Yaw Damper..................... 462
Control Wheel Steering.............................................. 462
Disengaging the Autopilot and Yaw Damper................. 462
7.6 Example Procedures............................................. 464
Departure................................................................. 464
Intercepting a VOR Radial........................................... 467
Flying a Flight Plan/FMS Course.................................. 468
Descent.................................................................... 469
Approach.................................................................. 473
Go Around/Missed Approach...................................... 476
7.7 AFCS Annunciations and Alerts.......................... 478
AFCS CAS Messages.................................................. 478
AFCS Voice Alerts....................................................... 478
Overspeed Protection................................................. 479
SECTION 8 ADDITIONAL FEATURES
8.1 SafeTaxi................................................................. 482
SafeTaxi Database Information................................... 484
8.2 ChartView (Optional)........................................... 486
Chart Selection.......................................................... 487
Day/Night View......................................................... 489
ChartView Database Information................................ 491
8.3 FliteCharts............................................................. 495
Chart Selection.......................................................... 496
Day/Night View......................................................... 498
FliteCharts Cycle Number and Expiration Date.............. 500
8.4 Airport Directory.................................................. 503
Airport Directory Database Cycle Number & Revision.... 504
8.5 Satellite Telephone and Datalink Services........ 506
Registering With Connext........................................... 506
Contacts................................................................... 507
Telephone Communication (Optional).......................... 510

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Text Messaging (SMS)................................................ 518
WiFi Connections (Optional)....................................... 527

8.6 SiriusXM Satellite Radio (Optional)................... 530
Activating SiriusXM Satellite Services.......................... 530
Using SiriusXM Radio................................................. 532
8.7 Scheduled Messages............................................ 535
8.8 Electronic Documents.......................................... 539
Installed Documents.................................................. 539
User Documents........................................................ 539
Viewing Electronic Documents.................................... 540
8.9 Flight Data Logging............................................. 544
8.10 Checklists.............................................................. 546
8.11 Abnormal Operation............................................ 549
APPENDICES
Annunciations and Alerts.............................................. 551
Crew Alerting System (CAS)........................................ 551
CAS Messages........................................................... 552
Comparator Annunciations......................................... 558
Reversionary Sensor Annunciations............................. 559
Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 System Annunciations.. 560
Prodigy® Touch Voice Alerts........................................ 562
Pilot Profile Import/Export Messages........................... 577
TAWS-A ALERTS........................................................ 577
TCAS II Alerts and Annunciations................................ 579
Database Management................................................. 581
Jeppesen Databases................................................... 581
Automatic Database Synchronization Feature............... 586
Garmin Databases..................................................... 587
Glossary........................................................................... 593
Frequently Asked Questions......................................... 599
Map Symbols.................................................................. 603
INDEX
Index .................................................................................I-1

xii

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

SYSTEM OVERVIEW

SECTION 1 SYSTEM OVERVIEW
1.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
This section provides an overview of the Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 as installed in the Phenom
300 aircraft. The Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 is an integrated flight control system that presents
flight instrumentation, position, navigation, communication, and identification information to the flight crew
using flat-panel color displays and Touchscreen Controllers. The system consists of the following Line Replaceable
Units (LRUs):
• GDU 1400W (3) – Each GDU is configured as one of two Primary Flight Displays (PFDs) or one Multifunction Display (MFD). The GDU 1400W features a 14-inch light emitting diode (LED) backlit widescreen
display with a 1280 x 800 resolution. The unit installed on the left/pilot side is designated as PFD1, and the
one installed on the right/copilot side is designated as PFD2. The unit installed in the center is designated as
the MFD. The displays communicate with each other, the Touchscreen Controllers, and with the on-side GIA
63W Integrated Avionics Unit (IAU) through a High-Speed Data Bus (HSDB) Ethernet connection.
• GTC 570 (2) – The Touchscreen Controller provides MFD control, Multi-function Window (MFW) control
on the PFD, in addition to FMS functions, data entry capability, and communications control to the system.
The unit installed on the left/pilot side is designated as GTC1, and the one installed on the right/copilot side is
designated as GTC2. Each touchscreen controller communicates with the on-side PFD in addition to the MFD
using an HDSB connection.
• GMA 36 (2) – The Remote Audio Unit integrates navigation/communication radio (NAV/COM) digital audio,
intercom, and marker beacon audio. Each unit is connected to the on-side Touchscreen Controller using an
HSDB interface and to the cross-side IAU using an RS-232 connection as a backup path. Each GMA 36 is also
connected to the Cockpit Voice Recorder (CVR) using a digital/analog connection.
• GIA 63W (2) – The Integrated Avionics Units (IAU) function as the main communications hub, linking several
LRUs with each on-side PFD. Each IAU contains a GPS Satellite-Based Augmentation System (SBAS) receiver,
a very high frequency (VHF) communication/navigation/glideslope (COM/NAV/GS) receiver, a flight director
(FD) and system integration microprocessors.
• GEA 71 (3) – The Engine Airframe Unit receives and processes signals from the engine and airframe sensors.
This unit communicates with both IAUs using an RS-485 digital interface.
• GSD 41 (2) – This unit is a data concentrator used to expand the input and output capabilities of the system.
HSDB communications occur among Garmin LRUs. The ARINC 429 protocol connects non-Garmin LRUs as
shown in Figure 1-1.
• GRS 77 (2) – The Attitude and Heading Reference System (AHRS) provides aircraft attitude and heading
information via ARINC 429 protocol to the on-side and cross-side IAU, the on-side PFD, and to the MFD.
An RS-232 backup path connects each AHRS to each IAU. The AHRS contains advanced sensors (including
accelerometers and rate sensors) and interfaces with the Magnetometer to obtain magnetic field information,
with the ADC to obtain air data, and with both IAUs to obtain GPS information. AHRS operation is discussed
in System Operation, later in this section.
• GMU 44 (2) – The Magnetometer measures local magnetic field and sends data to the AHRS for processing
to determine aircraft magnetic heading. The magnetometer receives power directly from the AHRS and
communicates with it via an RS-485/422 and RS-232 digital interface.

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

SYSTEM OVERVIEW
• GDR 66 (1) – The VHF Data Link Transciever is a transceiver for sending and receiving Controller Pilot Data
Link Communications (CPDLC) messages by using the Touchscreen Controllers. It also supports analog voice
communications. It communicates with the #1 GSD 41 unit using an RS-485/422 interface.
• GDL 69A – The Satellite Data Link Radio Receiver receives weather information, as well as digital audio
entertainment. The Data Link Receiver communicates with the #1 GSD, #2 GSD, and MFD via a HSDB
connection. A subscription to SiriusXM Weather and/or SiriusXM Satellite Radio service is required to enable
the GDL 69A capability.
• GMC 715 – The AFCS Mode Controller provides AFCS control through an RS-232 digital interface. The unit
is connected to PFD1 and the MFD.
• GSA 80 (1) and GSA 81 (3) – The GSA 80 Servo is used for automatic control of YAS-SAS. The GSA 81 Servos
are used for automatic control of pitch, roll, and yaw. These units interface with each IAU using RS-482/422
connections.
• GSM 86 (4) – The GSM 86 Servo Gearboxes are responsible for transferring the output torque of the servo
actuators to the mechanical flight-control surface linkages.
• GWX 70 (1) – Provides airborne weather and ground mapped radar data to the PFDs and to the MFD. The unit
is connected to the #1 GSD via HSDB connection.
• GDL 59 (1) – Provides a Wi-Fi datalink and System Data Logging capability. The unit is connected to the
#2 GSD via HSDB, and to the optional GSR 56 Iridium Transceiver using an RS-232 bus and a digital/analog
connection.
• GSR 56 (1) – The Iridium Transceiver provides voice communications by means of a telephone handset in the
cabin and pilot and copilot headsets in the cockpit. The transceiver can also send and receive short message
service (SMS) text messages. The GSR 56 also receives data link weather products from the Garmin Connext
weather service through the Iridium satellite network. The transceiver can also send and receive data provided
by the GDL 59 through the RS-232 bus.
The Phenom 300 is also equipped with a GFC 700 Automated Flight Control System (AFCS), providing the
flight director (FD), autopilot (AP), manual electric trim, and touch control steering (TCS) functions of the
Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 System.
NOTE: Refer to the Automatic Flight Control System (AFCS) Section for details on the GFC 700 AFCS.

Figure 1-1 shows interconnection of the LRUs.
NOTE: For information on optional equipment not shown in Figure 1-1, consult the applicable optional

interface user’s guide. This document assumes that the reader is already familiar with the operation of this
additional equipment

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

SYSTEM OVERVIEW

GMC 715
(AFCS Mode
Controller)

GDU 1400W
(PFD1)

Normal
Mode

#1 GTC 570
(Touchscreen
Controller)

MFD Failed
Mode

GDU 1400W
(PFD2)

#2 GTC 570
(Touchscreen
Controller)

#1 GMA 36
(Audio
Processor)

#1 GIA 63W
(Integrated
Avionics
Unit)

HSDB
Reversionay
Switch

GDU 1400W
(MFD)

#2 GMA 36
(Audio
Processor)

#1 Smart Probe
(Air Data)

#2 GIA 63W
(Integrated
Avionics
Unit)

#2 Smart Probe
(Air Data)

#1 GMU 44
(Magnetometer)

#2 GMU 44
(Magnetometer)
VHF COM

VHF COM

#1 GRS 77
(Attitude &
Heading)

GPS/SBAS
VOR/LOC

#2 GRS 77
(Attitude &
Heading)

GPS/SBAS
VOR/LOC

G/S

Flight
Director

GSA 81 (Pitch)

AFCS Mode
Logic

GSA 81 (Roll)

Servo Logic

GSA 81 (Yaw)
GSA 80 (YAS-SAS)
#1 GSD 41

#2 GSD 41

#1 GEA 71 (Engine
& Airframe)

(Data
Concentrator)

#2 GEA 71 (Engine
& Airframe)

GWX 70
(Weather
Radar)

#3 GEA 71 (Engine
& Airframe)

#3 GEA 71 (Engine
& Airframe I/F)
GDR 66
(VHF Data Link
Transceiver)

GDL 59
(Datalink)

GSR 56
(Iridium)

GDL 69
(SiriusXM Datalink)

MFD

Standard
Optional

232
232

485/422
485/422

Garmin Equipment

429
429

Non-Garmin Equipment

HSDB
HSDB

Digital/Analog Signal
Digital/Analog Signal

Optional
Garmin Equipment

Figure 1-1 Basic System Block Diagram

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

SYSTEM OVERVIEW

1.2 SYSTEM POWER-UP
NOTE: See the Airplane Flight Manual (AFM) for specific procedures concerning avionics power application

and emergency power supply operation.
NOTE: Refer to Appendix A for system-specific annunciations and alerts.

The Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 is integrated with the aircraft electrical system and receives power directly
from electrical busses. The PFDs, MFD, Touchscreen Controllers, and supporting sub-systems include both
power-on and continuous built-in test features that exercise the processors, memory, external inputs, and outputs
to provide safe operation.
During system power-up, the system displays test annunciations, as shown in Figure 1-2. All system annunciations
should be extinguished typically within the first minute of power-up. Upon power-up, annunciator lights on the
AFCS Controller illuminate momentarily.
On the PFDs, the AHRS begins to initialize and displays “AHRS ALIGN: Keep Wings Level”. The AHRS should
display valid attitude and heading fields typically within the first minute of power-up. The AHRS can align itself
both while taxiing and during level flight.
When the MFD powers up, the splash screen (Figure 1-3) displays the following information:
• System version
• Copyright
• Checklist name and version
• Land database name and version
• Safe Taxi database information

• Terrain database name and version
• Obstacle database name and version
• Navigation database name, version, and effective dates
• Airport Directory name, version and effective dates
• FliteCharts/ChartView database information

Current database information includes database type, cycle number, or valid operating dates. Review the listed
information for currency (to ensure that no databases have expired).
Pressing the right-most softkey on the MFD acknowledges this information, and the MFD then shows the EIS
(Engine Indication System) Display, the Navigation Map Pane (in Half Mode), and the Traffic Map Pane (in Half
Mode).
When the system has acquired a sufficient number of satellites to determine a position, the system displays the
aircraft’s current position on the Navigation Map Pane.

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Test Annunciation

Figure 1-2 PFD Power-Up

Figure 1-3 MFD Power-Up

Figure 1-4 Touchscreen Controller Home
Screen

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

SYSTEM OVERVIEW

1.3 PRODIGY® TOUCH FLIGHT DECK 300 CONTROLS
The Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 controls have been designed to simplify operation of the system and
minimize workload and the time required to access sophisticated functionality. Controls are located on the PFD
bezels, the Touchscreen Controllers, and the AFCS Controller. PFD controls and the Touchscreen Controllers are
discussed in this section. AFCS controls are described in the AFCS section. See the Audio and CNS Section for
more information about NAV/COM controls.

PFD CONTROLS

PFD Softkeys (Full Mode)

Display Pane does not
use softkeys

PFD Softkeys (Split Mode)

Figure 1-5 PFD Softkeys in Full Mode and Split Mode

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Selection softkeys are located along the bottom of the PFD. The softkeys shown depend on the softkey level
previously selected. The bezel keys below the softkeys can be used to select the appropriate softkey. There
are three types of softkeys. One selects a simple on/off state, indicated by an annunciator on the softkey label
displayed as green (on) or gray (off). The next type of softkey selects among several options, indicated by the
softkey label changing (with the exception of the Map Range keys) to reflect the name of the chosen option.
The last type of softkey, when pressed displays another set of softkeys available for the selected function. Also,
these softkeys revert to the previous level after 45 seconds of inactivity. When a softkey function is disabled,
the softkey label is subdued (dimmed).
Selected
Function
On

Bezel-Mounted
Softkeys (Press)

Softkey Names
(FMS selected
for the CDI)

Subdued
Softkey
(function
unavailable)
Full Mode
PFD CAS Scrolling
Softkeys Shown in
Reversionary Mode
Only

Split or Reversionary Mode
Figure 1-6 Top Level PFD Softkeys

Each softkey sublevel has a BACK Softkey which can be selected to return to the previous level.

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

SYSTEM OVERVIEW

Figure 1-7 Inset Map Settings and CAS Softkeys

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

SYSTEM OVERVIEW

Figure 1-8 PFD Settings Softkeys

Figure 1-9 Sensor Softkeys

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Level 1

Level 2

Map
Range Map
Range +
Inset Map
Settings

Displays the Inset Map display settings softkeys

Traffic
Topo
Terrain
NEXRAD
Radar

SiriusXM
Lightning
METAR

Description
Increases the Inset Map display range

Weather
Legend

PFD
Settings

Level 4

Decreases the Inset Map display range

Off
Detail

Traffic
Map

Level 3

Removes the Inset Map from the display
Selects desired amount of map detail; cycles through declutter
levels:
All (No Declutter): All map features visible
DCLTR 1: Declutters land data
DCLTR 2: Declutters land and SUA data
Least: Removes everything except for the active flight plan
Displays/removes the name of the selected data link weather
provider (SiriusXM, Connext) and the weather product icon and
age box (for enabled weather products).
Adds or removes the display of traffic on the Inset Navigation Map.
The softkey annunciator is green when the traffic function is on.
When the traffic function is off, the annunciator is gray.
Adds or removes the display of map topography on the Inset Map.
The softkey annunciator is green when topography is on. When
topography is off, the annunciator is gray.
Adds or removes the display of relative terrain information on the
Inset Navigation Map. The softkey annunciator is green when
topography is on. When topography is off, the annunciator is gray.
Displays/removes NEXRAD Inset Map; cycles through regions.

USA: Displays NEXRAD data only for the United States

Canada: Displays NEXRAD data only for Canada

Off: Removes NEXRAD data from the Inset Map
Adds or removes the display of SiriusXM information on the Inset
Navigation Map. The softkey annunciator is green when the
lightning function is on. When the lightning function is off, the
annunciator is gray.
Adds or removes the display of SiriusXM or Connext METAR data
on the Inset Navigation Map. The softkey annunciator is green
when the METAR data is enabled. When the METAR data is off,
the annunciator is gray.
Replaces the Inset Map with a dedicated traffic display. The softkey
annunciator is green when the dedicated traffic display on. When
the Inset Map is on, the softkey annunciator is gray.
Displays the PFD settings softkeys.

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Level 1

Level 2

Level 3

Level 4

Synthetic
Vision

Displays the softkeys for enabling or disabling Synthetic Vision
features.

Pathways
Synthetic
Terrain
Horizon
Heading
Airport
Signs

Displays Pathway Boxes on the Synthetic Vision Display.
Enables synthetic terrain depiction.
Displays compass heading along the Zero-Pitch line.
Displays position markers for airports within approximately 15 nm
of the current aircraft position. Airport identifiers are displayed
when the airport is within approximately 9 nm.
Enables or disables a multi-function Display Pane on the PFD.
FULL: Display Pane is disabled. The PFD display occupies the full
screen.
Split: Display Pane is enabled. The PFD screen is split between
the PFD display and the Display Pane.
Cycles the Bearing 1 Information Window through NAV1, GPS/
waypoint identifier and GPS-derived distance information, ADF/
frequency, and Off.
Cycles the Bearing 2 Information Window through NAV2, GPS/
waypoint identifier and GPS-derived distance information, ADF/
frequency, and Off.
Displays additional PFD settings softkeys.

PFD Mode

Bearing 1
Bearing 2
Other PFD
Settings
Wind

Displays the wind option softkeys

Option 1

Headwind/Tailwind and crosswind components.

Option 2

Wind direction arrow and speed.

Option 3

Wind direction arrow with direction and speed.

Off
Altitude
Units
IN
HPA
COM1
121.5

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Information not displayed.
Displays softkeys to select altitude unit parameters.

Meters

OBS

Description

When enabled, displays altimeter in meters.
Press to display the BARO setting as inches of mercury
Press to display the BARO setting as hectopacals.
Tunes COM1 to the emergency frequency.
Selects OBS mode on the CDI when navigating by GPS (only
available with active leg). When OBS is on, the softkey annunciator
is green.

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Level 1

Level 2

Level 3

Active
NAV
Sensors

Description
Cycles through FMS, VOR1, and VOR2 navigation modes on the
CDI.
Displays the sensor selection softkeys.
Displays the ADC selection softkeys.

ADC
Settings
ADC 1
ADC 2
ADC
Standby
AHRS
Settings

Selects the number 1 ADC. The softkey annunciator is green when
selected.
Selects the number 2 ADC. The softkey annunciator is green when
selected.
Indicates the standby ADC input is being used by the system.
Displays the AHRS selection softkeys.

AHRS 1
AHRS 2
AHRS
Standby

Level 4

Selects the number 1 AHRS. The softkey annunciator is green when
selected.
Selects the number 2 AHRS. The softkey annunciator is green when
selected.
Indicates the standby AHRS input is being used by the system.

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

SYSTEM OVERVIEW

TOUCHSCREEN CONTROLLER
The Touchscreen Controllers are a pedestal-mounted user interface allowing for ease of data entry, MFD/
Display Pane operation, and NAV/COM tuning. The touchscreen uses an infrared grid to determine the
location of touch and allows usage with gloves. Many procedures in this Pilot’s Guide are performed using the
Touchscreen Controller.
Radio tuning can be accomplished using the CNS Bar at the top of the Touchscreen Controller screen (refer
to the Audio Panel and CNS Section for more information about NAV/COM tuning).

1
2

Figure 1-10 GTC 570 Touchscreen Controller
1 CNS Bar

Displays/controls COM, NAV, XPDR, and ICS functions

2 Screen Title

Displays the title of the current screen

3 Screen

Displays set of context sensitive controls and data

4 Button Bar

Displays System level buttons (e.g. Home, MSG, Full/Half, Scroll Up/Down, Back, Enter,
Cancel)

5 Label Bar

Displays labels to show status and current functions of joystick and knobs

6 Joystick

Provides functions as labeled on the screen (e.g. Map Panning, Map Range)

7 Middle Knob

Provides functions as labeled on the screen (e.g. COM volume/squelch)

8 Large Right Knob

Provides functions as labeled on the screen (e.g. COM Freq/switching, Data Entry)

9 Small Right Knob

Provides functions as labeled on the screen (e.g. COM Freq/switching/Hold, Data Entry)

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

SYSTEM OVERVIEW
The Touchscreen Controller’s functions are arranged by screen. Each screen has a title which appears at the
top of the screen area (and below the CNS bar). The contents of each screen change dynamically in response
to pilot or system input.
All of the Touchscreen Controller’s available functions are accessible from the Home Screen. The Home
Screen may be accessed any time it is not currently displayed by touching the Home button in the Button Bar
below the screen area. Procedures in this Pilot’s Guide generally begin from the Home Screen as a reference
point; however it is not necessary to return to the Home Screen before performing each procedure if the
appropriate screen is already displayed.
Direct To Screen

Home Screen

Direct To Button Touched

Touch to Return to Touch to Return to
Previous Screen
Home Screen
Figure 1-11 Touchscreen Controller Screen Navigation

As the Touchscreen Controller is used, certain selections will cause another screen to be displayed. To return
to the previous screen, touch the Back or Cancel Button (as applicable) in the Button Bar, or touch the Home
Button to return to the Home Screen. If the Home Screen was the previous screen, pressing either the Back or
Home Button will also return to the Home Screen.
The CNS Bar, positioned above the screen area, is always displayed during system operation and is accessible
at any time. Some functions on the CNS Bar will cause another screen to be displayed (in the screen area below
the CNS Bar); however, touching the Back or Cancel Button will return to the previous screen.
Touch to Identify.
IDENT will show
green and pulse.

Touch to Access
Audio & Radios
Screen

Touch to Access
the Transponder
Screen

Touch to Access
Intercom Screen
Touch to Access COM 1
Standby Screen

Touch to Access COM 2
Standby Screen

Figure 1-12 Accessing Screens with the CNS Bar

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

SYSTEM OVERVIEW
The Button Bar, displayed below the screen area, displays the system-level buttons which are context-sensitive.
For example, if scrolling is available on a screen, the Button Bar includes corresponding Up and Down Scroll
Arrow buttons.

Figure 1-13 Button Bar Displays System-Level Buttons

The Button Bar is also where the Home, Cancel, and Back buttons are displayed. If the system issues a
message, the MSG button is shown. Touching this button will display the Messages Screen. The Button Bar
also contains a Full or Half button for controlling the size of display pane on the MFD (discussed later in this
section).
Returns to the Home Screen

Selects MFD half-display mode.

Returns to the previous screen

Selects MFD full-display mode

Displays the CPDLC Messages
window on Touchscreen
Controller. Flashes when a new
CPDLC message is received.
Displays the System Messages
window on Touchscreen
Controller. Flashes when a new
system message is issued.
Displays the Telephone window
on Touchscreen Controller.
Flashes when a new telephone
call is received.
Displays the SMS Text Inbox
window on Touchscreen
Controller. Flashes when a new
CPDLC message is received.

Scrolls up in a list

Scrolls down in a list

Cancels data entry and returns to the
previous screen

Accepts entered data into the system.

Table 1-1 Button Bar Buttons with Functions

The Label Bar, near the bottom of the Touchscreen Controller and above the Joystick and Knobs displays the
current function of each control as a reference. These functions include Map Range adjustment, Display Pane
selection, radio volume/squelch adjustment, COM radio tuning, and alphanumeric data entry.

Joystick Functions

Middle Knob Functions Large and Small Right
Knob Functions

Figure 1-14 Label Bar Indicates Context-Sensitive Joystick and Knob Functions

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

SYSTEM OVERVIEW
The labels change based on the context of the options being performed. If a Touchscreen Controller Knob
cannot be used because of a failure in a system component (COM, NAV, Audio, etc.), the Label Bar will also
indicate this status; refer to the Audio and CNS section for more information about radio failures.
The Touchscreen Controller recognizes input based on a touch, a gesture (such as sliding a finger), or by
pressing or turning the Knobs or Joystick.
On-screen buttons can be ‘pressed’ by momentarily touching them with a finger and then releasing. It is not
necessary to apply pressure, as the infrared touchscreen surface detects the only the presence and movement
of the finger, not pressure. When touched, the button background is highlighted in blue until the finger is
released. If enabled, an aural ‘click’ sound is also issued to confirm the button has been touched. When
releasing the finger, make sure it released within the boundary of the button, otherwise the input is considered
invalid. If enabled, an aural ‘doink’ is heard to indicate the touch input was not accepted.
NOTE: While the touch screen controller provides a high level of touch recognition accuracy, consider the

following to reduce the probability of touch errors:
• Make sure each button touch results in the expected response.
• Avoid holding anything close to the glass surface while deciding which button to touch, or resting the
hand or fingers on the bezel edges around the glass surface. This can cause interruption of the infrared
beams, leading to inadvertent activation or unresponsive touchscreen controls.
• When selecting a button on a scrollable list, avoid sliding movements which can cause inadvertent
scrolling.
Some adjustments are made using horizontal or vertical sliders. To use, simply touch within the slider box
and slide the finger in the desired slider bar direction, then release the finger. The finger may move outside
of the slider box during adjustment; slider movement stops when either the finger is released or the slider has
reached its maximum travel.

Volume Adjustment Slider

Map Detail Adjustment Slider
Figure 1-15 Sliders on the Touchscreen Controller

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

SYSTEM OVERVIEW
When a Touchscreen Controller screen window contains more information than the window can currently
show, a scroll bar and scroll buttons appear. To scroll inside of a window, touch the controller while moving
the finger up or down accordingly. To scroll more quickly, move the finger up or down rapidly in a flicking
motion. Scrolling can also be performed by pressing the Up or Down scroll buttons. If additional scrolling
is required to view all information in the window, each touch of the scroll button will display one ‘page’ of
information.
Some screens provide tabs as a means to group multiple categories of information or buttons. Touch the
desired tab to display its contents and manage settings or information. The selected tab is highlighted.

Selected Tab Highlighted
Scroll Bar

Other Available Tabs

Scroll Arrows

Figure 1-16 Touchscreen Controller with Tabs and Scroll Arrows

Elements on the Touchscreen Controller screens (such as buttons and sliders) appear subdued (dimmed) to
indicate their functions are currently not available.

Touch To Activate
Direct-To
Buttons Subdued Until
Direct-To is Activated
Figure 1-17 Subdued Buttons on Touchscreen Controller

In some cases, the screen area of the Touchscreen controller (including the buttons) may also appear subdued
to indicate functions on that screen are unavailable while the other Touchscreen Controller is controlling a
particular system resource.

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

SYSTEM OVERVIEW
BUTTON TYPES
Annunciator Buttons operate in an on/off state. An ‘on’ or enabled button displays a green annunciator; an
‘off’ or disabled button displays a gray annunciator. Touch the annunciator button to change its state.

On or Enabled

Off or Disabled

Figure 1-18 Touchscreen Controller Annunciator Buttons

Datafield Buttons can be modified based on information the pilot can enter or change, and often contain
light blue alphanumeric text. Touching datafield button will either display a pop-up window from which a
selection can be made, or display a keypad to supply the data. See the Data Entry discussion in this section
for more information.

Figure 1-19 Touchscreen Controller Datafield Buttons

If a system failure causes a button’s function to be inaccessible, a yellow ‘X’ appears over the button.. These
buttons will not respond if touched.

Button Function Not
Available Due to LRU
Failure
Figure 1-20 Failed Buttons on Touchscreen Controller

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SCREENS
Home Screen
On the Home Screen, the top row of buttons (Map, Traffic, Datalink Weather, and TAWS) are each
associated with a corresponding display that may be presented on a display pane. When one of these
buttons is touched, the selected display pane shows the associated display and the button border on the
Touchscreen Controller is highlighted in light blue to indicate the map associated with the button is selected
for display. When returning to the Home Screen, the selected display pane will show the display associated
with the highlighted button.

Shows Navigation Map Display in the selected Display Pane. Touch button again to access Map Settings Display
on Touchscreen Controller.
Shows Traffic Map Display in the selected Display Pane. Touch button again to access Traffic Map Settings Display
on Touchscreen Controller.
Shows Weather Display in the selected Display Pane. Touch button again to access Map Settings Display on
Touchscreen Controller.
Shows the TAWS Display in the selected Display Pane. Touch button again to access TAWS Settings screen on
Touchscreen Controller.
Accesses Direct-To screen on Touchscreen Controller.
Accesses Active Flight Plan screen on the Touchscreen Controller. A Flight Plan display is shown on the selected
Display Pane.
Accesses Procedures screen on Touchscreen Controller. Additional map displays may be shown as procedures are
selected.

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Accesses Charts screen on Touchscreen Controller. Charts are shown on the selected Display Pane.
Accesses Systems screen on Touchscreen Controller. Systems data can be selected for display on the Touchscreen
Controller, and displayed on the MFD. Also provides means to perform and monitor system tests.
Touch to display the Checklist Screen. The Checklist Screen provides access to the various aircraft checklists.
Accesses Services Menu Screen on Touchscreen Controller. Includes optional voice phone and text messaging
services, SiriusXM Satellite Radio controls.
Weight and Fuel, TOLD (Takeoff and Landing Data) VREF, Trip Planning functions, Minimums, Trip Statistics, Timer,
Scheduled Messages, GPS Status, FLC Profile, Initialization.
Displays the CPDLC (Controller Pilot Data Link Communications) Screen. Provides controls for managing CPDLC
connections, and message management features.
Displays the Speed Bugs Screen on the Touchscreen Controller. Provides for enabling and disabling speed bugs
and setting bug parameters.
Provides information about Airports, Intersections, VORs, NDBs, User Waypoints. Also allows creation of User
Waypoints.
Provides information about the nearest Airports, Intersections, VORs, NDBs, User Waypoints, Airspace, ARTCC facilities,
Flight Service Stations, and Weather reporting stations.

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Aircraft Systems Screen

Shows the Status display in Half-Mode in the selected Display Pane. Includes information on various aircraft
systems.
Shows the Environmental Control System synoptic display in the selected Display Pane in Half-Mode. Includes
information on the cabin temperature, oxygen quantities, and cabin pressurization.
Shows the Electrical synoptic display in the selected Display Pane in Half-Mode. Includes information on batteries,
generators, and busses.
Shows the Fuel synoptics display in the selected Display Pane in Half-Mode. Includes the fuel quantities and
weights, statuses of fuel flow, and valve positions.
Shows the Anti Ice synoptic display in the selected Display Pane. Displays anti-ice system status information.
Displays the Engine Settings Screen on the Touchscreen Controller. This screen provides for changing engine thrust
rating and entering takeoff data.
Displays the Landing Field Elevation Screen on the Touchscreen Controller. Allows for manual or FMS entry of field
elevation.
Provides functions accessible to maintenance personnel.

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Services Screen

Music Screen provides controls for SiriusXM Satellite Radio including channel selection, volume, and muting
settings.
Telephone Screen shows the status of the Iridium satellite telephone connection and provides telephone controls.
SMS Text Messaging Screen provides management of incoming and outgoing SMS (short message service) text
messages.
Contacts Screen provides management of contact information including phone and email addresses. Also provides
quick access to stored contacts via phone, SMS, or email.

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Utilities Screen

Accesses Weight and Fuel screen on the Touchscreen Controller. Provides for input of weight and balance data
and performs calculations.
Accesses the Trip Planning screen on the Touchscreen Controller.
Accesses the Minimums screen on the Touchscreen Controller. Provides controls for the Minimum Descent
Altitude/Decision Height alerting function. Button displays the current minimums altitude and source if provided.
Accesses the Trip Statistics screen on the Touchscreen Controller. Shows information regarding Flight Time,
Departure Time, Odometer, Trip Odometer, Average Ground Speed, and Maximum Ground Speed. Also provides
controls for trip statistic configuration.
Accesses the Timer screen on the Touchscreen Controller. Controls the timer on the PFD.
Used to create custom messages to be displayed one-time or periodically. The Touchscreen Controller displays
these messages on the Messages Screen on the Touchscreen Controller.
Shows the GPS Status display in the selected Display Pane. Touchscreen Controller provides additional RAIM
prediction function, GPS receiver selection, and SBAS selection.
Shows controls for viewing electronic documents on the Touchscreen Controller, and displays documents in the
selected Display Pane.

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Feature temporarily disables touchscreen glass input to allow for manual cleaning. Turn or press any knob on the
Touchscreen Controller to exit Screen Cleaning Mode.
Controls for activating and managing crew profiles.
Avionics Settings and Status, Data Link Services registration and status, Wi-Fi setup.

Setup Screen

Provides controls for changing system avionics settings, such as, time format, units of measure, airspace alert
settings, and MFD Data Bar Fields.
Displays information on the Touchscreen Controller for installed LRUs, system software, and databases.
Shows the SiriusXM Information Screen on the Touchscreen Controller. Used to activate audio and data services
from SiriusXM Satellite Radio and to verify subscriptions of SiriusXM Weather products.
Used to register with Garmin Flight Data Services (GFDS). Also provides information on current GFDS registration.
Provides controls for selecting available wireless networks, and for storing favorite wireless hotspots.
Displays the CPDLC Screen, giving access to the CPDLC Test Mode.

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Waypoint Info Screen

Accesses airport information including frequencies, weather, procedures, charts, runways, and airport directory
data.
Shows information for a selected intersection including bearing, distance, and location.
Provides VOR information including frequencies and location.
Provides NDB information including frequencies and locations.
Provides location information for User Waypoints including a list of User Waypoints.
Create User Waypoints based on present position or a designated location.

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Nearest Screen

Displays a list of the nearest airports, with runway, bearing, and distance information.
Displays a list of the nearest intersections with bearing and distance information.
Displays a list of the nearest VORs with bearing, distance, and frequency information.
Displays a list of the nearest NDBs with bearing, distance, and frequency information.
Displays a list of the nearest User Waypoints with bearing and distance information.
Displays information about the nearest airspace and status.
Displays information about the nearest ARTCC facilities including bearing, distance, and frequencies.
Displays the nearest Flight Service Stations with bearing, distance, and frequency information
Displays the nearest weather reporting sources, bearings, distances, and frequencies

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

SYSTEM OVERVIEW
TOUCHSCREEN CONTROLLER JOYSTICK AND KNOBS
The functions of the Joystick and Knobs on the Touchscreen Controller are context-sensitive. The Label
Bar, shown above each corresponding control, indicates which function(s) currently apply to each control.
The Joystick may be turned to increase or decrease map range, or to increase or decrease detail on certain
system displays. When the Joystick is pushed, the Map Pointer is activated for Map Panning (push again to
deactivate Map Pointer).
The Middle Knob is turned to increase or decrease the selected audio source volume. If a COM radio is
selected, pushing the Middle Knob activates/deactivates squelch. If a NAV radio is selected (on the Audio &
Radios Screen), pushing the Middle Knob enables NAV audio to be heard for identification.
The Large and Small Right Knobs are used for radio tuning and selection, frequency transfer, and data entry.
Turning the Large Right knob tunes the selected radio frequency in 1 MHz increments; the Small Right Knob
adjusts the frequency in 1 KHz increments. Push the Small Right Knob momentarily to change the selected
COM radio source (COM 1 or COM 2) for tuning. Push and hold the Small Right Knob for 1.5 seconds to
transfer the selected Standby COM frequency to the active COM frequency.
During data entry, turn the Large Right Knob to move the cursor position. Turn the Small Right Knob to
select a character for the highlighted cursor position. Push the Small Right Knob to enter the data (see the
Data Entry discussion later in this section for more information about Data Entry methods.)

CONTROLLING DISPLAY PANES (NORMAL OPERATIONS)
After system power-up, the MFD presents the Navigation Map Pane and the Traffic Map Pane in a side-byside format in Half Mode.
In Half Mode operation, the left half of the MFD (excluding the EIS display) is associated with the #1 (or
pilot’s side) Touchscreen Controller; the right portion is associated with the #2 (or co-pilot’s side) Touchscreen
Controller. Each Touchscreen Controller may be used to select and control a display on its respective MFD
half in Half Mode.
When a PFD is operating in Split Mode, the on-side Touchscreen Controller will also control the Display
Pane on the PFD.
The Joystick on each Touchscreen Controller, when moved to the right or left, selects the active pane on
the MFD or applicable PFD. On PFD1 and the left pane on the MFD, the active pane is indicated by a light
blue Pane Title Bar and outline. On PFD2 and the right pane on the MFD, the active pane is indicated by a
magenta Pane Title Bar and outline.
In Half Mode, the #1 and #2 Touchscreen Controllers retain independent settings for their respective
display half being controlled, allowing for greater flexibility and customization. For example, both the left
and right MFD halves may be showing a Navigation Map display, but with different map orientations or
overlay data based on the flight crew preferences on each half.
In normal operations, the system continues operating in Half Mode until Full Mode is selected on either
Touchscreen Controller.

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Light Blue
Title Bar
Indicates
Display Pane
Selected
Using #1
Touchscreen
Controller

MFD in Half Mode with
Two Display Panes

PFD1 in Split Mode with a
Display Pane

#1 Touchscreen
Controller

PFD2 in Split Mode with
a Display Pane

Magenta
Title Bar
Indicates
Display Pane
Selected
Using #2
Touchscreen
Controller

#2 Touchscreen
Controller

Figure 1-21 Display Pane Control (Normal Operations, PFDs in Split Mode)
Multi-Function Display (MFD)

EIS Display

Navigation Map
Display Currently
Selected on Left
Display Pane

Navigation Map Display
(Half Mode)

Traffic Map Display
(Half Mode)

Traffic Map
Display
Currently
Selected
on Right
Display
Pane

#1 Touchscreen Controller

Touch
to Select
Full Mode
Operation

#2 Touchscreen Controller

Figure 1-22 MFD and Touchscreen Controllers (Half Mode Operation)

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Full Mode is available when a Touchscreen Controller shows a Full Button in the Button Bar. When the
Full Button is touched, the MFD display half for the Touchscreen Controller on which the mode was selected
expands to a full display (Figure 1-23).
The Touchscreen Controller that enabled Full Mode will have the ability to change the selected display
settings while operating in Full Mode. For example, if the #1 Touchscreen Controller enabled the Navigation
Map Display in Full Mode, the #1 Touchscreen Controller can be used to customize the map overlay data or
change the map orientation while operating in Full Mode (accessed using the Map Settings Button.) The #2
Touchscreen Controller displays a diminished (dimmed) screen area if the Map Settings Screen is selected
on this controller to indicate these functions are not currently available using the #2 Touchscreen Controller.
Multi-Function Display (MFD)

EIS Display

Navigation Map
Display Currently
Selected on MFD in
Full Screen Mode

Navigation Map Display
(Full Mode)

#1 Touchscreen Controller

Touch
to Select
Half Mode
Operation
#2 Touchscreen Controller

Figure 1-23 MFD and Touchscreen Controllers (Full Mode Operation)

Regardless of which Touchscreen Controller enabled Full Mode, either Touchscreen Controller joystick
may be used to adjust map range or activate the map panning function, when available. The Label Bar on the
Touchscreen Controller will indicate the availability of these functions.

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

SYSTEM OVERVIEW
To resume Half Mode operation on either Touchscreen Controller, touch the Half Button on the Touchscreen
Controller when it is shown in the Button Bar.
The system also enters Half Mode automatically if the Touchscreen Controller which did not select Full
Mode is used to select another MFD display, or if either Touchscreen Controller selects an MFD display which
can only be presented in Half Mode (such as the aircraft systems displays).

DATA ENTRY
Two methods exist for directly entering alphanumeric data (e.g., waypoint identifiers, barometric minimum
descent altitude) into the system: using the Touchscreen Controller’s alphanumeric keypad, and the large and
small right knob on the bottom of the Touchscreen Controller. In some instances, such as when entering an
identifier, the system will try to predict the desired identifier based on the characters being entered. In this
case, if the desired identifier appears, use the ENTER Button to confirm the entry without entering the rest of
the identifier manually. This can save the pilot from entering all the characters of the identifier.
Besides character-by-character data entry, the system also provides a shortcut for entering waypoint
identifiers. When the cursor is on a field awaiting entry of a waypoint identifier, touching the Find button
accesses four different lists of waypoint identifiers for quick selection: Recent, Nearest, Flight Plan (if active
flight plan waypoints are available), and a Favorite waypoints list. In addition, the system provides the ability
to search by Facility Name or by City. The system will automatically fill in the identifier, facility, and city fields
with the information for the selected waypoint.
Using the Touchscreen Controller keyboard to enter alphanumeric data:
1) Select a Datafield Button the Touchscreen Controller for which data entry is required (i.e. waypoint, radio
frequency, etc.). A keypad will appear, and the Datafield Button will be highlighted in light blue.
2) Touch the desired letters or numbers, one at a time.
3) If an alphabetic keypad is displayed and numbers are desired, touch the 123... Button.
4) If the numeric keypad is displayed and letter are desired, touch the ABC... Button.
5) To accept the entry, touch the Enter Button. Otherwise, touch the Back, Cancel, or Home Button (on the
Button Bar) to exit the datafield without saving the entry.
Touch to use Numeric Buttons

Touch to use Alphabetic Buttons

Figure 1-24 Entering a Waypoint on the Touchscreen Controller’s Alphanumeric Keypads

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

SYSTEM OVERVIEW
It is not necessary to touch the Enter Button to complete certain data fields for which a specific number
of characters is always required. For example, after entering four digit transponder squawk code, the
system automatically accepts this data 1.5 seconds after the fourth button has been pressed (if the entry has
not been cancelled).
Using the Touchscreen Controller’s large and small right Knob to enter data:
1) Select a datafield button on the Touchscreen Controller for which data entry is required (i.e. waypoint, radio
frequency, etc.). A keypad will appear, and the data field will be highlighted in light blue.
2) Begin entering data by turning the small right Knob to select a character for the first placeholder.

Turning the knob to the right scrolls through the alphabet (where appropriate) toward the letter Z, starting in
the middle at K, and the digits zero through nine. Turning the knob to the left scrolls in the opposite direction.
3) Turn the large right knob to move the cursor to the next placeholder in the field.
4) Repeat, using the small right knob to select a character and the large right knob to move the cursor, until the
field is complete.
5) Press the right knob to confirm entry. Otherwise, touch the Back or Home button to exit the field without
saving the entry.

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

SYSTEM OVERVIEW

1.4 SYSTEM OPERATION
The displays are connected via a single Ethernet bus for high-speed communication. As shown in Figure
1-1, each IAU is connected to a single display. This allows the units to share information, enabling true system
integration.

NORMAL DISPLAY OPERATION
In normal operating mode, the PFD presents graphical flight instrumentation (attitude, heading, airspeed,
altitude, vertical speed), replacing the traditional flight instrument cluster (see the Flight Instruments Section
for more information).
The MFD displays a navigation information, as well as flight plan, weather, traffic and terrain information in
either two half-size display panes or one full-size display pane, depending on the selection made on the GTCs.
The left portion of the MFD is dedicated to the Engine Indication System (EIS; see the EAS Section).
The Touchscreen Controller provides radio management, MFD control and data entry, as well as feature
selection and data display for the selected features.

Figure 1-25 Normal Operation

REVERSIONARY DISPLAY OPERATION
NOTE: The system alerts the pilot when the LRUs are communicating using backup paths. Refer to the

Appendices for further information regarding system-specific alerts.
If a GDU fails or is off-line, the system provides the capability to show a PFD, an EIS display, and a display
pane on another GDU in Reversionary Mode.
The Phenom 300 employs dedicated three-position mode switches for PFD1 and PFD2. These PFD mode
switches allow for placing the GDUs in automatic, manual or split-screen reversionary modes. The Split Mode
selected using these switches is used for viewing the reversionary display in a split screen format, unlike the
Split Mode Softkey on the PFD, which allows for viewing the normal display in a split screen format. The
following discussion illustrates some of the various reversionary mode display combinations.

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

SYSTEM OVERVIEW
AUTO REVERSION
• PFD1 failure, PFD1 Mode Switch set to AUTO, PFD2 Mode Switch set to AUTO – MFD enters reversionary
Full Mode and PFD2 continues to operate normally.

Figure 1-26 Automatic Reversionary Mode - PFD1 Failure

• MFD failure, PFD1 Mode Switch set to AUTO, PFD2 Mode Switch set to AUTO – PFD1 operates normally
when in Full Mode. If PFD1 is operating in Split Mode, it will switch to Full Mode. PFD2 enters reversionary
mode. If PFD2 is operating in Split Mode, it will switch to reversionary Full Mode.

Figure 1-27 Automatic Reversionary Mode - MFD Failure

• PFD2 failure – PFD1 and MFD continue to operate normally.

Figure 1-28 Automatic Reversionary Mode - PFD2 Failure

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

SYSTEM OVERVIEW
MANUAL REVERSION
• PFD1 Mode Switch set to REV, PFD2 Mode Switch set to AUTO – PFD1 and MFD enter reversionary Full
Mode. PFD2 continues to operate normally.

Figure 1-29 Manual Reversionary Mode - PFD1

• PFD2 Mode Switch set to REV, PFD1 Mode Switch set to AUTO – PFD2 and MFD enter reversionary Full
Mode. PFD1 continues to operate normally.

Figure 1-30 Manual Reversionary Mode - PFD2

• PFD1 and PFD2 Mode Switches set to REV – PFD1, MFD, and PFD2 enter reversionary Full Mode.

Figure 1-31 Manual Reversionary Mode - PFD1 and PFD2

• PFD1 Mode Switch set to Split, PFD2 Mode Switch set to AUTO – PFD1 and MFD enter reversionary Split
Mode. PFD2 continues to operate normally.

Figure 1-32 Manual Reversionary Split Mode - PFD1

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

SYSTEM OVERVIEW
• PFD2 Mode Switch set to Split, PFD1 Mode Switch set to AUTO – PFD2 and MFD enter reversionary Split
Mode. PFD1 continues to operate normally.

Figure 1-33 Manual Reversionary Split Mode - PFD2

• PFD1 Mode Switch set to REV, PFD2 Mode Switch set to Split – PFD1 and MFD enter reversionary Full
Mode. PFD2 enters reversionary Split Mode.

Figure 1-34 Manual Reversionary Mode - PFD1 Reversionary Full Mode, PFD2 Reversionary Split Mode

• PFD2 Mode Switch set to REV, PFD1 Mode Switch set to Split – PFD2 and MFD enter reversionary Full
Mode. PFD1 enters reversionary Split Mode.

Figure 1-35 Manual Reversionary Mode - PFD2 Reversionary Full Mode, PFD1 Reversionary Split Mode

• PFD1 and PFD2 Mode Switches set to Split – PFD1, MFD, and PFD2 enter reversionary Split Mode.

Figure 1-36 Manual Reversionary Split Mode - PFD1 and PFD2

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

SYSTEM OVERVIEW
If the MFD is operating in Reversionary Mode (e.g. PFD1 or PFD2 failure), the Touchscreen Controller on the
failed PFD side controls the Reversionary Mode display pane. If PFD1 or PFD2 is in Reversionary Mode, the
on-side Touchscreen Controller controls the Reversionary Mode display pane.
If both PFD1 and PFD2 fail or are off-line, the #1 Touchscreen Controller controls the Reversionary Mode
display pane on the MFD. The #2 Touchscreen Controller’s functions (with the exception of display pane
control) continue to be available in the event of PFD1 and PFD2 failure.

TOUCHSCREEN CONTROLLER FAILURE
If either Touchscreen controller fails or is off-line, the operating Touchscreen Controller controls the display
panes for both PFDs and the MFD. In addition, the single Touchscreen Controller provides audio and CNS
control for both the pilot and copilot.

AHRS OPERATION
NOTE: Refer to Appendix A for specific AHRS alert information.
NOTE: Aggressive maneuvering while AHRS is not operating normally may degrade AHRS accuracy.

In addition to using internal sensors, the GRS 77 AHRS uses GPS information, magnetic field data and air
data to assist in attitude/heading calculations. In normal mode, the AHRS relies upon GPS and magnetic
field measurements. If either of these external measurements is unavailable or invalid, the AHRS uses air
data information for attitude determination. Four AHRS modes of operation are available (see Figure 1-37)
and depend upon the combination of available sensor inputs. Loss of air data, GPS, or magnetometer sensor
inputs is communicated to the pilot by message advisory alerts.

Mag Data AND Air Data
Available and Reliable?

YES

Mag Data Available and Reliable?

YES

GPS Data Available and Reliable?

AHRS Normal
Mode

YES

Air Data Available and Reliable?

AHRS no-Mag
Mode

AHRS no-Mag/
no-Air Mode

Heading Invalid

AHRS no-GPS
Mode

AHRS coast-on-gyros
until invalid

Attitude/Heading Invalid

Figure 1-37 AHRS Operation

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

SYSTEM OVERVIEW
GPS INPUT FAILURE
NOTE: In-flight initialization of AHRS, when operating without any valid source of GPS data and at true

air speed values greater than approximately 200 knots, is not guaranteed. Under these rare conditions, it
is possible for in-flight AHRS initialization to take an indefinite amount of time which would result in an
extended period of time where valid AHRS outputs are unavailable.
Two GPS inputs are provided to the AHRS. If GPS information from one of the inputs fails, the AHRS uses
the operating GPS input and an alert message is issued to inform the flight crew. If both GPS inputs fail, the
AHRS can continue to provide attitude and heading information to the PFDs as long as magnetometer and
airspeed data are available and valid.

MAGNETOMETER FAILURE
If the magnetometer input fails, the AHRS transitions to one of the reversionary No-Magnetometer modes and
continues to output valid attitude information. However, if the aircraft is airborne, the heading output on the
PFD does become invalid (as indicated by a yellow “X”).

AIR DATA INPUT FAILURE
Failure of the air data input has no affect on the AHRS output while AHRS is receiving valid GPS
information. Invalid/unavailable airspeed data in addition to GPS failure results in loss of all attitude and
heading information.

GPS RECEIVER OPERATION
Each GIA 63W Integrated Avionics Unit (IAU) contains a GPS receiver. Information collected by the specified
receiver (GPS 1 for the #1 IAU or GPS 2 for the #2 IAU) may be viewed on the GPS 1 or GPS 2 STATUS Pane
and the GPS Status Screen on the Touchscreen Controller (refer to Figure 1-38).
These GPS sensor annunciations are most often seen after system power-up when one GPS receiver has
acquired satellites before the other, or one of the GPS receivers has not yet acquired an SBAS (Satellite Based
Augmentation System) signal. While the aircraft is on the ground, the SBAS signal may be blocked by
obstructions causing one GPS receiver to have difficulty acquiring a good signal. Also, while airborne, turning
the aircraft may result in one of the GPS receivers temporarily losing the SBAS signal.

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

SYSTEM OVERVIEW
If the sensor annunciation persists, check for a system failure message by touching the MSG Button on
Touchscreen Controller. If no failure message exists, check the GPS Status Screen and compare the information
for GPS 1 and GPS 2. Discrepancies may indicate a problem.

Satellite Constellation
Diagram
Satellite Signal
Strength Bars
Satellite Signal
Information Status

GPS Receiver
Status

Figure 1-38 GPS Receiver Information

Selecting the GPS receiver:
1) From the Home Screen, touch Utilities > GPS Status.
2) Touch the GPS 1 annunciator button to select the #1 GPS receiver. The button annunciator will be green when
selected on. The system displays the GPS 1 STATUS Pane.
3) Touch the GPS 2 annunciator button to select the #2 GPS receiver. The button annunciator will be green when
selected on. The system displays the GPS 2 STATUS Pane.

SATELLITE CONSTELLATION DIAGRAM
Satellites currently in view are shown at their respective positions on a sky view diagram. The sky view is
always in a north-up orientation, with the outer circle representing the horizon, the inner circle representing
45° above the horizon, and the center point showing the position directly overhead.
Each satellite is represented by an oval containing the Pseudo-random noise (PRN) number (i.e., satellite
identification number). Satellites whose signals are currently being used are represented by solid ovals.

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SATELLITE SIGNAL STATUS
The accuracy of the aircraft’s GPS fix is calculated using Estimated Position Uncertainty (EPU), Dilution
of Precision (DOP), and horizontal and vertical figures of merit (HFOM and VFOM). EPU is the radius of a
circle centered on an estimated horizontal position in which actual position has 95% probability of laying.
EPU is a statistical error indication and not an actual error measurement.
DOP measures satellite geometry quality (i.e., number of satellites received and where they are relative to
each other) on a range from 0.0 to 9.9, with lower numbers denoting better accuracy. HFOM and VFOM,
measures of horizontal and vertical position uncertainty, are the current 95% confidence horizontal and
vertical accuracy values reported by the GPS receiver.
The current calculated GPS position, time, altitude, ground speed, and track for the aircraft are displayed
below the satellite signal accuracy measurements.

GPS RECEIVER STATUS
The GPS solution type (ACQUIRING, 2D NAV, 2D DIFF NAV, 3D NAV, 3D DIFF NAV) for the active GPS
receiver (GPS 1 or GPS 2) is shown in the right center of the GPS 1 and GPS 2 STATUS Display. When the
receiver is in the process of acquiring enough satellite signals for navigation, the receiver uses satellite orbital
data (collected continuously from the satellites) and last known position to determine the satellites that
should be in view. ACQUIRING is indicated as the solution until a sufficient number of satellites have been
acquired for computing a solution.
When the receiver is in the process of acquiring a 3D navigational GPS solution, 3D NAV is indicated as the
solution until the 3D differential fix has finished acquisition. SBAS (Satellite-Based Augmentation System)
indicates INACTIVE. When acquisition is complete, the solution status indicates 3D DIFF NAV and SBAS
indicates ACTIVE.

GPS SATELLITE SIGNAL STRENGTHS
The GPS 1 and GPS 2 STATUS Display can be helpful in troubleshooting weak (or missing) signal levels due
to poor satellite coverage or installation problems. As the GPS receiver locks onto satellites, a signal strength
bar is displayed for each satellite in view, with the appropriate satellite PRN number (01-32 or 120-138 for
WAAS) below each bar. The progress of satellite acquisition is shown in three stages, as indicated by signal
bar appearance:
- No bar—Receiver is looking for the indicated satellite
- Hollow bar—Receiver has found the satellite and is collecting data
- Light blue bar—Receiver has collected the necessary data and the satellite signal can be used
- Green bar—Satellite is being used for the GPS solution
- Checkered bar—Receiver has excluded the satellite (Fault Detection and Exclusion)
- “D” indication—Denotes the satellite is being used as part of the differential computations
Each satellite has a 30-second data transmission that must be collected (signal strength bar is hollow) before
the satellite may be used for navigation (signal strength bar becomes solid).

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SBAS SELECTION
In certain situations, such as when the aircraft is outside or on the fringe of the WAAS, EGNOS, or MSAS
coverage area, it may be desirable to disable the reception of the applicable SBAS signal (although it is not
recommended). When enabled, the annunciator on the applicable button shows green.
Enabling/Disabling EGNOS, MSAS or WAAS
1) From Home, touch Utilities > GPS Status.
2) Touch the EGNOS, MSAS, or WAAS (any combination) Annunciator Button(s) to enable or disable. A green
annunciation indicates an enabled SBAS selection.

RAIM (RECEIVER AUTONOMOUS INTEGRITY MONITORING) PREDICTION
In most cases performing a RAIM prediction is not necessary. However, in some cases, the selected approach
may be outside the SBAS coverage area and it may be necessary to perform a RAIM prediction for the intended
approach.
Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring (RAIM) is a GPS receiver function that performs a consistency
check on all tracked satellites. RAIM ensures that the available satellite geometry allows the receiver to
calculate a position within a specified RAIM protection limit (2.0 nautical miles for oceanic and enroute, 1.0
nm for terminal, and 0.3 nm for non-precision approaches). During oceanic, enroute, and terminal phases of
flight, RAIM is available nearly 100% of the time.
The RAIM prediction function also indicates whether RAIM is available at a specified date and time. RAIM
computations predict satellite coverage within ±15 min of the specified arrival date and time.
Because of the tighter protection limit on approaches, there may be times when RAIM is not available. The
system automatically monitors RAIM and warns with an alert message when it is not available. If RAIM is not
predicted to be available for the final approach course, the approach does not become active, as indicated by
the messages “Approach is not active” and “RAIM not available from FAF to MAP”. If RAIM is not available
when crossing the FAF, the missed approach procedure must be flown.
Predicting RAIM availability:
1) From the Home, touch Utilities > GPS Status > Location.
2) Touch the Waypoint Button to enter the location for which RAIM will be predicted. Touch the Present
Position Button to enter the aircraft’s current position as the prediction location.
3) If the Waypoint Button was touched in step 2, enter the waypoint identifier using the alphanumeric buttons.
If the Present Position Button was touched in step 2, proceed to step 5.
4) Touch the Enter Button.
5) The location selected for RAIM prediction is now displayed on the Location Button.
6) Touch the Arrival Time Button.
7) Enter the planned arrival time for the selected location using the numeric buttons
8) Touch the Enter Button. The time is now displayed on the Arrival Time Button.
9) Touch the Arrival Date Button.

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

SYSTEM OVERVIEW
10) Touch the button for the desired year. If necessary, touch and drag in the window, or use the Up and Down
buttons to display the desired year.
11) Touch the button for the desired month. If necessary, touch and drag in the window, or use the Up and Down
buttons to display the desired month.
12) Touch the button for the desired day. If necessary, touch and drag in the window, or use the Up and Down
buttons to display the desired day. The selected date is now displayed on the Arrival Date Button.
13) Touch the Compute RAIM Button. One of the following will be displayed in the RAIM Status field.

• ‘Computing’—RAIM calculation in progress

• ‘Available’—RAIM is predicted to be available for the specified waypoint, time, and date

• ‘Not Available’—RAIM is predicted to be unavailable for the specified waypoint, time, and date

• ‘--------’—RAIM has not been computed for the specified waypoint, time, and date combination

ANNUNCIATIONS
When an LRU or an LRU function fails, a yellow ‘X’ is typically displayed on windows associated with the
failed data (Figure 1-39). Upon system power-up, certain instruments remain invalid as equipment begins to
initialize. All windows should be operational within one minute of power-up. If any window remains flagged,
the system should be serviced by a Garmin-authorized repair facility.
NOTE: For a detailed description of all annunciations and alerts, refer to Appendix A. Refer to the Airplane

Flight Manual (AFM) for additional information regarding pilot responses to these annunciations.

Figure 1-39 System Failure Annunciations, Reversionary Mode

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

SYSTEM OVERVIEW

1.5 SYSTEM MANAGEMENT
The Touchscreen Controllers allow management of various system parameters, in addition to providing status
and database information for the system.

AVIONICS SETTINGS
Avionics Settings are categorized into 5 Tabs (System, Units, Alerts, MFD Fields, and Audio):

SYSTEM SETTINGS
• Time display format (local 12 hour, local 24 hour, or UTC )
• Time offset
• Flight Director Active Format (Single Cue or Dual Cue)
• GPS CDI range
• COM transceiver channel spacing
• Nearest Airport Runway Surface
• Nearest Airport Minimum Length

NOTE: The time offset is used to define current local time. UTC (also called GMT or Zulu) date and time are

calculated directly from the GPS satellite signals and cannot be changed.
Setting the Time Format:
1) From the Home, touch Utilities > Setup > Avionics Settings.
2) If necessary, touch the System tab.

3) Touch the Time Format Button (displays currently selected time format in light blue).
4) Touch a time format option button (Local 12hr, Local 24hr, or UTC).
Setting the Time Offset Value:
1) From the Home, touch Utilities > Setup > Avionics Settings.
2) If necessary, from the System Tab.
3) Touch the Time Offset button (currently selected time offset shown in light blue).

4) Input the desired value using the numeric keypad or the large and small right knobs and touch the ENTER
Button.

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

SYSTEM OVERVIEW

Figure 1-40 System Time (Local 24-hr Format)

Date

‘Time Format’
Datafield
Time

‘Time Format’ Options

Figure 1-41 Time Format Settings

Setting the Flight Director Active Format:
1) From the Home, touch Utilities > Setup > Avionics Settings.
2) If necessary, touch the System tab.
3) Touch the Flight Director Active Format button to display a list of flight director formats (button displays currently
selected Flight Director Active Format in light blue).
4) Touch either the Single Cue or Dual Cue Buttons.

GPS CDI Range
The ‘GPS CDI’ datafield allows the pilot to define the range for the on-screen course deviation indicator
(CDI). The range values represent full range deflection for the CDI to either side. The default setting is
‘AUTO’. At this setting, leaving the departure airport the CDI range is set to 1.0 nm and gradually ramps
up to 2 nm beyond 30 nm from the departure airport. The CDI range is set to 2.0 nautical miles during the
en route phase of flight. Within 30 nm of the destination airport, the CDI range gradually ramps down to
1.0 nm (terminal area). During approach operations, the CDI range ramps down even further to 0.3 nm.
This transition normally occurs within 2.0 nm of the final approach fix (FAF).

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

SYSTEM OVERVIEW
If a lower CDI range setting is selected (i.e., 1.0 or 0.3 nm), the higher range settings are not selected
during any phase of flight. For example, if 1.0 nm is selected, the system uses this for en route and terminal
phases and ramps down to 0.3 nm during an approach. Note that the Receiver Autonomous Integrity
Monitoring (RAIM) protection limits follow the selected CDI range and corresponding flight phases.
Setting the GPS CDI Range:
1) From the Home, touch Utilities > Setup > Avionics Settings.
2) If necessary, touch the System tab.

3) Touch the GPS CDI button (button displays current GPS CDI range in light blue).
4) Touch one of the following GPS CDI Range Buttons: 0.30 NM, 1.00 NM, 2.00 NM, or AUTO.

COM Channel Spacing
NOTE: 8.33 kHz VHF communication frequency channel spacing is not approved for use in the United States.

Select the 25.0 kHz channel spacing option for use in the United States.
The ‘COM Channel Spacing’ datafield allows the pilot to select 8.33 kHz or 25.0 kHz COM frequency
channel spacing.
Setting COM Channel Spacing:
1) From the Home, touch Utilities > Setup > Avionics Settings.
2) If necessary, touch the System tab.
3) Scroll to and touch the COM Channel Spacing Button (button displays the current spacing setting in light blue).

4) Touch either the 8.33 kHz or 25.0 kHz Buttons.

Nearest Airports
Nearest airport matching criteria (such as minimum runway length and/or surface type) can be entered to
prevent airports with small runways or runways that are not of appropriate surface from being displayed in
the list as nearest airports . Default settings are zero feet (or meters) for runway length and “HARD/SOFT”
for runway surface type.
Setting the Nearest Airport surface matching criteria:
1) From the Home, touch Utilities > Setup > Avionics Settings.
2) If necessary, touch the System tab.
3) Scroll to and touch the Nearest Airport Runway Surface button (button displays current runway surface selection
in light blue).
4) Touch one of the following runway surface buttons: Any, Hard Only, Hard/Soft, or Water.

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Setting the Nearest Airport Minimum Runway Length matching criteria:
1) From the Home, touch Utilities > Setup > Avionics Settings.
2) If necessary, touch the System tab.
3) Scroll to and touch the Nearest Airport Min Rwy Length button (button displays current length setting in light
blue).
4) Input a minimum runway surface distance using the keypad or the large and small right knobs, then touch Enter
to accept the entry.
Restoring default Avionics Settings:
1) From the Home, touch Utilities > Setup > Avionics Settings.
2) Touch one of the following tabs: System, Units, Alerts, MFD Fields, or Audio.
3) Scroll as necessary and touch the Restore Default Button..
4) Touch Yes to restore all settings in the selected tab to their default settings, or touch the Cancel Button.

UNITS SETTINGS
• Nav Angle
• Magnetic Variance
• Distance/Speed
• Altitude/Vertical Speed
• Temperature
• Fuel
• Weight
• Position Format

The Units Tab allows for configuration of the measurement units. A button appears next to the current
unit setting only for those units which the flight crew can modify. Measurement units without an associated
button are shown only for informational purposes and cannot be modified by the flight crew.
• Nav angle (magnetic, true)
When set to ‘Magnetic (°)’, magnetic variation is calculated into the displayed value. When ‘True (°T)’
is selected, no magnetic variation is calculated and a ‘T’ is displayed next to the value.
Affects Current Heading, Selected Heading, and Selected Course.
Affects the BRG, DTK, TKE, TRK, and XTK fields.

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

SYSTEM OVERVIEW
• Temperature (Celsius, Fahrenheit)
Affects display cabin temperature readout and temperature deviation from ISA.
• Position Format (HDDD°MM.MM’, HDDD°MM’SS.S”)
Affects all position displays.
Changing unit settings:
1) From the Home, touch Utilities > Setup > Avionics Settings.
2) If necessary, touch the Units tab.
3) Scroll if necessary and touch button corresponding to the units to be changed (current units selection displayed
in light blue).

4) Touch a units button from the list.
Settings
Displayed for
Reference,
Not Flight
Crew
Selectable
Button
Indicates
Setting is
Flight Crew
Selectable

Figure 1-42 Viewing Unit Data on the Avionics Settings Screen

ALERTS SETTINGS
• Baro transition alert
• Airspace alert altitude buffer
• Arrival Alert
• Class B/TMA airspace alert
• Class C/TCA airspace alert
• Class D airspace alert
• Restricted airspace alert
• MOA (Military) airspace alert
• Other (ADIZ) airspace alert

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

SYSTEM OVERVIEW
The Alerts Tab allows configuration of the following alert settings:
• Baro transition alert

• Arrival alerts

• Altitude buffer distance alert

• Airspace alerts

Baro Transition Alert settings
Enabling/Disabling the Baro Transition Alert:
1) From the Home, touch Utilities > Setup > Avionics Settings.
2) If necessary, touch the Alerts Tab.
3) Touch the Baro Transition Alert Enable Button. Button annunciator is green when alert is enabled, gray when
disabled.
Setting the Baro Transition Alert altitude:
1) From the Home, touch Utilities > Setup > Avionics Settings.
2) If necessary, touch the Alerts Tab.
3) Touch the Baro Transition Alert altitude button.
4) Input the desired altitude using the numeric keypad or the large and small right knobs, then touch the ENTER
Button or press the Right Knob.

Arrival Alert settings
Enabling/disabling Arrival Alerts:
1) From the Home, touch Utilities > Setup > Avionics Settings.
2) If necessary, touch the Alerts Tab.
3) Touch the Arrival Alert Enable Button. Button annunciator is green when alert is enabled, gray when disabled.
Setting the Arrival Alert distance:
1) From the Home, touch Utilities > Setup > Avionics Settings.
2) If necessary, touch the Alerts Tab.
3) Touch the Arrival Alert distance button.
4) Input the desired distance using the numeric keypad or the large and small right knobs, then touch the ENTER
Button or press the Right Knob.

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Airspace Alerts
The Airspace Alerts allow the pilot to turn the controlled/special-use airspace message alerts on or off.
This does not affect the Nearest Airspace alerts or the airspace boundaries depicted on the Navigation Map
pane. It simply enabled/disables the warning provided when the aircraft is approaching or near an airspace.
Alerts for the following airspaces can be turned enabled/disabled:
• Class B/TMA

• Restricted

• Class C/TCA

• MOA (Military)

• Class D

• Other airspaces/ADIZ

An altitude buffer is also provided which “expands” the vertical range above or below an airspace. For
example, if the buffer is set at 500 feet, and the aircraft is more than 500 feet above/below an airspace, an
alert message is not generated, but if the aircraft is less than 500 feet above/below an airspace and projected
to enter it, the pilot is notified with an alert message. The default setting for the altitude buffer is 200 feet.
Enabling/disabling an airspace alert:
1) From the Home, touch Utilities > Setup > Avionics Settings.
2) If necessary, touch the Alerts Tab.
3) Scroll as necessary and touch the Enable Button nex to any of the following alerts: CLASS B/TMA, CLASS C/
TCA, CLASS D, RESTRICTED, MOA (MILITARY), OTHER/ADIZ. Button annunciator is green when alert is enabled,
gray when disabled.
Setting the altitude buffer distance:
1) From the Home, touch Utilities > Setup > Avionics Settings.
2) If necessary, touch the Alerts Tab.
3) Touch the Airspace Alert Alt Buffer altitude button (displays current selection in light blue).
4) Enter the desired altitude buffer using the numeric keypad or the large and small right knobs, then touch the
ENTER Button or press the Right Knob.

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

SYSTEM OVERVIEW
MFD FIELDS SETTINGS
• MFD Data Bar Field 1
• MFD Data Bar Field 2
• MFD Data Bar Field 3
• MFD Data Bar Field 4
• MFD Data Bar Field 5
• MFD Data Bar Field 6
• MFD Data Bar Field 7
• MFD Data Bar Field 8

The MFD Navigation Status Bar can display up to eight navigation data bar fields. By default, the
Navigation Status Bar displays Ground Speed (GS), Desired Track (DTK), Track (TRK), Estimated Time
Enroute (ETE), Bearing (BRG), Distance (DIS), Minimum Safe Altitude (MSA), and Estimated Time of
Arrival (ETA). The system assigns each data bar field a corresponding number, 1 though 8, as displayed
from left-to-right in the MFD Navigation Status Bar.
Change the information shown in an MFD Data Bar field:
1) From the Home, touch Utilities > Setup > Avionics Settings.
2) If necessary, touch the MFD Fields Tab.
3) Scroll as needed and touch the MFD Data Bar Field Number to be changed (1 through 8); current selection for
each data bar field displayed in light blue.
4) Scroll as needed and touch the button corresponding to the desired data to be shown in the selected MFD Data
Bar Field.
The following data may be selected for display in each of the eight fields of the Navigation Status Bar.
• Bearing (BRG)

• Fuel On Board (FOB)

• Distance (DIS)

• Fuel Over Destination (FOD)

• Desired Track (DTK)

• Ground Speed (GS)

• Endurance (END)

• Minimum Safe Altitude (MSA)

• Enroute Safe Altitude (ESA)

• True Air Speed (TAS)

• Estimated Time of Arrival (ETA)

• Cross-Track Error (XTK)

• Estimated Time Enroute (ETE)

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

SYSTEM OVERVIEW
AUDIO SETTINGS
• Audio Alert Voice

Audio
From the Audio Tab the audio alert voice gender can be set to male or female.
To change the audio alert voice:
1) From the Home, touch Utilities > Setup > Avionics Settings.
2) If necessary, touch the Alerts Tab.
3) Touch the Audio Alert Voice button (current voice gender displayed in light blue).
4) Touch the audio alert voice gender button (Male or Female).

CREW PROFILES
The system automatically stores various settings and selections within crew profiles. These include a wide
range of parameters for both the pilot and copilot including (but not limited to) map settings, avionics settings,
PFD settings, user waypoints, and weight and balance information.
The Crew Profile Screen provides additional capabilities for managing crew profiles. The system can store
up to 25 crew profiles. From here, crew profiles may be added, renamed, activated, copied, or deleted. In
addition, crew profiles can be imported from an SD card, or exported to an SD card on the Crew Profile screen.
By default, ‘DEFAULT PROFILE’ is the active crew profile. This profile cannot be deleted or renamed.

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

SYSTEM OVERVIEW
After system power-up, the Default Profile is the active crew profile, regardless which Crew Profile was active
before the power cycle. If needed, the flight crew may activate a different crew profile on the Initialization
Screen or the Crew Profile Screen.
Active Crew
Profile

Available
Profiles Stored
on the System

Available
Options for
Selected
Crew Profile

Add a New
Crew Profile
Import a Crew
Profile from an
SD Card

Selected Crew
Profile

Figure 1-43 Managing Crew Profiles on the Crew Profile Screen

Adding a new crew profile:
1) From Home, touch Utilities > Crew Profile.
2) Scroll if necessary, and touch the Add Profile Button.
3) Input the name to assign to the crew profile using the keypad or the large and small right knobs, then touch
Enter or press the Right Knob. Crew Profiles may be up to 16 characters long, and cannot share the exact
name of another crew profile.

Activating a crew profile:
1) From Home, touch Utilities > Crew Profile.
2) Scroll if necessary, and touch the button for the crew profile to be activated.
3) Touch the Activate Button. When finished, the system displays the name of the selected crew profile in the
‘Active Profile’ window.

Copying an existing crew profile:
1) From Home, touch Utilities > Crew Profile.
2) Scroll if necessary, and touch the button for the crew profile to be copied.
3) Touch the Copy Button.
4) Input the name to assign to the copied crew profile using the keypad or the large and small right knobs, then
touch Enter or press the Right Knob. Crew Profiles may be up to 16 characters long, and cannot share the
exact name of another crew profile. The Crew Profile screen displays the name of the copied profile in the list.

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Renaming an existing crew profile:
1) From Home, touch Utilities > Crew Profile.
2) Scroll if necessary, and touch the button for the crew profile to be renamed.
3) Touch the Rename Button.
4) Input the new name to assign to the selected crew profile using the keypad or the large and small right knobs,
then touch Enter or press the Right Knob. Crew Profiles may be up to 16 characters long, and cannot share
the exact name of another crew profile. The Crew Profile screen displays the name of the renamed crew profile
in the list.

Deleting a crew profile:
NOTE: The system cannot delete the currently active crew profile. If necessary, activate another crew profile

prior to deletion.
1) From Home, touch Utilities > Crew Profile.
2) Scroll if necessary, and touch the button for the profile to be deleted.
3) Touch the Delete Button.
4) Touch the OK Button to confirm and delete the profile, or touch the Cancel Button.

Importing a crew profile from an SD card:
1) If necessary, insert an SD card containing a crew profile into the top card slot in the MFD.
2) From Home, touch Utilities > Crew Profile.
3) Touch the Import Button.
4) Scroll if necessary, and touch the button for the crew profile to be imported.

Exporting a crew profile to an SD card:
1) If necessary, insert an SD card to store a crew profile into the top card slot in the MFD.
2) From Home, touch Utilities > Crew Profile.
3) Scroll if necessary, and touch the button for the crew profile to be exported from the list.
4) Touch the Export Button.

AVIONICS STATUS
The Avionics Status Screen provides information about installed LRUs, airframe system software, and
databases.

LRU INFO
The LRU Info Tab on the Avionics Status screen displays the status, serial numbers, and software version
numbers for all detected system LRUs. The system displays a green checked box for each active LRUs. A
yellow ‘X’ box indicates a failed LRU. Inform a service center or Garmin dealer a LRU has failed.

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Viewing LRU information:
1) From Home, touch Utilities > Setup > Avionics Status.
2) If necessary, touch the LRU Info tab.
3) Scroll as needed and touch a LRU button to display a pop-up window with additional information for the
selected LRU.
4) When finished, touch the pop-up window (if displayed), or touch Back or Home.
LRU Info Tab
Selected
Additional
Information
Shown for
Selected
LRU

Failed
LRU
Active LRU
(Touch
to View
Additional
Information)

Figure 1-44 Viewing LRU Info Information on the Touchscreen Controller

AIRFRAME
The Airframe Tab of the Avionics Status screen displays pertinent information about the airframe including
the System ID number, System Software Version number, Configuration ID, Cockpit Reference Guide part
number, and Checklist information.
Viewing airframe information:
1) From Home, touch Utilities > Setup > Avionics Status.
2) If necessary, touch the Airframe Tab.
3) Scroll as needed to view the airframe information.

DATABASE
The Database Tab of the Avionics Status screen displays pertinent information on all system databases
(PFD1, PFD2, MFD, GTC1, and GTC2).
Viewing database information:
1) From Home, touch Utilities > Setup > Avionics Status.
2) If necessary, touch the Database Tab.
3) Touch MFD1, PFD1, PFD2, GT1, or GTC2 Buttons to view database information for the selected LRU.
4) Scroll as needed to view the database information for the selected LRU, then touch Back or Home.

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

SYSTEM OVERVIEW

SIRIUSXM INFORMATION
NOTE: Refer to the Hazard Avoidance Section for information about SiriusXM Weather products or the

Additional Features Section for information about SiriusXM Satellite Radio.
Viewing SiriusXM Information:
From Home, touch Utilities > Setup > SiriusXM Info
SiriusXM Satellite Radio services are subscription-based. The service is activated by providing SiriusXM
Satellite Radio with either one or two coded IDs, depending on the equipment. Either the Audio Radio ID or
the Data Radio ID, or both, must be provided to SiriusXM to activate the subscription.
It is not required to activate both the entertainment and weather service subscriptions with the GDL 69A.
Either or both services can be activated. SiriusXM uses one or both of the coded IDs to send an activation signal.
These IDs are located:
• On the label on the back of the Data Link Receiver
• On the SiriusXM Information Screen
• On the XM Satellite Radio Activation Instructions included with the unit (available at www.garmin.com, P/N
190-00355-04)
Activating SiriusXM Weather and SiriusXM Satellite Radio:
1) Position the aircraft so the GDL 69A antenna has an unobstructed view of the sky.
2) From Home touch Utilities > Setup > SiriusXM Info > Start. Touchscreen Controller displays ‘ACTIVATING’.
3) When system indicates activation has completed, touch ‘Lock’ to save the activation changes, or touch ‘Cancel’
to exit without saving changes.

SCREEN CLEANING
Screen Cleaning mode temporary deactivates touch input on the Touchscreen Controller screen to facilitate
cleaning. The screen can be cleaned using a microfiber or soft cotton cloth lightly dampened with clean water.
Do not use chemical cleaning agents, as these may damage the coating on the glass surface.
Cleaning the Touchscreen Controller screen:
1) From Home, touch Utilities > Screen Cleaning.
2) The Touchscreen Controller indicates the screen may be cleaned. Clean the screen as needed.
3) Press or turn any knob to return to the Utilities Screen.

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

SYSTEM OVERVIEW

1.6 UTILITIES
The Timer and Trip Statistics features provide a stopwatch-like generic timer, a total time in flight timer, and
a record of the time of departure as well as distance tracking—odometer, trip odometer, and average ground
speeds and maximum ground speeds.

TIMER
The generic timer can be set to count up or down from a specified time (HH:MM:SS). When the countdown
on the timer reaches zero the digits begin to count up from zero. If the timer is reset before reaching zero on a
countdown, the digits are reset to the initial value. If the timer is counting up when reset, the digits are zeroed.
Setting the generic timer:
1) From the Home, touch Utilities > Timer.
2) Touch the Time Button.
3) Input the desired time using the numeric keypad or the Large and Small Right Knobs, then touch the Enter
Button or press the Right Knob.
4) Touch the Start Button. The button changes to ‘Stop’.
5) To stop the timer, touch the Stop Button.
6) To reset the timer, touch the Reset Button.

Figure 1-45 Timer (Touchscreen Controller)

Figure 1-46 Timer (PFD)

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

SYSTEM OVERVIEW

TRIP STATS
FLIGHT TIME
The flight timer can be set to count up from zero starting at system power-up or from the time the aircraft
lifts off; the timer can also be reset to zero.
Setting the flight timer starting criterion:
1) From Home, touch Utilities > Trip Stats.
2) Touch the Flight Time Start At Button (Figure 1-47).
3) Touch either the Power On or In-Air Button. A green annunciator indicates the selected option.
4) Touch the Accept Button.
Resetting the flight timer:
1) From Home Screen, touch Utilities > Trip Stats.
2) Touch the Flight Time Button (light blue text in button displays flight time).
3) Touch the Reset Button to reset the flight timer or touch the Cancel Button.

Figure 1-47 Trip Statistics Options

DEPARTURE TIME
The system records the time at which departure occurs. The departure time is selectable as either from the
time the system was powered-up, or when the aircraft becomes airborne. The displayed departure time can
also be reset to display the current time at the point of reset.
Setting the departure timer starting criterion:
1) From Home, touch Utilities > Trip Stats.
2) Touch the Departure Time Start At Button.
3) Touch either the Power On or In-Air Button. A green annunciator indicates the selected option.
4) Touch the Accept Button.

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Resetting the departure time:
1) From Home, touch Utilities > Trip Stats.
2) Touch the ‘Departure Time’ Datafield Button.
3) Touch the Reset Button.

ODOMETER
The Odometer presents a total distance traveled since the last reset.
Setting the odometer automatic reset criterion:
1) From the Home, touch Utilities > Trip Stats.
2) Touch the Odometer Reset Button (Figure 1-47).
3) Touch the Power On, In-Air, or Manually Button. A green annunciator indicates the selected option. Note
manual reset is always available regardless of the option selected for automatic reset.
4) Touch the Accept Button.
Manually resetting the odometer:
1) From the Home, touch Utilities > Trip Statis.
2) Touch the Odometer distance button (shows current odometer reading in light blue).
3) Touch the Reset Button to reset the odometer, or touch the Cancel Button.

TRIP ODOMETER
The Trip Odometer presents a total distance traveled for the active flight plan since the last reset.
Setting the Trip Odometer automatic reset criterion:
1) From the Home Screen, touch Utilities > Trip Stats.
2) Touch the Trip Odometer Reset Button (Figure 1-47).
3) Touch the Power On, In-Air, or Manually Button. A green annunciator indicates the selected option. Note
manual reset is always available regardless of the option selected for automatic reset.
4) Touch the Accept Button.
Manually resetting the Trip Odometer:
1) From Home, touch Utilities > Trip Stats.
2) Touch the Trip Odometer distance button (shows current trip odometer reading in light blue.)
3) Touch the Reset Button to reset the trip odometer, or touch the Cancel Button.

HOUR METER
The hour meter shows accummulated engine time. It begins counting when N1 is above 5 percent on either
engine. It stops counting when N1 drops below 5 percent. This is a system timer and is not pilot adjustable.

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

SYSTEM OVERVIEW
AVERAGE GROUND SPEED
Avg Ground Speed presents a ground speed average since the last reset.
Setting the average ground speed automatic reset criterion:
1) From Home Screen, touch Utilities > Trip Stats.
2) Scroll to display the ‘Avg Ground Speed’ buttons.
3) Touch the Avg Ground Speed Reset Button.
4) Touch the Power On, In-Air, or Manually Button. A green annunciator indicates the selected option. Note
manual reset is always available regardless of the option selected for automatic reset.
5) Touch the Accept Button.
Manually resetting the Odometer:
1) From the Home Screen, touch Utilities > Trip Stats.
2) Scroll to display the ‘Avg Ground Speed’ buttons.
3) Touch the Avg Ground Speed Button (button displays average ground speed in light blue).
4) Touch the Reset Button to reset the average ground speed, or touch the Cancel Button.

MAXIMUM GROUND SPEED
‘Max Ground Speed’ shows the highest recorded ground speed since the last reset.
Setting the Maximum Ground Speed automatic reset criterion:
1) From Home, touch Utilities > Trip Stats.
2) Scroll to display the ‘Max Ground Speed’ buttons.
3) Touch the Max Ground Speed Reset Button.
4) Touch the Power On, In-Air, or Manually Button. A green annunciator indicates the selected option. Note
manual reset is always available regardless of the option selected for automatic reset.
5) Touch the Accept Button.
Manually resetting the Maximum Ground Speed:
1) From the Home, touch Utilities > Trip Stats.
2) Scroll to display the ‘Max Ground Speed’ buttons.
3) Touch the Max Ground Speed Button (button displays maximum speed in light blue).
4) Touch the Reset Button to reset the Maximum Ground Speed, or touch the Cancel Button.

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

SYSTEM OVERVIEW

1.7 SECURE DIGITAL CARDS
NOTE: DO NOT use the database SD cards for any purpose other than database storage.
NOTE: Refer to the Appendices for instructions on updating databases.
NOTE: Ensure that the system is powered off before inserting the SD card.

The PFDs and the MFD data card slots use Secure Digital (SD) cards and are located on the top right portion
of the display bezels. Each display bezel is equipped with two SD card slots. SD cards are used for various
databases, system software updates, recording flight data, and storing electronic documents.
Not all SD cards are compatible with the system. Use only SD cards supplied by Garmin or the aircraft
manufacturer.
Install an SD card
Insert the SD card in the SD card slot, pushing the card in until the spring latch engages. The front of the card
should remain flush with the face of the display bezel.
Remove an SD card
Gently press on the SD card to release the spring latch and eject the card.

SD Card Slots

Figure 1-48 Display Bezel SD Card Slots

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

SYSTEM OVERVIEW

Blank Page

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS

SECTION 2 FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
WARNING: If the airspeed, attitude, altitude, or heading indications become unusable, refer to the backup

instruments.
NOTE: The Automatic Flight Control System (AFCS) provides additional readouts and indicators (bug) on

selected flight instruments. Refer to the AFCS Section for details on these indicators (bug) and readouts, as
they appear on the display during certain AFCS flight director modes.
Two Primary Flight Displays (PFDs) feature large horizons, airspeed, attitude, altitude, vertical speed, and
course deviation information. In addition to the flight instruments, navigation, communication, terrain, traffic,
and weather information are also presented on the PFDs and explained in other sections of this Pilot’s Guide.
The following flight instruments and supplemental flight data are displayed on each PFD:
• Airspeed Indicator, showing

• Vertical Navigation (VNAV) indications

– Indicated airspeed

• Total Air Temperature (TAT)

– Airspeed awareness ranges

• Static Air Temperature (SAT)

– Vspeed reference flags

• ISA Temperature Deviation

– Mach number

• Horizontal Situation Indicator, showing

– Airspeed reference and bug

– Turn Rate Indicator

• Groundspeed

– Bearing pointers and information windows

• True airspeed

– Navigation source

• Attitude Indicator with slip/skid indication

– Course Deviation Indicator (CDI)

• Altimeter, showing

– Bearing pointers and information windows

– Trend vector

• Course Deviation Indicator (CDI)

– Barometric setting

• Generic Timer

– Selected Altitude

• Wind data

• Vertical Deviation, Glideslope, and Glidepath
Indicators

• Radar Altimeter (RA)
• Barometric minimum descent altitude (MDA)

• Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI)
The PFDs also display various alerts and annunciations.

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS

23
22

20
19

3
18
4

11
10
1

Airspeed Reference

Heading Bug

Airspeed Indicator

Navigation Status Box

Indicated Airspeed

Turn Rate Indicator

Airspeed Reference Bug

Barometric Altimeter Setting

Mach Number

Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI)

Current Track Indicator

Selected Altitude Bug

Course Deviation Indicator (CDI)

Altimeter

True Airspeed

Selected Altitude

Ground Speed

COM Frequency Box

Softkeys

AFCS Status Box

System Time

Slip/Skid Indicator

Timer

Attitude Indicator

Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI)

Figure 2-1 Primary Flight Display (Default)

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS

8
9

11
1

Reversionary Sensor Window

Bearing Information Windows

Traffic Annunciation

ISA Temperature Deviation

IAS Comparator Annunciation

Vspeed References

Selected Heading

Wind Data

Inset Map

DME1 Information Window

Static Air Temperature (SAT)

Total Air Temperature (TAT)

Minimum Descent Altitude/Decision
Height
14 CAS Window
15

Selected Course

Radar Altimeter

TAWS Annunciation

Current Vertical Speed

Glideslope Indicator

Figure 2-2 Additional PFD Information

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS

2.1 FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
AIRSPEED INDICATOR
NOTE: Refer to the Airplane Flight Manual (AFM) for speed criteria and Vspeed values.

The Airspeed Indicator displays airspeed on a moving tape rolling number gauge. The numeric labels and
major tick marks on the moving tape represent intervals of 10 knots. The minor tick marks on the moving tape
represent intervals of five knots. Speed indication starts at 20 knots, with 80 knots of airspeed scale viewable at
any time. The indicated airspeed is displayed inside the black pointer. The pointer remains black until reaching
maximum operating speed (VMO/MMO), at which point it turns red along with the Mach number readout.
The Mach number is displayed below the Airspeed Indicator (Figure 2-3) for airspeeds at or above Mach 0.4
or at altitudes of 26,227 feet or higher. The color of the readout is the same as the color of the airspeed pointer.
Airspeed
Reference
Airspeed
Trend Vector

Vspeed
References

Indicated
Airspeed

1.3VS1

Airspeed
Reference
Bug
Mach
Number
Airspeed Indicator

Red Pointer and Mach
Number Showing
Overspeed

Figure 2-3 Airspeed Indicator

Speeds above the maximum operating speed, VMO or MMO depending on aircraft altitude, appear in the high
speed awareness range, shown on the airspeed tape by a red/white barber pole. An aural overspeed warning
tone is generated if the airspeed exceeds the high airspeed limit. If the indicated airspeed is within the red
range, the airspeed pointer is displayed in red. An aural stall warning is generated if the airspeed falls below
VLSA. An open green circle on the airspeed tape represents 1.3VS1. The green circle is displayed when in the air
below 18,000 feet, and it indicates the stall warning system is functioning correctly.
The Airspeed Trend Vector is a vertical magenta line that appears to the right of the color-coded speed range
strip when airspeed is either accelerating or decelerating. One end of the magenta line is anchored to the
tip of the airspeed pointer while the other end moves continuously up or down corresponding to the rate of
acceleration or deceleration. For any constant rate of acceleration or deceleration, the moving end of the line
shows approximately what the indicated airspeed value will be in six seconds. If the trend vector crosses VMO/
MMO, the airspeed and the Mach readouts changes to yellow. If the trend vector crosses the red VLSA range, the
airspeed readout is displayed in yellow. The trend vector is absent if the speed remains constant or if any data
needed to calculate airspeed is not available due to a system failure.
64

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
The Airspeed Reference is displayed above the Airspeed Indicator in the box indicated by a selection bug
symbol. A bug corresponding to this speed is shown on the tape. If the Airspeed Reference exceeds the range
shown on the tape, the bug appears at the upper or lower edge of the tape. See the AFCS Section for more
information about the Airspeed Reference.

Landing

Takeoff

Vspeeds can be changed and their flags turned on/off from the Timer/References Window. When active (on),
the Vspeeds are displayed at their respective locations to the right of the airspeed scale. By default, all Vspeed
values are reset and all flags turned off during power up.
Vspeed

Flag

VFS

VAP

VREF

VAC

VFS

Table 2-1 Vspeed Flag Labels

Vspeeds are categorized as either takeoff or landing. Takeoff Vspeed flags are automatically turned off when
airspeed reaches 160 knots. The order in which the categories are displayed is determined by whether the
aircraft is on the ground or in the air. If the aircraft is on the ground, the takeoff Vspeeds are displayed at the
top of the Vspeed list. If the aircraft is in the air, the landing Vspeeds are displayed at the top.

Figure 2-4 Vspeed Settings

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Changing Vspeeds and turning Vspeed flags on/off:
1) From the Home Screen, touch Speed Bugs
2) To turn the Vspeed on or off, touch the On Button.
3) To set or change a Vspeed value, touch the Data Field for the Vspeed, enter a value in the keypad, and touch
Enter. The icon next to the Vspeed value (Figure 2-5) indicates that the Vspeed is a pilot-entered value.

Figure 2-5 Pilot-Entered Vspeed

Turning all Vspeed flags on/off:
1) From the Home Screen, touch Speed Bugs.
2) To activate all Vspeed flags, touch the All Bugs On Button.
3) To remove all Vspeed flags, touch the the All Bugs Off Button.
Restoring all Vspeed defaults:
1) From the Home Screen, touch Utilities > Speed Bugs.
2) Touch the Restore All Defaults Button.

ATTITUDE INDICATOR
Attitude information is displayed over a virtual blue sky and brown ground with a white horizon line. The
Attitude Indicator displays the pitch, roll, and slip/skid information.
9

7
2

Roll Pointer

Roll Scale

Horizon Line

Aircraft Symbol
(Formatted for Single-cue
Command Bars)
Land Representation

Pitch Scale

Slip/Skid Indicator

Sky Representation

Roll Scale Zero

6
3

4
5

Figure 2-6 Attitude Indicator

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
The horizon line is part of the pitch scale. Above and below the horizon line, major pitch marks and numeric
labels are shown for every 10˚, up to 80˚. Minor pitch marks are shown for intervening 5˚ increments, up to
25˚ below and 45˚ above the horizon line. Between 20˚ below to 20˚ above the horizon line, minor pitch marks
occur every 2.5˚. When the Synthetic Vision System is activated, the pitch scale is reduced to 10˚ up and 7.5˚
down; refer to the Additional Features section.
The inverted white triangle indicates zero on the roll scale. Major tick marks at 30˚ and 60˚ and minor tick
marks at 10˚, 20˚, and 45˚ are shown to the left and right of the zero. Angle of bank is indicated by the position
of the pointer on the roll scale.
The Slip/Skid Indicator is the bar beneath the roll pointer. One bar displacement is equal to one ball
displacement on a traditional inclinometer. The indicator bar moves with the roll pointer and moves laterally
away from the pointer to indicate uncoordinated flight. Slip (inside the turn) or skid (outside the turn) is
indicated by the location of the bar relative to the pointer.
The Attitude Indicator also provides pitch cues to comply with TCAS II Resolution Advisories; see the Hazard
Avoidance Section for details.
Slip/Skid
Indication

Figure 2-7 Slip/Skid Indication

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
The yellow symbolic aircraft on the Attitude Indicator changes appearance based on selection of AFCS flight
director Command Bar format (see the AFCS Section for details). Both PFDs show the same Command Bar
format and Aircraft Symbol. The Command Bar format (single cue or dual cue) may be selected on the GTC
Avionics Settings Screen.
Changing Command Bar and Aircraft Symbol format.
1) From the Home Screen, touch Utilities >Setup > Avionics Settings.
2) Touch the System Tab.
3) Touch the Flight Director Active Format Data Field.
4) Touch desired setting (Single Cue or Dual Cue).

Single-cue

Cross-pointer

Figure 2-8 Flight Director Format Settings

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS

ALTIMETER
The Altimeter displays 600 feet of barometric altitude values at a time on a moving tape rolling number gauge.
Numeric labels and major tick marks are shown at intervals of 100 feet. Minor tick marks are at intervals of 20
feet. The current altitude is displayed in the black pointer.
The Selected Altitude is displayed above the Altimeter in the box indicated by a selection bug symbol. A bug
corresponding to this altitude is shown on the tape. If the Selected Altitude exceeds the range shown on the
tape, the bug appears at the corresponding edge of the tape. When the metric value is selected it is displayed
in a separate box below the Selected Altitude.
A magenta Altitude Trend Vector extends up or down the left of the altitude tape, the end resting at the
approximate altitude to be reached in 6 seconds at the current vertical speed. The trend vector is not shown if
altitude remains constant or if data needed for calculation is not available due to a system failure.
Setting the Selected Altitude:

Turn the ALT Knob on the GMC 715 AFCS Controller to set the Selected Altitude in 100-ft increments. When
meters are displayed, Selected Altitude is adjusted in 50 meter increments..

If set, the Minimum Descent Altitude/Decision Height (MDA/DH) value is also available for the Selected altitude.

If desired, press the ALT SEL Knob to synchronize the selected altitude with the displayed altitude to the nearest
10 ft.
Selected
Altitude

Selected
Altitude
(Meters)
Current
Altitude
(Meters)

Altitude
Trend
Vector
Current
Altitude

Selected
Altitude
Bug

MDA/DH
Bug
Barometric
Setting Box
Figure 2-9 Altimeter

Barometric
Setting Box
(Hectopascals)
Figure 2-10 Altimeter (Metric)

The altitude tape does not change scale when the altitudes are displayed in meters.
Displaying altitude in meters:
1) Select the PFD Settings Softkey to display the second-level softkeys.
2) Select the Other PFD Settings Softkey.
3) Select the Altitude Units Softkey.
4) Select the Meters Softkey to turn on metric altitude readouts.

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
The barometric pressure setting is displayed below the Altimeter in inches of mercury (in Hg) or hectopascals
(hPa) when metric units are selected. Adjusting the altimeter barometric setting creates discontinuities in
VNAV vertical deviation, moving the descent path. For large adjustments, it may take several minutes for the
aircraft to re-establish on the descent path. If the change is made while nearing a waypoint with a VNAV Target
Altitude, the aircraft may not re-establish on the descent path in time to meet the vertical constraint.
Selecting the altimeter barometric pressure setting:

Turn the BARO Knob to select the desired setting.

Selecting standard barometric pressure:

Press the BARO Knob to select standard pressure; STD BARO is displayed in the Barometric Setting box.

Figure 2-11 Standard Barometric Altimeter Setting

Changing altimeter barometric pressure setting units:
1) Select the PFD Settings Softkey to display the second-level softkeys.
2) Select Other PFD Settings
3) Select the Altitude Units Softkey.
4) Select the IN Softkey to display the barometric pressure setting in inches of mercury (in Hg).

Or, select the HPA Softkey to display the barometric pressure setting in hectopascals (hPa; see Figure 2-10).

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
A Baro Transition Alert is provided to alert the pilot to change the barometric pressure setting when crossing
the transition altitude in either direction. This is displayed by the flashing light blue barometric pressure setting
when crossing the transition altitude.
Setting the Baro Transition Alert:
1) From the Home Screen, touch Utilities >Setup > Avionics Settings.
2) Touch the Alerts Tab.
• To turn the alert on or off, touch the Baro Transition Alert Enable Button.
• To set or change the Baro Transition Alert Altitude, touch the Baro Transition Alert Data Field. Enter the
desired altitude on the keypad, and touch Enter.

Figure 2-12 Baro Transition Alert

VERTICAL SPEED INDICATOR (VSI)
The Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI) displays the aircraft vertical speed on a fixed scale with labels at 2000 and
4000 fpm and minor tick marks every 1000 fpm. Digits appear in the pointer when the climb or descent rate
is greater than 100 fpm. If the rate of ascent/descent exceeds 4000 fpm, the pointer appears at the edge of the
tape and the rate appears inside the pointer.
A magenta chevron is displayed on the VSI to indicate the Required Vertical Speed for reaching a VNAV target
altitude once the “TOD [Top of Descent] within 1 minute” alert has generated. See the Flight Management
and AFCS sections for details on VNAV features. Refer to Section 2.3, Supplemental Flight Data, for more
information about VNAV indications on the PFD. The VSI also provides vertical speed guidance during TCAS
II Resolution Advisories; see the Hazard Avoidance section for details.

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS

VERTICAL DEVIATION
The Vertical Deviation Indicator (VDI) is a magenta chevron indicating the baro-VNAV vertical deviation
when Vertical Navigation (VNAV) is being used (Figure 2-13). The VDI appears in conjunction with the “TOD
within 1 minute” alert. Full-scale deflection (two dots) on the VDI is 1000 feet. The VDI is removed from the
display if vertical deviation becomes invalid. See the Flight Management Section for details on VNAV features,
and refer to Section 2.3, Supplemental Flight Data, for more information about VNAV indications on the PFD.
The Glideslope Indicator (Figure 2-14) appears to the left of the Altimeter whenever an ILS frequency is
tuned in the active NAV field. A green diamond acts as the Glideslope Indicator, like a glideslope needle on
a conventional indicator. If a localizer frequency is tuned and there is no glideslope, “NO GS” is displayed in
place of the diamond.
VNAV Target
Altitude
Vertical
Speed
Indicator
Vertical
Deviation
Indicator

Vertical
Speed
Pointer

Glideslope
Indicator

Required
Vertical
Speed
Indicator

Figure 2-13 Vertical Speed and
Deviation Indicators (VSI and VDI)

Figure 2-14 Glideslope Indicator

The glidepath is analogous to the glideslope for FMS approaches supporting SBAS vertical guidance (LNAV+V,
LNAV/VNAV, LPV). When an approach of this type is loaded into the flight plan, FMS is the selected navigation
source, and SBAS is used for vertical approach guidance, the Glidepath Indicator appears as a magenta diamond
(Figure 2-15). If the approach type downgrades past the final approach fix (FAF), “NO GP” is displayed in place
of the diamond.
While executing an LNAV/VNAV approach and SBAS is unavailable, baro-VNAV (barometric vertical
navigation) is used for vertical guidance. This occurs due to any of the following conditions:
• SBAS fails or becomes unavailable prior to the FAF
• The aircraft is outside of SBAS coverage
• SBAS is manually disabled on the GPS Status page of the GTC
Baro-VNAV is also the source of vertical approach guidance if the LNAV/VNAV procedure does not support
SBAS vertical guidance.

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
While baro-VNAV is being utilized, the Glidepath Indicator appears as a magenta pentagon (Figure 2-16). If
the approach type downgrades past the final approach fix (FAF), “NO GP” is displayed in place of the pentagon.

Glidepath
Indicator

Baro-VNAV
Glidepath
Indicator

Figure 2-15 Glidepath Indicator

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Figure 2-16 Baro-VNAV Glidepath Indicator

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS

HORIZONTAL SITUATION INDICATOR (HSI)
The Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI) displays a rotating compass card in a heading-up orientation. Letters
indicate the cardinal points and numeric labels occur every 30˚. Major tick marks are at 10˚ intervals and minor
tick marks at 5˚ intervals. A digital reading of the current heading appears on top of the HSI, and the current
track is represented on the HSI by a magenta diamond. The HSI also presents turn rate, course deviation,
bearing, and navigation source information.
The HSI contains a Course Deviation Indicator (CDI), with a Course Pointer, To/From Indicator, and a sliding
deviation bar and scale. The course pointer is a single line arrow (FMS, VOR1, and LOC1) or a double line
arrow (VOR2 and LOC2) which points in the direction of the set course. The To/From arrow rotates with the
course pointer and is displayed when the active NAVAID is received.
17

1
14

2
3
4

11
10

Turn Rate Indicator

Rotating Compass Card

Selected Heading

Aircraft Symbol

Current Track Indicator

Course Deviation Indicator (CDI)

Navigation Source

Flight Phase

Lateral Deviation Scale

Selected Course

Heading Bug

Turn Rate and Heading Trend Vector

Course Pointer

Current Heading

To/From Indicator

Lubber Line

OBS Mode Active
Figure 2-17 Horizontal Situation Indicator (360˚ HSI)

A digital reading of the current heading appears on top of the HSI. The current track is represented on the
HSI by a magenta diamond. To the upper left of the HSI, the Selected Heading is shown in light blue; the light
blue bug on the compass rose corresponds to the Selected Heading. The Desired Track (DTK) is shown in
magenta to the upper right of the HSI when the selected navigation source is FMS without OBS mode active.
The Selected Course (CRS) is shown to the upper right of the HSI in green when the selected navigation source
is VOR or LOC and in magenta when the selected navigation source is FMS with OBS mode active.

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Adjusting the selected heading:

Turn the HDG Knob to set the Selected Heading on both PFDs.

Press the HDG Knob to synchronize the bug to the current heading.

Adjusting the Selected Course:

Turn the CRS Knob to set the Selected Course (for each PFD).

Press the CRS Knob to re-center the CDI and return the course pointer to the bearing of the active waypoint or
navigation station.
Current Heading

Heading Bug

Selected
Heading

Selected
Course

Figure 2-18 Heading and Course Indications (Magnetic)

Navigation angles (track, heading, course, bearing) are corrected to the computed magnetic variation or
referenced to true north (denoted ‘T’), and are set on the GTC Avionics Setup Screen. When an approach
referenced to true north has been loaded into the flight plan, the system generates a message to change the
navigation angle setting to ‘True’ at the appropriate time.

Figure 2-19 Heading and Course Indications (True)

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Changing the navigation angle setting:
1) From the Home Page touch Utilities >Setup > Avionics Settings.
2) Touch the Units Tab.
3) Touch the Nav Angle Data Field.
4) Touch the desired setting (Magnetic or True).

Figure 2-20 Navigation Angle Settings

TURN RATE INDICATOR
The Turn Rate Indicator is located directly above the rotating compass card. Tick marks to the left and right
of the lubber line denote half-standard and standard turn rates. A magenta Turn Rate Trend Vector shows the
current turn rate. The end of the trend vector gives the heading predicted in 6 seconds, based on the present
turn rate. A standard-rate turn is shown on the indicator by the trend vector stopping at the standard turn
rate tick mark, corresponding to a predicted heading of 18˚ from the current heading. At rates greater than
4 deg/sec, an arrowhead appears at the end of the magenta trend vector and the prediction is no longer valid.
Half-standard
Turn Rate
Standard
Turn Rate

Arrow Shown
for Turn Rate
> 4 deg/sec

Figure 2-21 Turn Rate Indicator and Trend Vector

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
BEARING POINTERS AND INFORMATION WINDOWS
Two bearing pointers and associated information can be displayed on the HSI for NAV, FMS, and ADF
sources by pressing the PFD Settings Softkey then the Bearing 1 or Bearing 2 Softkey. The bearing pointers
are light blue and are single-line (Bearing 1) or double-line (Bearing 2). A pointer symbol is shown in the
information windows to indicate the navigation source. The bearing pointers never override the CDI and are
visually separated from the CDI by a white ring. Bearing pointers may be selected but not necessarily visible
due to data unavailability.

Bearing 1
Pointer
Tuning
Mode

Frequency

Bearing 2
Pointer

Distance
Distance to
Bearing Source
Station
Identifier
Bearing Source 1

Bearing Source 2

Figure 2-22 HSI with Bearing and Distance Information

When a bearing pointer is displayed, its associated information window is also displayed. The Bearing
Information windows (Figure 2-22) are beneath the HSI and displays the following information:
• Bearing source (NAV, FMS, ADF)

• Station/waypoint identifier (NAV, FMS)

• Pointer icon (Bearing 1 = single line, Bearing 2 =
double line)

• GPS-derived great circle distance to bearing
source

• Frequency (NAV, ADF)
When the NAV radio is tuned to an ILS frequency, the bearing source and bearing pointer are removed
from the HSI. When NAV1 or NAV2 is the selected bearing source, the frequency is replaced by the station
identifier when the station is within range. If FMS is the bearing source, the active waypoint identifier is
displayed in lieu of a frequency.

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
The bearing pointer is removed from the HSI and “NO DATA” is displayed in the information window if
the NAV radio is not receiving the tuned VOR station or if FMS is the bearing source and an active waypoint
is not selected.
Selecting bearing display and changing sources:
1) Select the PFD Settings Softkey.
2) Select a Bearing Softkey to display the desired bearing pointer and information window with a NAV source.
3) Select the Bearing Softkey again to change the bearing source to FMS.
4) Select the Bearing Softkey a third time to change the bearing source to ADF.
5) To remove the bearing pointer and information window, select the Bearing Softkey again.

COURSE DEVIATION INDICATOR (CDI)
The Course Deviation Indicator (CDI) moves left or right from the course pointer along a lateral deviation
scale to display aircraft position relative to the course. If the course deviation data is not valid, the CDI is not
displayed.
Navigation
Source

Flight
Phase

Scale
Crosstrack
Error
CDI

Figure 2-23 Course Deviation Indicator

The CDI can display two sources of navigation, FMS or VOR/LOC. Color indicates the current navigation
source, magenta for FMS and green for VOR and LOC. The full scale limits for the CDI are defined by a GPSderived distance when coupled to GPS. When navigating using a VOR or localizer (LOC), the CDI uses the
same angular limits as a mechanical CDI. If the CDI exceeds the maximum deviation on the scale (two dots)
while navigating with GPS, the crosstrack error (XTK) is displayed below the white aircraft symbol.

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS

Figure 2-24 Navigation Sources

Changing navigation sources:
1) Select the Active NAV Softkey to change from FMS to VOR1 or LOC1.
2) Select the Active NAV Softkey again to change from VOR1 or LOC1 to VOR2 or LOC2.
3) Select the Active NAV Softkey again to return to FMS.

FMS
Selected

LOC1
Selected

VOR2
Selected

Active NAV
Softkey

Figure 2-25 Selecting a Navigation Source

The system automatically switches from FMS to LOC navigation source and changes the CDI scaling
accordingly when all of the following occur:
• A localizer or ILS approach has been loaded into the active flight plan
• The final approach fix (FAF) is the active waypoint, the FAF is less than 15 nm away, and the aircraft is moving
toward the FAF
• A valid localizer frequency has been tuned
• The FMS CDI deviation is less than 1.2 times full-scale deflection
FMS steering guidance is still provided after the CDI automatically switches to LOC until LOC capture, up
to the Final Approach Fix (FAF) for an ILS approach, or until FMS information becomes invalid. Activating a
Vector-to-Final (VTF) also causes the CDI to switch to LOC navigation source. FMS steering guidance is not
provided after this switch.

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
If the same VOR/LOC navigation source is selected on both PFDs, the navigation source annunciation turns
yellow on both displays if not synchronized. Once the CDIs are synchronized (CDI Synchronization turned
on), they remain synchronized until the selection is changed. When turning on the system for use, it remembers
the last CDI synchronization setting.

FMS CDI SCALING
When FMS is the selected navigation source, the flight plan legs are sequenced automatically and
annunciations appear on the HSI for the flight phase. Flight phase annunciations are normally shown in
magenta, but when cautionary conditions exist the color changes to yellow. If the current leg in the flight plan
is a heading leg, ‘HDG LEG’ is annunciated in magenta beneath the aircraft symbol.
The current FMS CDI scale setting is displayed on the GTC Avionics Settings Screen and the full-scale
deflection setting may also be changed on this screen. If the selected scaling is smaller than the automatic
setting for enroute and terminal phases, the CDI is scaled accordingly and the selected setting is displayed
rather than the flight phase annunciation.
Changing the selected FMS CDI setting:
1) From the Home Screen, touch Utilities >Setup > Avionics Settings.
2) Touch the System Tab.
3) Touch the GPS CDI Data Field.
4) Touch desired setting (2.00 NM, 1.00 NM, 0.30 NM, or AUTO).

Figure 2-26 GPS CDI Settings

When set to ‘Auto’ (default), the GPS CDI scale automatically adjusts to the desired limits based upon the
current phase of flight (Figure 2-27, Table 2-2).

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Departure

Terminal

Enroute
(Oceanic if >200 nm
from nearest airport)

Terminal

Refer to accompanying
approach CDI scaling figures

Approach

0.3 nm

1.0 nm

2.0 nm

1.0 nm

0.3 nm

CDI Full-scale Deflection

FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS

Missed
Approach

Figure 2-27 Automatic CDI Scaling

• Once a departure procedure is activated, the CDI is scaled for departure (0.3 nm).
• The system switches from departure to terminal CDI scaling (1.0 nm) under the following conditions:
- The next leg in the departure procedure is not aligned with the departure runway
- The next leg in the departure procedure is not a CA, CD, CF, CI, CR, DF, FA, FC, FD, FM, IF, or TF leg
(see Glossary for leg type definitions)
- After any leg in the departure procedure that is not a CA or FA leg
• At 30 nm from the departure airport the enroute phase of flight is automatically entered and CDI scaling
changes to 2.0 nm over a distance of 1.0 nm, except under the following conditions:
- When navigating with an active departure procedure, the flight phase and CDI scale does not change
until the aircraft arrives at the last departure waypoint (if more than 30 nm from the departure airport) or
the leg after the last departure waypoint has been activated or a direct-to waypoint is activated.
• If after completing the departure procedure the nearest airport is more than 200 nm away from the aircraft
and the approach procedure has not yet commenced, the CDI is scaled for oceanic flight (2.0 nm).
• Within 31 nm of the destination airport (terminal area), the CDI scale gradually ramps down from 2.0 nm
to 1.0 nm over a distance of 1.0 nm, except under the following conditions:
- Upon reaching the first waypoint of an arrival route that is more than 31 nm from the destination airport,
the flight phase changes to terminal and the CDI scale begins to transition down from 2.0 nm to 1.0 nm
over a distance of 1.0 nm.
• During approach, the CDI scale ramps down even further (Figures 2-28 and 2-29). This transition normally
occurs within 2.0 nm of the Final Approach Fix (FAF). The CDI switches to approach scaling automatically
once the approach procedure is active or if Vectors-To-Final (VTF) are selected.
- If the active waypoint is the FAF, the ground track and the bearing to the FAF must be within 45° of the
final approach segment course.
- If the active waypoint is part of the missed approach procedure, the active leg and the preceding missed
approach legs must be aligned with the final approach segment course and the aircraft must not have
passed the turn initiation point.

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

2 nm
FAF

FAF

CDI scale varies if VTF is activated

0.3 nm

1.0 nm

angle based
on database
information

course width

2 nm

CDI Full-scale Deflection

0.3 nm

angle set
by system

350 ft

CDI scale is set to the smaller of 0.3 nm
or an angle set by the system
1.0 nm

CDI Full-scale Deflection

FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS

Landing
Threshold

CDI scale varies if VTF is activated

Figure 2-28 Typical LNAV and LNAV+V Approach CDI Scaling

Figure 2-29 Typical LNAV/VNAV, LPV and LP Approach CDI Scaling

• When a missed approach is activated, the CDI scale changes to 0.3 nm.
• The system automatically switches back to terminal mode under the following conditions:
- The next leg in the missed approach procedure is not aligned with the final approach path
- The next leg in the missed approach procedure is not a CA, CD, CF, CI, CR, DF, FA, FC, FD, FM, IF, or TF leg
- After any leg in the missed approach procedure that is not a CA or FA leg
Flight Phase
Departure
Terminal
Enroute
Oceanic

Annunciation*
DPRT
TERM
ENR
OCN

Approach
(Non-precision)

LNAV

Approach
(Non-precision with
Vertical Guidance)
Approach
(LNAV/VNAV)
Approach
(LPV)
Approach
(LP)
Missed Approach

Automatic CDI Full-scale Deflection
0.3 nm
1.0 nm
2.0 nm
2.0 nm

1.0 nm decreasing to 350 feet depending on
variables (Figure 2-28)
LNAV + V
L/VNAV
LPV

1.0 nm decreasing to a specified course width, then
0.3 nm, depending on variables (Figure 2-29)

LP
MAPR

0.3 nm

* Flight phase annunciations are normally shown in magenta, but when cautionary
conditions exist the color changes to yellow.
Table 2-2 Automatic GPS CDI Scaling

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
OBS MODE
NOTE: VNAV is inhibited while automatic waypoint sequencing has been suspended.

Enabling Omni-bearing Selector (OBS) Mode suspends the automatic sequencing of waypoints in a FMS
flight plan (FMS must be the selected navigation source), but retains the current “active-to” waypoint as the
navigation reference even after passing the waypoint. ‘OBS’ is annunciated to the lower right of the aircraft
symbol when OBS Mode is selected.
While OBS Mode is enabled, a course line is drawn through the “active-to” waypoint on the moving map.
If desired, the course to/from the waypoint can now be adjusted. When OBS Mode is disabled, the FMS flight
plan returns to normal operation with automatic sequencing of waypoints, following the course set in OBS
Mode. The flight path on the moving map retains the modified course line.
FMS
Selected
OBS Mode
Enabled

OBS Softkey

Figure 2-30 Omni-bearing Selector (OBS) Mode

Enabling/disabling OBS Mode while navigating an FMS flight plan:
1) Select the OBS Softkey to select OBS Mode.
2) Turn the CRS Knob to select the desired course to/from the waypoint. Press the CRS Knob to synchronize the
Selected Course with the bearing to the next waypoint.
3) Select the OBS Softkey again to return to automatic waypoint sequencing.

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
As the aircraft crosses the missed approach point (MAP), automatic approach waypoint sequencing is
suspended. ‘SUSP’ appears on the HSI at the lower right of the aircraft symbol. The OBS Softkey label
changes to indicate the suspension is active as shown in Figure 2-31. Selecting the SUSP Softkey, deactivates
the suspension and resumes automatic sequencing of approach waypoints.

SUSP Softkey

SUSP
Annunciation

Figure 2-31 Suspension of Automatic Waypoint Sequencing

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS

2.2 GARMIN SVT™ (SYNTHETIC VISION TECHNOLOGY)
WARNING: Use appropriate primary systems for navigation, and for terrain, obstacle, and traffic avoidance.

SVT is intended as an aid to situational awareness only and may not provide either the accuracy or reliability
upon which to solely base decisions and/or plan maneuvers to avoid terrain, obstacles, or traffic.
Garmin SVT™ (Synthetic Vision Technology) is a visual enhancement to the Vision Flight Deck. SVT depicts
a forward-looking attitude display of the topography immediately in front of the aircraft. The field of view is 44
degrees to the left and 44 degrees to the right. SVT information is shown on the Primary Flight Display (PFD),
or on the Multifunction Display (MFD) in Reversionary Mode. The depicted imagery is derived from the aircraft
attitude, heading, GPS three-dimensional position, and a 4.9 arc-second database of terrain, obstacles, and other
relevant features. The terrain data resolution of 4.9 arc-seconds, meaning that the terrain elevation contours are
stored in squares measuring 4.9 arc-seconds on each side, is required for the operation of SVT. Loss of any of the
required data, including temporary loss of the GPS signal, will cause SVT to be disabled until the required data
is restored.
The SVT terrain display shows land contours (colors are consistent with those of the topographical map display),
large water features, towers, and other obstacles over 200’ AGL that are included in the obstacle database. Cultural
features on the ground such as roads, highways, railroad tracks, cities, and state boundaries are not displayed even
if those features are found on the MFD map. The terrain display also includes a north–south east–west grid with
lines oriented with true north and spaced at one arc-minute intervals to assist in orientation relative to the terrain.
The Terrain Awareness and Warning System (TAWS-A) is integrated within SVT to provide visual and auditory
alerts to indicate the presence of terrain and obstacle threats relevant to the projected flight path. Terrain alerts
are displayed in red and yellow shading on the PFD.
The terrain display is intended for situational awareness only. It may not provide the accuracy or fidelity on
which to base decisions and plan maneuvers to avoid terrain or obstacles. Navigation must not be predicated
solely upon the use of TAWS-A terrain or obstacle data displayed by the SVT.
The following SVT enhancements appear on the PFD:
• Flight Path Marker

• Runway Display

• Horizon Heading Marks

• Terrain Alerting

• Traffic Display

• Obstacle Alerting

• Airport Signs

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS

Figure 2-32 Synthetic Vision Imagery

SVT OPERATION
SVT is activated from the PFD using the softkeys located along the bottom edge of the display. Pressing the
softkeys turns the related function on or off. When SVT is enabled, the pitch scale increments are reduced to
10 degrees up and 7.5 degrees down.
SVT functions are displayed on three levels of softkeys. The PFD Settings Softkey leads into the PFD
function Softkeys, including synthetic vision. Pressing the Attitude Overlays Softkey displays the SVT feature
softkeys. The softkeys are labeled Pathways, Synthetic Terrain, Horizon Heading, and Airport Signs. The
Back Softkey returns to the previous level of softkeys. Synthetic Terrain must be active before any other SVT
feature may be activated. A green annunciator on the softkey label indicates the feature is activated.
Horizon Heading, Airport Signs, and Pathways softkeys are only available when the Synthetic Terrain
Softkey is activated (softkey annunciator is green). After activating the Synthetic Terrain Softkey, the
Horizon Heading, Airport Signs, and Pathways softkeys may be activated in any combination to display
desired features. When system power is cycled, the last selected state (on or off) of the SVT feature softkeys is
remembered.
• Pathways Softkey enables display of rectangular boxes that represent course guidance.
• Synthetic Terrain Softkey enables synthetic terrain depiction.
• Horizon Heading Softkey enables the display of heading marks and digits on the zero pitch line.
• Airport Signs Softkey enables airport signposts.
Activating and deactivating SVT:
1) Press the PFD Settings Softkey.
2) Press the Attitude Overlays Softkey.
3) Press the Synthetic Terrain Softkey. The SVT display will cycle on or off with each press of the Synthetic
Terrain Softkey.

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Activating and deactivating Pathways:
1) Press the PFD Settings Softkey.
2) Press the Attitude Overlays Softkey.
3) Press the Pathways Softkey. The Pathways feature will cycle on or off with each press of the Pathways
Softkey.

Activating and deactivating Horizon Headings:
1) Press the PFD Settings Softkey.
2) Press the Attitude Overlays Softkey.
3) Press the Horizon Heading Softkey. The horizon heading display will cycle on or off with each press of the
Horizon Heading Softkey.

Activating and deactivating Airport Signs:
1) Press the PFD Settings Softkey.
2) Press the Attitude Overlays Softkey.
3) Press the Airport Signs Softkey. Display of airport signs will cycle on or off with each press of the Airport
Signs Softkey.

SVT FEATURES
Selected
Altitude
Pathways
Boxes

Flight
Path
Marker
Airplane
Symbol

Zero
Pitch Line
(ZPL) with
Compass
Heading
Marks
Synthetic
Terrain

SVT
Softkeys

Figure 2-33 SVT on the Primary Flight Display

NOTE: Pathways and terrain features are not a substitute for standard course and altitude deviation

information provided by the altimeter, CDI, and VDI.

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
PATHWAYS
Pathways provide a three-dimensional perspective view of the selected route of flight shown as colored
rectangular boxes representing the horizontal and vertical flight path of the active flight plan. The box
size represents 700 feet wide by 200 feet tall during enroute, oceanic, and terminal flight phases. During
an approach, the box width is 700 feet or one half full scale deviation on the HSI, whichever is less. The
height is 200 feet or one half full scale deviation on the VDI, whichever is less. The altitude at which the
pathway boxes are displayed is determined by the higher of either the selected altitude or the VNAV altitude
programmed for the active leg in the flight plan (Figure 2-34).
The color of the rectangular boxes may be magenta, green, or white depending on the route of flight and
navigation source selected. The active GPS or GPS overlay flight plan leg is represented by magenta boxes
that correspond to the Magenta CDI. A localizer course is represented by green boxes that correspond to a
green CDI. An inactive leg of an active flight plan is represented by white boxes corresponding to a white line
drawn on the Inset map or MFD map indicating an inactive leg.
Programmed
Altitudes

Selected
Altitude

Figure 2-34 Selected and Programmed Selected Altitude

Pathways provide supplemental glidepath information on an active ILS, LPV, LNAV/VNAV, and some LNAV
approaches. Pathways are intended as an aid to situational awareness and should not be used independent of the

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
CDI, VDI, glide path indicator, and glide slope indicator. They are removed from the display when the selected
navigation information is not available. Pathways are not displayed beyond the active leg when leg sequencing
is suspended and are not displayed on any portion of the flight plan leg that would lead to intercepting a leg in
the wrong direction.

Departure and Enroute
Prior to intercepting an active flight plan leg, pathways are displayed as a series of boxes with pointers at
each corner that point in the direction of the active waypoint. Pathways are not displayed for the first leg of
the flight plan if that segment is a Heading-to-Altitude leg. The first segment displaying pathways is the first
active GPS leg or active leg with a GPS overlay. If this leg of the flight plan route is outside the SVT field of
view, pathways will not be visible until the aircraft has turned toward this leg. While approaching the center
of the active leg and prescribed altitude, the number of pathway boxes decreases to a minimum of four.
Pathways are displayed along the flight plan route at the highest of either the selected altitude or the
programmed altitude for the leg. Climb profiles cannot be displayed due to the variables associated with
aircraft performance. Flight plan legs requiring a climb are indicated by pathways displayed at a level above
the aircraft at the altitude selected or programmed.

Descent and Approach
Pathways are shown descending only for a programmed descent (Figures 2-35, 2-36). When the flight
plan includes programmed descent segments, pathways are displayed along the descent path provided that
the selected altitude is lower than the programmed altitude.
During a Vectors-to-Final (VTF) approach transition, pathways are displayed along the final approach
course inbound to the Missed Approach Point (MAP). Pathways are shown level at the selected altitude
or at the next programmed crossing altitude, whichever is higher, up to the point along the final approach
course where the altitude intercepts the extended vertical descent path, glidepath, or glideslope. From
the vertical path descent, glidepath, or glideslope intercept point, the pathways are shown inbound to the
Missed Approach Point (MAP) along the published lateral and vertical descent path.
During an ILS approach, the initial approach segment is displayed in magenta at the segment altitudes
if FMS is selected as the navigation source on the CDI. When switching to localizer inbound with LOC
selected as the navigation source on the CDI, pathways are displayed in green along the localizer and glide
slope.
VOR, LOC BC, and ADF approach segments that are approved to be flown using GPS are displayed in
magenta boxes. Segments that are flown using other than GPS or ILS, such as heading legs or VOR final
approach courses are not displayed.

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS

Selected Altitude
set for Enroute
Selected Altitude
set for Departure

Climbs NOT
displayed
by pathway

Non-programmed descents NOT displayed by pathway

TOD
Selected Altitude
for Step Down

Programmed descent
displayed by pathway

Selected Altitude or Programmed Altitude
(whichever is higher)

Figure 2-35 SVT Pathways, Enroute and Descent

Missed Approach
Upon activating the missed approach, pathways lead to the Missed Approach Holding Point (MAHP) and
are displayed as a level path at the published altitude for the MAHP, or the selected altitude, whichever is
the highest. If the initial missed approach leg is a Course-to-Altitude (CA) leg, the pathways boxes will
be displayed level at the altitude published for the MAHP. If the initial missed approach leg is defined by
a course using other than GPS, pathways are not displayed for that segment. In this case, the pathways
displayed for the next leg may be outside the field of view and will be visible when the aircraft has turned
in the direction of that leg.
Pathways are displayed along each segment including the path required to track course reversals that are
part of a procedure, such as holding patterns. Pathways boxes will not indicate a turn to a MAHP unless a
defined geographical waypoint exists between the MAP and MAHP.

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS

FAF

Descent displayed
by pathway

Selected Altitude
or Programmed Altitude
(whichever is higher)

MAP Climbs NOT displayed
by pathway

Turn Segment
NOT displayed
by pathway

MAHP

Figure 2-36 SVT Pathways, Approach, Missed Approach, and Holding

FLIGHT PATH MARKER
The Flight Path Marker (FPM), also known as a Velocity Vector, is displayed on the PFD at groundspeeds
above 30 knots. The FPM depicts the approximate projected path of the aircraft accounting for wind speed
and direction relative to the three-dimensional terrain display.
The FPM is always available when the Synthetic Terrain feature is in operation. The FPM represents the
direction of the flight path as it relates to the terrain and obstacles on the display, while the airplane symbol
represents the aircraft heading.
The FPM works in conjunction with the Pathways feature to assist the pilot in maintaining desired altitudes
and direction when navigating a flight plan. When on course and altitude the FPM is aligned inside the
pathway boxes.
The FPM may also be used to identify a possible conflict with the aircraft flight path and distant terrain or
obstacles. Displayed terrain or obstacles in the aircraft’s flight path extending above the FPM could indicate
a potential conflict, even before an alert is issued by TAWS. However, decisions regarding terrain and/or
obstacle avoidance should not be made using only the FPM.

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS

Flight Path
Marker
(FPM)

Wind
Vector

Figure 2-37 Flight Path Marker Position is Affected by Wind

ZERO PITCH LINE
The Zero Pitch Line is drawn completely across the display and represents the horizon when the terrain
horizon is difficult to distinguish from other terrain being displayed. It may not align with the terrain
horizon, particularly when the terrain is mountainous or when the aircraft is flown at high altitudes.

HORIZON HEADING
The Horizon Heading is synchronized with the HSI and shows approximately 60 degrees of compass
heading in 30‑degree increments on the Zero Pitch Line. Horizon Heading tick marks and digits appearing
on the zero pitch line are not visible behind either the airspeed or altitude display. Horizon Heading is used
for general heading awareness, and is activated and deactivated by pressing the Horizon Heading Softkey.

TRAFFIC
WARNING: Intruder aircraft at or below 500 ft. AGL may not appear on the SVT display or may appear as a

partial symbol.
Traffic symbols are displayed in their approximate locations as determined by the related traffic systems.
Traffic symbols are displayed in three dimensions, appearing larger as they are getting closer, and smaller
when they are further away. Traffic within 250 feet laterally of the aircraft will not be displayed on the SVT
display. Traffic symbols and coloring are consistent with that used for traffic displayed in the Inset map or
MFD traffic page. If the traffic altitude is unknown, the traffic will not be displayed on the SVT display. For
more details refer to the traffic system discussion in the Hazard Avoidance section.

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
AIRPORT SIGNS
Airport Signs provide a visual representation of airport location and identification on the synthetic terrain
display. When activated, the signs appear on the display when the aircraft is approximately 15 nm from an
airport and disappear at approximately 4.5 nm. Airport signs are shown without the identifier until the aircraft
is approximately eight nautical miles from the airport. Airport signs are not shown behind the airspeed or
altitude display. Airport signs are activated and deactivated by pressing the Airport Signs Softkey.
Traffic

Airport
Sign
without
Identifier
(Between
8 nm and
15 nm)

Airport
Sign with
Identifier
(Between
4.5 nm and
8 nm)

Figure 2-38 Airport Signs

RUNWAYS
WARNING: Do not use SVT runway depiction as the sole means for determining the proximity of the aircraft

to the runway or for maintaining the proper approach path angle during landing.
NOTE: Not all airports have runways with endpoint data in the database, therefore, these runways are not

displayed.
Runway data provides improved awareness of runway location with respect to the surrounding terrain. All
runway thresholds are depicted at their respective elevations as defined in the database. In some situations,
where threshold elevations differ significantly, crossing runways may appear to be layered. As runways are
displayed, those within 45 degrees of the aircraft heading are displayed in white. Other runways will be gray
in color. When an approach for a specific runway is active, that runway will appear brighter and be outlined
with a white box, regardless of the runway orientation as related to aircraft heading. As the aircraft gets closer
to the runway, more detail such as runway numbers and centerlines will be displayed.

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS

Runway
Selected for
Approach

Other
Runway on
Airport

Figure 2-39 Airport Runways

TAWS-A ALERTING
Terrain alerting on the synthetic terrain display is triggered by Forward-looking Terrain Avoidance (FLTA)
alerts. In addition to the yellow terrain shading for a caution alert and the red shading for a warning alert,
TAWS-A alerting will also indicate potential impact points. These potential impact points correspond to
red and/or yellow X symbols on the PFD Inset Map (as shown in Figure 2-41), Navigation Status Pane, and
TAWS-A Pane. Terrain shading will only occur on the synthetic terrain display on the PFD and TAWS-A Pane.
No terrain shading nor potential impact points will be displayed on the PFD inset map or the Navigation
Status Pane. For more detailed information regarding TAWS-A, refer to the Hazard Avoidance Section.
In some instances, a terrain or obstacle alert may be issued with no conflict shading displayed on the
synthetic terrain. In these cases, the conflict is outside the SVS field of view to the left or right of the aircraft.

Terrain
Caution
TERRAIN
Annunciation

Potential
Impact
Points

Figure 2-40 Terrain Alert

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Obstacles are represented on the synthetic terrain display by standard two-dimensional tower symbols found
on the Inset map and MFD maps and charts. Obstacle symbols appear in the perspective view with relative
height above terrain and distance from the aircraft. Obstacles greater than 1000 feet below the aircraft altitude
are not shown. Obstacles are shown behind the airspeed and altitude displays.
As with terrain alerting, obstacle alerting is limited to the synthetic terrain display on the PFD and the
TAWS-A Pane.

Obstacle
Warning

TAWS-A
Annunciation

Potential
Impact
Point

Figure 2-41 Obstacle

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS

FIELD OF VIEW
The PFD field of view can be represented on the MFD Navigation Map Page. Two dashed lines forming a
V‑shape in front of the aircraft symbol on the map, represent the forward viewing area shown on the PFD.
Enabling or Disabling the field of view indication:
1) From the Home Screen on the Touchscreen Controller, touch Map > Map Settings > Map Options.
2) If not already selected, touch the Other Tab.
3) Scroll to display the Field of View Annunciator Button.
4) Touch the Field of View Button to enable or disable the field of view indication. A green annunciator on the
button indicates the field of view is enabled. A gray annunciator indicates the field of view is disabled.

The following figure compares the PFD forward looking depiction with the MFD plan view and Field of View
turned on.

Lines
Depict
PFD Field
of View

SVT View on the PFD

Field of View on the MFD

Figure 2-42 PFD and MFD Field of View Comparison

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS

2.3 SUPPLEMENTAL FLIGHT DATA
In addition to the flight instruments, the PFDs also display various supplemental information, including
temperatures, wind data, and Vertical Navigation (VNAV) indications.

TEMPERATURE DISPLAYS
The Total and Static air temperatures (TAT and SAT) are displayed in the lower left of the PFD. ISA Temperature
Deviation is displayed in the lower right of the PFD. These temperatures are displayed in degrees Celsius (°C)
or Fahrenheit (°F) as configured by the installation personnel.

Figure 2-43 TAT, SAT, and ISA

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS

WIND DATA
Wind direction and speed (relative to the aircraft) in knots can be displayed in a window to the upper left of
the HSI. When the window is selected for display, but wind information is invalid or unavailable, the window
shows “NO WIND DATA”. Wind data can be displayed in three different ways:
Option 1

Option 2

Option 3

No Data

Figure 2-44 Wind Data

Displaying wind data:
1) Select the PFD Settings Softkey.
2) Select the Other PFD Settings Softkey.
3) Select the Wind Softkey to display wind data display options.
4) Select one of the Option softkeys to change how wind data is displayed below the Selected Heading:
• Option 1: Wind direction arrows with numeric headwind/tailwind and crosswind components
• Option 2: Wind direction arrow with direction and speed
• Option 3: Wind direction arrow with headwind (H) or tailwind (T) and crosswind (X) speed components
5) To remove the window, select the Off Softkey.

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS

VERTICAL NAVIGATION (VNAV) INDICATIONS
When a VNAV flight plan has been activated, VNAV indications (VNAV Target Altitude, RSVI, VDI) appear on
the PFD in conjunction with the “TOD within 1 minute” message and “Vertical track” voice alert. See the Flight
Management section for details on VNAV features. VNAV indications are removed from the PFD according to
the criteria listed in Table 2-3.
VNAV Target
Altitude
Vertical
Deviation
Indicator
Required
Vertical
Speed Bug
Top of
Descent
Message

FMS is
Selected
Navigation
Source

Terminal
Phase of
Flight
Figure 2-45 Vertical Navigation Indications (PFD)

Criteria
Aircraft > 1 min before the next TOD due to flight plan change
VNAV cancelled
Distance to active waypoint cannot be computed due to
unsupported flight plan leg type (see Flight Management
Section)
Aircraft > 250 feet below active VNAV Target Altitude
Current crosstrack or track angle error has exceeded limit
Active altitude-constrained waypoint can not be reached within
maximum allowed flight path angle and vertical speed

VNAV Indication Removed
Required Vertical
Vertical
VNAV Target
Speed (RSVI)
Deviation (VDI)
Altitude
X
X
X
X
X
X
X

X
X

Table 2-3 VNAV Indication Removal Criteria

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS

2.4 PFD ANNUNCIATIONS AND ALERTING FUNCTIONS
The following annunciations and alerting functions are displayed on the PFD. Refer to Appendix A for more
information on alerts and annunciations.

MARKER BEACON ANNUNCIATIONS
Marker Beacon Annunciations are displayed on the PFD to the left of the Selected Altitude. Outer marker
reception is indicated in blue, middle in yellow, and inner in white. Refer to the Audio Panel and CNS Section
for more information on Marker Beacon Annunciations.
Outer Marker

Middle Marker

Inner Marker

Altimeter
Figure 2-46 Marker Beacon Annunciations

TRAFFIC ANNUNCIATIONS
Traffic is displayed symbolically on the Inset Map (PFD), the Navigation Map Page (MFD), and various
other MFD page maps. Refer to the Hazard Avoidance Section and Appendix F for more details about the
Traffic Collision Avoidance System II (TCAS II). When a Traffic Advisory (TA) or Resolution Advisory (RA) is
detected, the following automatically occur:
• The PFD Inset Map is enabled, displaying traffic.
• A flashing black-on-yellow (TA) TRAFFIC annunciation or white-on red (RA) TRAFFIC annunciation appears
to the top left of the Attitude Indicator for five seconds and remains displayed until no TAs or RAs are detected
in the area.
• One or more aural traffic alerts is generated.
• When an RA becomes active, vertical guidance pitch cues will appear on the Attitude Indicator and Vertical
Speed Indicator; see the Hazard Avoidance Section for details about TCAS II.

PFD TA Annunciation
Traffic
Symbols
PFD RA Annunciation

Figure 2-47 Traffic Annunciation and Inset Map with Traffic Displayed

100

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS

TERRAIN ANNUNCIATIONS
Terrain Awareness and Warning System - Class A (TAWS-A) annunciations appear on the PFD to the upper
right of the HSI. Refer to the Hazard Avoidance Section and the Appendix for information on TAWS-A alerts
and annunciations.

Inset Map
Enabled,
Displaying
Traffic When
TA Detected
Figure 2-48 Traffic and Example TAWS-A Annunciations

ALTITUDE ALERTING
Altitude Alerting provides the pilot with visual and aural alerts when approaching the Selected Altitude.
Whenever the Selected Altitude is changed, the Altitude Alerter is reset. The following occur when approaching
the Selected Altitude:
• Upon passing through 1000 feet of the Selected Altitude, the Selected Altitude changes to black text on a light
blue background and flashes for 5 seconds.
• When the aircraft passes within 200 ft of the Selected Altitude, an aural tone is heard, and the Selected
Altitude changes to light blue text on a black background and flashes for 5 seconds.
• After reaching the Selected Altitude, if the pilot flies outside the deviation band (±200 feet of the Selected
Altitude) an aural tone is heard. The Selected Altitude changes to yellow text on a black background and
flashes for 5 seconds.
Within 1000 ft

Within 200 ft

Deviation of ±200 ft

Figure 2-49 Altitude Alerting Visual Annunciations

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

101

FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS

LOW ALTITUDE ANNUNCIATION
NOTE: The Low Altitude Annunciation is available only when SBAS is available and TAWS-A terrain alerting

is inhibited.
When the Final Approach Fix (FAF) is the active waypoint in a GPS SBAS approach using vertical guidance,
a Low Altitude Annunciation may appear if the current aircraft altitude is at least 164 feet below the prescribed
altitude at the FAF. A black-on-yellow ‘LOW ALT’ annunciation appears to the top left of the Altimeter, flashing
for several seconds then remaining displayed until the condition is resolved.

Altimeter
Figure 2-50 Low Altitude on GPS SBAS Approach

MINIMUM DESCENT ALTITUDE/DECISION HEIGHT ALERTING
For altitude awareness, a Minimum Descent Altitude (MDA) or Decision Height (DH), based on barometric,
radar, or temperature compensated altitude can be set. When active, the altitude setting is displayed to the
lower left of the Altimeter and with a bug at the corresponding altitude along the Altimeter (once the altitude is
within the visible range of the tape). The following visual annunciations alert the pilot when approaching the
MDA/DH:
• When the aircraft altitude descends to within 2500 feet of the MDA/DH setting, the ‘BARO MIN’, RA MIN, or
‘TEMP COMP’ box appears with the altitude in light blue text. The bug appears on the altitude tape in light
blue once in range.
• When the aircraft passes through 100 feet of the MDA/DH, the bug and text turn white.
• Once the aircraft reaches the MDA/DH, the bug and text turn yellow and the aural alert, “Minimums
Minimums”, is heard.
Light Blue Within 2500 ft

White Within 100 ft

Yellow When Altitude Reached

MDA/DH
Bug
Barometric
Minimum
Box
Figure 2-51 Barometric MDA/DH Alerting Visual Annunciations

Alerting is inhibited while the aircraft is on the ground and until the aircraft reaches 150 feet above the setting
for the alert. If the aircraft proceeds to climb after having reached the MDA/DH, once it reaches 50 feet above
102

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
the MDA/DH, alerting is disabled. The MDA/DH is synchronized on both PFDs. The function is reset (set to
“Off”) when the power is cycled or another approach is activated.
Setting the Baro/Radio Alt Minimum Descent Altitude/Decision Height and bug:
1) From the Home Screen, touch Utilities > Minimums > Minimums.
2) Touch Baro, Temp Comp, or Radio Alt (OFF is selected by default.)
• If Temp Comp is selected, touch Temp at Dest. Use the keypad to enter desired temperature, and touch
Enter.
3) Use the keypad to enter the desired altitude from zero to 16,000 feet, and touch Enter.

Figure 2-52 Minimum Descent Altitude/Decision Height

RADAR ALTIMETER
When the radar height (the aircraft altitude above ground level detected by the radar altimeter) is between
zero and 2500 feet, the current value is displayed in white above the selected course box (Figure 2-53). Display
of radar height becomes more sensitive as the height above ground decreases (Table 2-4).
Radar Altimeter

Figure 2-53 Current Radar Height

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

103

FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Radar Height Range

Shown to Nearest

0 to 200 feet

5 feet

200 to 1500 feet

10 feet

1500 to 2500 feet

50 feet

Table 2-4 Radar Altimeter Sensitivity

When the radar altimeter is selected as the altitude source for the minimum descent altitude/decision height
alerting function, the radar altimeter numeric display changes to yellow upon descending to at or below this
altitude (Figure 2-54). Refer to the Minimum Descent Altitude/Decision Height Alerting discussion in this
section for more information about this function.

Figure 2-54 RA as Altitude Source for MDA/DH

A ground line (Figure 2-55) is shown on the Altimeter to display the aircraft’s height relative to the ground.
If the data becomes invalid, the message ‘RA FAIL’ is displayed in yellow in place of the current radar height
(Figure 2-56).

Radar Altimeter

Ground
Line

Radar Altimeter
Minimums Box
Figure 2-55 Altimeter Displaying the Ground Line

104

Figure 2-56 Radar Altimeter Invalid Data

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS

2.5 ABNORMAL OPERATIONS
ABNORMAL GPS CONDITIONS
The annunciations listed in Table 2-5 can appear on the PFD when abnormal GPS conditions occur. Refer to
the Flight Management Section for more information on Dead Reckoning Mode.
Annunciation

Location
Lower left of
HSI
Lower left of
HSI

Description
Loss of Integrity Monitoring–FMS integrity is insufficient for the current
GPS LOI
phase of flight
Integrity OK–FMS integrity has been restored to within normal limits
GPS INTEG OK
(annunciation displayed for 5 seconds)
Dead Reckoning–System is using projected position rather than FMS
Lower left of
DR
position to compute navigation data and sequence active flight plan
aircraft symbol
waypoints
Table 2-5 Abnormal GPS Conditions Annunciated on HSI

Figure 2-57 Abnormal GPS Condition Annunciations

In Dead Reckoning Mode, the following items on the PFD are shown in yellow:
• CDI (When FMS is the selected navigation source, the CDI does not turn yellow and is simply removed a few
seconds following the appearance of the “GPS LOI” annunciation.)
• Current Track Bug
• Wind Data
• Distances in the Bearing Information windows
• GPS bearing pointers
These items should be verified when operating in Dead Reckoning Mode and they become increasingly
inaccurate over time.

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

105

FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS

UNUSUAL ATTITUDES
When the aircraft enters an unusual pitch attitude, red chevrons pointing toward the horizon warn of extreme
pitch. The chevrons are displayed on the Attitude Indicator, starting at 50˚ above and 30˚ below the horizon
line.
Nose High

Nose Low

Figure 2-58 Pitch Attitude Warnings

If pitch exceeds +30˚/-20˚ or bank exceeds 65˚, some information displayed on the PFD is removed. The
Altimeter, Airspeed, Attitude, Vertical Speed, and Horizontal Situation indicators remain on the display and
the Bearing Information, Alerts, and Annunciation windows can be displayed during such situations. The
following information is removed from the PFD (and corresponding softkeys are disabled) when the aircraft
experiences unusual attitudes:
• Traffic Annunciations

• System Time

• Selected Altitude

• Flight Director Command Bars

• Generic Timer

• VNAV Target Altitude

• Inset Map

• Minimum Descent Altitude/
Decision Height readout

• Selected Heading

• Vertical Deviation, Glideslope,
and Glidepath Indicators

• PFD Setup Menu

• Total Air Temperature (TAT)
• Static Air Temperature (SAT)
• ISA Temperature Deviation
• Wind Data

106

• Selected Course/Desired Track

• Altimeter Barometric Setting

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS

GARMIN SVT TROUBLESHOOTING
Garmin SVT™ is intended to be used with traditional attitude, heading, obstacle, terrain, and traffic inputs.
SVT is disabled when valid attitude or heading data is not available for the display. In case of invalid SVT data,
the PFD display reverts to the standard blue-over-brown attitude display.
SVT becomes disabled without the following data resources:
• Attitude data
• Heading data
• GPS position data
• 4.9 arc-second terrain data
• Obstacle data
• TAWS function is not available, in test mode, or failed
SVT can be displayed on the Multifunction Display (MFD) in Reversionary Mode. If it is enabled when switching
to Reversionary Mode, SVT will take up to 30 seconds to be displayed. The standard, non-SVT PFD display will
be shown in the interim.

SVT UNUSUAL ATTITUDES
During extreme pitch attitudes, the display shows either a brown or blue colored bar at the top or bottom
of the screen to represent earth or sky. The blue colored bar is also displayed when terrain gradient is great
enough to completely fill the display. This is intended to prevent losing sight of the horizon during extreme
pitch attitudes.
Blue Band

Terrain
Completely
Fills Display

Figure 2-59 Blue Sky Bar with Full Display Terrain

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

107

FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS

Blank Page

108

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

ENGINE & AIRFRAME SYSTEMS

SECTION 3 ENGINE AND AIRFRAME SYSTEMS
NOTE: Refer to the Airplane Flight Manual (AFM) for limitations.

The system offers improved flight operations and reduces crew workload by automatically monitoring critical
system parameters and providing system alerts during all phases of flight using the following:
• The Engine Indication System (EIS) displays electrical, fuel, engine, pressurization, and flight control
information on the left side of the Multi Function Display (MFD).
• Synoptics pages are provided for monitoring the status of the doors, brakes, hydraulics, oxygen, pressurization,
environmental control, electrical, fuel, and de-icing systems.
• The Crew Alerting System (CAS) displays advisories, cautions, and warnings to communicate conditions,
statuses, and system failures. CAS messages are grouped by level of importance and color-coded based on
urgency and appear in a window to the right of the Altimeter on the Primary Flight displays (PFDs). See the
Appendices for a list of possible CAS messages.
In combination with these, aural alerts, additional avionics messages, and master indicators are used to inform
the crew of aberrant flight conditions. The system also provides an improved level of maintenance data for the
ground crew.
PFD

CAS
Window

MFD

EIS
Display

Figure 3-1 EICAS (Normal)

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

109

ENGINE & AIRFRAME SYSTEMS
In the event of a display failure, depending on the failed display(s), the operating display(s) may be re-configured
to present Primary Flight Display (PFD) symbology together with condensed EIS and MFD information (refer to
the System Overview for more information about Reversionary Mode).
EIS
Display

CAS
Window

Figure 3-2 EICAS (Reversionary Mode)

110

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

ENGINE & AIRFRAME SYSTEMS

3.1 ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM (EIS)
EIS information is presented using gauges and digital readouts. During normal operating conditions, gauge
pointers and readout text appear in green. When unsafe operating conditions occur, gauge pointers and readouts
change color to indicate caution (yellow) or warning (red). Refer to each indicator description for additional
details on display behavior.
If the time limit for an unsafe condition is exceeded, the color of the pointers and digits may change to denote
an increase in priority level. Parameters out of the range of the readout display a red ‘X’. If sensor data for a
parameter becomes invalid or unavailable, a red “X” is displayed across the indicator and/or readout.

6
8

9
10

3
4

7
9

Figure 3-4 EIS Display (Reversionary)

Figure 3-3 EICAS Display (Normal)

Engine Fan Rotation Speed

Oil Pressure and Temperature

Spoiler Status

Interstage Turbine
Temperature (ITT)
Engine High Pressure
Compressor Rotation Speed

Fuel Display

Landing Gear Status

Battery Voltmeter

Flap Indicator

Pressurization Display

Trim Indicator

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

111

ENGINE & AIRFRAME SYSTEMS

TAKEOFF DATA SET WINDOW
When the aircraft is parked or is taxiing, the Outside Air Temperature (OAT) for the departure airport can be
set and Automatic Thrust Reserve (ATR) enabled/disabled in the Takeoff Data Set Window.

Figure 3-5 Takeoff Data Set Window

Setting the Outside Air Temperature (OAT):
1) From Home, touch Aircraft Systems > Engine Settings
2) Touch Set Data, then touch OAT.
3) Use the keypad to enter the OAT and touch the Enter button to confirm the new OAT.
4) To confirm the selected takeoff settings, touch the Send Data Button.
Or:

To cancel the operation, touch BACK or Home.

On aircraft electrical power-up, Automatic Thrust Reserve (ATR) is enabled by default. ATR status (defined
in Table 3-1) is shown at the top of the EIS Display (Figure 3-7).
Indication*
ATR
ATR
TO - RSV
GA - RSV

Description
ATR enabled in both engines
ATR armed in both engines, but inactive
ATR activated in at least one engine
ATR activated in at least one engine in
Go-Around Mode

* When no indication is shown, ATR has not been
enabled or armed in both engines.
Table 3-1 Automatic Thrust Reserve (ATR) Status

112

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

ENGINE & AIRFRAME SYSTEMS
Disabling/enabling Automatic Thrust Reserve (ATR):
1) From Home, touch Aircraft Systems > Engine Settings
2) Touch Set Data.
3) Touch the Auto Thrust Reserve Button to enable/disable (green indicates enabled).
4) If desired, change the OAT while the Takeoff Data Set Window is displayed.
5) To confirm the selected takeoff settings touch the Send Data Button,
Or:

To cancel the operation, touch BACK. or Home

ENGINE INDICATIONS
Automatic Thrust
Reserve Status

Thrust Rating

Commanded
N1 Rating
Minimum Anti-Ice
N1 Bug

Thrust Rating
Max Speed
N1 for Thrust
Rating Max Speed
Current Speed
Control Arc

Engine Fan
Speed

N1 Transient Limit
ITT Steady State
Limit
ITT Transient Limit

Interstage Turbine
Temperature

Ignition Status
Engine High Pressure
Compressor Speed

Oil Pressure
Oil Temperature
Figure 3-6 Engine and Oil Indications

The upper portion of the EIS Display is devoted to showing indications for the engines: engine stage
rotation speeds (N1 and N2; shown as percentages), ATR status, thrust rating information, Interstage Turbine
Temperatures (ITT; degrees Celsius, °C), and oil pressure (pounds per square inch, psi) and temperature (°C).
The N1 gauges indicate the engine fan rotation speeds, while the N2 readouts show the engine high pressure
compressor rotation speeds. Both are shown as percentages. Values and limits are obtained from the Full
Authority Digital Engine Controller (FADEC).

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

113

ENGINE & AIRFRAME SYSTEMS
On the N1 gauges, the following indications can be displayed:
• Commanded N1 Rating (based on Thrust Lever Angle, TLA, position) – When the current N1 value is below
the commanded rating, a light blue arc is drawn from the current to the commanded N1 value.
• N1 value corresponding to the Thrust Rating Maximum Speed (shown as a light blue T-shaped bug)
• Current Speed Control N1 value (shown as a green arc)
• Minimum Anti-Ice N1 Bug – Indicates which N1 should be commanded for full anti-ice capacity (shown as
a light blue tick mark)
• Engine shutdown (normal operations) – When the engines are shutting down normally, the N1 gauges display
a light blue “OFF” annunciation (Figure 3-8).

Figure 3-7 Engine Shutdown Indication

Interstage Turbine Temperatures (ITT) values and limits are obtained from the Full Authority Digital Engine
Control (FADEC). Ignition status appears below the ‘IGN’ label beside the ITT scales (A, B, AB, or OFF).

THRUST RATING
The thrust rating for the engines is shown at the center top of the EIS Display, above and between the N1
gauges (see Table 3-2 for indications). The maximum value of the speed range (in kt) for the displayed thrust
rating is shown above each N1 gauge. While the aircraft is in the air, the rating can be changed to suit the
conditions for maximum climb or continuous thrust.
Indication
CRZ
CLB
CON
TO
GA

Thrust Rating
Cruise
Max Climb
Continuous
Takeoff
Go Around

Table 3-2 Thrust Rating Indications

Selecting a thrust rating:
1) From Home, touch Aircraft Systems > Engine Settings
2) To choose the continuous thrust rating, select the Continuous Button,
Or:

To choose the Maximum Climb thrust rating, select the Maximum Climb Button.
3) Touch BACK or Home to exit.

114

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

ENGINE & AIRFRAME SYSTEMS
CURRENT SPEED CONTROL (CSC)
Current Speed Control (CSC), if available, can be activated while the autopilot is engaged and AFCS Altitude
Hold Mode is active. During CSC, the FADEC varies engine thrust to maintain the desired airspeed, within
a certain control range.
When CSC is active, green arcs appear on the N1 gauges, at values corresponding to the current speed
selected (Figure 3-7).
The N1 gauge flashes ‘LIM’ (black text on yellow background) if the CSC maximum authority limit has
been reached for the corresponding engine (Figure 3-9).

Figure 3-8 N1 Current Speed Control Limit

Selecting Current Speed Control (CSC):
1) Enter Altitude Hold Mode (see the AFCS Section for details).
2) Press the CSC Key (on the AFCS Control Unit).

FUEL AND ELECTRICAL INDICATIONS
The fuel display is located beneath the oil indicators and shows the fuel flow in pounds per hour (pph) and
the tank fuel quantity in pounds (lb) for each engine, the total fuel quantity, and the fuel tank temperature in
°C. The factory can also configure the Fuel Display for metric units.
Engine Fuel Flow
Tank Fuel Quantity
Total Fuel Quantity

Fuel Temperature
Figure 3-9 Fuel Display

Voltages for batteries 1 and 2 are shown as readouts below the fuel indications.

Figure 3-10 Electrical Display

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

115

ENGINE & AIRFRAME SYSTEMS

CABIN PRESSURIZATION
The Cabin Display shows cabin pressurization information (cabin altitude and rate of change, differential
cabin pressure) is shown along with the Landing Field Elevation (LFE) and oxygen system pressure. The trend
of cabin pressure altitude rate change is indicated by a green arrow beside the rate readout.
The LFE is set automatically based on the destination in the active flight plan by touching the FMS Mode
Button, but can also be adjusted manually by the pilot. Automatically entered values appear in green; if the
value is entered by the pilot, it changes to light blue. Pilot-selected LFE is yellow for 30 seconds when a
difference of >5 feet occurs. A red “X” is displayed if the LFE is out of range or the data source is invalid.
If the landing field elevation is high enough, the indication “HI FIELD” is shown at the top of the Cabin
Display and the cabin altitude caution and warning thresholds are increased to avoid generation of nuisance
alert indications.
High Landing
Field Elevation

Pressure Altitude

Pressure Change Rate
Pressure Differential
Landing Field Elevation
Oxygen System Pressure
Figure 3-11 Cabin Pressure Display

Setting the displayed landing field elevation:
1) From Home, touch Aircraft Systems > Landing Field Elevation.
2) Touch the FMS Button to set the Landing Field Elevation to the value for the destination airport in the current
flight plan.
Or:

Use the Manual button to set the desired elevation using the keypad.
3) To confirm the new Landing Field Elevation value, select the Enter Button.

116

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

ENGINE & AIRFRAME SYSTEMS

SPOILER AND LANDING GEAR
Spoiler and landing gear statuses are shown using the indications in Tables 3-3 and 3-4, respectively.
Indication

Spoiler
Status

Description
Landing Gear Down

Main Landing
Gear
Left-side
Landing Gear

Right-side
Landing Gear
Figure 3-12 Spoiler and
Landing Gear Indications

Indication

SPDBRK
FAIL
CLOSED
GND SPLR
SPDBRK
STEEP

Description
Invalid information
Spoilers out of takeoff
configuration
Spoilers failed
Spoilers retracted
Ground spoilers deployed
Speedbrakes deployed
Steep Mode enabled (optional)

Landing Gear Up
Landing Gear Transitioning
(Normal)
Landing Gear Locked Down
(Abnormal)
Landing Gear Locked Up
(Abnormal)
Landing Gear Transitioning
(Abnormal)
Table 3-4 Landing Gear Position Indications

Table 3-3 Spoiler Indications

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

117

ENGINE & AIRFRAME SYSTEMS

FLAPS AND TRIM
Flap deflection is normally displayed beneath the trim indications using a rotating pointer and a green readout
indicating the flap lever setting (0, 1, 2, 3, or FULL). A light blue bug marks the selected flap position. When
the flap is in motion, the readout is dashed. If the position data becomes invalid, a red ‘X’ is displayed over
the flap pointer.
Pitch, roll, and yaw trim indications are shown along scales at the bottom of the EIS Display. If the trim
information becomes invalid, the pointers are removed and the readout (for pitch) is displayed with a red “X”.
Flap
Position
Flap
Lever
Setting

Flap
Selected
Bug

Figure 3-13 Flap and Trim Indications

118

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

ENGINE & AIRFRAME SYSTEMS

3.2 SYNOPTICS
The Synoptics pages show current conditions of certain aircraft functionalities on aviation system diagrams,
reducing workload by allowing the flight crew to rapidly analyze the situation. Aircraft systems graphically
depicted in the synoptic diagrams include:
• Anti-ice system

• Fuel system

• Brake system

• Hydraulics system

• Doors

• Oxygen system

• Electrical system

• Pressurization system

• Environmental system
Accessing Synoptic Pages:
From Home, touch Aircraft Systems.
Shows ECS
Synoptic on
Selected Pane
Shows Electrical
Synoptic on
Selected Pane

Shows System
Status on
Selected Pane
Shows Fuel System
Synoptic Display on
Selected Pane

Shows Ice
Protection
Synoptic on
Selected Pane

Shows
Maintenance
Synoptic on
Selected Pane
Figure 3-14 Aircraft Systems Screen

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

119

ENGINE & AIRFRAME SYSTEMS

SYSTEM STATUS
The Status Synoptics Page is displayed after the power-up splash screen is acknowledged on the MFD. The
aircraft diagram displays open passenger and emergency doors in red and open baggage doors in yellow.
1

10
9

Flight ID

Oxygen

Static Air Temperature (SAT)

Emergency Brake Accumulator Pressure

Total Air Temperature (TAT)

Door Status

True Airspeed (TAS)

Electrical Status

Engine Dispatch Message Box

Hydraulic Pressure

Figure 3-15 System Status Synoptics Page

120

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

ENGINE & AIRFRAME SYSTEMS

ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROL SYSTEM (ECS)
The Environmental Control System (ECS) Synoptic Page provides information about cockpit and cabin
temperatures as well as status information for valves, fans, heat exchangers, and the Vapor Cycle System.

17
1

16
15

3
13

12
11

10
6

Cockpit Temperature Setting

Crossbleed Valve Status (XBV)

Cabin Temperature Setting

Cabin Duct Temperature Setting

Ram Air Valve (RAV)

Heat Exchanger Cooling Pack Circuit

Environmental Control System Valve (ECS) 1

Environmental Control System Valve (ECS) 2

Cockpit Duct Temperature Setting

Actual Cabin Temperature

Pressure Regulating Shutoff Valve (PRSOV) 1

Cabin Evaporator Fan

Vapor Cycle System (VCS)

Actual Cockpit Temperature

Outflow Valve (OFV) Status*

Cockpit Evaporator Fan

Pressure Regulating Shutoff Valve (PRSOV) 2
Figure 3-16 Environmental Control System Synoptics Page
* Outflow valve (OFV) status is displayed only while the aircraft is parked or taxiing.

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

121

ENGINE & AIRFRAME SYSTEMS
Lines between icons on the diagram denote ducting. Icons shown in green are operating normally. A white
icon may indicate that a unit is off or not otherwise operating normally (see Table 3-5). A red “X” indicates
failure of a unit.
Unit

Icons and Descriptions

Fan
On

Off

Heat Exchanger

Vapor Cycle System

PRSOV Valve
Crossbleed Valve
ECS Valve
Ram Air Valve

Open with flow

Open, no flow

Closed

Open with flow

Open, no flow

Closed

Table 3-5 Environmental Control System Unit Status Indications

122

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

ENGINE & AIRFRAME SYSTEMS

ELECTRICAL
The Electrical Synoptics Page uses a diagram of the aircraft’s electrical system to display the system status. The
generators, ground power supply (GPU), batteries, and buses are shown in green to denote normal operation.
Color of the units changes depending on the condition (Table 3-6). A red “X” over a component indicated
invalid data or a failed unit.
Battery

Bus

Generator

Ground Power Unit
Figure 3-17 Electrical Synoptics Page

Unit

Icons and Descriptions

Generator
N2>52%
Bus

Hot Bus

Battery

Bus off

N2<52%

Bus off

Normal

Abnormal

Normal

Abnormal

Table 3-6 Electrical System Unit Status Indications

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

123

ENGINE & AIRFRAME SYSTEMS

FUEL
The Fuel Synoptics Page displays the status of the fuel tanks and feed system. A red “X” over a component
indicated invalid data or a failed unit.
1
2
3

Total Fuel

Fuel Transfer SOV

Fuel Used

Right Engine Feed Line

Left Feed Ejector

RH Pressure Switch

Left DC Pump

Fuel 2 SOV

Left Tank Fuel Quantity

Right Tank Fuel Quantity

Fuel 1 SOV

Right DC Pump

LH Pressure Switch

Right Feed Ejector

Left Engine Feed Line

Figure 3-18 Fuel Synoptics Page

Unit

Icons and Descriptions

Fuel Line
Operating

Not operating

Operating

Not operating

Operating

Not operating

Feed Ejector

Fuel Pressure
Switch

Fuel Shut Off Valve
Open with flow Open, no flow

In transit

Closed

DC Pump
Operating
Fuel Transfer Valve

Open with flow Open, no flow

Not operating

In transit

Closed

Table 3-7 Fuel System Unit Status Indications

124

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

ENGINE & AIRFRAME SYSTEMS

ICE PROTECTION SYSTEM
When the ice protection system is operating normally, all components are shown in green on the system
diagram. Items in white indicate components which are off. A red “X” over a component indicated invalid data
or a failed unit.

9
8

2
1

Windshield Heaters

Crossbleed Valve

Boot Lines and Valves

Ice Protection Bleed Duct

Anti Ice Valve (AIV) 1

Pressure Regulating Shut-Off Valve 2 (PRSOV 2)

Bleed Duct and Skin 1

Engine Anti Ice Valve (EAIV) 2 Valve and Bleed Line

Engine Anti Ice Valve (EAIV) 1 Valve and Bleed Line

Bleed Duct and Skin 2

Pressure Regulating Shut-Off Valve 1 (PRSOV 1)

Anti Ice Valve (AIV) 2

Figure 3-19 Ice Protection Synoptics Page

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

125

ENGINE & AIRFRAME SYSTEMS
Unit

Icons and Descriptions

Anti Ice Line
Operating
Crossbleed Valve (XBV)
Pressure Regulating Shutoff
Valve (PRSOV)
Anti Ice Valve (AIV)
Engine Anti Ice Valve (EAIV)

Not operating

Open with flow

Open, no flow

Closed

Open with flow

Open, no flow

Closed

Table 3-8 Ice Protection System Unit Status Indications

The Minimum Anti-Ice N1 Bug (Figure 3-20) appears as a light blue tick mark on the N1 engine gauges. It
indicates which N1 should be commanded to achieve full anti-ice capability. The bug is visible when the landing
gear is extended and wing anti-ice is on, or when an engine or engine bleed air is lost. If the anti-ice capacity is
not fully operational, the message “A-I LO CAPACITY” appears on the Crew Alerting System (CAS).

Minimum Anti-Ice
N1 Bug

Figure 3-20 Engine Minimum N1 Anti-Ice Indication

126

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

ENGINE & AIRFRAME SYSTEMS

ENGINE MAINTENANCE
NOTE: Refer to the Airplane Flight Manual (AFM) for required actions.

The Engine Maintenance Synoptics Page can only displayed when the aircraft is on the ground and both
engines are off. Maintenance personnel can view status messages for engine dispatch items and the following
engine parameter exceedance peaks and durations recorded by the FADEC for the last engine start-shutdown
cycle:
• Engine fan rotation speed (N1)

• Inter Turbine Temperature (ITT)

• Engine high pressure compressor rotation speed
(N2)

• Main oil temperature and Pressure
• Fuel temperature

If no peaks are detected, the values and times are displayed as dashes. The data is cleared from the display
using the CLEAR E1 and CLEAR E2 buttons on the touch screen controller.
The Engine Maintenance Page also displays ITT and N1 trims loaded in each Engine Data Collection Unit
(EDCU).

Figure 3-21 Engine Maintenance Synoptics Page

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

127

ENGINE & AIRFRAME SYSTEMS

3.3 CREW ALERTING SYSTEM (CAS)
NOTE: Aural alerts associated with abnormal conditions and advisories are managed through the audio

panels. Refer to the Audio Panel and CNS Section for more information.
NOTE: Refer to the Appendices Section for more information on the Crew Alerting System (CAS).

When Crew Alerting System (CAS) messages are generated, the CAS Window opens to the right of the Altimeter
(on the PFDs). Up to 14 messages can be displayed; when more than 14 messages accumulate, the CAS Softkey
becomes available. Pressing the CAS Softkey displays softkeys for scrolling up and down through the messages
in the CAS Window.

CAS
Window
Softkey Annunciation
(Press to Acknowledge
CAS Message)

CAS Scrolling Softkey
Figure 3-22 CAS Display

CAS MESSAGE PRIORITIZATION
NOTE: Information on CAS messages in this pilot’s guide is always superseded by the AFM.

CAS messages are grouped by criticality (warning, caution, advisory) and sorted by order of appearance (most
recent messages on top). The color of the message is based on its urgency and on required action, and the
softkey label changes to display the appropriate annunciation when a CAS message is generated.
• Warning (red) – Immediate crew awareness and action required; accompanied by an aural tone (triple chime
every 3 seconds) and flashing ‘WARNING’ softkey annunciation.
• Caution (yellow) – Immediate crew awareness and possible future corrective action required; accompanied
by an aural tone (single chime every 5 seconds) and flashing ‘CAUTION’ softkey annunciation.

128

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

ENGINE & AIRFRAME SYSTEMS
• Advisory (white) – Crew awareness required and subsequent action may be required; accompanied by a
flashing ‘ADVISORY’ softkey.
The softkey annunciation flashes and the corresponding aural alert sounds until acknowledged by depressing
the softkey.

Figure 3-23 Softkey Annunciations (MSG Softkey Labels)

A CAS message does not appear more than once at a given time. Warning and caution CAS messages flash
when they are generated, and continue to flash until acknowledged. Advisory CAS messages, flash for 5
seconds or until acknowledged.
Some CAS messages are differentiated as root causes of other failures and should be considered first during
the decision-making process when multiple CAS messages are displayed. These “golden” messages flash until
acknowledged and remain in inverse video after being acknowledged manually.
After the acknowledgment, a message remains displayed at the top of its respective priority group in the CAS
Window until either a newer message of the same priority appears or the condition(s) that caused the alert to
display no longer exist.

3.4 ABNORMAL OPERATIONS
NOTE: Refer to the Airplane Flight Manual (AFM) for corrective pilot actions.

ENGINE
When an engine failure occurs, besides the CAS message corresponding to the failed engine (“E1 FAIL” or “E2
FAIL”), the corresponding N1 gauge displays the annunciation “FAIL” in black text over a yellow background
(Figure 3-24). Detection of an engine fire causes a CAS message corresponding to the engine on fire (“E1 FIRE”
or “E2 FIRE”) in addition to the “FIRE” annunciation to be displayed over the ITT gauge in white text over a
red background (Figure 3-25).

Figure 3-24 Engine Failure Indication

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Figure 3-25 Engine Fire Indication

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

129

ENGINE & AIRFRAME SYSTEMS

CABIN PRESSURIZATION
If the cabin altitude (ALT) reaches a caution level, the readout displays black text on a yellow background.
When a high cabin altitude warning occurs, the readout is displayed with white text on a red background, and
the corresponding CAS message “CAB ALTITUDE HI” is issued.
A cabin pressure change rate (RATE) caution readout is indicated with black text on a yellow background.
If low flow or a cabin leak is detected, the cabin pressure change rate readout displays white text on a red
background and the trend arrow becomes red (Figure 3-26).
Excessive cabin differential pressure (DELTA-P) causes the pressure readout to display a yellow background
and black text; warnings are indicated with red background with white readout text. The CAS message “CAB
DELTA-P FAIL” accompanies this condition.
Low oxygen system pressure (OXY) is indicated by a yellow background and black text. The CAS message
“OXY LO PRES” is also issued.
If the pilot selected landing field elevation (LFE) differs by more than five feet from the FMS LFE value, the
LFE readout is shown as black text with a yellow background for 30 seconds.
A red “X” is displayed in place of any readout on the Cabin Display that is invalid or out of range.

Figure 3-26 Cabin Display with Leak Detected

130

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

ENGINE & AIRFRAME SYSTEMS

FLAPS
The following denote abnormal flap conditions:
• Flaps not in position for takeoff – Flap pointer and readout are shown in red with white text (Figures 3-27
and 3-28).
• Flaps have failed or become jammed – Flap pointer and readout are shown in yellow with black text (Figure
3-29)
• Flaps unavailable – Flap pointer is removed and readout is shown in light blue with black text (Figure
3-30)
• Flaps position data invalid – Flap pointer and readout displayed with a red “X”

Figure 3-27 Flaps Retracted
at Takeoff

Figure 3-28 Flaps at FULL
(Landing) Position at Takeoff

Figure 3-29 Flaps Failed

Figure 3-30 Flaps Unavailable

TRIM
Aileron or rudder mistrim are denoted with yellow arrows pointing in the direction of mistrim on the Roll and
Yaw Trim indicators (Figure 3-31).
If takeoff configuration has been selected and the pitch trim position is not within the green band on the pitch
trim scale, the pointer and readout turn red with white text (Figure 3-32).
Aileron
Mistrim
Rudder
Mistrim
Figure 3-31 Mistrim

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Figure 3-32 Pitch Trim
Outside Takeoff Configuration

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

131

ENGINE & AIRFRAME SYSTEMS

Blank Page

132

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

AUDIO AND CNS

SECTION 4 AUDIO AND CNS
4.1 OVERVIEW
The Communication/Navigation/Surveillance (CNS) system includes the Audio Controller, communication
radios, navigation radios, Mode S transponder, and the Controller Pilot Data Link Communications System
(CPDLC). The System Overview Section provides a block diagram description of the Audio and CNS system
interconnection.
The Touchscreen Controller provides primary tuning of the communication transceivers and microphone and
receiver audio selection. The Audio Controller includes an intercom system (ICS) between the pilot, copilot, and
passengers, a marker beacon receiver, and a COM clearance recorder.
The Mode S transponder is controlled with the Touchscreen Controller. The Transponder Button is located in
the upper right of the touchscreen, right below the XPDR IDENT Button. The Transponder Button displays the
active four-digit code, mode, and reply status (Figure 4-1).

PFD COM/NAV DISPLAY AND CONTROLS
1

Figure 4-1 COM/NAV Window, Active NAV Window, and Active COM Frequency Box
1

Active NAV Window – Displays active NAV station ID, frequency, and DME distance.

Selected Source/Frequency Box – Displays selected communication source and frequency.

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

133

AUDIO AND CNS

TOUCHSCREEN CONTROLLER AUDIO AND CNS CONTROLS
1
2

9
10

11
12
13
14

Figure 4-2 Touchscreen CNS Bar Controls

134

MIC Button – Switches between the #1 COM transceiver and the #2 COM transceiver.

COM1 Button – Transfers the standby and active COM1 frequencies.

Audio & Radios Button – Displays/removes the Audio & Radios Screen. The Audio & Radios Screen is
used to control the communication and navigation radios and the Audio settings for the pilot and copilot.

Intercom Button – Displays/removes the Intercom Screen. The Intercom Screen is used to control the
intercom isolation, volume, and squelch settings for the pilot and copilot.

STBY Button (COM1) – Displays/removes the COM1 Standby Screen. The COM1 Standby Screen is used
to enter and transfer COM1 frequencies.

COM2 Button– Transfers the standby and active COM2 frequencies.

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

AUDIO AND CNS
7

Transponder IDENT Button – Sends a distinct identity indication to Air Traffic Control (ATC). When
selected,the word IDENT is displayed in green and pulsates for the duration of the transmission. While
the transponder is replying to an interrogation, an R is displayed on the button.

Transponder Code Button– Displays/removes the Transponder Screen. The Transponder Screen is used to
select the transponder modes and the transponder code using the keypad.

STBY Button (COM2) – Displays/removes the COM2 Standby Screen. The COM2 Standby Screen is used
to enter and transfer COM2 frequencies.

MON Button – Controls which receivers are being explicitly monitored.

Function Label – Indicates middle knob function. Typical: Pilot COM1/COM2 Volume, Push: Squelch

Function Label – Indicates right large and small knob function. Typical Frequency Entry: COM1/COM2
Frequency, Push:1-2, Hold: Typical Data Entry: Data Entry, Push: Enter, Hold:

Middle Knob – Function as labeled (see #12)

Large/Small Right Knob – Function as labeled (see #12). Data Entry: Large knob moves the cursor from field
to field. Small knob edits character by character. Frequency Entry: Large knob increases/decreases MHz;
Small knob increases/decreases kHz. Press the small knob to confirm the frequency. Press and hold to
transfer the standby frequency to the active frequency.

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

135

AUDIO AND CNS

4.2 COM OPERATION
COM TRANSCEIVER SELECTION AND ACTIVATION
NOTE: When turning on the Prodigy Touch for use, the system remembers the last frequencies used and the

active COM transceiver state prior to shutdown.
The COM1 and COM2 Frequencies are shown on the CNS Bar. The COM1, COM2 and COM3 frequencies
are also shown on the Audio & Radios Screen. The COM transceiver can be selected for transmitting on the
Touchscreen Controller. During reception of audio from the COM radio selected for transmission, audio from
the other COM radio(s) is muted.
The active COM frequency is displayed in green. The standby frequency of the COM selected for tuning is
light blue. When the standby frequency of the COM selected for tuning is being tuned with the right knobs,
the entire standby frequency button is highlighted in light blue The other standby frequency is white.
Enabling COM3 voice communication:
1) Touch the Audio & Radios Button to display the Audio & Radios Screen.
2) If necessary, scroll to find COM3.
3) Touch the Datalink Button.
4) Touch the OK Button in response to “Disable Datalink Mode?”. To cancel the request, touch the Cancel
Button.

Disabling COM3 voice communication:
1) Touch the Audio & Radios Button to display the Audio & Radios Screen.
2) If necessary, scroll to find COM3.
3) Touch the COM3 Frequency Button.
4) Touch the Datalink Button to disable COM3 voice communication.
Or:
1) From Home, touch the CPDLC Button to display the CPDLC Screen.
2) Touch the OK Button in response to “Switch Radio to Data Mode?”. To cancel the request, touch the Cancel
Button.

Selecting a COM Radio for transmission:

Touch the MIC Button in the CNS Bar to switch between COM1 and COM2 radios until the desired COM is
selected.
Or:
1) Touch the Audio & Radios Button to display the Audio & Radios Screen.
2) Touch the desired MIC Button on the Audio & Radios Screen to select the COM radio for transmission.

136

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

AUDIO AND CNS
Selecting a COM Radio for monitoring:

Touch the MON Button in the CNS Bar to monitor the COM not selected for transmission.
Or:
1) Touch the Audio & Radios Button to display the Audio & Radios Screen.
2) Touch the COM1 Button, COM2 Button, or COM3 Button to select the COM radio for monitoring.
CNS Bar

MIC Button (COM1 selected for transmission)

COM1 Active Frequency
(selected for transmission)

COM2 Primary Frequency

COM1 Standby Frequency

COM2 Standby Frequency

COM1 Active Frequency
COM1 Standby Frequency
COM2 Primary Frequency
COM2 Standby Frequency

MIC Button (COM1 selected
for transmission)
MIC Button(COM2)
Audio & Radios Screen

Communication
Source/Primary
Frequency
(COM1 selected
for transmission)

Figure 4-3 Selecting a COM Radio for Transmission

CNS Bar Symbol Meaning of Symbol
COM1 selected for transmission/monitoring
COM2 selected for transmission/monitoring
HF COM selected for transmission/monitoring
COM3 selected for transmission/monitoring
An additional audio source is manually selected for monitoring
Passenger Address is selected for transmission
CNS Bar MIC/MON Button Symbols

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

137

AUDIO AND CNS
TRANSMIT/RECEIVE INDICATIONS
During COM transmission, a white TX appears by the active COM frequency. During COM signal reception,
a white RX appears by the active COM frequency.
Transmit Indicator

Receive Indicator

Transmit Indicator
Receive Indicator

Transmit Indicator on PFD
Receive Indicator on PFD
Figure 4-4 COM Radio Transmit and Receive Indications

138

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

AUDIO AND CNS

COM FREQUENCY TUNING
NOTE: If an invalid frequency is entered, the invalid digits are ignored and a confirmation window appears.

Selecting a COM1/2 frequency using the Touchscreen Controller:
1) Touch the COM1 STBY Button or COM2 STBY Button in the CNS Bar to display the COM1/COM2 Standby
Screen.
2) Use the keypad to select the frequency.
3) Touch the Enter Button to accept the new frequency as the COM1/COM2 standby frequency; or touch the
XFER Button to accept the new frequency as the COM1/COM2 active frequency and transfer the previously
active frequency to the standby frequency.
Or:
1) Press the small right knob to select the COM desired for tuning (selected standby frequency is light blue).
2) Turn the large and small right knobs to tune the frequency (Large knob increases/decreases MHz; Small knob
increases/decreases kHz).
3) Press the small right knob to enter the new frequency as the standby frequency; or press and hold the small right
knob to transfer the new standby frequency to the active frequency.

Frequency selected
for tuning
Find Button

Frequency Transfer (XFER) Button
Enter Button
Knob function labels
Figure 4-5 COM Frequency Tuning Keypad

Or:

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

139

AUDIO AND CNS
1) Touch the Audio & Radios Button to display the Audio & Radios Screen.
2) Touch the COM1/COM2 volume slider, or press the small right knob, to select COM1/COM2 for tuning.
3) Turn the large and small right knobs to select the frequency (Large knob increases/decreases MHz; Small knob
increases/decreases kHz).
4) Press the small right knob to accept the new frequency as the standby frequency; or press and hold the small
right knob to accept the new frequency as the COM1/COM2 active frequency and transfer the previously active
frequency to the standby frequency

COM selected for
tuning (light blue
border)

COM1 Volume Slider
COM2 Frequency Button

Knob function labels
Figure 4-6 Audio & Radios Screen - COM1/COM2 Frequency Tuning

Or:
1) Touch the Audio & Radios Button to display the Audio & Radios Screen.
2) Touch the COM1/COM2 frequency button to display the COM1/COM2 Standby Screen.
3) Use the keypad to select the desired frequency.
4) Touch the Enter Button to accept the new frequency as the COM1/COM2 standby frequency; or touch the
XFER Button to accept the new frequency as the COM1/COM2 active frequency and transfer the previously
active frequency to the standby frequency.

140

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

AUDIO AND CNS
Selecting a COM3 frequency using the Touchscreen Controller:
1) Touch the Audio & Radios Button to display the Audio & Radios Screen.
2) Touch the COM3 volume slider to select COM3 for tuning.
3) Turn the large and small right knobs to select the frequency (Large knob increases/decreases MHz; Small knob
increases/decreases kHz).
4) Press the small right knob to accept the new frequency as the standby frequency; or press and hold the small
right knob to accept the new frequency as the COM1/COM2 active frequency and transfer the previously active
frequency to the standby frequency

COM selected for
tuning (light blue
border)

COM3 Volume Slider
COM3 Frequency Button

Knob function labels
Figure 4-7 Audio & Radios Screen - COM3 Frequency Tuning

Or:
1) Touch the Audio & Radios Button to display the Audio & Radios Screen.
2) Touch the COM3 frequency button to display the COM3 Standby Screen.
3) Use the keypad to select the desired frequency.
4) Touch the Enter Button to accept the new frequency as the COM3 standby frequency; or touch the XFER
Button to accept the new frequency as the COM3 active frequency and transfer the previously active frequency
to the standby frequency.

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

141

AUDIO AND CNS
Finding and selecting a COM frequency from the CNS Bar:
1) Touch the COM1 STBY Button (CNS Bar) or the COM2 STBY Button (CNS Bar) or the COM3 Frequency Button
to display the COM1/2/3 Standby Screen.
2) Touch the Find Button to display the Find COM Frequency Screen.
3) Touch the tab for the desired type of frequency (Recent, Nearest, Dest, Flight Plan, or Favorite).
4) Scroll the list to find the desired frequency.
5) Touch the frequency button to accept the new frequency as the COM1/COM2/COM3 standby frequency.
Select a
tab for the
frequency
category

Find
Button

Select the
frequency
button to
tune the
standby
frequency
Selecting
Multiple
accesses
another
level with
selectable
frequencies
Figure 4-8 Find COM Frequency Screen

142

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

AUDIO AND CNS
Finding and selecting a COM frequency from the Airport Info Screen:
1) From Home, touch Waypoint Info > Airport to display the Airport Information Screen.
2) If needed, touch the airport button to enter/find the desired airport.
3) Touch the Freqs Tab to display the Airport Frequencies Screen.
4) Scroll the list to find the desired frequency.
5) Touch the frequency button to display the Load Frequency Screen.
6) Touch the location button to load the frequency to COM1/2 Active/Standby or Favorites.
Airport
Button

Freqs
Tab
Frequency
Button

Location
Buttons

Figure 4-9 Airport Info Screen Tuning

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

143

AUDIO AND CNS
Finding and selecting a COM frequency from the Nearest Airport Screen:
1) From Home, touch Nearest > Airport to display the Nearest Airport Screen.
2) Scroll the list to find the desired airport.
3) Touch the airport button to display the Waypoint Options Window.
4) Touch the Airport Info Button to display the Airport Information Screen.
5) Touch the Freqs Tab to display the Airport Frequencies Screen.
6) Scroll the list to find the desired frequency.
7) Touch the frequency button to display the Load Frequency Screen.
8) Touch the location button to load the frequency to COM1/2 Active/Standby or Favorites.

Airport
Button

Airport Info
Button

Frequency
Button
Freqs
Tab

Figure 4-10 Nearest Airport Tuning

144

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

AUDIO AND CNS
Finding and selecting a COM frequency from the Nearest Airspace/ARTCC/FSS/Weather Screen:
1) From Home, touch the Nearest > (Airspace or ARTCC or FSS or Weather) to display the Nearest (Airspace
or ARTCC or FSS or Weather) Screen.
2) Scroll the list to find the desired frequency.
3) Touch the frequency button to display the Load Frequency Screen.
4) Touch the location button to load the frequency to COM1/2 Active/Standby or Favorites.

Frequency
Button

Figure 4-11 Nearest Airspace/ARTCC/FSS/Weather Tuning

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

145

AUDIO AND CNS

FREQUENCY SPACING
The COM radios can tune either 25-kHz spacing (118.000 to 136.975 MHz) or 8.33-kHz spacing (118.000
to 136.990 MHz) for 760-channel or 3040-channel configuration. When 8.33-kHz channel spacing is selected,
all of the 25-kHz channel spacing frequencies are also available in the complete 3040-channel list.

8.33-kHz Channel Spacing

25-kHz Channel Spacing

Figure 4-12 COM Channel Spacing

Changing COM frequency channel spacing:
1) From Home, touch Utilities >Setup > Avionics Settings.
2) Scroll the list to show the COM Channel Spacing button.
3) Touch the COM Channel Spacing button to display the choice of 25.0 kHz or 8.33 kHz.
4) Touch the channel spacing button.

Select 8.33-kHz
or 25.0-kHz
COM Frequency
Channel Spacing

Figure 4-13 Changing COM Frequency Channel Spacing

146

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

AUDIO AND CNS

AUTOMATIC SQUELCH
Automatic Squelch quiets unwanted static noise when no audio signal is received, while still providing good
sensitivity to weak COM signals. To disable Automatic Squelch for the selected transceiver, press the middle
knob. When Automatic Squelch is disabled, COM audio reception is always on. Continuous static noise is
heard over the headsets and speaker, if selected. Pressing the middle knob again enables Automatic Squelch .
When Automatic Squelch is disabled, a white SQ appears next to the active COM frequency.
Automatic Squelch Off Indicator

Automatic Squelch Off
Indicator

Middle knob - Push to
disable/enable Automatic
Squelch

Automatic Squelch Off Indicator
on PFD
Figure 4-14 COM Radio Automatic Squelch Disable/Enable

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

147

AUDIO AND CNS

VOLUME
The selected COM radio volume level can be adjusted from 0 to 100% on the touchscreen controller by
turning the middle knob or by sliding your finger right or left on the COM volume slider. Turning the knob
clockwise increases volume, turning the knob counterclockwise decreases volume. Sliding to the right increases
volume, sliding to the left decreases volume. When adjusting volume, the level is displayed in place of the
active frequency in the CNS Bar, and remains for two seconds after the change. When the Audio & Radios
Screen is displayed, the volume changes are not shown in the CNS Bar.
COM1 Volume

Selected COM
Volume

Middle Knob
- Turn to adjust
COM volume

Figure 4-15 COM Volume Level

148

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

AUDIO AND CNS

HF COM TRANSCEIVER SELECTION AND ACTIVATION
The HF COM Frequencies are shown on the PFD. The HF COM transceiver can be selected for transmitting
on the Touchscreen Controller. During reception of audio from the HF COM radio selected for transmission,
audio from the other COM radio(s) is muted.
Selecting the HF COM Radio for transmission:
1) Touch the Audio & Radios Button to display the Audio & Radios Screen.
2) Touch the desired MIC Button on the Audio & Radios Screen to select the HF COM radio for transmission.

Selecting the HF COM Radio for monitoring:
1) Touch the Audio & Radios Button to display the Audio & Radios Screen.
2) Touch the HF Button to select the HF COM radio for monitoring.
CNS Bar

MIC Button (HF selected for transmission)

MIC Button (HF selected
for transmission)

Audio & Radios Screen

Figure 4-16 Selecting the HF COM Radio for Transmission
Communication Source/Primary Frequency
on PFD (HF selected for transmission)
Figure 4-17 HF COM Frequency Displayed on PFD

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

149

AUDIO AND CNS

HF COM VOLUME
The selected HF COM radio volume level can be adjusted from 0 to 100% on the touchscreen controller
by turning the middle knob or by sliding your finger right or left on the COM volume slider. Turning the
knob clockwise increases volume, turning the knob counterclockwise decreases volume. Sliding to the right
increases volume, sliding to the left decreases volume.
The volume can also be adjusted on the PFD using the PFD Controller. With the COM/NAV Window
displayed, turn the large right knob to select the VOLUME field. Turn the small right knob to adjust the volume
(Turning the knob clockwise increases volume, turning the knob counterclockwise decreases volume).

Selected HF
COM Volume

Middle Knob
- Turn to adjust
COM volume

Figure 4-19 COM Volume Level

150

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

AUDIO AND CNS

4.3 NAV OPERATION
NAV RADIO SELECTION AND ACTIVATION
The active NAV frequency selected for navigation is shown on the PFD. Active and Standby NAV frequencies
are shown on the Touchscreen Controller.
A NAV radio is selected for navigation by selecting the Active NAV Softkey located on the PFD. The NAV
frequency selected for navigation is displayed in green. Selecting the Active NAV Softkey once selects NAV1
as the navigation radio. Selecting the Active NAV Softkey a second time selects NAV2 as the navigation radio.
Selecting the Active NAV Softkey a third time activates FMS mode. Selecting the Active NAV Softkey again
cycles back to NAV1.
The three navigation modes that can be cycled through are:
• VOR1 (or LOC1) – If NAV1 is selected, a green single line arrow (shown) labeled either VOR1 or LOC1 is
displayed on the HSI and the active NAV1 frequency is displayed in green.
• VOR2 (or LOC2) – If NAV2 is selected, a green double line arrow (not shown) labeled either VOR2 or LOC2
is displayed on the HSI and the active NAV2 frequency is displayed in green.
• FMS – If FMS Mode is selected, a magenta single line arrow (not shown) appears on the HSI and neither NAV
radio is selected. Both active NAV frequencies are displayed in white on the Touchscreen Controller.

NAV1 Active Frequency
and ID

The NAV Radio is selected by
pressing the Active NAV Softkey
Figure 4-20 Selecting a NAV Radio for Navigation

See the Flight Instruments Section for selecting the DME and Bearing Information windows and using VOR
or ADF as the source for the bearing pointer.

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

151

AUDIO AND CNS
NAV radios are selected for listening by pressing the corresponding buttons on the Touchscreen Controller.
Touching the NAV1 or NAV2 Button selects and deselects the navigation radio source. Selected audio can be heard
over the headset and the speaker (if selected). All radios can be selected individually or simultaneously.

NAV1 Active Frequency/ID
NAV1 Standby Frequency
NAV2 Active Frequency/ID
NAV2 Standby Frequency

NAV1 Button
(selected for monitoring)
NAV2 Button
(not selected)

Figure 4-21 Selecting a NAV Radio for Monitoring

Selecting/deselecting a navigation radio for monitoring:
1) Touch the Audio & Radios Button to display the Audio & Radios Screen.
2) Touch the NAV1 or NAV2 Button on the Audio & Radios Screen to select/deselect the radio for monitoring.

NAV RECEIVER TUNING
The NAV frequencies are tuned from the Touchscreen Controller.

NAV selected for
tuning (light blue
border)

NAV1 Volume Slider
NAV2 Frequency Button

Knob function labels
Figure 4-22 Audio & Radios Screen - NAV Frequency Tuning

Selecting a NAV frequency using the Touchscreen Controller:
1) Touch the Audio & Radios Button to display the Audio & Radios Screen.
2) Touch the NAV1/NAV2 frequency button to select NAV1/NAV2 for tuning, and display the NAV1/NAV2 frequency
tuning screen.

152

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

AUDIO AND CNS
3) Use the keypad to select the desired frequency.
4) Touch the Enter Button to enter the new frequency as the NAV1/NAV2 standby frequency; or touch the XFER
Button to enter the new frequency as the NAV1/NAV2 standby frequency and transfer it to the active frequency.

Find Button

XFER Button
Enter Button
Knob function labels
Figure 4-23 NAV Frequency Tuning Window

Or:
1) Touch the Audio & Radios Button to display the Audio & Radios Screen.
2) Touch the NAV1/NAV2 volume slider to select NAV1/NAV2 for tuning.
3) Turn the large and small right knobs to tune the frequency (Large knob increases/decreases MHz; Small knob
increases/decreases kHz).
4) Press the small right knob to enter the new frequency as the NAV1/NAV2 standby frequency; or press and hold
the small right knob to transfer the new standby frequency to the active frequency.

Finding and selecting a NAV frequency from the Airport Info Screen:
1) From Home, touch Waypoint Info > Airport to display the Airport Information Screen.
2) If needed, touch the airport button to enter/find the desired airport.
3) Touch the Freqs Tab to display the Airport Frequencies Screen.
4) Scroll the list to find the desired frequency.
5) Touch the frequency button to display the Load Frequency Screen.
6) Touch the location button to load the frequency to NAV1/2 Active/Standby or Favorites.

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

153

AUDIO AND CNS

Airport
Button
Frequency
Button
Freqs
Tab

Location
buttons

Figure 4-24 Airport Info Screen Tuning

Finding and selecting a NAV frequency from the VOR Info Screen:
1) From Home, touch Waypoint Info > VOR to display the VOR Information Screen.
2) If needed, touch the VOR button to enter/find the desired airport.
3) Touch the frequency button to display the Load Frequency Screen.
4) Touch the location button to load the frequency to NAV1/2 Active/Standby or Favorites.
VOR
Button
Location
buttons

Frequency
Button

Figure 4-25 VOR Info Screen Tuning

154

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

AUDIO AND CNS
Finding and selecting a NAV frequency from the Nearest Airport Screen:
1) From Home, touch Nearest > Airport to display the Nearest Airport Screen.
2) Scroll the list to find the desired airport.
3) Touch the airport button to display the Waypoint Options Window.
4) Touch the Airport Info Button to display the Airport Information Screen.
5) Touch the Freqs Tab to display the Airport Frequencies Screen.
6) Scroll the list to find the desired frequency.
7) Touch the frequency button to display the Load Frequency Screen.
8) Touch the location button to load the frequency to NAV1/2 Active/Standby or Favorites.

Airport
Button

Airport Info
Button

Frequency
Button
Freqs
Tab

Location
buttons

Figure 4-26 Nearest Airport Tuning

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

155

AUDIO AND CNS
Finding and selecting a NAV frequency from the Nearest VOR/FSS/Weather Screen:
1) From Home, touch the Nearest > (VOR or FSS or Weather) to display the Nearest (Airspace or FSS or
Weather) Screen.
2) Scroll the list to find the desired frequency.
3) Touch the frequency button to display the Load Frequency Screen.
4) Touch the location button to load the frequency to NAV1/2 Active/Standby or Favorites.

Frequency
Button

Location
Buttons

Figure 4-27 Nearest VOR/FSS/Weather Tuning

VOR/LOC ID
When the Morse code Identifier audio is on for a NAV radio, a white ID appears to the right of the active
NAV frequency. Pressing the middle knob turns off the Morse code audio only for the selected radio. To turn
off both NAV IDs, select each NAV in turn and press the middle knob to turn the Morse code off.

Station
Identifier
Morse Code ID
is selected
Figure 4-28 VOR/LOC ID Locations

156

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

AUDIO AND CNS
VOLUME
The selected NAV radio volume level can be adjusted from 0 to 100% on the touchscreen controller by turning
the middle knob or by sliding your finger right or left on the NAV volume slider. Turning the knob clockwise
increases volume, turning the knob counterclockwise decreases volume. Sliding to the right increases volume,
sliding to the left decreases volume.

Selected NAV
Volume

Middle knob Turn to adjust NAV
volume
Figure 4-29 NAV Volume Level

AUTO-TUNING NAV FREQUENCIES ON APPROACH ACTIVATION
NOTE: The primary NAV frequency is auto-tuned upon loading a VOR or ILS/Localizer approach.
NOTE: When an ILS/LOC approach has been activated in FMS Mode, the system switches to NAV Mode as

the final approach course is intercepted (within 15 nm of the FAF). See the Flight Management Section for
details.
NAV frequencies are automatically loaded into the NAV Frequency Box on approach activation.
When loading or activating a VOR or ILS/LOC approach, the approach frequency is automatically transferred
to a NAV frequency field as follows:
• If the current CDI navigation source is FMS, the approach frequency is transferred to the NAV1 active
frequency field. The frequency that was previously in the NAV1 active frequency field is transferred to
standby.
• If the current CDI navigation source is FMS, and if the approach frequency is already loaded into the NAV1
standby frequency field, the standby frequency is transferred to active.
• If the current CDI navigation source is NAV1 or NAV2, the approach frequency is transferred to the standby
frequency fields of the selected CDI NAV radio.

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

157

AUDIO AND CNS

MARKER BEACON RECEIVER
NOTE: The marker beacon indicators operate independently of marker beacon audio and cannot be turned

off.
The marker beacon receiver is used as part of the ILS. The marker beacon receiver is always on and detects
any marker beacon signals within the reception range of the aircraft. The receiver detects the three marker tones
– outer, middle, and inner – and provides the marker beacon annunciations located to the left of the Altimeter
on the PFD.
Outer Marker
Indication

Middle Marker
Indication

Inner Marker
Indication

Figure 4-30 Marker Beacon Annunciations on the PFD
Marker Beacon
Mute Button
(flashing)
Marker Beacon
Volume Slider
Marker Button

Marker Beacon
High Sense
Button

Figure 4-31 Marker Beacon Keys

Marker Volume
Knob Label

The Touchscreen Controller provides three different states of marker beacon audio operation; Selected, Muted,
and Deselected. Pressing the MARKER Button selects/deselects marker beacon audio. The button annunciator
indicates when marker beacon audio is selected.
During marker beacon audio reception, pressing the flashing MUTE Button mutes the audio but does not
affect the marker annunciations. The marker tone is silenced, then waits for the next marker tone. The flashing
MUTE Button is also removed during audio muting. The audio returns when the next marker beacon signal is
received.

158

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

AUDIO AND CNS
Pressing the High Sense Button switches between high and low marker beacon receiver sensitivity. The High
Sense function (annunciator illuminated) is used to provide an earlier indication when nearing a marker during
an approach. The Low Sense function (annunciator extinguished) results in a narrower marker dwell while
over a station.
The Marker Beacon volume level can be adjusted from 0 to 100% on the touchscreen controller by turning
the middle knob or by sliding your finger right or left on the Marker Beacon Volume Slider. Turning the
knob clockwise increases volume, turning the knob counterclockwise decreases volume. Sliding to the right
increases volume, sliding to the left decreases volume.

ADF/DME TUNING
See the Flight Instruments Section for displaying the DME and bearing information windows (ADF) and
using the ADF as the source for the bearing pointer.
The system tunes the ADF receiver (optional) and DME transceiver (optional). The ADF is tuned by entering
the frequency in the ADF standby frequency field of the Audio & Radios Screen on the Touchscreen Controller.
The UHF DME frequency is tuned by pairing with a VHF NAV frequency. DME frequency pairing is automatic
and only the VHF NAV frequency is shown.
The following ADF/DME information is displayed on the Touchscreen Controller:
• Active and standby ADF frequencies
• ADF receiver mode
• ADF receiver volume
• DME tuning mode (DME transceiver pairing)
• DME receiver volume

ADF Volume Slider
ADF1 Button

ADF Control Button

DME1 Button

DME Control Button

DME Volume Slider
ADF Volume Knob Label

ADF Frequency/Transfer Knob Label
Figure 4-32 ADF/DME Tuning

The selected ADF/DME volume level can be adjusted from 0 to 100% on the touchscreen controller by turning
the middle knob or by sliding your finger right or left on the NAV volume slider. Turning the knob clockwise
increases volume, turning the knob counterclockwise decreases volume. Sliding to the right increases volume,
sliding to the left decreases volume.

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

159

AUDIO AND CNS
ADF TUNING
ADF frequencies in the 190.0-kHz to 1799.5-kHz range are entered in the standby ADF frequency field.
The system does not tune the ADF emergency frequency, 2182.0‑kHz.
Selecting an ADF frequency:
1) Touch Audio & Radios to display the Audio & Radios Screen.
2) Scroll the list to find the ADF.
3) Touch the ADF control button to display the ADF Mode/Tuning Screen.
4) Use the keypad to select the desired frequency.
5) Touch the Enter Button to enter the new frequency as the ADF standby frequency; or touch the XFER Button
to enter the new frequency as the ADF standby frequency and transfer it to the active frequency.

Find Button

XFER Button
Enter Button
Knob function labels
Figure 4-33 ADF Mode/Tuning Screen

Or:
1) Touch the Audio & Radios Button to display the Audio & Radios Screen.
2) Scroll the list to find the ADF.
3) Touch the ADF control button to display the ADF Mode/Tuning Screen.
4) Turn the large and small right knobs to tune the frequency (Large knob increases/decreases kHz; Small knob
selects .5 kHz).
5) Press the small right knob to enter the new frequency as the ADF standby frequency; or press and hold the small
right knob to transfer the new standby frequency to the active frequency.

160

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

AUDIO AND CNS
Finding and selecting an ADF frequency:
1) Touch the Audio & Radios Button to display the Audio & Radios Screen.
2) Scroll the list to find the ADF.
3) Touch the ADF control button to display the ADF Mode/Tuning Screen.
4) Touch the Find Button to display the Find ADF Frequency Screen.
5) Touch the tab for the desired type of frequency (Recent, Nearest, Dest, Flight Plan, or Favorite).
6) Scroll the list to find the desired frequency.
7) Touch the frequency button to enter the new frequency as the ADF standby frequency.
Select a
tab for the
frequency
category
Select the
frequency
button to
tune the
standby
frequency

Find
Button

Figure 4-34 Finding an ADF Frequency

Transferring the active and standby ADF frequencies:
1) Touch the Audio & Radios Button to display the Audio & Radios Screen.
2) Scroll the list to find the ADF.
3) Touch the ADF volume slider to select the ADF for transfer.
4) Press and hold the small right knob to transfer the frequencies.

ADF Volume slider

ADF Transfer Knob Label
Figure 4-35 ADF Frequency Transfer

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

161

AUDIO AND CNS
SELECTING ADF RECEIVER MODE
The following modes can be selected: (In all modes NDB audio can be heard by selecting the ADF1 Button
on the Touchscreen Controller.)
• ANT (Antenna) – The ADF bearing pointer parks on the HSI at 90 degrees. Best mode for listening to NDB
audio.
• ADF (Automatic Direction Finder) – The ADF pointer points to the relative bearing of the NDB station.
• ADF/BFO (ADF/Beat Frequency Oscillator) – The ADF pointer points to the relative bearing of the NDB
station and an audible tone confirms signal reception. This mode allows identification of the interrupted
carrier beacon stations used in various parts of the world.
• ANT/BFO (Antenna/Beat Frequency Oscillator) – The ADF bearing pointer parks on the HSI at 90 degrees
while an audible tone is provided when a signal is received. This mode also allows identification of the
interrupted carrier beacon stations and confirms signal reception.
Selecting an ADF receiver mode:
1) Touch Audio & Radios to display the Audio & Radios Screen.
2) Scroll the list to find the ADF.
3) Touch the ADF control button to display the ADF Mode/Tuning Screen.
4) Touch the ANT, ADF, ADF/BFO, or ANT/BFO Button to select the ADF mode.

ADF Mode Buttons

Figure 4-36 ADF Mode Selection

162

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

AUDIO AND CNS
DME TUNING
NOTE: The system remembers the last frequency used for DME tuning and the NAV1, NAV2, or HOLD state

prior to shutdown.
The following DME transceiver pairings can be selected:
• NAV1 – Pairs the DME frequency from the selected NAV1 frequency.
• NAV2 – Pairs the DME frequency from the selected NAV2 frequency.
• HOLD – When in the HOLD position, the DME frequency remains paired with the last selected NAV
frequency.
DME1
Mode
Control
Button
DME1
Audio
Select
Button

DME
Mode
Select
Buttons

Figure 4-37 DME Mode Selection

Selecting DME transceiver pairing:
1) Touch Audio & Radios to display the Audio & Radios Screen.
2) Scroll the list to find the DME.
3) Touch the DME mode control button to display the DME Mode Window.
4) Touch the NAV1 Mode, NAV2 Mode, or HOLD Mode Button to select the DME mode.

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

163

AUDIO AND CNS

4.4 MODE S TRANSPONDER
The Mode S Transponder provides Mode A, Mode C, and Mode S interrogation and reply capabilities. Selective
addressing or Mode Select (Mode S) capability includes the following features:
• Level-2 reply data link capability (used to exchange information between aircraft and ATC facilities)
• Surveillance identifier capability
• Flight ID (Flight Identification) reporting – The Mode S Transponder reports aircraft identification as either the
aircraft registration or a unique Flight ID.
• Altitude reporting
• Airborne status determination
• Transponder capability reporting
• Mode S Enhanced Surveillance (EHS) requirements
• Acquisition squitter – Acquisition squitter, or short squitter, is the transponder 24-bit identification address.
The transmission is sent periodically, regardless of the presence of interrogations. The purpose of acquisition
squitter is to enable Mode S ground stations and aircraft equipped with a Traffic Avoidance System (TAS) to
recognize the presence of Mode S-equipped aircraft for selective interrogation.
• Transmission of the Automatic Dependent Surveillance-Broadcast (ADS-B) position, velocity, and heading
information periodically without requiring an interrogation.
The Hazard Avoidance Section provides more details on traffic avoidance systems.

TCAS II TRANSPONDER CONTROLS
TCAS II transponder mode selection, code entry, Flight ID entry, and IDENT activation are controlled and
displayed on the Touchscreen Controller.
Transponder IDENT Button
Transponder Mode Button
Figure 4-38 Transponder Display and Controls

164

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

AUDIO AND CNS

TCAS II TRANSPONDER MODE SELECTION
Transponder mode selection can be automatic (ALT Mode) or manual (STBY, ON, and ALT Modes) and is
accessed by selecting the Transponder Mode Button, then the Standby, On, or Altitude Reporting Button.
Selecting a transponder mode:
1) Touch the Transponder Mode Button to display the Transponder Screen.
2) Touch a XPDR Mode Selection Button to activate the transponder mode.

XPDR Mode Selection
Buttons

Figure 4-39 TCAS II Transponder Mode Selection

STANDBY MODE (MANUAL)
NOTE: In Standby Mode, the IDENT function is inhibited. TCAS II is switched to Standby Mode, because the

transponder is not capable of supporting TCAS II operation in Standby Mode.
Standby Mode can be selected at any time by touching the Standby Button. In Standby, the transponder
does not reply to interrogations, but new codes can be entered. When Standby is selected, a white STBY
indication appears in the Transponder Mode Button and the transponder code is also white. In all other
modes, these fields appear in green.

Standby Mode
Figure 4-40 Standby Mode

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

165

AUDIO AND CNS
ON MODE (MANUAL)
NOTE: TCAS II is switched to Standby Mode, because the transponder is not capable of supporting TCAS II

operation in ON Mode.
ON Mode can be selected at any time by touching the On Button. ON Mode generates Mode A and Mode S
replies, but Mode C altitude reporting is inhibited. In ON Mode, a green ON indication appears in the
Transponder Mode Button.

ON Mode (No
Altitude Reporting)
Figure 4-41 ON Mode

ALTITUDE MODE (AUTOMATIC OR MANUAL)
Altitude Reporting Mode is automatically selected when the aircraft becomes airborne. Altitude Reporting
Mode may also be selected manually by touching the Altitude Reporting Button.
If Altitude Mode is selected, a green ALT indication appears in the Transponder Mode Button, and all
transponder replies requesting altitude information are provided with pressure altitude information.

Altitude Reporting Mode
(Mode C Altitude Reporting)
Figure 4-42 Altitude Reporting Mode

ENTERING A TRANSPONDER CODE
Entering a transponder code with the keypad:
1) Touch the Transponder Code Button to display Transponder Screen.
2) Use the keypad to select the desired code.
3) Touch the Enter Button to enter the new code, or wait approximately two seconds for automatic entry.

166

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

AUDIO AND CNS

Transponder Code Entry

Figure 4-43 Transponder Code Entry

Entering a transponder code with the knobs:
1) Touch the Transponder Code Button to display the Transponder Screen.
2) Turn the large right knob one click either way to place the editing cursor on the first digit of the existing code.
3) Turn the small right knob to enter the first digit.
4) Turn the large right knob to move the cursor to the next digit.
5) Turn the small right knob to enter the next digit, repeat steps 4 and 5 until complete.
6) Touch the Enter Button, or push the small right knob, to enter the new code.
Or:
1) Touch the Transponder Mode Button to display the Transponder Screen.
2) Turn the small right knob one click either way to erase the previous code and place the editing cursor on the first
digit.
3) Turn the small right knob to enter the first digit.
4) Turn the large right knob to move the cursor to the next digit.
5) Turn the small right knob to enter the next digit, repeat steps 4 and 5 until complete.
6) Touch the Enter Button, or push the small right knob, to enter the new code.

Pressing the Cancel Button before code entry is complete cancels code entry and restores the previous code.

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

167

AUDIO AND CNS

IDENT FUNCTION
NOTE: In Standby Mode, the IDENT Button is inoperative.

Selecting the Transponder IDENT Button sends a distinct identity indication to Air Traffic Control (ATC).
The indication distinguishes the identing transponder from all the others on the air traffic controller’s screen.
When the Transponder IDENT Button is selected, the word IDENT appears on the button and pulsates for the
duration of the identity indication.
Transponder IDENT Active

Figure 4-44 Transponder IDENT Indication

FLIGHT ID REPORTING
NOTE: If the Flight ID is required but the system is not configured for it, contact a Garmin-authorized service

center for configuration.
When the Flight ID must be entered before flight operation, the identifier is placed on the Transponder Screen
on the Touchscreen Controller. The Flight ID field can hold up to eight characters.
Entering a Flight ID:
1) Touch the Transponder Mode Button to display the Transponder Screen.
2) Touch the Flight ID Button to display the keypad.
3) Use the keypad to select the desired flight ID.
4) Touch the Enter Button to enter the new flight ID.

Flight ID Button

Figure 4-45 Flight ID Entry

168

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

AUDIO AND CNS

4.5 ADDITIONAL AUDIO FUNCTIONS
MONO/STEREO HEADSETS
Stereo headsets are recommended for use in this aircraft.
Using a monaural headset in a stereo jack shorts the right headset channel output to ground. While this does
not damage the Audio Controller, a person listening on a monaural headset hears only the left channel in both
ears. If a monaural headset is used at one of the passenger positions, any other passenger using a stereo headset
hears audio in the left ear only.

SPEAKER
All of the radios can be heard over the cabin speaker. Pressing the Speaker Button selects and deselects the
cabin speaker. Speaker audio is muted when the PTT is pressed. Certain aural alerts and warnings (autopilot,
traffic, altitude) are always heard on the speaker, even when the speaker is not selected.
The speaker volume level can be adjusted from 0 to 100% on the touchscreen controller by turning the
middle knob or by sliding your finger right or left using the Speaker volume slider. Turning the knob clockwise
increases volume, turning the knob counterclockwise decreases volume. Sliding to the right increases volume,
sliding to the left decreases volume.

Speaker Volume Slider
Speaker Button

Figure 4-46 Speaker Audio Selection

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

169

AUDIO AND CNS

INTERCOM
The Audio Panel includes an eight-mode intercom system (ICS) and two stereo music inputs for the pilot,
copilot and passengers. The intercom provides Pilot and Copilot isolation from the passengers and aircraft
radios. Each of the three link arrows are selected/deselected by touching the arrow.

Intercom Button
Pilot/Copilot Link Arrow
Copilot Volume Button

Pilot Volume Button

Pilot/Passenger Link Arrow

Copilot/Passenger Link
Arrow
Passenger Volume
Button

Figure 4-47 Intercom Controls

All Intercom Mode
In ‘All Intercom’ mode the Pilot, Copilot, and Passengers hear each other.

Figure 4-48 All Intercom Mode

170

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

AUDIO AND CNS
Copilot-Passenger Intercom Mode
In ‘Copilot-Passenger’ mode the Pilot and Copilot hear each other. The Copilot and Passengers also hear
each other.

Figure 4-49 Copilot-Passenger Intercom Mode

Pilot-Copilot Intercom Mode
In ‘Pilot-Copilot’ mode the Pilot and Copilot hear each other. The Passengers hear each other.

Figure 4-50 Pilot-Copilot Intercom Mode

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

171

AUDIO AND CNS
Pilot-Passenger Intercom Mode
In ‘Pilot-Passenger’ mode the Pilot and Copilot hear each other. The Pilot and Passengers also hear each
other.

Figure 4-51 Pilot-Passenger Intercom Mode

All Isolate Mode
In ‘All Isolate’ mode the Pilot and Copilot hear the aircraft audio. The Passengers hear each other.

Figure 4-52 All Isolate Mode

172

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

AUDIO AND CNS
Pilot-Passenger/Copilot-Passenger Intercom Mode
In ‘Pilot-Passenger/Copilot-Passenger’ mode the Passengers hear the pilot, copilot, and each other.

Figure 4-53 Pilot-Passenger/Copilot-Passenger Intercom Mode

Pilot-Passenger/Pilot-Copilot Intercom Mode
In ‘Pilot-Passenger/Pilot-Copilot’ mode the Pilot and Copilot hear each other. The Passengers hear the
Pilot and each other.

Figure 4-54 Pilot-Passenger/Pilot-Copilot Intercom Mode

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

173

AUDIO AND CNS
Copilot-Passenger/Pilot-Copilot Intercom Mode
In ‘Copilot-Passenger/Pilot-Copilot’ mode the Pilot and Copilot hear each other. The Passengers hear the
Copilot and each other.

Figure 4-55 Copilot-Passenger/Pilot-Copilot Intercom Mode

INTERCOM VOLUME AND SQUELCH
The Touchscreen Controller controls the volume and squelch for the pilot and copilot independently.
The selected intercom volume or squelch level can be adjusted from 0 to 100% on the touchscreen controller
by turning the middle knob or by sliding your finger right or left on the slider. Turning the knob clockwise
increases volume, turning the knob counterclockwise decreases volume. Sliding to the right increases volume,
sliding to the left decreases volume.
Adjusting intercom volume:
1) Touch the Intercom Button to display the Intercom Screen.
2) Touch the Pilot Volume or Copilot Volume button to display the Pilot or Copilot Intercom Settings Screen.
3) Adjust the volume by using the middle knob or by sliding your finger on the volume slider.

Adjusting intercom squelch:
1) Touch the Intercom Button to display the Intercom Screen.
2) Touch the Pilot Volume or Copilot Volume button to display the Pilot or Copilot Intercom Settings Screen.
3) Touch the Squelch Mode Button to disable Auto Squelch.
4) Adjust the squelch by using the middle knob or by sliding your finger on the squelch slider.

174

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

AUDIO AND CNS

Intercom Button

Pilot Volume Button

Copilot Volume Button

Volume
Slider
Squelch
Button
Squelch
Slider
Volume
Knob Label
Figure 4-56 Intercom Volume/Squelch Controls

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

Squelch
Knob Label

175

AUDIO AND CNS

PASSENGER ADDRESS (PA) SYSTEM
A passenger address system is available for delivering voice messages to the passengers. When the PA Button
is selected on the Touchscreen Controller, the MIC Annunciator is replaced with a green PA, and the active COM
frequency changes to white, indicating that there is no COM selected. The active COM frequency on the PFD
is replaced by a white PA annunciation. A Push-to-Talk (PTT) must be pressed to deliver PA announcements.
The PA Annunciator flashes about once per second while the PTT is depressed.
The PA volume can be adjusted from 0 to 100% on the touchscreen controller by turning the middle knob.
Turning the knob clockwise increases volume, turning the knob counterclockwise decreases volume.
PFD PA Annunciation

COM Frequencies

Audio & Radios Button

PA Annunciator

PA Button

PA Volume Knob Label
Figure 4-57 PA Controls

Selecting the PA system for transmission:
1) Touch the Audio & Radios Button to display the Audio & Radios Screen.
2) Scroll the list to find the PA.
3) Touch the PA Button on the Audio & Radios Screen to select the PA for transmission.

176

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

AUDIO AND CNS

CLEARANCE RECORDER AND PLAYER
The Audio Controller contains a digital clearance recorder that records up to 2.5 minutes of the selected COM
radio signal. Recorded COM audio is stored in separate memory blocks. Once 2.5 minutes of recording time
have been reached, the recorder begins recording over the stored memory blocks, starting from the oldest block.
Touching the Recorder (Play) Button plays the latest recorded memory block. The Recorder (Stop) Button
is displayed while the audio is playing. When the present memory block has finished playing the Recorder
(Play) Button is displayed again.
Touching the Recorder (Stop) Button during play of a memory block stops play. If a COM input signal is
detected during play of a recorded memory block, play is halted.
Touching the Play Previous Button begins playing the previously recorded memory block. Each subsequent
press of the Play Previous Button selects the previously recorded memory block, if any more exist. Touching
the Play Next Button begins playing the next recorded memory block. Each subsequent press of the Play Next
Button selects the next recorded memory block, if any more exist.
Powering down the system automatically clears all recorded blocks.
Audio & Radios Button

Recorder Volume Slider
Audio Playback Controls
Play Next Button

Recorder Button
Stop
Play

Play Previous Button

Figure 4-58 Recorder Controls

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

177

AUDIO AND CNS

SIMULTANEOUS COM OPERATION
The pilot and the copilot can transmit and receive simultaneously over separate COM radios. The selected
COM MIC Annunciator flashes when either pilot’s microphone PTT is pressed.
If both pilots select the same COM radio, the pilot has priority on COM1 and the copilot has priority on
COM2.
COM2
Active
Frequency
MIC Button (COM1 selected for
transmission by pilot)
COM1 Active Frequency
(selected by copilot for transmission)

MIC Button (COM1 selected
for transmission by pilot)

MIC Button (COM2 selected for
transmission by copilot)

COM2 Active Frequency
(selected by copilot for transmission)

MIC Button (COM2 selected for
transmission by copilot)

Figure 4-59 Simultaneous COM Operation

178

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

AUDIO AND CNS

ENTERTAINMENT INPUTS
The Audio Controller provides two stereo auxiliary entertainment inputs: MUSIC 1 and MUSIC 2. These
inputs are compatible with popular portable entertainment devices such as MP3 and CD players. Two 3.5-mm
stereo phone jacks are installed in convenient locations for audio connection. The headphone outputs of the
entertainment devices are plugged into the MUSIC 1 or MUSIC 2 jacks.
The pilot, copilot and passengers can select each of the entertainment inputs independently.
MUSIC1 Volume Slider
MUSIC1 Button

Mute Settings Button (MUSIC1)

MUSIC2 Button

Mute Settings Button (MUSIC2)

MUSIC2 Volume Slider

MUSIC1 Volume Knob label
Figure 4-60 Entertainment Audio Control

Selecting/deselecting MUSIC1/2 input:
1) Touch the Audio & Radios Button to display the Audio & Radios Screen.
2) If selecting for the Copilot or Passengers, touch the Copilot Tab or the Pass Tab.
3) Scroll the list to find MUSIC1 or MUSIC2.
4) Touch the MUSIC1 or MUSIC2 Button to select/deselect the MUSIC1/2 input for the selected position (pilot,
copilot, or passengers).

The MUSIC1/2 volume can be adjusted from 0 to 100% on the touchscreen controller by turning the middle
knob or by sliding your finger right or left on the volume slider.

MUSIC MUTING
MUSIC muting occurs when the configured activity (intercom, radio inputs, or aural alerts) is heard.
MUSIC is always soft muted when an interruption occurs from these sources. Soft muting is the gradual
return of MUSIC to its original volume level. The time required for MUSIC volume to return to normal is
between one-half and four seconds.

SIRIUSXM RADIO ENTERTAINMENT
SiriusXM Radio audio from the Data Link Receiver can be connected to both the MUSIC1 and MUSIC2
inputs (optional). Refer to the Additional Features Section for more details on the Data Link Receiver.
Connecting a stereo input to the MUSIC1 jack removes the SiriusXM Radio Audio from that input.

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

179

AUDIO AND CNS

4.6 CONTROLLER PILOT DATA LINK COMMUNICATIONS (CPDLC)
The GDR 66 VHF Data Link Transceiver provides the link from the Prodigy Touch Flight Deck 300 to
the Controller Pilot Data Link Communications system (CPDLC). The CPDLC system provides data link
communication between the aircraft and an Air Traffic Control facility. Communication is normally in the form
of text message elements that resemble phraseology used in voice communications with ATC.
Generally, messages are closed with an acknowledgement or acceptance. When a message is acknowledged, the
connection with the ATC facility is not terminated, but kept active for future communication.
Communication hand-off to the next ATC facility is usually performed automatically, but may also be
accomplished manually by the pilot.

CONNECTING TO THE CPDLC SYSTEM
A flight plan must be filed prior to logging on to the CPDLC system. After entering flight plan information in
the required fields and successfully logging on to the system, messages may be sent and received.
Log-on Setup:
1) From the Home Screen, touch CPDLC.
2) If necessary, touch the Status Tab to display the Logon Setup buttons as shown on Figure 4-61.

Figure 4-61 CPDLC Log-On Display

Figure 4-62 ATC Facility List

3) Touch the Facility Button. A list of available ATC facilities is displayed as in Figure 4-62.
4) Touch the appropriate ATC facility to which the CPDLC connection will be established. In this case, EDGG will
be selected. The selected facility is now displayed in the Facility field, as seen in Figure 4-63.

180

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

AUDIO AND CNS

Figure 4-63 CPDLC Log-On Facility Set

Figure 4-64 Entering Flight ID (Tail Number Shown)

5) Touch the Flight ID Button. The Flight ID entry screen is displayed as in Figure 4-64. Enter the Flight ID or
aircraft registration number, whichever is appropriate for the filed flight plan.
6) Touch Enter. The Flight ID number is displayed in the Flight ID field as shown in Figure 4-65.

Figure 4-65 CPDLC Log-On Flight ID Set

Figure 4-66 Entering Destination Airport

7) Touch the Destination Airport Button. The Destination Airport entry screen is displayed as in Figure 4-66.
Enter the airport identifier for the destination airport used in the filed flight plan.

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

181

AUDIO AND CNS
8) Touch Enter. The airport identifier is displayed in the Destination Airport field as shown in Figure 4-67.

Figure 4-67 CPDLC Log-On Destination Airport Set

Figure 4-68 Entering Departure Time

9) The Filed Departure Airport field is prefilled with the airport identifier corresponding to the current aircraft
location, in this case KPUB. If the flight plan was filed using a different airport identifier, touch the Filed Dep
Airport Button and enter the appropriate airport identifier. Touch Enter.
10) Touch the Filed Dep Time Button. The entry screen is displayed as in Figure 4-68. Enter the departure time
used in filing the flight plan.
11) Touch Enter. The confirmation screen is displayed as shown in Figure 4-69.

Figure 4-69 Confirming Departure Time

Figure 4-70 Departure Time Set

12) Touch OK. The departure time is displayed in the Filed Dep Time field as shown in Figure 4-70.

182

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

AUDIO AND CNS
Performing the system log-on:
1) After performing the previous Logon Setup procedure, verify the Link Status display indicates a link with a
ground station is available. An available link is indicated by a green line between the aircraft symbol and the
ground station antenna symbol, as seen in Figure 4-70.
2) Touch the Logon Button. The Link Status display indicates ‘Connecting’ with an animated dashed green line
between the ground station antenna symbol and the ATC facility symbol, as seen in Figure 4-71. Touching
the Cancel Button will terminate the log-on process. When connection is complete, the display indicates
‘Connected’ with an solid green line between the ground station antenna symbol and the ATC facility symbol,
as seen in Figure 4-72.

Figure 4-71 CPDLC Connecting to ATC Facility

Figure 4-72 System is Connected and Active

CREATING A MESSAGE
Creating a message consists of choosing from a pre-determined list of requests, entering the required
information, and sending the request.
1) From the Home Screen, touch CPDLC.
2) Touch the Create Message Button. A list of requests is presented for selection as shown in Figure 4-73.
3) For discussion purposes, ‘Request Level’ is selected in this example by touching the Request Level Button. A
window is displayed for entering further information as shown in Figure 4-74.

Figure 4-73 List of New Message Types

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Figure 4-74 Select Altitude Entry

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

183

AUDIO AND CNS
4) Touch the Request Level Button. The Altitude Entry display is shown as in Figure 4-75.

Figure 4-75 Altitude Entry

Figure 4-76 Reason for Request

5) Select the desired altitude mode by touching the Flight Level or FT (feet) Button. A green annunciator
indicates the selected mode.
6) Using the number keys, enter the altitude to be requested.
7) Touch the Enter Button. The requested altitude is displayed as in Figure 4-76.
8) Touch the Reason Button. A list of pertinent reasons is presented as in Figure 4-77.

Figure 4-77 List of New Message Types

Figure 4-78 Enter Requested Altitude

9) In this example, the flight level change request is initiated due to decreased aircraft performance. Touch the
Due to Aircraft Performance Button. The selected reason is displayed as in Figure 4-78.
10) Touch the Send Button.

184

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

AUDIO AND CNS

RESPONDING TO AN ATC MESSAGE
Responding to an ATC message consists of choosing from a pre-determined list of responses or
acknowledgements, then sending the response or acknowledgement.

VIEWING CPDLC MESSAGE DIALOGS
The status of a string of messages and responses, or dialog, may be checked and past message dialogs viewed.
When the system power is cycled, the list of message dialogs is deleted.
To view messages:
1) From the Home Screen, touch CPDLC.
2) If necessary, touch the CPDLC Messages Tab. A list of message dialogs is displayed as seen in Figure 4-79.

Figure 4-79 Message Dialog List

Figure 4-80 Message Dialog Thread

3) Touch a message dialog box to display the message thread, as seen in Figure 4-80.
Or:
1) Touch the flashing CPDLC Button on the Button Bar.
2) If necessary, touch the CPDLC Messages Tab. A list of message dialogs is displayed.

Figure 4-81 CPDLC Button on the Button Bar

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

185

AUDIO AND CNS

DELETING MESSAGE DIALOGS
While the system deletes the list of message dialogs when power is turned off, individual message dialogs may
also be deleted manually. Message dialogs considered closed may also be deleted.
To delete a single message dialog:
1) From the Home Screen, touch CPDLC.
2) If necessary, touch the CPDLC Messages Tab.
3) Touch the message dialog to be deleted.
4) Touch the Delete Button. A confirmation window is displayed.
5) Touch the OK Button to delete the message dialog.

To delete all closed message dialogs:
1) From the Home Screen, touch CPDLC.
2) Touch the Delete Messages Button. A confirmation window is displayed.
3) Touch the OK Button. All closed message dialogs are deleted.

DISCONNECTING FROM THE CPDLC SYSTEM
A flight plan must be filed prior to logging on to the CPDLC system. After entering flight plan information in
the required fields and successfully logging on to the system, messages may be sent and received.
1) From the Home Screen, touch CPDLC.
2) If necessary, touch the Status Tab.
3) Touch the Logoff Button to disconnect the system.

186

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

AUDIO AND CNS

4.7 ABNORMAL OPERATION
Abnormal operation of the Prodigy Touch includes equipment failures of the system components and failure of
associated equipment, including switches and external devices.

STUCK MICROPHONE
If the push-to-talk (PTT) Key becomes stuck, the COM transmitter stops transmitting after 35 seconds of
continuous operation. An alert appears on the Touchscreen Controller to advise the pilot of a stuck microphone.
The MIC Button Annunciator flashes as long as the PTT Key remains stuck.

Figure 4-82

COM TUNING FAILURE
In case of a COM system tuning failure, the emergency frequency (121.500 MHz) is automatically tuned in
the radio in which the tuning failure occurred. Depending on the failure mode, a yellow X may be shown.
Emergency Channel
Loaded Automatically

Figure 4-83 COM Tuning Failure

EMERGENCY MODE
The emergency frequency (121.500 MHz) can be tuned in COM1 by selecting the emergency mode.
Selecting emergency mode:
1) Select the PFD Settings Softkey on the PFD.
2) Select the Other PFD Settings Softkey on the PFD.
3) Select the COM1 121.5 Softkey on the PFD to tune COM1 to the emergency frequency.
Emergency Mode Active
Figure 4-84 COM1 Emergency Mode Active

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

187

AUDIO AND CNS

AUDIO CONTROLLER FAIL-SAFE OPERATION
If there is a failure of the Audio Controller, a fail-safe circuit connects the pilot and copilot’s headsets and
microphones directly to the COM1 transceiver. Audio will not be available on the speaker.

188

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT

SECTION 5 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
5.1 INTRODUCTION
The Prodigy™ Touch Flight Deck 300 is an integrated flight, engine, communication, navigation and surveillance
system. This section of the Pilot’s Guide explains GPS navigation using the Prodigy™ Touch Flight Deck 300.
The most prominent parts of the system are the Primary Flight Display (PFD), the Multi Function Display
(MFD), and the Touchscreen Controllers. The information to successfully navigate the aircraft using the GPS
sensors is displayed on these units. See examples in the Figure 5-1 and Figure 5-2. Detailed descriptions of GPS
navigation functions are discussed later in this section.
A brief description of the GPS navigation data on the PFD and MFD follows.
Navigation mode indicates which sensor is providing the course data (e.g., GPS, VOR) and the flight plan phase
(e.g., Departure (DPRT), Terminal (TERM), Enroute (ENR), Oceanic (OCN), Approach (LNAV, LNAV+V, L/VNAV,
LP, LPV), or Missed Approach (MAPR)). L/VNAV, LP, and LPV approaches are only available with SBAS. L/VNAV
approaches will be flown as a Baro VNAV approach when SBAS is not available.
The Inset Map is a small version of the Navigation Map and can be displayed in the lower left corner of the PFD.
When the system is in reversionary mode, the Inset Map is displayed in the lower right corner. The Inset Map
is displayed by selecting the Inset Map Settings Softkey. Selecting the Inset Map Settings Softkey again, then
selecting the Off Softkey removes the Inset Map.
The Navigation Map displays aviation data (e.g., airports, VORs, airways, airspaces), geographic data (e.g.,
cities, lakes, highways, borders), topographic data (map shading indicating elevation), and hazard data (e.g.,
traffic, terrain, weather). The amount of displayed data can be reduced by selecting the Detail Softkey on the
PFD for the Inset Map, and by the Map Detail Slider on the Touchscreen Controller for navigation maps. The
Navigation Map can be oriented three different ways: North Up (NORTH UP), Track Up (TRK UP), or Heading
Up (HDG UP).
An aircraft icon is placed on the Navigation Map at the location corresponding to the calculated present position.
The aircraft position and the flight plan legs are accurately based on GPS calculations. The basemap upon which
these are placed are from a source with less resolution, therefore the relative position of the aircraft to map features
is not exact. The leg of the active flight plan currently being flown is shown as a magenta line on the navigation
map. The other legs are shown in white.
There are 28 different map ranges available, from 250 feet to 1000 nm. Range is indicated in the upper left
quadrant of the range ring shown around the aircraft icon. This indicated range is the range from the aircraft
icon to the range ring, and roughly half the range to the top edge of the displayed map. To change the map range
on any map, turn the Joystick counter-clockwise to decrease the range, or clockwise to increase the range. To
change the Inset Map range, use the Map Range - and the Map Range + softkeys, or turn the Joystick on the
PFD Controller.

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

189

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT

Current Track
Indicator
Navigation Status Bar
Navigation Mode

Inset Map

Figure 5-1 GPS Navigation Information on the PFD
MFD Data Bar
Map Orientation
Display Title
Navigation Map

- Aviation Data
- Geographic Data
- Topographic Data
- Hazard Data

Map Range
Active Flight Plan Leg

Aircraft Icon
at Present Position
Flight Plan Leg

Figure 5-2 GPS Navigation Information on the MFD Navigation Map Display

190

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT

NAVIGATION STATUS BAR
The PFD Navigation Status Bar located to the right of the HSI contains two fields displaying the following
information:

PFD Navigation Status Bar

• Active flight plan leg (e.g., ‘D-> KICT’ or ‘KIXD -> KCOS’) or flight plan annunciations (e.g., ‘Turn right to
021˚ in 8 seconds’)
• Distance (DIS) and Bearing (BRG) to the next waypoint or flight plan annunciations (e.g., ‘TOD within 1
minute’)
The symbols used in the PFD status bar are:
Symbol

Description
Active Leg

Symbol

Description
Right Holding Pattern

Direct-to

Left Holding Pattern

Right Procedure Turn

Right DME Arc

Left Procedure Turn

Left DME Arc

Vector to Final

The MFD Data Bar located at the top of the MFD contains eight data fields, each displaying one of the
following items:
• Bearing (BRG)
• Distance (DIS)
• Desired Track (DTK)
• Endurance (END)
• Enroute Safe Altitude (ESA)
• Estimated Time of Arrival (ETA)
• Estimated Time Enroute (ETE)
• Fuel on Board (FOB)

• Fuel over Destination (FOD)
• Ground Speed (GS)
• Minimum Safe Altitude (MSA)
• True Air Speed (TAS)
• Track Angle Error (TKE)
• Track (TRK)
• Vertical Speed Required (VSR)
• Crosstrack Error (XTK)

MFD Navigation Data Bar

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

191

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
The navigation information displayed in the eight data fields can be selected on the Touchscreen Controller.
The default selections (in order left to right) are GS, DTK, TRK, ETE, BRG, DIS, MSA, and ETA.
Changing a field in the MFD Navigation Data Bar:
1) From Home, touch Utilities>Setup>Avionics Settings to display the Avionics Settings Screen.
2) Touch the MFD Fields Tab to display the MFD Data Bar Field selection list.
3) If necessary, scroll through the data field list to find the desired field.
4) Touch the MFD Data Bar Field Button to display the data options list.
5) If necessary, scroll through the data options list to find the desired option.
6) Touch the desired data option button.
7) Repeat steps 3 - 6 as necessary.

Data Bar
Field Select
Buttons

MFD Fields
Tab

Figure 5-3 MFD Data Bar Field Selection

192

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT

5.2 USING MAP DISPLAYS
Map displays are used extensively to provide situational awareness in flight. Most maps can display the following
information:
• Airports, NAVAIDs, airspaces, airways, land data
(highways, cities, lakes, rivers, borders, etc.) with
names
• Map Pointer information (distance and bearing
to pointer, location of pointer, name, and other
pertinent information)

• Aircraft icon (representing present position)

• Map range

• Track vector

• Wind direction and speed

• Topography scale

• Map orientation

• Topography data

• Icons for enabled map features

• Obstacle data

• Fuel range ring
• Flight plan legs
• User waypoints

The information in this section applies to any displays that show the navigation map.

MAP SETTINGS SYNC
Map settings can be synchronized with with the settings of any display, and will keep them synchronized
when changes are made to the settings. The synchronization can be for the onside or offside independently, or
for all displays.
Enabling/disabling map settings synchronization:
1) From Home, touch Map > Map Settings > Map Settings Sync.
2) Touch the Onside Button or the All Button.
3) Touch the PFD1, MFD Left, PFD2, or MFD Right Button to initially synchronize the onside map settings or all
map settings with the selected display.
Or:
1) Touch the Off Button to disable synchronization.

Off Button
Map Settings
Sync Button

Onside
Button
All Button

Figure 5-4 Map Settings Synchronization

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

193

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT

MAP ORIENTATION
Maps are shown in one of three different orientation options, allowing flexibility in determining aircraft
position relative to other items on the map (north up) or for determining where map items are relative to where
the aircraft is going (track up or heading up). The map orientation is shown in the upper left corner of the map.

Figure 5-5 Map Orientation

• North up (NORTH UP) aligns the top of the map display to north.
• Track up (TRK UP) aligns the top of the map display to the current ground track.
• Heading up (HDG UP) aligns the top of the map display to the current aircraft heading (default setting).
Changing the Navigation Map orientation:
1) From Home, touch Map > Map Settings.
2) Touch the Orientation Button.
3) Touch the Heading Up, Track Up, or North Up Button to select the navigation map orientation.

194

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT

Orientation
Button

Heading Up Button
Track Up Button
North Up Button

Heading Up Orientation

Track Up Orientation

North Up Orientation

Figure 5-6 Map Orientation Selection

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

195

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT

MAP RANGE
There are 28 different map ranges available, from 250 feet to 1000 nm. Range is indicated in the upper left
quadrant of the range ring shown around the aircraft icon. This indicated range is the range from the aircraft icon
to the range ring, and roughly half the range to the top edge of the displayed map. To change the map range on
any MFD map, turn the Joystick counter-clockwise to decrease the range, or clockwise to increase the range. To
change the Inset Map range, use the Map Range - and the Map Range + softkeys.

Auto Zoom On

Auto Zoom Off
Figure 5-7 Map Range

AUTO ZOOM
Auto zoom allows the system to change the map display range to the smallest range clearly showing the
active waypoint. Auto zoom can be overridden by adjusting the range with the Joystick, and remains until
the active waypoint changes, a terrain or traffic alert occurs, the aircraft takes off, or the manual override times
out (timer set on the Touchscreen Controller Map Setup Screen).
If a terrain caution or warning occurs, any map page displaying TAWS/TERRAIN data automatically adjusts
to the smallest map range clearly showing the highest priority alert. If a new traffic advisory alert occurs, any
map page capable of displaying traffic advisory alerts automatically adjusts to the smallest map range clearly
showing the traffic advisory. When terrain or traffic alerts clear, the map returns to the previous auto zoom
range based on the active waypoint.
The auto zoom function can be turned on or off independently for the PFD and MFD. Control of the ranges
at which the auto zoom occurs is done by setting the minimum and maximum ‘look forward’ times (set on the
Touchscreen Controller Map Settings Screen). These settings determine the minimum and maximum distance
to display based upon the aircraft’s ground speed.
• Waypoints that are long distances apart cause the map range to increase to a point where many details on
the map are decluttered. If this is not acceptable, lower the maximum look ahead time to a value that limits
the auto zoom to an acceptable range.
• Waypoints that are very short distances apart cause the map range to decrease to a point where situational
awareness may not be what is desired. Increase the minimum look ahead time to a value that limits the auto
zoom to a minimum range that provides acceptable situational awareness.
• Flight plans that have a combination of long and short legs cause the range to increase and decrease as
waypoints sequence. To avoid this, auto zoom can be disabled or the maximum/minimum times can be
adjusted.

196

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
• The ‘time out’ time (configurable on the Touchscreen Controller Map Settings Screen) determines how long
auto zoom is overridden by a manual adjustment of the range knob. At the expiration of this time, the auto
zoom range is restored. Setting the ‘time out’ value to zero causes the manual override to never time out.
• When the maximum ‘look forward’ time is set to zero, the upper limit becomes the maximum range available
(1000 nm).
• When the minimum ‘look forward’ time is set to zero, the lower limit becomes 0.75 nm.
Configuring automatic zoom:
1) From Home, touch Map > Map Settings.
2) If necessary, touch the Other Tab to display the options list.
3) Touch the Auto Zoom Button to enable/disable auto zoom.
4) Touch the Auto Zoom Settings Button to display the Auto Zoom Settings Screen.
5) Touch the Auto Zoom Max Look Fwd Button to display the numeric keyboard.
6) Use the keypad to enter the maximum look forward time. Times are from zero to 999 minutes.
7) Repeat steps 5 and 6 for ‘Min Look Fwd’ (zero to 99 minutes) and ‘Time Out’ (zero to 99 minutes).
Auto Zoom Button
Auto Zoom Settings Button

Auto Zoom Max Look Fwd
Button
Auto Zoom Time Out Button

Auto Zoom Min Look Fwd
Button

Figure 5-8 Auto Zoom Setup

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

197

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT

MAP PANNING
The Map Pointer allows the pilot to:
• View parts of the map outside the displayed range without adjusting the map range by panning the map
• Highlight and select locations on the map
• Graphically create user waypoints
• Review information for a selected airport, NAVAID, or user waypoint
• Designate locations for use in flight planning
• Review airspace and airway information
• Measure the bearing and distance from the aircraft present position to any location on the navigation map
When the Map Pointer function is selected by pressing the Joystick, the Map Pointer flashes on the map
display, and the Map Pointer Options Screen is displayed on the Touchscreen Controller. A window also appears
at the upper left of the map display showing the latitude/longitude of the pointer, the bearing and distance to
the pointer from the aircraft’s present position, and the elevation of the land at the position of the pointer.
Map Pointer
Information

Map Pointer

Figure 5-9 Navigation Map - Map Pointer Activated

Panning the map:
1) Press the Joystick to display the Map Pointer.
2) Move the Joystick to move the Map Pointer around the map.
3) Press the Joystick to remove the Map Pointer and recenter the map on the aircraft’s current position.

198

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
When the Map Pointer is placed on an airport, the name of the airport is highlighted (even if the name was
not originally displayed on the map). When an airport is highlighted on the map display, pertinent information
is available by pressing the Waypoint Info Button on the Touchscreen Controller.
Map Pointer
Information

Map Pointer
on Airport

Info Tab
Waypoint
Info
Button

Airport
Information

Figure 5-10 Navigation Map - Map Pointer on Airport

Reviewing information for an airport, NAVAID, or user waypoint:
1) Place the Map Pointer on an airport, NAVAID, or user waypoint.
2) Touch the Waypoint Info Button to display the waypoint information screen.
3) Press the Joystick to exit the waypoint information screen and remove the Map Pointer from the Navigation
Map.

When the Map Pointer is placed on a NAVAID, the name of the NAVAID is highlighted (even if the name was
not originally displayed on the map). When a NAVAID is highlighted on the map display, pertinent information
is available by pressing the Waypoint Info Button on the Touchscreen Controller.

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

199

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT

Map Pointer
Information

Map Pointer
on VOR

Waypoint
Info
Button

VOR
Information

Figure 5-11 Navigation Map - Map Pointer on VOR

When the Map Pointer is placed on a User Waypoint, the name of the User Waypoint is highlighted (even if
the name was not originally displayed on the map). When a User Waypoint is highlighted on the map display,
pertinent information is available by pressing the Waypoint Info Button on the Touchscreen Controller.

200

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT

Map Pointer
Information

Map Pointer
on User
Waypoint

Waypoint
Info
Button

User
Waypoint
Information

Figure 5-12 Navigation Map - Map Pointer on User Waypoint

When the Map Pointer is on an airspace boundary, the boundary is highlighted and airspace information is
shown in a box above and to the right of the Map Pointer. The information includes the name and class of
airspace, the ceiling in feet above Mean Sea Level (MSL), and the floor in feet MSL. When an airspace is selected

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

201

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
on the map display, additional frequency information is also available by pressing the Airspace Info Button on
the Touchscreen Controller.
Map Pointer
Information

Airspace
Information
Map Pointer
on Airspace

Airspace
Information
Airspace
Info
Button

Figure 5-13 Navigation Map - Map Pointer on Airspace

Reviewing information for a special use or controlled airspace:
1) Place the Map Pointer on a waypoint.
2) Touch the Airspace Info Button to display the Airspace Information Screen.
3) Press the Joystick to exit the Airspace Information Screen and remove the Map Pointer from the Navigation
Map.

202

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT

TOPOGRAPHY
All navigation maps can display various shades of topography colors representing land elevation, similar
to aviation sectional charts. Topographic data can be displayed or removed as described in the following
procedures.
Navigation Map
Topographic Data
Navigation Map
Black Background

TOPO Off

TOPO On

Topo Data
Button
Topo Data
Settings
Button

Topo Data
Button

Land Tab

Topo
Scale
Button

Figure 5-14 Navigation Map - Topographic Data

Displaying/removing topographic data on navigation map displays:
1) From Home, touch Map > Map Settings.
2) Touch the Land Tab, if necessary.
3) Scroll the list to find the Topo Data Button, if necessary.
4) Touch the Topo Data Button to display/remove topographic data on the navigation map.

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

203

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Topo Data Off

Topo Disabled

Topo Data On

Topo Enabled

Figure 5-15 PFD Inset Map - Topographic Data

Displaying/removing topographic data from the PFD Inset Map:
1) Press the Inset Map Settings Softkey on the PFD.
2) Press the Topo Softkey to display/remove topographic data on the Inset Map.
3) Press the Back Softkey to return to the top level softkeys.

The topographic data range is the maximum map range on which topographic data is displayed.
Selecting a topographical data range:
1) From Home, touch Map > Map Settings.
2) Touch the Land Tab, if necessary.
3) Scroll the list to find the Topo Data Settings Button, if necessary.
4) Touch the Topo Data Settings Button to display the Topo Data Settings Screen.
5) Touch the Topo Data Button to display the Map Topo Range list.
6) Scroll the list if necessary to find the desired range, and touch the range button.

In addition, the Navigation Map can display a topographic scale (located in the lower right hand side of the
map) showing a scale of the terrain elevation.

204

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT

Figure 5-16 Navigation Map - Topo Scale

Displaying/removing the topographic scale:
1) From Home, touch Map > Map Settings.
2) Touch the Land Tab, if necessary.
3) Scroll the list to find the Topo Data Settings Button, if necessary.
4) Touch the Topo Data Settings Button to display the Topo Data Settings Screen.
5) Touch the Topo Scale Button to display/remove the topographic scale.

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

205

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT

MAP SYMBOLS
This section discusses the types of land and aviation symbols that can be displayed. Each listed type of symbol
can be turned on or off, and the maximum range to display each symbol can be set. The decluttering of the
symbols from the map using the DCLTR Softkey is also discussed.

LAND SYMBOLS
The following items are configured on the Land Tab on the Map Options Screen:
Land Symbols

Symbol

Topo Data
Obstacle Data
Roads

See Appendix F

Default
Maximum
Range (nm) Range (nm)
1000
1000
10
25

Interstate Highway (Freeway)

100

International Highway (Freeway)

100

US Highway (National Highway)

100

State Highway (Local Highway)

7.5

Local Road (Local Road)

Railroad

7.5

Large City (> 200,000)

100

1000

Medium City (> 50,000)

150

Small City (> 5,000)
State/Province

25
400

100
1000

Rivers and Lakes (River/Lake)

100

N/A

Table 5-1 Land Symbol Information

206

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
AVIATION SYMBOLS
The following items are configured on the Aviation Tab of the Map Settings Screen:
Aviation Symbols

Symbol

Default
Maximum
Range (nm) Range (nm)

Low Altitude Airways

250

High Altitude Airways

250

Class B/TMA

250

Class C/TCA)

150

Class D

100

Restricted

150

MOA (Millitary)

150

Other/ADIZ

150

TFR

250

1000

Large Airport
Medium Airport
Small Airport

100
50
25

250
100
50

VOR Waypoint

250

INT Waypoint

NDB Waypoint

User Waypoint
SafeTaxi

25
1.5

250
4

7.5

See Additional Features

Runway Extension
Table 5-2 Aviation Symbol Information

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

207

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYMBOL SETUP
All navigation maps can display aviation and land symbols. Aviation and land symbol types (e.g. runway
extensions, railroads) can be removed individually.
Displaying/removing a navigation or land symbol type:
1) From Home, touch Map > Map Settings.
2) Touch the Aviation Tab or Land Tab, if necessary.
3) Scroll the list to find the desired item.
4) Touch the annunciator button to display/remove the symbol type from navigation maps.

Annunciator Button

Figure 5-17 Map Settings Screen - Individual Items On/Off

The range button sets the maximum range at which items appear on the display.
Selecting an Aviation or Land item range:
1) From Home, touch Map > Map Settings.
2) Touch the Aviation Tab or Land Tab, if necessary.
3) Scroll the list to find the desired item.
6) Touch the range button to display the range choices.
7) Touch a range selection button to select the maximum range.
8) Repeat steps 2-6 as necessary.

208

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT

Range
Button

Figure 5-18 Map Settings Screen - Aviation Data Setup

Range
Selection
Button

Range
Button
Range
Selection
Button

Figure 5-19 Map Settings Screen - Land Data Setup

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

209

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
MAP DETAIL
The declutter feature allows the pilot to progressively step through four levels of map detail. The navigation
map detail level is displayed on the Map Settings Screen on the Touchscreen Controller and on the navigation
map. The PFD Inset Map detail level is shown on the Inset Map and the Detail Softkey.

Map Detail
Slider
Detail Indicator

Figure 5-20 Navigation Map - Map Detail

Detail Indicator
Detail Softkey
Figure 5-21 Inset Map - Map Detail

Adjusting the navigation map detail:
1) From Home, touch Map > Map Settings > Map Detail.
2) Slide up or down on the Map Detail Slider to adjust the navigation map detail.

Adjusting the the PFD Inset Map detail:
1) Press the Inset Map Settings Softkey on the PFD.
2) Press the Detail Softkey as necessary to adjust the Inset Map detail.

210

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Table 5-3 lists the items that are decluttered at each map detail level. The ‘X’ represents map items
decluttered for each level of detail.
Item
NEXRAD
Lightning Data
Airports
Safe Taxi
Runway Labels
TFRs
Restricted
MOA (Military)
User Waypoints
Latitude/Longitude Grid
NAVAIDs (does not declutter if used to define airway)
Intersections (does not declutter if used to define airway)
Class B Airspaces/TMA
Class C Airspaces/TCA
Class D Airspaces
Other Airspaces/ADIZ
Obstacles
Cities
Roads
Railroads
State/Province Boundaries

Declutter-1 Declutter-2

X
X
X
X

X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X

Least
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X

Table 5-3 Navigation Map Items Decluttered for each Detail Level

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

211

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT

AIRWAYS
This airways discussion is based upon the North American airway structure. The airway structure in places
other than North America vary by location, etc. and are not discussed in this book. Low Altitude Airways (or
Victor Airways) are eight nautical miles wide and start 1,200 feet above ground level (AGL) and extend up to
18,000 feet mean sea level (MSL). Low Altitude Airways are designated with a “V” before the airway number
(hence the name “Victor Airways”) since they run primarily between VORs.
High Altitude Airways (or Jet Routes) start at 18,000 feet MSL and extend upward to 45,000 feet MSL
(altitudes above 18,000 feet are called “flight levels” and are described as FL450 for 45,000 feet MSL). Jet
Routes are designated with a “J” before the route number.
Low Altitude Airways are drawn in gray (the same shade used for roads). High Altitude Airways are drawn
in green. When both types of airways are displayed, High Altitude Airways are drawn on top of Low Altitude
Airways.
When airways are selected for display on the map, the airway waypoints (VORs, NDBs and Intersections) are
also displayed.

High Altitude
Airway
(Jet Route)

Low Altitude
Airway
(Victor Airway)

Figure 5-22 Airways on MFD Navigation Map

212

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Airways may be displayed on the map at the pilot’s discretion using the Touchscreen Controller. The airway
range can also be programmed to only display airways on the MFD when the map range is at or below a specific
value.
Displaying/removing airways:
1) From Home, touch Map > Map Settings.
2) Touch the Aviation Tab, if necessary.
3) Touch the Low Altitude Airways Button to display/remove the low altitude airways.
4) Touch the High Altitude Airways Button to display/remove the high altitude airways.
Range
Button
Low
Altitude
Airways
Button
High
Altitude
Airways
Button
Range
Selection
Button

Figure 5-23 Map Options Screen - Airways Setup

The airway range is the maximum map range on which airways are displayed.
Selecting an airway range:
1) From Home, touch Map > Map Settings.
2) Touch the Aviation Tab, if necessary.
3) Touch the low altitude or high altitude range button to display the range selection buttons.
4) Touch a range selection button to select the maximum map display range.The following range items are
configurable on the airways menu.
Airway Type

Airway Symbol/Line

Highlighted Airway
Information Box

Default
Maximum
Range (nm) Range (nm)

Low Altitude Airway

500

High Altitude Airway

500

Table 5-4 Airway Range Information

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

213

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT

TRACK VECTOR
The Navigation Map can display a track vector that is useful in minimizing track angle error. The track vector
is a solid light blue line segment extended to a predicted location. The track vector look-ahead time is selectable
(30 sec, 60 sec (default), 2 min, 5 min, 10 min, 20 min) and determines the length of the track vector. The track
vector shows up to 90 degrees of a turn for the 30 and 60 second time settings. It is always a straight line for
the 2 min, 5 min, 10 min and 20 min settings.

Track Vector

Figure 5-24 Navigation Map - Track Vector

Displaying/removing the track vector:
1) From Home, touch Map > Map Settings.
2) Touch the Other Tab, if necessary.
3) Touch the Track Vector Button to display/remove the track vector.
Time
Button
Track
Vector
Button

Time
Selection
Button

Figure 5-25 Map Options Screen - Track Vector Setup

Selecting track vector look-ahead time:
1) From Home, touch Map > Map Settings.
2) Touch the Other Tab, if necessary.
3) Touch the time button to display the time selection buttons.
4) Scroll the list, if necessary, and touch a time selection button to select the look-ahead time.

214

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT

WIND VECTOR
The map displays a wind vector arrow in the upper right-hand portion of the screen. Wind vector information
is displayed as a white arrow pointing in the direction in which the wind is moving for wind speeds greater than
or equal to 1 kt. It is always a straight line for the 2 min, 5 min, 10 min and 20 min settings.
Wind Vector
Figure 5-26 Navigation Map - Wind Vector

NOTE: The wind vector is not displayed until the aircraft is moving.

Displaying/removing the wind vector:
1) From Home, touch Map > Map Settings.
2) Touch the Other Tab, if necessary.
3) Touch the Wind Vector Button to display/remove the track vector.

Wind
Vector
Button

Figure 5-27 Map Options Screen - Wind Vector Setup

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

215

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT

FUEL RANGE RING
The map can display a fuel range ring which shows an estimate of the remaining flight distance. A dashed
green circle indicates the selected range to reserve fuel. A solid green circle indicates the total endurance range.
If only reserve fuel remains, the range is indicated by a solid yellow circle.

Time to Reserve Fuel

Total Endurance Range

Range to Reserve Fuel

Figure 5-28 Navigation Map - Fuel Range Ring

Displaying/removing the fuel range ring:
1) From Home, touch Map > Map Settings.
2) Touch the Other Tab, if necessary.
3) Touch the Fuel Rng (Rsv) Button to display/remove the fuel range ring.

Fuel Rng (Rsv)
Button

Fuel Reserve Time
Button

Figure 5-29 Map Options Screen - Fuel Range Ring Setup

Selecting fuel reserve time:
1) From Home, touch Map > Map Settings.
2) Touch the Other Tab, if necessary.
3) Touch the fuel reserve time button to display the keypad.
4) Use the keypad to enter the fuel reserve time.

216

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT

FIELD OF VIEW (SVT)
The PFD field of view can be represented on the Navigation Map Page. Two dashed lines forming a V‑shape
in front of the aircraft symbol on the map, represent the forward viewing area shown on the PFD.

Lines
Depict
PFD Field
of View

SVT View on the PFD

Field of View on the MFD

Figure 5-30 PFD and Navigation Map Field of View Comparison

Displaying/removing the field of view:
1) From Home, touch Map > Map Settings.
2) Touch the Other Tab, if necessary.
3) Scroll to display the Field of View Button.
4) Touch the Field of View Button to display/remove the field of view.

Field of
View
Button
Figure 5-31 Map Settings Screen - Field of View Setup

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

217

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT

SELECTED ALTITUDE INTERCEPT ARC
The map can display the location along the current track where the aircraft will intercept the selected altitude.
The location will be shown as a light blue arc when the aircraft is actually climbing or descending.

Range to
Altitude Arc

Figure 5-32 Navigation Map - Range to Altitude Arc

Displaying/removing the selected altitude intercept arc:
1) From Home, touch Map > Map Settings.
2) Touch the Other Tab, if necessary.
3) Touch the Selected Alt Range Arc Button to display/remove the selected altitude intercept arc.

Selected Alt
Range Arc
Button

Figure 5-33 Map Options Screen - Selected Altitude Intercept Arc Setup

218

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT

OBSTACLES
The navigation map can display the location of obstacles (e.g. towers). The obstacles are shown as red, yellow,
or gray, depending on the height relative to the aircraft AGL altitude. See the Hazard Avoidance section for more
details on symbol and color usage.

Obstacle
Obstacle Data Displayed
when selected by the
Pointer

Figure 5-34 Navigation Map - Obstacles

Displaying/removing obstacles:
1) From Home, touch Map > Map Settings.
2) Touch the Land Tab, if necessary.
3) Touch the Obstacle Data Button to display/remove the obstacles.
Range
Button
Obstacle
Data
Button

Range
Selection
Button

Figure 5-35 Map Options Screen - Obstacle Setup

Selecting the obstacle data range:
1) From Home, touch Map > Map Settings.
2) Touch the Land Tab, if necessary.
3) Touch the obstacle range button to display the range selection buttons.
4) Touch a range selection button to select the maximum map display range.

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

219

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT

5.3 WAYPOINTS
Waypoints are predetermined geographical positions (internal database) or pilot-entered positions, and are
used for all phases of flight planning and navigation.
Communication and navigation frequencies can be found and tuned from waypoint data, Refer to the Audio
and CNS section for details.
Waypoints can be selected by entering the ICAO identifier, entering the name of the facility, or by entering the
city name. See the System Overview section for detailed instructions on entering data in the system.
INT Button
Airport Button

VOR Button

NDB Button

User Waypoint
Button
Create Waypoint
Button
Figure 5-36 Waypoint Info Screen

If duplicate entries exist for an identifier, a Waypoint Duplicates Screen is displayed when the Enter Button is
touched or the small right knob is pressed.
Duplicates
Found
Message

Waypoint
Selection
Button

Figure 5-37 Waypoint Duplicates Screen

220

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT

AIRPORTS
NOTE: ‘North Up’ orientation on the Airport Information Display cannot be changed; the pilot needs to

be aware of proper orientation if the Navigation Map orientation is different from the Airport Information
Display Map.
The Airport Information Display displays a map of the currently selected airport and surrounding area, and
the Airport Information Screen on the Touchscreen Controller allows the pilot to view airport information,
load frequencies, review runways, and review instrument procedures that may be involved in the flight plan.
For airports with multiple runways, information for each runway is available. See the Audio and CNS Section
for more information on finding and tuning frequencies. After engine startup, the Airport Information Display
defaults to the airport where the aircraft is located. After a flight plan has been loaded, it defaults to the
destination airport. On a flight plan with multiple airports, it defaults to the airport which is the current active
waypoint.

Navigation Map
Showing Selected
Airport

Airport/Runway
Diagram

Figure 5-38 Airport Information Display on MFD

Waypoint Options Button

Selected Airport Button

Direct-To, Insert in Flight Plan,
Show On Map

(Identifier, Name, Symbol)

Info Tab

Airport City, Region

Airport Bearing, Distance, &
Latitude/Longitude
Airport Elevation,
UTC Offset

Fuel Available, Airport Usage Type
Figure 5-39 Airport Information Screen

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

221

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
The following descriptions and abbreviations are used on the Airport Information Screen:
Usage type: PUBLIC, MILITARY, PRIVATE, or HELIPORT
Fuel Available: AVGAS, JET

Selected Airport Button

Availability
Freqs Tab
Frequency Identifier

Frequency Button

Tune COM Active Frequency
Tune COM Standby Frequency
Add to Favorites

Figure 5-40 Airport Frequencies Screen

The following descriptions and abbreviations are used on the Airport Frequencies Screen:
COM Availability: TX (transmit only), RX (receive only), PT (part time), i (additional information available)
COM Frequencies: Approach*, Arrival*, ASOS, ATIS, AWOS, Center, Class B*, Class C*, Clearance, Control, CTA*,
Departure*, Gate, Ground, Helicopter, Multicom, Other, Pre-Taxi, Radar, Ramp, Terminal*, TMA*, Tower, TRSA*, Unicom
* May include Additional Information)
NAV Frequencies: ILS, LOC

See the Hazard Avoidance section for the description of the information shown on the Weather Tab. See
the Procedures discussion later in this section about loading procedures from the Proc Tab. See the Additional
Features section for the description of the information shown on the Charts Tab and the Chart NOTAMs Tab.

Selected Airport Button
Runway Information Button

Designation
Length/Width
Surface
Lighting Available

Runways Tab

Figure 5-41 Airport Runways Screen

The following descriptions and abbreviations are used on the Airport Runways Screen:
Runway surface type: Hard, Turf, Sealed, Gravel, Dirt, Soft, Unknown, or Water
Runway lighting type: No Lights, Part Time, Full Time, Unknown, or PCL (for pilot-controlled lighting)

222

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT

Selected Airport Button
Airport Directory
Information

Airport DirectoryTab
Figure 5-42 Airport Directory Info Screen

The following types of airport directory information are shown (if available):
Airport: Identifier, Site Number, Name, City, State

Traffic Pattern Altitudes (TPA): Aircraft Class/Altitude

Phones: Phone/Fax Numbers

Weather: Service Type, Frequency, Phone Number

Hours: Facility, Light, Tower, Beacon

Flight Service Station (FSS): Name, Phone Numbers

Location: Sectional, Magnetic Variation

Instrument Approaches: Published Approach, Frequency

Frequencies: Type/Frequency

NAVAIDS: Type, Identifier, Frequency, Radial, Distance

Transportation: Ground Transportation Type Available

Noise: Noise Abatement Procedures

Approach: Facility Name, Frequency, Frequency Parameter

Charts: Low Altitude Chart Number

Runway: Headings, Length, Width, Obstructions, Surface

Notes: Airport Notes

Obstructions: General Airport Obstructions

Pilot Controlled Lighting: High/Med/Low Clicks/Second

Special Operations at Airport

Services Available: Category, Specific Service

FBO: Type, Frequencies, Services, Fees, Fuel, Credit Cards,
Phone/Fax Numbers

Selecting an airport for review by identifier:
1) From Home, touch Waypoint Info > Airport.
2) Touch the Info Tab, if necessary.
3) Touch the selected airport button to display the keypad.
4) Use the keypad to enter the airport identifier.
5) Touch the Enter Button to accept the identifier and display the airport information on the Touchscreen
Controller.
6) Touch the Waypoint Options Button, then the Show on Map Button to display the Airport Information
Display, if necessary.

Finding and selecting an airport for review by facility name or city name:
1) From Home, touch Waypoint Info > Airport.
2) Touch the Info Tab, if necessary.

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

223

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
3) Touch the selected airport button to display the keypad.
4) Touch the Find Button to display the Find Waypoint Screen.
5) Touch the Search Tab to display the Search By Button.
6) If necessary, touch the Search By Button to choose Search by City or Search by Facility.
7) Touch the Facility Name Button or the City Name Button to display the keypad.
8) Use the keypad to enter the name.
9) Touch the Enter Button to accept the entry and display the search results.
10) Touch an airport selection button to display the airport information on the Touchscreen Controller.
11) Touch the Waypoint Options Button, then the Show on Map Button to display the Airport Information
Display, if necessary.

Finding and selecting an airport for review by category (Recent, Nearest, Flight Plan, or Favorites):
1) From Home, touch Waypoint Info > Airport.
2) Touch the Info Tab, if necessary.
3) Touch the selected airport button to display the keypad.
4) Touch the Find Button to display the Find Waypoint Screen.
5) Touch the Recent, Nearest, Flight Plan, or Favorites Tab to display a list of airports in the selected category.
6) Touch an airport selection button to display the airport information on the Touchscreen Controller.
7) Touch the Waypoint Options Button, then the Show on Map Button to display the Airport Information
Display, if necessary.

Selecting a runway:
1) From Home, touch Waypoint Info > Airport.
2) Touch the Runways Tab. to display the runway information buttons.
3) Touch a runway information button to select the runway.
4) Touch the Waypoint Options Button, then the Show on Map Button to view the runway on the MFD, if
necessary.

The Nearest Airport Display displays a map of the nearest airport and surrounding area, and the Nearest
Airport Screen on the Touchscreen Controller allows the pilot to view airport information, load frequencies,
review runways, and review instrument procedures that may be involved in the flight plan. For airports with
multiple runways, information for each runway is available. See the Audio and CNS Section for more information
on finding and tuning frequencies.
The Nearest Airports Screen displays a list of up to 25 nearest airports (five entries can be displayed at one
time). If there are more than five they are displayed in a scrollable list. If there are no nearest airports available,
“NONE WITHIN 200NM” is displayed.
A dashed white line is drawn on the Nearest Airport Display from the aircraft position to the selected nearest
airport.

224

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT

Navigation Map
Showing Nearest
Airport

Nearest Airport
Figure 5-43 Nearest Airport Display

Nearest Airport Information
Bearing
Distance
Type of Approach
Length of Runway

Nearest Airport Buttons
(Identifier, Name, Symbol)

Figure 5-44 Nearest Airport Screen

Viewing information for a nearest airport:
1) From Home, touch Nearest > Airport.
2) Touch a nearest airport button to display the Waypoint Options Window and highlight the airport on the MFD.
3) Touch the Airport Info Button to display the Airport Information Screen.
4) Touch a Tab to display the desired information on the Touchscreen Controller.
5) Touch the Waypoint Options Button, then the Show on Map Button to display the Nearest Airport Display,
if necessary.

See the Audio and CNS Section for frequency selection and the Procedures section for approaches.
The minimum runway length and surface type used when determining the 25 nearest airports to display
on the Nearest Airports Screen are set on the Avionics Settings Screen under the System Tab. A minimum
runway length and/or surface type can be entered to prevent airports with small runways or runways that are
not appropriately surfaced from being displayed. Default settings are 0 feet (or meters) for runway length and
“HARD/SOFT” for runway surface type.
190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

225

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Selecting nearest airport surface matching criteria:
1) From Home, touch Utilities > Setup > Avionics Settings.
2) Touch the System Tab, if necessary.
3) Scroll the list to display the Nearest Airport Runway Surface Button.
4) Touch the Nearest Airport Runway Surface Button to display the surface choices.
5) Touch a surface selection button to set the surface criteria.
System
Tab
Nearest
Airport
Runway
Surface
Button

Surface
Selection
Button

Figure 5-45 Nearest Airport Runway Surface Selection

Selecting nearest airport minimum runway length matching criteria:
1) From Home, touch Utilities > Setup > Avionics Settings.
2) Touch the System Tab, if necessary.
3) Scroll the list to display the Nearest Airport Min Rwy Length Button.
4) Touch the Nearest Airport Min Rwy Length Button to display the keypad.
5) Use the keypad to enter the minimum length.
6) Touch the Enter Button to accept the length criteria.
Runway
Length
Entry

System
Tab

Nearest
Airport
Min Rwy
Length
Button
Figure 5-46 Nearest Airport Runway Length Selection

226

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT

INTERSECTIONS
NOTE: The VOR displayed on the Intersection Information Page is the nearest VOR, not necessarily the VOR

used to define the intersection.
The Intersection Information Display displays a map of the currently selected intersection and surrounding
area, and the Intersection Information Screen on the Touchscreen Controller allows the pilot to view intersection
information.

Navigation Map
Showing
Selected
Intersection

Selected Intersection

Figure 5-47 Intersection Information Display

Waypoint Options Button

Selected Intersection Button

Direct-To, Insert in Flight Plan,
Show On Map

(Identifier, Symbol)

Region
Intersection Latitude/Longitude,
Bearing & Distance
Nearest VOR Identifier
Nearest VOR Radial

Nearest VOR Distance
Figure 5-48 Intersection Information Screen

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

227

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Selecting an intersection:
1) From Home, touch Waypoint Info > INT.
2) Touch the selected intersection button to display the keypad.
3) Use the keypad to enter the intersection identifier.
4) Touch the Enter Button to accept the identifier and display the intersection information on the Touchscreen
Controller.
5) Touch the Waypoint Options Button, then the Show on Map Button to display the Intersection Information
Display, if necessary.

Finding and selecting an intersection by category (Recent, Nearest, Flight Plan, or Favorites):
1) From Home, touch Waypoint Info > INT.
2) Touch the selected intersection button to display the keypad.
3) Touch the Find Button to display the Find Waypoint Screen.
4) Touch the Recent, Nearest, Flight Plan, or Favorites Tab to display a list of intersections in the selected
category.
5) Touch an intersection selection button to display the intersection information on the Touchscreen Controller.
6) Touch the Waypoint Options Button, then the Show on Map Button to display the Intersection Information
Display, if necessary.

The Nearest Intersecton Display displays a map of the nearest intersection and surrounding area, and the
Nearest Intersection Screen on the Touchscreen Controller allows the pilot to view intersection information, and
intitate a direct-to or insert the intersection in the flight plan.
The Nearest Intersection Screen displays a list of up to 25 nearest intersections (five entries can be displayed at
one time). If there are more than five they are displayed in a scrollable list. If there are no nearest intersections
available, “NONE WITHIN 200NM” is displayed.
A dashed white line is drawn on the Nearest Intersection Display from the aircraft position to the selected
nearest intersection.
NOTE: The list only includes waypoints that are within 200 nm.

228

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT

Navigation Map
Showing Nearest
Intersection

Nearest Intersection

Figure 5-49 Nearest Intersection Display

Nearest Intersection Information
Bearing
Distance

Nearest Intersection Buttons
(Identifier, Symbol)

Figure 5-50 Nearest Intersection Screen

Viewing information for a nearest intersection:
1) From Home, touch Nearest > INT.
2) Touch a nearest Intersection button to display the Waypoint Options Window.
3) Touch the Show on Map Button to display the Nearest Intersection Display, if necessary.
4) Touch the Intersection Info Button to display the Intersection Information Screen.

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

229

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT

NDBS
The NDB Information Display on the MFD displays a map of the currently selected NDB and surrounding
area, and the NDB Information Screen on the Touchscreen Controller allows the pilot to view NDB information.

Navigation Map
Showing
Selected NDB

Selected NDB

Figure 5-51 NDB Information Display

Waypoint Options Button

Selected NDB Button

Direct-To, Insert in Flight Plan,
Show On Map

(Identifier, Name, Symbol)

City, Region
NDB Latitude/Longitude,
Bearing & Distance
Nearest Airport
Frequency Button
Tune ADF1/2 Active/Standby
Add to Favorites

Identifier
Symbol
Bearing/Distance

Figure 5-52 NDB Information Screen

NOTE: Compass locator (LOM, LMM): a low power, low or medium frequency radio beacon installed in

conjunction with the instrument landing system. When LOM is used, the locator is at the Outer Marker;
when LMM is used, the locator is at the Middle Marker.

230

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Selecting an NDB:
1) From Home, touch Waypoint Info > NDB.
2) Touch the selected NDB button to display the keypad.
3) Use the keypad to enter the NDB identifier.
4) Touch the Enter Button to accept the identifier and display the NDB information on the Touchscreen
Controller.
5) Touch the Waypoint Options Button, then the Show on Map Button to display the NDB Information Display,
if necessary.

Finding and selecting an NDB for review by facility name or city name:
1) From Home, touch Waypoint Info > NDB.
2) Touch the selected NDB button to display the keypad.
3) Touch the Find Button to display the Find Waypoint Screen.
4) Touch the Search Tab to display the Search By Button.
5) If necessary, touch the Search By Button to choose Search by City or Search by Facility.
6) Touch the Facility Name Button or the City Name Button to display the keypad.
7) Use the keypad to enter the name.
8) Touch the Enter Button to accept the entry and display the search results.
9) Touch an NDB selection button to display the NDB information on the Touchscreen Controller.
10) Touch the Waypoint Options Button, then the Show on Map Button to display the NDB Information Display,
if necessary.

Finding and selecting an NDB by category (Recent, Nearest, Flight Plan, or Favorites):
1) From Home, touch Waypoint Info > NDB.
2) Touch the selected NDB button to display the keypad.
3) Touch the Find Button to display the Find Waypoint Screen.
4) Touch the Recent, Nearest, Flight Plan, or Favorites Tab to display a list of NDBs in the selected category.
5) Touch an NDB selection button to display the NDB information on the Touchscreen Controller.
6) Touch the Waypoint Options Button, then the Show on Map Button to display the NDB Information Display,
if necessary.

The Nearest NDB Display displays a map of the nearest NDB and surrounding area, and the Nearest NDB
Screen on the Touchscreen Controller allows the pilot to view NDB information, and intitate a direct-to or insert
the NDB in the flight plan.
The Nearest NDB Screen displays a list of up to 25 nearest NDBs (five entries can be displayed at one time).
If there are more than five they are displayed in a scrollable list. If there are no nearest NDBs available, “NONE
WITHIN 200NM” is displayed.

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

231

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
A dashed white line is drawn on the Nearest NDB Display from the aircraft position to the selected nearest
NDB .
NOTE: The list only includes waypoints that are within 200 nm.

Navigation Map
Showing Nearest
NDB

Nearest NDB

Figure 5-53 Nearest NDB Display

Nearest NDB Information
Bearing/Distance

NDB Frequency Button

Tune ADF1/2 Active/Standby Frequency
Add to Favorites

Nearest NDB Buttons

(Identifier, Name, Symbol)

Figure 5-54 Nearest NDB Screen

Viewing information for a nearest NDB:
1) From Home, touch Nearest > NDB.
2) Touch a nearest NDB button to display the Waypoint Options Window.
3) Touch the Show on Map Button to display the Nearest NDB Display, if necessary.
4) Touch the NDB Info Button to display the NDB Information Screen.

232

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT

VORS
The VOR Information Page can be used to view information about VOR and ILS signals (since ILS signals
can be received on a NAV receiver), or to quickly tune a VOR or ILS frequency. Localizer information cannot
be viewed on the VOR Information Screen. If a VOR station is combined with a TACAN station it is listed as a
VOR-TACAN on the VOR Information Screen and if it includes only DME, it is displayed as VOR-DME.
The VOR Information Display displays a map of the currently selected VOR and surrounding area, and the
VOR Information Screen on the Touchscreen Controller allows the pilot to view VOR information.

Navigation Map
Showing
Selected VOR

Selected VOR

Figure 5-55 VOR Information Display

Waypoint Options Button

Selected VOR Button

Direct-To, Insert in Flight Plan,
Show On Map

(Identifier, Name, Symbol)

City, Region
VOR Latitude/Longitude,
Bearing & Distance

Class, Magnetic Variation, Type
Nearest Airport

Frequency Button
Tune NAV1/NAV2 Active/Standby
Add to Favorites

Identifier
Symbol
Bearing/Distance

Figure 5-56 VOR Information Screen

The VOR classes used are: LOW ALTITUDE, HIGH ALTITUDE, and TERMINAL.

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

233

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Selecting a VOR:
1) From Home, touch Waypoint Info > VOR.
2) Touch the selected VOR button to display the keypad.
3) Use the keypad to enter the VOR identifier.
4) Touch the Enter Button to accept the identifier and display the VOR information on the Touchscreen
Controller.
5) Touch the Waypoint Options Button, then the Show on Map Button to display the VOR Information Display,
if necessary.

Finding and selecting a VOR for review by facility name or city name:
1) From Home, touch Waypoint Info > VOR.
2) Touch the selected VOR button to display the keypad.
3) Touch the Find Button to display the Find Waypoint Screen.
4) Touch the Search Tab to display the Search By Button.
5) If necessary, touch the Search By Button to choose Search by City or Search by Facility.
6) Touch the Facility Name Button or the City Name Button to display the keypad.
7) Use the keypad to enter the name.
8) Touch the Enter Button to accept the entry and display the search results.
9) Touch a VOR selection button to display the VOR information on the Touchscreen Controller.
10) Touch the Waypoint Options Button, then the Show on Map Button to display the VOR Information Display,
if necessary.

Finding and selecting a VOR by category (Recent, Nearest, Flight Plan, or Favorites):
1) From Home, touch Waypoint Info > VOR.
2) Touch the selected VOR button to display the keypad.
3) Touch the Find Button to display the Find Waypoint Screen.
4) Touch the Recent, Nearest, Flight Plan, or Favorites Tab to display a list of VORs in the selected category.
5) Touch a VOR selection button to display the VOR information on the Touchscreen Controller.
6) Touch the Waypoint Options Button, then the Show on Map Button to display the VOR Information Display,
if necessary.

The Nearest VOR Display displays a map of the nearest VOR and surrounding area, and the Nearest VOR
Screen on the Touchscreen Controller allows the pilot to view VOR information, intitate a direct-to, insert the
VOR in the flight plan, or tune a NAV frequency.
The Nearest VOR Screen displays a list of up to 25 nearest VORs (five entries can be displayed at one time).
If there are more than five they are displayed in a scrollable list. If there are no nearest VORs available, “NONE
WITHIN 200NM” is displayed.

234

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
A dashed white line is drawn on the Nearest VOR Display from the aircraft position to the selected nearest
VOR.
NOTE: The list only includes waypoints that are within 200 nm.

Navigation Map
Showing Nearest
VOR

Nearest VOR

Figure 5-57 Nearest VOR Display

Nearest VOR Information
Bearing/Distance

VOR Frequency Button

Tune NAV1/2 Active/Standby Frequency
Add to Favorites

Nearest VOR Buttons

(Identifier, Name, Symbol)

Figure 5-58 Nearest VOR Screen

Viewing information for a nearest NDB:
1) From Home, touch Nearest > VOR.
2) Touch a nearest VOR button to display the Waypoint Options Window and highlight the VOR.
3) Touch the Show on Map Button to display the Nearest VOR Display, if necessary.
4) Touch the VOR Info Button to display the VOR Information Screen.

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

235

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT

USER WAYPOINTS
The system can create and store up to 1,000 user-defined waypoints. User waypoints can be created from
any map display (except PFD Inset Map, Trip Planning, or Procedure) by selecting a position on the map using
the Joystick, or from the User Waypoint Information Screen by referencing a bearing/distance from an existing
waypoint, bearings from two existing waypoints, or latitude and longitude. Once a waypoint has been created,
it can be renamed, deleted, or moved. Temporary user waypoints are erased upon system power down.

Navigation Map
Showing
Selected User
Waypoint

Selected User Waypoint

Figure 5-59 User Waypoint Information Display

Selected User Waypoint Button

Waypoint Options Button

(Identifier, Name, Symbol)

Direct To, Insert in Flight Plan, Edit,
Delete, Delete All, Show On Map

Region

User Waypoint Definition
Location Type (LAT/LON)
Latitude/Longitude
Distance/Bearing from Aircraft

Figure 5-60 User Waypoint Information Screen (defined by latitude/longitude)

236

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT

Selected User Waypoint Button
(Identifier, Name, Symbol)

Bearing/Distance from Aircraft

Waypoint Options Button

Direct-To, Insert in Flight Plan, Edit,
Delete, Delete All, Show on Map

User Waypoint Definition
Location Type (RAD/DIS)
Reference Waypoint
Radial/Distance from Waypoint
Latitude/Longitude

Region

Figure 5-61 User Waypoint Information Screen (defined by radial/distance from waypoint)

Selected User Waypoint Button
(Identifier, Name, Symbol)

Bearing/Distance from Aircraft

Waypoint Options Button

Direct-To, Insert in Flight Plan, Edit,
Delete, Delete All, Show on Map

User Waypoint Definition
Location Type (RAD/RAD)
Reference Waypoints
Radials from Waypoints
Latitude/Longitude

Region

Figure 5-62 User Waypoint Information Screen (defined by radials from two waypoints)

Selecting a user waypoint:
1) From Home, touch Waypoint Info > User Waypoint.
2) Touch the selected user waypoint button to display the keypad.
3) Use the keypad to enter the user waypoint identifier.
4) Touch the Enter Button to accept the identifier and display the user waypoint information on the Touchscreen
Controller.
5) Touch the Waypoint Options Button, then the Show on Map Button to display the User Waypoint Information
Display, if necessary.

Finding and selecting a user waypoint for review by facility name or city name:
1) From Home, touch Waypoint Info > User Waypoint.
2) Touch the selected user waypoint button to display the keypad.
3) Touch the Find Button to display the Find Waypoint Screen.
4) Touch the Search Tab to display the Search By Button.
5) If necessary, touch the Search By Button to choose Search by City or Search by Facility.
6) Touch the Facility Name Button or the City Name Button to display the keypad.

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

237

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
7) Use the keypad to enter the name.
8) Touch the Enter Button to accept the entry and display the search results.
9) Touch a user waypoint selection button to display the user waypoint information on the Touchscreen
Controller.
10) Touch the Waypoint Options Button, then the Show on Map Button to display the User Waypoint Information
Display, if necessary..

Finding and selecting a user waypoint by category (Recent, Nearest, Flight Plan, or Favorites):
1) From Home, touch Waypoint Info > User Waypoint.
2) Touch the selected user waypoint button to display the keypad.
3) Touch the Find Button to display the Find Waypoint Screen.
4) Touch the Recent, Nearest, Flight Plan, or Favorites Tab to display a list of user waypoints in the selected
category.
5) Touch a user waypoint selection button to display the user waypoint information on the Touchscreen
Controller.
6) Touch the Waypoint Options Button, then the Show on Map Button to display the User Waypoint Information
Display, if necessary.

Navigation Map
Showing Nearest
User Waypoint

Nearest User Waypoint

Figure 5-63 Nearest User Waypoint Display

238

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT

Nearest User Waypoint Information
Bearing/Distance

Nearest User Waypoint Buttons
(Identifier, Name, Symbol)

Figure 5-64 Nearest User Waypoint Screen

Viewing information for a nearest user waypoint:
1) From Home, touch Nearest > User.
2) Touch a nearest user waypoint button to display the Waypoint Options Window.
3) Touch the Show on Map Button to display the Nearest User Display on the MFD, if necessary.
4) Touch the User Waypoint Info Button to display the User Waypoint Information Screen.

CREATING USER WAYPOINTS
User waypoints can be created from the User Waypoint Information Screen in the following ways:
Creating user waypoints from the User Waypoint Information Screen:
1) From Home, touch Waypoint Info > Create Waypoint. The current aircraft position is the default location
of the new waypoint.
2) Touch the user waypoint name button to display the keypad.
3) Use the keypad and the Enter Button to select a user waypoint name (up to six characters).
4) If desired, define the type and location of the waypoint in one of the following ways:
a) Touch the Type Button to display the User Waypoint Type Window.
b) Touch the RAD/DIS Button to select the bearing/distance from a waypoint type.
c) Touch the REF Button to display the keypad.
d) Use the keypad and the Enter Button, or the Find function, to select the waypoint.
e) Touch the RAD Button to display the keypad.
f) Use the keypad and the Enter Button to select the radial.
g) Touch the DIS Button to display the keypad.
h) Use the keypad and the Enter Button to select the distance.

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

239

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT

User Waypoint Name Button

Temporary Button

Type Button
REF Button

DIS Button

RAD Button
Comment Button
Figure 5-65 Create User Waypoint Screen (defined by bearing/distance from a waypoint)

Or:
a) Touch the Type Button to display the User Waypoint Type Window.
b) Touch the RAD/RAD Button to select the bearings from two waypoints type.
c) Touch a REF Button to display the keypad.
d) Use the keypad and the Enter Button, or the Find function, to select the waypoint.
e) Touch the corresponding RAD Button to display the keypad.
f) Use the keypad and the Enter Button to select the radial.
g) Repeat steps c – f for the other reference waypoint and radial.
User Waypoint Name Button

Temporary Button

Type Button
REF Button 1

RAD Button 1

REF Button 2

RAD Button 2
Comment Button

Figure 5-66 Create User Waypoint Screen (defined by radials from two waypoints)

Or:
a) Touch the Type Button to display the User Waypoint Type Window.
b) Touch the LAT/LON Button to select the latitude/longitude type.
c) Touch the LAT/LON Button to display the keypad.
d) Use the keypad and the Enter Button to select the latitude and longitude.

240

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT

User Waypoint Name Button

Temporary Button

Type Button
LAT/LON Button

Comment Button
Figure 5-67 Create User Waypoint Screen (defined by latitude/longitude)

5) If desired, change the waypoint comment.
a) Touch the Comment Button to display the keypad.
b) Use the keypad and the Enter Button to select the comment.
6) If desired, touch the Temporary Button to change the waypoint storage method. When the annunciator on
the button is green, the waypoint is only stored until the next power cycle. When the annunciator is gray, the
waypoint is stored until manually erased.
7) Touch the Create Button to accept the new user waypoint.

Creating user waypoints from map pages:
1) Press the Joystick to activate the panning function and display the Map Pointer Options Screen on the
Touchscreen Controller.
2) Use the Joystick to pan to the map location of the desired user waypoint.
3) Touch the Create User Waypoint Button. The Create User Waypoint Screen is displayed with the captured
position.
4) Touch the user waypoint name button to display the keypad.
5) Use the keypad and the Enter Button to select a user waypoint name (up to six characters).
6) If desired, change the waypoint comment. The comment defaults to the abbreviated latitude/longitude of the
user waypoint.
a) Touch the Comment Button to display the keypad.
b) Use the keypad and the Enter Button to select the comment.
7) Press the Create Button to create the new waypoint.
8) Press the Joystick to deactivate the panning function and return to the previous display on the Touchscreen
Controller.

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

241

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT

User Waypoint Name Button

Comment Button
Figure 5-68 Create User Waypoint Screen (initiated from map page)

EDITING USER WAYPOINTS
Editing a user waypoint comment:
1) From Home, touch Waypoint Info > User Waypoint.
2) If necessary, touch the WPT List Tab to display the list of user waypoints, and touch the desired user waypoint
selection button.
3) Touch the Waypoint Options Button to display the Waypoint Options Window.
4) Touch the Edit Button to display the Edit User Waypoint Screen.
5) Touch the Comment Button to display the keypad.
6) Use the keypad and the Enter Button to select a user waypoint comment (up to 25 characters).
7) Touch the Save Button to accept the new comment.
8) Touch the YES Button in response to the question “Are you sure you want to modify this waypoint?”.

Editing a user waypoint name:
1) From Home, touch Waypoint Info > User Waypoint.
2) If necessary, touch the WPT List Tab to display the list of user waypoints, and touch the desired user waypoint
selection button.
3) Touch the Waypoint Options Button to display the Waypoint Options Window.
4) Touch the Edit Button to display the Edit User Waypoint Screen.
5) Touch the user waypoint name button to display the keypad.
6) Use the keypad and the Enter Button to select a user waypoint name (up to six characters).
7) Touch the Save Button to accept the new name.
8) Touch the YES Button in response to the question “Are you sure you want to modify this waypoint?”.

242

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Editing a user waypoint type and location:
1) From Home, touch Waypoint Info > User Waypoint.
2) If necessary, touch the WPT List Tab to display the list of user waypoints, and touch the desired user waypoint
selection button.
3) Touch the Waypoint Options Button to display the Waypoint Options Window.
4) Touch the Edit Button to display the Edit User Waypoint Screen.
5) Touch the Type Button to display the User Waypoint Type Window.
6) Touch the RAD/DIS Button, the RAD/RAD Button, or the LAT/LON Button to select the waypoint type.
7) Touch the REF Button, the RAD Button, the DIS Button, or the LAT/LON Button, as required, to bring up the
keypad.
8) Use the keypad and the Enter Button to select the user waypoint location.
9) Touch the Save Button to accept the new type and location.
10) Touch the YES Button in response to the question “Are you sure you want to modify this waypoint?”.
Changing the location of an existing user waypoint to the aircraft present position:
1) From Home, touch Waypoint Info > User Waypoint.
2) If necessary, touch the WPT List Tab to display the list of user waypoints, and touch the desired user waypoint
selection button.
3) Touch the Waypoint Options Button to display the Waypoint Options Window.
4) Touch the Edit Button to display the Edit User Waypoint Screen.
5) Touch the Type Button to display the User Waypoint Type Window.
6) Touch the P. POS Button to select the aircraft present position as the location.
7) Touch the Save Button to accept the new name.
8) Touch the YES Button in response to the question “Are you sure you want to modify this waypoint?”.

DELETING USER WAYPOINTS
Deleting a single user waypoint:
1) From Home, touch Waypoint Info > User Waypoint.
2) If necessary, touch the WPT List Tab to display the list of user waypoints, and touch the desired user waypoint
selection button.
3) Touch the Waypoint Options Button to display the Waypoint Options Window.
4) Touch the Delete Button.
5) Touch the YES Button in response to the question “Would you like to delete the user waypoint XXXXXX?”.

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

243

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT

5.4 AIRSPACES
The system can display the following types of airspaces: Class B/TMA, Class C/TCA, Class D, Restricted, MOA
(Military), Other Airspace, Air Defense Interdiction Zone (ADIZ), and Temporary Flight Restriction (TFR).

Class D Airspace

MOA (Military)

Class B Airspace
Restricted Area

Alert Area

Class C Airspace

ADIZ
Warning Area
Figure 5-69 Airspaces

The Nearest Airspace Screen and the Message window on the Touchscreen Controller provide additional
information about airspaces and the location of the aircraft in relationship to them.
The Alerts Tab on the Avionics Settings Screen allows the pilot to turn the controlled/special-use airspace alerts
on or off. This does not affect the alerts listed on the Nearest Airspace Screen or the airspace boundaries depicted
on the Navigation Map Display. It simply turns on/off the alert provided when the aircraft is approaching or near
an airspace.

244

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
An altitude buffer is also provided which “expands” the vertical range above or below an airspace. For example,
if the buffer is set at 500 feet, and the aircraft is more than 500 feet above/below an airspace, an alert message is
not generated, but if the aircraft is less than 500 feet above/below an airspace and projected to enter it, the pilot
is notified with an alert message. The default setting for the altitude buffer is 200 feet.
Changing the altitude buffer distance setting:
1) From Home, touch Utilities > Setup > Avionics Settings.
2) Touch the Alerts Tab to display the list of alert settings.
3) Touch the Airspace Alert Alt Buffer Button to display the keypad.
4) Use the keypad and the Enter Button to select the buffer distance.

Turning an airspace alert on or off:
1) From Home, touch Utilities > Setup > Avionics Settings.
2) Touch the Alerts Tab to display the list of alert settings.
3) Scroll the list if necessary.
4) Touch the airspace alert enable button to enable/disable the alert.

Airspace Alert Alt Buffer Button
- Airspace Altitude Buffer
(Default Settings Shown)

Alerts Tab
Airspace Alert Enable Button

Figure 5-70 Avionics Settings Screen - Alerts Tab

Map ranges for the airspace boundaries are selected on the Aviation Tab on the Map Settings Screen. See Table
5-2 for the default and maximum ranges for each type of airspace and the symbol used to define the airspace area.
The Nearest Airspace Screen and the Nearest Airspace Display can be used to quickly find airspaces close to the
flight path. The Nearest Airspace Display shows a map of airspace boundaries and surrounding area. The Nearest
Airspace Screen displays airspace information. In addition, a selected frequency associated with the airspace can
be loaded from the Nearest Airspace Screen.

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

245

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT

Airspace 1
Airspace 2
Airspace 3

Figure 5-71 Nearest Airspace Display

Controlling
Agency

Airspace
Info Button
Airspace

Vertical Limits

Airspace
Status

Frequency
Tuning
Button
Frequencies

- Ceiling
- Floor

Name
Type

* Proximity
** Time till
Intercept

Figure 5-72 Nearest Airspace Screen

- Type
- Avail/Info

*Proximity: Ahead, Inside, Ahead<2nm, Within 2nm
**Time till Intercept: Only if Ahead or Ahead < 2nm

Selecting and viewing an airspace alert with its associated information:
1) From Home, touch Nearest > Airspace.
2) Touch an airspace info button to display the Airspace Options Window.
3) Touch the Show on Map Button to display the Nearest Airspace Information Display, if necessary.
4) Touch the Details Button to see more information about the airspace.

246

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
When an airspace alert occurs, the MSG Button on the Touchscreen Controller begins flashing. Touch the
flashing button to view the list of alerts. The following airspace alerts are displayed in the message window:
Message
INSIDE ARSPC – Inside airspace.
ARSPC AHEAD – Airspace ahead –
less than 10 minutes.
ARSPC NEAR – Airspace near and
ahead.
ARSPC NEAR – Airspace near
– less than 2 nm.

Comments
The aircraft is inside the airspace.
Special use airspace is ahead of aircraft. The aircraft penetrates the airspace within 10
minutes.
Special use airspace is near and ahead of the aircraft position.
Special use airspace is within 2 nm of the aircraft position.

Table 5-6 Airspace Alert Messages

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

247

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT

5.5 DIRECT-TO-NAVIGATION
The Direct-to method of navigation, initiated by touching the Direct To Button on the Touchscreen Controller,
or by pressing the ¯ Button on the PFD Controller, is quicker to use than a flight plan when needing to navigate
to a single point such as a nearby airport.
Once a direct-to is activated, the system establishes a point-to-point course line from the present position to the
selected direct-to destination. Course guidance is provided until the direct-to is replaced with a new direct-to or
flight plan, or cancelled.
A vertical navigation (VNAV) direct-to creates a descent path (and provides guidance to stay on the path) from
the current altitude to a selected altitude at the direct-to waypoint. Vertical navigation is based on barometric
altitudes, not on GPS altitude, and is used for cruise and descent phases of flight.
The Direct-to Window on the PFD and the Direct To Screen on the Touchscreen Controller allows selection and
activation of direct-to navigation, and displays selected direct-to waypoint data on the PFD and the Touchscreen
Controller. Any waypoint can be entered as a direct-to destination.
Waypoint Selection Button
- Identifier/Symbol/City

Waypoint Tab

Direct-to Point Info
- City/Region
- Bearing/Distance

Flight Plan Tab

VNAV Offset Button

Nearest Tab

VNAV Altitude Button

Recent Tab

Hold Button

Course Button

Activate ¯ Button

Cancel ¯ Button
Figure 5-73 Direct To Screen

Activate and Insert in Flight Plan
Button

Selecting a waypoint as the direct-to destination by identifier:
1) From Home, touch Direct To.
2) Touch the waypoint selection button to display the keypad.
3) Use the keypad to select the waypoint identifier.
4) Touch the Enter Button to accept the identifier, and and return to the Direct To Screen.
5) Touch the Activate ¯ Button to activate the direct-to.

Finding and selecting a waypoint as the direct-to destination by facility name or city name:
1) From Home, touch Direct To.
2) Touch the waypoint selection button to display the keypad.
3) Touch the Find Button to display the Find Waypoint Screen.
4) Touch the Search Tab to display the Search By Button.

248

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
5) If necessary, touch the Search By Button to choose Search by City or Search by Facility.
6) Touch the Facility Name Button or the City Name Button to display the keypad.
7) Use the keypad to select the name.
8) Touch the Enter Button to accept the entry and display the search results.
9) Touch a waypoint selection button to choose the waypoint as the direct-to destination, and return to the Direct
To Screen.
10) Touch the Activate ¯ Button to activate the direct-to.
City Name
Button

Search By
Button
- Name
- Facility

Waypoint
Selection
Button

Search Tab
Figure 5-74 Find Waypoint Screen - Search by City Name

Selecting a waypoint as the direct-to destination by category (Flight Plan, Nearest, or Recent):
1) From Home, touch Direct To.
2) Touch the Flight Plan Tab, the Nearest Tab, or the Recent Tab, as necessary.
3) Touch a waypoint selection button to choose the waypoint as the direct-to destination, and return to the Direct
To Screen.
4) Touch the Activate ¯ Button to activate the direct-to.

Bearing/Distance to Waypoint
Flight Plan Tab

Waypoint Selection Button

Figure 5-75 Direct To Screen - Flight Plan Tab

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

249

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Selecting a waypoint as the direct-to destination from the active flight plan:
1) From Home, touch Flight Plan.
2) Touch a waypoint selection button to display the Waypoint Options Screen.
3) Touch the ¯ button to choose the waypoint as the direct-to destination, and return to the Direct To Screen.
4) Touch the Activate ¯ Button to activate the direct-to.
Direct To (¯) Button
Waypoint Selection Button

Figure 5-76 Waypoint Options Screen

Selecting the active flight plan waypoint as the direct-to destination:
1) From Home, touch the ¯ Button to choose the active flight plan waypoint as the direct-to destination, and
return to the Direct To Screen.
2) Touch the Activate ¯ Button to activate the direct-to.
Or:
1) From Home, touch Flight Plan.
2) Touch the ¯ button to choose the active flight plan waypoint as the direct-to destination, and return to the
Direct To Screen.
3) Touch the Activate ¯ Button to activate the direct-to.

The direct-to function can be accessed from any waypoint information screen (Airport Information, Intersection
Information, VOR Information, NDB Information, or User Waypoint Information), and from some of the nearest
waypoint screens (Nearest Airport, Nearest Intersection, Nearest VOR, Nearest NDB, Nearest User, or Nearest
Weather) . If the direct-to is initiated from the Active Flight Plan Screen when no waypoint has been selected,
the default waypoint is either the active flight plan waypoint (if a flight plan is active) or no waypoint (Select
Waypoint Button is active). Direct-to requests on waypoint information screens or nearest waypoint screens
defaults to the displayed waypoint.

250

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Selecting any waypoint as a direct-to destination:
1) Select the screen containing the desired waypoint type and select the desired waypoint.
2) Touch the Waypoint Options Button.
3) Touch the ¯ button to choose the waypoint as the direct-to destination, and display the Direct To Screen.
4) Touch the Activate ¯ Button to activate the direct-to.

Selecting a nearby airport as a direct-to destination:
1) From Home, touch Nearest > Airport.
2) Touch a nearest airport button to display the Waypoint Options Window and highlight the airport.
3) Touch the ¯ button to choose the waypoint as the direct-to destination, and display the Direct To Screen.
4) Touch the Activate ¯ Button to activate the direct-to.

Direct-to destinations may also be selected by using the map pointer on the navigation map.
Selecting a waypoint as a direct-to destination using the pointer:
1) From the navigation map display, press the Joystick to display the pointer.
2) Move the Joystick to place the pointer at the desired destination location.
3) If the pointer is placed on an existing airport, NAVAID, or user waypoint, the waypoint name is highlighted, and
the Direct To Button is activated.
4) Touch the Direct To Button to display the Direct To Screen with the selected point entered as the direct-to
destination.
5) Touch the Activate ¯ Button to activate the direct-to.

Cancelling a Direct To:
1) From Home, touch Direct To.
2) Touch the Cancel ¯ Button.
3) Touch the YES Button in response to the question “Cancel ¯ XXXXXX”.

Cancel ¯
Figure 5-77 Cancelling a Direct To

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

251

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
When navigating a direct-to, the system sets a direct great circle course to the selected destination. The course
to a destination can also be manually selected.
Selecting a manual direct-to course:
1) From Home, touch Direct To.
2) Touch the Course Button to display the keypad.
3) Use the keypad to select the course.
4) Touch the Enter Button to accept the course, and and return to the Direct To Screen.
5) Touch the Activate ¯ Button to activate the direct-to using the manually selected course.

Course
Selection

Figure 5-78 Direct To - Selecting a Manual Course

Reselecting the direct course from the current position:
1) From Home, touch Direct To.
2) Touch the Activate ¯ Button to activate the direct-to using the direct course.

A direct-to with altitude constraints creates a descent path (and provides guidance to stay on the path) from
the aircraft’s current altitude to the altitude of the direct-to waypoint. The altitude is reached at the waypoint, or
at the specified distance along the flight path if an offset distance has been entered. All VNAV altitudes prior to
the direct-to destination are removed from the active flight plan upon successful activation of the direct-to. All
VNAV altitudes following the direct-to waypoint are retained. See the section on Vertical Navigation for more
information regarding the use and purpose of VNAV altitudes and offset distances.

252

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Entering a VNAV altitude and along-track offset for the waypoint:
1) From Home, touch Direct To.
2) Touch the VNAV Altitude Button to display the keypad.
3) Use the keypad to select the altitude.
4) Touch the Enter Button to accept the altitude, and and return to the Direct To Screen.
2) Touch the VNAV Offset Button to display the keypad.
3) Touch the (Before) - Button or the (After) + Button, if necessary.
3) Use the keypad to select the offset distance.
4) Touch the Enter Button to accept the offset distance, and and return to the Direct To Screen.
5) Touch the Activate ¯ Button to activate the direct-to using the VNAV constraints.

Altitude/
Offset
Selection

Figure 5-79 Direct To - Setting VNAV Constraints

Removing a VNAV constraint:
1) From Home, touch Direct To.
2) Touch the Activate ¯ Button to activate the direct to without the VNAV constraints.

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

253

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT

5.6 FLIGHT PLANNING
Flight planning consists of building a flight plan by entering waypoints one at a time, adding waypoints along
airways, and inserting departures, airways, arrivals, or approaches as needed. The system allows flight planning
information to be entered from the Touchscreen Controller. The flight plan is displayed on maps using different
line widths, colors, and types, based on the type of leg and the segment of the flight plan currently being flown
(departure, enroute, arrival, approach, or missed approach).
Flight Plan Leg Type
Active non-heading Leg

Symbol

Active heading Leg
Non-heading Leg in the current flight segment
Heading Leg not in the current flight segment
Non-heading Leg not in the active flight segment
Turn Anticipation Arc

Table 5-7 Flight Plan Leg Symbols

Up to 99 flight plans with up to 99 waypoints each can be created and stored in memory. One flight plan can be
activated at a time and becomes the active flight plan. The active flight plan is erased when the system is turned
off and overwritten when another flight plan is activated. When storing flight plans with an approach, departure,
or arrival, the system uses the waypoint information from the current database to define the waypoints. If the
database is changed or updated, the system automatically updates the information if the procedure has not been
modified. If an approach, departure, or arrival procedure is no longer available, the procedure is deleted from the
affected stored flight plan(s), and an alert is displayed (see Miscellaneous Messages in Appendix A) advising that
one or more stored flight plans need to be edited.
Whenever an approach, departure, or arrival procedure is loaded into the active flight plan, a set of approach,
departure, or arrival waypoints is inserted into the flight plan along with a header line describing the instrument
procedure the pilot selected. The original enroute portion of the flight plan remains active (unless an instrument
procedure is activated) when the procedure is loaded.
When the database is updated, the airways need to be reloaded also. Each airway segment is reloaded from
the database given the entry waypoint, the airway identifier and the exit waypoint. This reloads the sequence of
waypoints between the entry and exit waypoints (the sequence may change when the database is updated). The
update of an airway can fail during this process. If that happens, the airway waypoints are changed to regular
(non-airway) flight plan waypoints, and an alert is displayed (see Miscellaneous Messages in Appendix A).

254

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
The following could cause the airway update to fail:
• Airway identifier, entry waypoint or exit waypoint not found in the new database.
• Airway entry/exit waypoint is not an acceptable waypoint for the airway – either the waypoint is no longer on
the airway, or there is a new directional restriction that prevents it being used.
• Loading the new airway sequence would exceed the capacity of the flight plan.

FLIGHT PLAN CREATION
There are three places to create, modify, or view a flight plan:
• Active Flight Plan Screen on the Touchscreen Controller (create/modify the active flight plan)
• Flight Plan Catalog Screen on the Touchscreen Controller (create/modify a stored flight plan)
• Active Flight Plan on the MFD (view the active flight plan)
Flight Plan Name

Direct To (¯) Button

Departure Identifier Button
Waypoint Selection Button

PROC Button

Active Flight Plan Leg
VNAV Button

Bearing/Distance to Waypoint
(default data field types selections)
Enroute Button

Flight Plan Options Button

VNAV Altitude Button
Figure 5-80 Active Flight Plan Screen
Number of Flight Plans Stored

Number of Available Storage Spots

Stored Flight Plan Options Button

Cumulative Flight Plan Distance

Departure Airport Identifier/Symbol
Flight Plan Enroute Safe Altitude

Destination Airport Identifier/Symbol

Create New Catalog Flight Plan
Button

Figure 5-81 Flight Plan Catalog Screen

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

255

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT

Active Flight Plan

Active Flight Plan Leg

Active Flight Plan Info

Current VNAV Profile

- Active VNAV WPT ID/Alt
- Time to Top of Descent
- Flight Path Angle
- Vertical Speed Target
- Vertical Speed Required
- Vertical Deviation

Active Flight Plan Leg

Figure 5-82 Active Flight Plan displayed on MFD

The active flight plan is listed on the Active Flight Plan Screen on the Touchscreen Controller. It is the flight
plan to which the system is currently providing guidance, and is shown on the navigation maps. Stored flight
plans are listed on the Flight Plan Catalog Screen, and are available for activation (becomes the active flight
plan).
Displaying/removing the active flight plan on the navigation map display:
1) From Home, touch Map > Map Settings.
2) Touch the Inset Window Tab.
3) Touch the Flight Plan Text Button to display/remove the active flight plan information.
Creating an active flight plan using the Touchscreen Controller:
1) From Home, touch Flight Plan.
2) Touch the Add Waypoint Button to display the keypad.
3) Select the identifier of the departure waypoint. The active flight plan is modified as each waypoint is entered.

Use the keypad and the Enter Button to select a waypoint Identifier.
Or:

Use the right Knobs to select a waypoint identifier.
Or:
a) Touch the Find Button to display the FInd Waypoint Screen.
b) Touch the Nearest, Recent, Flight Plan, or Favorites Tab and select the waypoint from from the list of
waypoints.
Or:

256

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
a) Touch the Find Button to display the Find Waypoint Screen.
b) Touch the Search Tab to display the Search By Button.
c) If necessary, touch the Search By Button to choose Search by City or Search by Facility.
d) Touch the Facility Name Button or the City Name Button to display the keypad.
e) Use the keypad and the Enter Button to accept the entry and display the search results.
f) Touch a waypoint selection button to choose the waypoint.
4) Repeat step numbers 2 and 3 to enter each additional flight plan waypoint.

Creating a stored flight plan using the Touchscreen Controller:
1) From Home, touch Flight Plan > Flight Plan Options
2) Touch the Catalog Button to display the Flight Plan Catalog Screen.
3) Touch the Create New Catalog Flight Plan Button to display the Edit Stored Flight Plan Screen.
4) Touch the Add Waypoint Button to display the keypad.
5) Select the identifier of the departure waypoint. The active flight plan is modified as each waypoint is entered.

Use the keypad and the Enter Button to select a waypoint Identifier.
Or:

Use the right knobs to select a waypoint identifier.
Or:
a) Touch the Find Button to display the FInd Waypoint Screen.
b) Touch the Nearest, Recent, Flight Plan, or Favorites Tab and select the waypoint from from the list of
waypoints.
Or:
a) Touch the Find Button to display the Find Waypoint Screen.
b) Touch the Search Tab to display the Search By Button.
c) If necessary, touch the Search By Button to choose Search by City or Search by Facility.
d) Touch the Facility Name Button or the City Name Button to display the keypad.
e) Use the keypad and the Enter Button to accept the entry and display the search results.
f) Touch a waypoint selection button to choose the waypoint.
6) Repeat step numbers 4 and 5 to enter each additional flight plan waypoint.

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

257

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Flight plans can be imported from an SD Card or exported to an SD Card.
Importing a Flight Plan from an SD Card
1) Insert the SD card containing the flight plan in the top card slot on the MFD.
2) From Home, touch Flight Plan > Flight Plan Options > Catalog > Create New Catalog Flight Plan >
Flight Plan Options.
3) Touch the Import Button to display the Import Flight Plan Screen.
4) Touch a flight plan selection button to display the flight plan information and activate the Import Button.
5) Touch the Import Button.
7) Touch the OK Button to return to the Edit Stored Flight Plan Screen.

Flight Plan
Select
Button

Import
Button

Import
Button
Selected
Flight
Plan Info

Figure 5-83 Flight Plan Import

NOTE: If the imported flight plan contains a waypoint with a name that duplicates the name of a waypoint

already stored on the system, the system compares the coordinates of the imported waypoint with those of
the existing waypoint. If the coordinates are different, the imported waypoint is automatically renamed by
adding characters to the end of the name.

258

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Exporting a stored Flight Plan to an SD Card
1) Insert the SD card for storing the flight plan in the top card slot on the MFD.
2) From Home, touch Flight Plan > Flight Plan Options
3) Touch the Catalog Button to display the Flight Plan Catalog Screen.
4) Touch a flight plan selection button to display the Catalog Options Window.
5) Touch the Export Button to display the Export Flight Plan Screen.
6) Touch the File Name: Button to rename the exported flight plan using the keypad or right knob, if necessary.
7) Touch the Export Button.
8) Touch the OK Button in response to the “Flight Plan Successfully Exported.” prompt to return to the Flight Plan
Options Screen.
NOTE: The exported flight plan will not contain any procedures or airways.

Flight Plan
Selection
Button

Catalog
Button

Export
Button

Figure 5-84 Stored Flight Plan Export

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

259

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT

ADDING WAYPOINTS TO AN EXISTING FLIGHT PLAN
Waypoints can be added to the active flight plan or any stored flight plan. Choose the flight plan, select the
desired point of insertion, enter the waypoint, and it is added to the flight plan. Flight plans are limited to 99
waypoints (including waypoints within airways and procedures). If the number of waypoints in the flight plan
exceeds 99, the message “Flight plan is full. Remove unnecessary waypoints.” appears and the new waypoint(s)
are not added to the flight plan.
Stored Flight Plan Selected

- Comment
- Procedure Identifier
- Waypoint Identifier
- Airway Identifier
- Flight Plan Segment Identifier
- Desired Track to Waypoint
- Distance to Waypoint
- Waypoint Altitude Constraint

Procedure Options Button
Waypoint Options Button

Flight Plan Options Button
Figure 5-85 Edit Stored Flight Plan Screen

Flight Plan Full Message

Figure 5-86 Edit Stored Flight Plan Screen - Flight Plan Full

Adding a waypoint to a stored flight plan:
1) From Home, touch Flight Plan > Flight Plan Options
2) Touch the Catalog Button to display the Flight Plan Catalog Screen.
3) Touch a flight plan selection button to display the Catalog Options Window.
4) Touch the Edit Button to display the Edit Stored Flight Plan Screen.
5) Touch a waypoint options button to display the Waypoint Options Window.

260

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
6) Touch the Insert Before Button or the Insert After Button to select where the new waypint will be placed in
relation to the selected waypoint. The keypad is displayed.
7) Use the keypad, right knob, or the Find function to select the new waypoint.
8) Touch the Enter Button to accept the waypoint and place it in the flight plan.
Insert Before Button
Insert After Button

Selected Waypoint
Remove Waypoint Button
Waypoint Info Button

Figure 5-87 Edit Stored Flight Plan Screen - Waypoint Options Window

Or:
1) From Home, touch Flight Plan > Flight Plan Options
2) Touch the Catalog Button to display the Flight Plan Catalog Screen.
3) Touch a flight plan selection button to display the Catalog Options Window.
4) Touch the Edit Button to display the Edit Stored Flight Plan Screen.
5) Scroll to the end of the list, if necessary to show the Add Waypoint Button.
6) Touch the Add Waypoint Button to display the keypad is displayed.
7) Use the keypad, right knob, or the Find function to select the new waypoint.
8) Touch the Enter Button to accept the waypoint and place it in the flight plan.

Add Waypoint Button
Figure 5-88 Edit Stored Flight Plan Screen - Adding a Waypoint to the end of the Flight Plan

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

261

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT

NOTE: If the identifier entered in the Waypoint Information Window has duplicates, a ‘Duplicates found’

message is shown. Touch the Enter Button and the Waypoint Duplicates Screen is displayed. Touch a
waypoint selection button to select the correct waypoint.

Duplicates
Message
Waypoint
Selection
Button

Figure 5-89 Duplicate Waypoints

Adding a waypoint to the active flight plan:
1) From Home, touch Flight Plan.
2) Touch a waypoint button to display the Waypoint Options Window.
3) Touch the Insert Before Button or the Insert After Button to select where the new waypoint will be placed
in relation to the selected waypoint. The keypad is displayed.
4) Use the keypad, right knob, or the Find function to select the new waypoint.
5) Touch the Enter Button to accept the waypoint and place it in the flight plan.

Adding waypoints to the active flight plan using the map pointer:
1) Press the Joystick to activate the panning function on the Navigation Map Display and pan to the map location
of the desired waypoint. When the pointer is activated, the Map Pointer Options Screen is displayed on the
Touchscreen Controller. When the pointer highlights a map location that can be added to the active flight plan,
the Insert In Flight Plan Button is activated.
2) Touch the Insert In Flight Plan Button. The Insert Before Waypoint Screen is displayed.
3) Touch the waypoint selection button to select where to insert the new waypoint. The waypoint is inserted into
the active flight plan before the selected waypoint.

262

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT

Map Pointer

- TOP Highlighted

Active Flight Plan Info

Figure 5-90 Active Flight Plan Display - Map Pointer Active

Insert In
Flight Plan
Button

Waypoint
Selection
Button
Figure 5-91 Inserting Waypoint in Active Flight Plan

TOP Inserted
Figure 5-92 KTOP in Flight Plan

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

263

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT

ADDING AIRWAYS TO A FLIGHT PLAN
Airways can be added to the active flight plan or any stored flight plan. An airway can only be loaded if
there is a waypoint in the flight plan that is part of the desired airway and is not part of an arrival or approach
procedure. The system also anticipates the desired airway based on the selected waypoint and the flight plan.
Adding an airway to the active flight plan:
1) From Home, touch Flight Plan.
2) Scroll the list if necessary and touch a waypoint selection button to display the Waypoint Options Window.
3) Touch the Load Airway Button to display the Airway Selection Screen.
4) Scroll the list if necessary and touch an airway selection button to select the airway and display the Select Exit
Window (the exit points are displayed in alphabetical order, not the order they appear in the airway).
5) Scroll the list if necessary and touch an airway exit point selection button to select the airway exit point and
display the Airway Waypoint Sequence.
6) Touch the Load Airway Button to insert the airway into the active flight plan.

Selected
Airway
Entry Point
Airway
Selection
Button

Load
Airway
Button

Airway
Waypoint
Sequence

Airway
Exit Point
Selection
Button

Figure 5-93 Adding an Airway to the Active Flight Plan

264

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

Load
Airway
Button

190-01537-00 Rev. B

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT

Inserted Airway
Inserted Airway Header
- Airway Identifier:
[airway id].[exit wpt id]
(e.g., V4.SLN)

Figure 5-94 Active Flight Plan Display - V4 Airway Loaded
Inserted Airway Header

- Airway Identifier:
[airway id].[exit waypoint id]
(e.g., V4.SLN)

Figure 5-95 Active Flight Plan Screen - V4 Airway Loaded

Adding an airway to a stored flight plan:
1) From Home, touch Flight Plan > Flight Plan Options
2) Touch the Catalog Button to display the Flight Plan Catalog Screen.
3) Touch a flight plan selection button to display the Catalog Options Window.
4) Touch the Edit Button to display the Edit Stored Flight Plan Screen.
5) Scroll the list if necessary and touch a waypoint selection button to display the Waypoint Options Window.
6) Touch the Load Airway Button to display the Airway Selection Screen.
7) Scroll the list if necessary and touch an airway selection button to select the airway and display the Select Exit
Window.
8) Scroll the list if necessary and touch an airway exit point selection button to select the airway exit point and
display the Airway Waypoint Sequence.
9) Touch the Load Airway Button to insert the airway into the stored flight plan.

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

265

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
RESTRICTIONS ON ADDING AIRWAYS
Some airways have directional restrictions on all or part of the route. Airway “A2” in Europe has a directional
restriction over the whole route such that it can be flown only in the direction MTD-ABB-BNE-DEVAL.
Airway “UR975” in North Africa has more complicated directional restrictions within the list of airway
waypoints AMANO, VAKOR, LIBRO, NELDA, DIRKA, GZO, KOSET, and SARKI:
• Starting from AMANO, the airway can be flown only to LIBRO.
• Starting from SARKI, the airway can be flown only to LIBRO.
• Between NELDA and GZO, the airway can be flown in either direction.
In the US, airways that are “one-way” for specified hours of operation are not uncommon. These airways
are always bidirectional in the system database.
The system only allows correct airway sequences to be inserted. If the pilot subsequently inverts the flight
plan, the system inverts the airway waypoint sequence and removes the airway header.

ADDING PROCEDURES TO A STORED FLIGHT PLAN
The system allows the pilot to insert pre-defined instrument procedures from the navigation database into a
flight plan. The procedures are designed to facilitate routing of traffic leaving an airport (departure), arriving at
an airport (arrival), and landing at an airport (approach). See the procedures section for more details.
Stored Flight Plan Name

Stored Flight Plan Waypoint List

Load Departure Button
Load Arrival Button
Load Approach Button

Figure 5-96 Edit Stored Flight Plan Screen - Flight Plan Options

DEPARTURE (DP)
A Departure Procedure (DP) is loaded at the departure airport in the flight plan. Only one departure can
be loaded at a time in a flight plan. The route is defined by selection of a departure, the transition waypoints,
and a runway.

266

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Departure Button
Airport Button

Transition Button
Departure Waypoint Sequence

Runway Button

Preview Button
Load Button

Remove Button
Figure 5-97 Departure Selection Screen

Preview of
Selected
Departure

Departure Airport

Figure 5-98 Departure Display - Preview of the Selected Departure

Loading a departure procedure into a stored flight plan:
1) From Home, touch Flight Plan > Flight Plan Options
2) Touch the Catalog Button to display the Flight Plan Catalog Screen.
3) Touch a flight plan selection button to display the Catalog Options Window.
4) Touch the Edit Button to display the Edit Stored Flight Plan Screen.
5) Touch the Flight Plan Options Button to display the Flight Plan Options Window.
6) Touch the Load Departure Button to display the Departure Selection Screen.
7) Touch the Departure Button to display the Select Departure Screen with a list of available departures.
8) Scroll the list if necessary and touch a departure selection button to select the departure and return to the
Departure Selection Screen.

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

267

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
9) Touch the Transition Button to display the Select Transition Screen with a list of available transitions.
10) Scroll the list if necessary and touch a transition selection button to select the transition and return to the
Departure Selection Screen.
11) Touch the Runway Button to display the Select Runway Screen with a list of available runways.
12) Scroll the list if necessary and touch a runway selection button to select the runway and return to the Departure
Selection Screen.
13) Touch the Preview Button, then the Show on Map Button to show the preview of the departure.
14) Touch the Load Button to insert the departure into the stored flight plan.

Stored Flight Plan Name
Inserted Departure Header

- Departure Identifier: [departure
airport]-[departure runway].
[departure transition].
[departure end point]
(e.g., KMKC-RW01.TIFTO3.TIFTO)

Figure 5-99 Edit Stored Flight Plan Screen - Departure Inserted

Departure End Point
Loaded Departure

Departure Airport

Figure 5-100 Stored Flight Plan Display - Departure Inserted

268

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
ARRIVAL (STAR)
A Standard Terminal Arrival (STAR) is loaded at the destination airport in the flight plan. Only one arrival
can be loaded at a time in a flight plan. The route is defined by selection of an arrival, the transition waypoints,
and a runway.
Arrival Button
Airport Button

Transition Button
Arrival Waypoint Sequence

Runway Button

Preview Button
Load Button

Remove Button
Figure 5-101 Arrival Selection Screen

Destination Airport
Preview of
Selected Arrival

Figure 5-102 Arrival Display - Preview of the Selected Arrival

Loading an arrival procedure into a stored flight plan:
1) From Home, touch Flight Plan > Flight Plan Options
2) Touch the Catalog Button to display the Flight Plan Catalog Screen.
3) Touch a flight plan selection button to display the Catalog Options Window.
4) Touch the Edit Button to display the Edit Stored Flight Plan Screen.
5) Touch the Flight Plan Options Button to display the Flight Plan Options Window.

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

269

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
6) Touch the Load Arrival Button to display the Arrival Selection Screen.
7) Touch the Arrival Button to display the Select Arrival Screen with a list of available arrivals.
8) Scroll the list if necessary and touch an arrival selection button to select the arrival and return to the Arrival
Selection Screen.
9) Touch the Transition Button to display the Select Transition Screen with a list of available transitions.
10) Scroll the list if necessary and touch a transition selection button to select the transition and return to the Arrival
Selection Screen.
11) Touch the Runway Button to display the Select Runway Screen with a list of available runways.
12) Scroll the list if necessary and touch a runway selection button to select the runway and return to the Arrival
Selection Screen.
13) Touch the Preview Button, then the Show on Map Button to show the preview of the arrival.
14) Touch the Load Button to insert the arrival into the stored flight plan.
Stored Flight Plan Name
Inserted Arrival Header

- Arrival Identifier: [destination
airport]-[arrival transition].
[arrival].[arrival runway]
(e.g., KCOS-TBE.DBRY2.ALL)

Figure 5-103 Edit Stored Flight Plan Screen - Arrival Inserted

Destination Airport
Loaded Arrival

Figure 5-104 Stored Flight Plan Display - Arrival Inserted

270

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
APPROACH (APPR)
An Approach Procedure (APPR) can be loaded at any airport that has an approach available. Only one
approach can be loaded at a time in a flight plan. The route for a selected approach is defined by designating
transition waypoints.
Approach Button
Airport Button

Transition Button
Approach Waypoint Sequence

Minimums Button

Preview Button

Load Button

Remove Button

Load & Activate Button
Figure 5-105 Approach Selection Screen

Destination Runway
Preview of
Selected
Approach

Figure 5-106 Approach Display - Preview of the Selected Approach

Loading an approach procedure into a stored flight plan:
1) From Home, touch Flight Plan > Flight Plan Options
2) Touch the Catalog Button to display the Flight Plan Catalog Screen.
3) Touch a flight plan selection button to display the Catalog Options Window.
4) Touch the Edit Button to display the Edit Stored Flight Plan Screen.
5) Touch the Flight Plan Options Button to display the Flight Plan Options Window.

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

271

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
6) Touch the Load Approach Button to display the Approach Selection Screen.
7) Touch the Approach Button to display the Select Approach Screen with a list of available approaches.
8) Scroll the list if necessary and touch an approach selection button to select the approach and return to the
Approach Selection Screen.
9) Touch the Transition Button to display the Select Transition Screen with a list of available transitions.
10) Scroll the list if necessary and touch a transition selection button to select the transition and return to the
Approach Selection Screen.
11) Touch the Minimums Button to display the Minimums Screen.
12) Touch the Baro Button to activate barometric minimums.
13) Use the keypad to select the minimums altitude.
14) Touch the Enter Button to accept the minimums altitude and return to the Approach Selection Screen.
15) Touch the Preview Button, then the Show on Map Button to show the preview of the approach.
16) Touch the Load Button to insert the approach into the stored flight plan.
Stored Flight Plan Name

Inserted Approach Header

- Approach Identifier: [destination
airport]-[runway and approach type].
(e.g., KCOS-RNAV GPS Y 35R LPV)

Figure 5-107 Edit Stored Flight Plan Screen - Approach Inserted

272

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT

Loaded Approach

Figure 5-108 Stored Flight Plan Display - Approach Inserted

FLIGHT PLAN STORAGE
The system can store up to 99 flight plans. The active flight plan is erased when the system is powered off
or when another flight plan is activated. Details about each stored flight plan can be viewed on the Flight Plan
Catalog Screen.
Viewing information about a stored flight plan:
1) From Home, touch Flight Plan > Flight Plan Options
2) Touch the Catalog Button to display the Flight Plan Catalog Screen. The flight plan information is displayed
showing departure, destination, total distance, and enroute safe altitude information for the stored flight plans.
3) Touch a stored flight plan button to display the Catalog Options Window.
4) Touch the Edit Button to display the Edit Stored Flight Plan Screen to view the waypoints in the stored flight
plan.

Stored Flight Plan Button

Cumulative Flight Plan Distance

Departure Airport Identifier/Symbol
Flight Plan Enroute Safe Altitude

Destination Airport Identifier/Symbol

Figure 5-109 Flight Plan Catalog Screen

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

273

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Stored Flight Plan Selected

- Comment
- Procedure Identifier
- Waypoint Identifier
- Airway Identifier
- Flight Plan Segment Identifier
- Desired Track to Waypoint
- Distance to Waypoint
- Waypoint Altitude Constraint

Flight Plan Options Button
Figure 5-110 Edit Stored Flight Plan Screen

Storing an active flight plan from the Active Flight Plan Screen:
1) From Home, touch Flight Plan > Flight Plan Options
2) Touch the Store Button.
3) Touch the OK Button in response to the question “Store XXXX/XXXX into catalog?”.

ACTIVATE A FLIGHT PLAN
Activating a stored flight plan erases the active flight plan and replaces it with the flight plan being activated.
Inverting a stored flight plan reverses the waypoint order, erases the active flight plan, and replaces it with the
flight plan being activated (the stored flight plan is not changed).
Activating a stored flight plan:
1) From Home, touch Flight Plan > Flight Plan Options
2) Touch the Catalog Button to display the Flight Plan Catalog Screen.
3) Touch a stored flight plan button to display the Catalog Options Window.
4) Touch the Activate Button.
5) Touch the OK Button in response to “Activate Selected Flight Plan and Replace Current Active Route?”. To
cancel the request, touch the Cancel Button.

Inverting and activating a stored flight plan:
1) From Home, touch Flight Plan > Flight Plan Options
2) Touch the Catalog Button to display the Flight Plan Catalog Screen.
3) Touch a stored flight plan button to display the Catalog Options Window.
4) Touch the Invert and Activate Button.
5) Touch the OK Button in response to “Invert and Activate Selected Flight Plan and Replace Current Active
Route?”. To cancel the request, touch the Cancel Button.

274

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
COPY A FLIGHT PLAN
The system allows copying a flight plan into a new flight plan memory slot, allowing editing, etc., without
affecting the original flight plan. This can be used to duplicate an existing stored flight plan for use in creating
a modified version of the original stored flight plan.
Copying a stored flight plan:
1) From Home, touch Flight Plan > Flight Plan Options
2) Touch the Catalog Button to display the Flight Plan Catalog Screen.
3) Touch a stored flight plan button to display the Catalog Options Window.
4) Touch the Copy Button.
5) Touch the OK Button in response to “Copy Flight Plan ?” The copied flight plan is placed
at the end of the list of stored flight plans. To cancel the request, touch the Cancel Button.

DELETE A STORED FLIGHT PLAN
Individual flight plans can be deleted from the system memory.
Deleting a stored flight plan:
1) From Home, touch Flight Plan > Flight Plan Options
2) Touch the Catalog Button to display the Flight Plan Catalog Screen.
3) Touch a stored flight plan button to display the Catalog Options Window.
4) Touch the Delete Button.
5) Touch the OK Button in response to “Delete Flight Plan ?”. The flight plan is deleted, and
any flight plans following it in the list are shifted up. To cancel the request, touch the Cancel Button.

FLIGHT PLAN EDITING
The active flight plan or any stored flight plan can be edited. The edits made to the active flight plan affect
navigation as soon as they are entered.

DELETING THE ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN
The system allows deleting an active flight plan. Deleting the active flight plan suspends navigation by the
system.
Deleting the active flight plan:
1) From Home, touch Flight Plan > Flight Plan Options
2) Touch the Delete Flight Plan Button.
3) Touch the OK Button in response to “Delete all waypoints in flight plan?” The active flight plan is deleted. To
cancel the request, touch the Cancel Button.

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

275

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
REMOVING FLIGHT PLAN ITEMS
Individual waypoints, entire airways, and entire procedures can be deleted from a flight plan. Some waypoints
in the final approach segment (such as the FAF or MAP) can not be deleted individually. Attempting to delete
a waypoint that is not allowed results in a window displaying ‘Invalid flight plan modification.’
Removing an individual waypoint from the active flight plan:
1) From Home, touch Flight Plan
2) Scroll the list if necessary and touch a waypoint selection button to display the Waypoint Options Window.
3) Touch the Remove Waypoint Button.
4) Touch the Yes Button in response to “Remove ?” The waypoint is removed. To cancel the
request, touch the No Button.

Removing an entire airway from the active flight plan:
1) From Home, touch Flight Plan
2) Scroll the list if necessary and touch an airway selection button to display the Airway Options Window.
3) Touch the Remove Airway Button.
4) Touch the Yes Button in response to “Remove Airway - from flight plan?” The airway is
removed, but the starting and ending waypoints remain in the flight plan. To cancel the request, touch the No
Button.

Removing an entire procedure from the active flight plan:
1) From Home, touch Flight Plan
2) Scroll the list if necessary and touch a departure, arrival, or approach selection button to display the Departure,
Arrival, or Approach Options Window.
3) Touch the Remove Departure Button, the Remove Arrival Button, or the Remove Approach Button.
4) Touch the Yes Button in response to “Remove - from flight plan?” The
procedure is removed (the departure airport remains when removing a departure). To cancel the request, touch
the No Button.

Removing an individual waypoint from a stored flight plan:
1) From Home, touch Flight Plan > Flight Plan Options
2) Touch the Catalog Button to display the Flight Plan Catalog Screen.
3) Scroll the list if necessary and touch a flight plan options button to display the Catalog Options Window.
4) Touch the Edit Button.
5) Scroll the list if necessary and touch a waypoint selection button to display the Waypoint Options Window.
6) Touch the Remove Waypoint Button.
7) Touch the Yes Button in response to “Remove ?” The waypoint is removed. To cancel the
request, touch the No Button.

276

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Removing an entire airway from a stored flight plan:
1) From Home, touch Flight Plan > Flight Plan Options
2) Touch the Catalog Button to display the Flight Plan Catalog Screen.
3) Scroll the list if necessary and touch a flight plan options button to display the Catalog Options Window.
4) Touch the Edit Button.
5) Scroll the list if necessary and touch an airway selection button to display the Airway Options Window.
6) Touch the Remove Airway Button.
7) Touch the Yes Button in response to “Remove ?” The airway is removed, but the starting and
ending waypoints remain in the flight plan. To cancel the request, touch the No Button.

Removing an entire procedure from a stored flight plan:
1) From Home, touch Flight Plan > Flight Plan Options
2) Touch the Catalog Button to display the Flight Plan Catalog Screen.
3) Scroll the list if necessary and touch a flight plan options button to display the Catalog Options Window.
4) Touch the Edit Button.
5) Scroll the list if necessary and touch a departure, arrival, or approach selection button to display the Departure,
Arrival, or Approach Options Window.
6) Touch the Remove Departure Button, the Remove Arrival Button, or the Remove Approach Button.
7) Touch the Yes Button in response to “Remove - from flight plan?” The
procedure is removed (the departure airport remains when removing a departure). To cancel the request, touch
the No Button.

CHANGING FLIGHT PLAN COMMENTS (NAMES)
The comment field (or name) of each flight plan can be changed to something that is useful for identification.
Changing the active flight plan comment:
1) From Home, touch Flight Plan > Flight Plan Options
2) Touch the Rename Button to display the keypad.
3) Use the keypad to select the comment.
4) Touch the Enter Button to accept the comment, and and return to the Flight Plan Options Screen.

Changing the active flight plan comment using the PFD Controller:
1) On the PFD Controller, press the FPL Button to display the Direct To Window.
2) Turn the large PFD Knob to move the cursor to the comment field, if necessary.
3) Turn the small PFD Knob one click to activate the editing cursor (flashing).
4) Turn the large and small PFD knobs to select the comment (large knob moves the cursor; small knob selects the
character)
5) Press the ENT Key or the small PFD Knob to accept the selection.

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

277

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Changing a stored flight plan comment:
1) From Home, touch Flight Plan > Flight Plan Options
2) Touch the Catalog Button to display the Flight Plan Catalog Screen.
3) Scroll the list if necessary and touch a flight plan options button to display the Catalog Options Window.
4) Touch the Rename Button to display the keypad.
5) Use the keypad to select the comment.
6) Touch the Enter Button to accept the comment, and return to the Flight Plan Catalog Screen.

CHANGING FLIGHT PLAN DATA FIELDS
The data fields displayed on the Touchscreen Controller for each flight plan can be changed. The default
settings for the data fields are DTK - Desired Track and DIS - Distance.
Changing the flight plan data fields:
1) From Home, touch Flight Plan > Flight Plan Options
2) Touch the Edit Data Fields Button to display the Flight Plan Data Fields Screen.
3) Touch the Data Field 1 Button or the Data Field 2 Button to display the Select Field Type Screen.
4) Scroll the list if necessary and touch a data field type button to select the field type and return to the Select Field
Type Screen.
5) Touch the other data field button to choose another data field type, or touch the Restore Defaults Button to
return to the default settings.

ALONG TRACK OFFSETS
A waypoint having an “along track offset” distance from an existing waypoint can be entered into a flight plan.
Along track offset waypoints lie along the path of the existing flight plan, and can be used to make the system
reach a specified altitude before or after reaching the specified flight plan waypoint. Offset distances can be
entered from 1 to 99 nm in increments of 1 nm. Entering a negative offset distance results in an along track
offset waypoint inserted before the selected waypoint, whereas entering a positive offset distance results in an
along track offset waypoint inserted after the selected waypoint. Multiple offset waypoints are allowed.
A waypoint must be adjacent to its parent waypoint in the flight plan, so the system limits the along-track
distance to less than the length of the leg before or after the selected waypoint. If the selected waypoint is the
active waypoint, the distance is limited to less than the distance to go to the active waypoint. Assigning an along
track offset to a leg with indeterminate length is not permitted. An along track offset is not allowed at or after
the final approach fix of an approach.
The along track offset distance cannot be modified once entered, but the altitude can be modified. If the
along track offset distance must be changed, the existing along track offset waypoint must be deleted and a new
one created with the new offset distance.

278

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT

Waypoint
Selected

Along
Track
Waypoint
Button

(Before) Button
(After) +
Button

Waypoint
Options
Select
Button

Along Track Offset
Waypoint

Along Track Offset
Waypoint Altitude

Figure 5-111 Along Track Offset

Entering an along track offset distance:
1) From Home, touch Flight Plan
2) Touch a waypoint options button to display the Waypoint Options Screen.
3) Touch the Along Track Waypoint Button to bring up the Along Track Offset Waypoint Screen.
4) Use the keypad to select the distance in the range of 1 to 99 nm (limited by leg distances).
5) Touch the (Before) - Button or (After) - Button to select the offset waypoint direction.
4) Touch the Enter Button to insert the offset waypoint into the active flight plan.

PARALLEL TRACK
The Parallel Track feature allows creation of a parallel course offset of 1 to 50 nm left or right of the current
flight plan. When Parallel Track is activated, the course line drawn on the map pages shows the parallel course,
and waypoint names have a lower case “-p” placed after the identifier.
Using direct-to, loading an approach, a holding pattern, or editing and activating the flight plan automatically
cancels Parallel Track. Parallel Track is also cancelled if a course change occurs greater than 120° or the parallel
tracks overlap as a result of the course change.
NOTE: Vertical navigation is unavailable while the Parallel Track feature is active.

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

279

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT

Active Flight Plan
prior to Parallel Track

Figure 5-112 Active Flight Plan Display - Prior to Activating Parallel Track

Offset Direction
Left Button
Right Button

Activate Parallel Track Button

Parallel Track Status
Offset Distance Button

Figure 5-113 Parallel Track Screen - Selecting Parallel Track

Activating parallel track:
1) From Home, touch Flight Plan > Flight Plan Options > Parallel Track
2) Touch the Left Button or the Right Button to choose the offset direction.
3) Touch the Offset Distance Button to display the keypad.
4) Use the keypad to select the distance.
5) Touch the Enter Button to accept the distance, and and return to the Parallel Track Screen.
6) Touch the Activate Parallel Track Button to activate the parallel track function.

280

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT

Original Track

Parallel Track

Parallel Track Waypoints

- TIFTO-p
- TOP-p
- ...
- LAA-p
Activating Parallel Track
affects the active flight
plan from the current
position on (will not affect
an approach)

Figure 5-114 Active Flight Plan Display - Parallel Track Active

If the parallel track proposed by the offset direction and distance is not allowed by the system, the activation
prompt is displayed, but disabled. Parallel Track cannot be activated if a course is set using direct-to or if the
active leg is the first leg of the departure procedure. Attempting to activate parallel track with these conditions
results in the message ‘Parallel Track Unavailable Invalid Route Geometry’. If an approach leg is active the status
indicates that the system is unable to activate the parallel track with the message ‘Parallel Track Unavailable
Approach Leg Active’. If the offset direction and distance results in an unreasonable route geometry the status
indicates that the system is unable to activate the parallel track because of invalid geometry.

Unavailable
-Approach
Leg Active

Unavailable
- Invalid
Route
Geometry
Figure 5-115 Parallel Track Unavailable

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

281

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
If the active leg is not a track between two fixes (TF) or a course to a fix (DF) leg, the status
indicates that the system is unable to activate the parallel track because parallel track is not available for the
active leg type.
Cancelling parallel track:
1) From Home, touch Flight Plan > Flight Plan Options > Parallel Track
2) Touch the Cancel Parallel Track Button to cancel the parallel track function.

Cancel Parallel Track Button

Parallel Track Status

Figure 5-116 Parallel Track Screen - Cancelling Parallel Track

ACTIVATING A FLIGHT PLAN LEG
The system allows selection of a highlighted leg as the “active leg” (the flight plan leg which is currently
used for navigation guidance).
Activating a flight plan leg:
1) From Home, touch Flight Plan
2) Scroll the list, if necessary, and touch the waypoint selection button to select the the destination waypoint for
the desired leg. The Waypoint Options Window is displayed.
3) Touch the Activate Leg to Waypoint Button.
4) Touch the OK Button in response to “Activate Leg?” The new active flight plan leg is activated. To cancel the
request, touch the Cancel Button.

282

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT

Current
Active
Flight Plan
Leg

Activate
Leg to
Waypoint
Button

Waypoint
Selection
Button

Selected Leg
Destination
Waypoint

OK Button

New Active
Flight Plan
Leg

Cancel
Button

Figure 5-117 Active Flight Plan Screen - Activating a Flight Plan Leg

INVERTING A FLIGHT PLAN
Any flight plan may be inverted (reversed) for navigation back to the original departure point.
Inverting the active flight plan:
1) From Home, touch Flight Plan > Flight Plan Options
2) Touch the Invert Button
3) Touch the Yes Button in response to “Invert active flight plan?” The active flight plan leg is inverted. To cancel
the request, touch the No Button.

Inverting and activating a stored flight plan:
1) From Home, touch Flight Plan > Flight Plan Options
2) Touch the Catalog Button to display the Flight Plan Catalog Screen.
3) Scroll the list if necessary and touch a flight plan selection button to display the Catalog Options Window.
4) Touch the Invert and Activate Button.
7) Touch the OK Button in response to “Invert and Activate Selected Flight Plan and Replace Current Active
Route?” The stored flight is inverted and becomes the active flight plan. The stored flight plan is not modifed.
To cancel the request, touch the Cancel Button.

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

283

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
COLLAPSING AIRWAYS
The system allows airways on the active flight plan to be collapsed or expanded from the Active Flight Plan
Page Screen. When airways have been collapsed, it is indicated on the airway heading.
When airways are collapsed, leg-to-leg computed values such as DIS or ETE shown for the exit waypoint
reflect the total of all the legs on the airway that have been hidden in the collapsed display. The DTK value is
inhibited because it is not usable in this context.
The Active Flight Plan Page always keeps the following three waypoints visible: “From” waypoint, “To”
waypoint, and the “Next” waypoint. To prevent one or more of these waypoints from being hidden in a collapsed
airway segment, the airway segment that contains either the “To” or the “Next” waypoint is automatically
expanded. When an airway is loaded, airways are automatically expanded to facilitate flight plan review.

Airway
Collapsed

Airway
Expanded

Figure 5-118 Expanded/Collapsed Airways

Collapsing/expanding the airways in the active flight plan:
1) From Home, touch Flight Plan
2) Scroll the list if necessary and touch an airway selection button to display the Airway Options Window.
3) Touch the Collapse All Button or the Expand All Button to collapse/expand all airways and return to the
Active Flight Plan Screen.
Expand All Button
Collapse All Button

Figure 5-119 Active Flight Plan Screen -Collapsing Expanding Airways

284

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT

CLOSEST POINT OF FPL
‘Closest Point of FPL’ calculates the bearing and closest distance at which a flight plan passes a selected
waypoint, and allows creation of a new user waypoint along the flight plan at the location closest to a chosen
reference waypoint.
Determining the closest point along the active flight plan to a selected waypoint:
1) From Home, touch Flight Plan > Flight Plan Options
2) Touch the Closest Point of Flight Plan Button to display the Closest Point of Flight Plan Screen
3) Touch the From waypoint button to display the keypad.
4) Use the keypad and the Enter Button to select the “From” waypoint.
5) Touch the Insert Point into Flight Plan Button to add the calculated waypoint into the flight plan. The name
for the new waypoint is derived from the identifier of the From waypoint.

From Waypoint Button

Calculated Bearing/Distance
and Latitude/Longitude of the
Closest Point of Flight Plan

Figure 5-120 Closest Point of FPL

Inserted Flight Plan Waypoint
Figure 5-121 Closest Point of FPL inserted in Active Flight Plan

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

285

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT

USER-DEFINED HOLDING PATTERNS
A holding pattern can be defined at any active flight plan waypoint, or at the aircraft present position.
Creating a user-defined hold at an active flight plan waypoint:
1) From Home, touch Flight Plan
2) Scroll the list, if necessary, and touch the waypoint selection button to select the the waypoint at which to define
the holding pattern. The Waypoint Options Window is displayed.
3) Touch the Hold at Waypoint Button. The Hold at Waypoint Window is displayed.
4) Touch the Turn Direction Button, and touch the Right Button or the Left Button to select the turn direction.
5) Touch the Course Direction Button, and touch the Inbound Button or the Outbound Button to select the
course direction.
6) Touch the Hold Entry Course Button to display the keypad. Use the keypad and the Enter Button to select the
entry angle.
7) Touch the Leg Length Mode Button, and touch the Distance Button or the Time Button to select the length
mode.
8) Touch the Leg Time Button or the Leg Distance Button to display the keypad. Use the keypad and the Enter
Button to select the length of the leg.
9) Touch the Expect Further Clearance Button to display the keypad. Use the keypad and the Enter Button to
select the time for a reminder.
10) Touch the Create Button to add the hold into the flight plan.

Hold at
Waypoint
Button

Waypoint
Selection
Button
Course Direction Button
(Inbound or Outbound)

Turn Direction Button
Hold at Present Position Button
Hold Location Information

Leg Length Mode Button
(Time or Distance)

Leg Time or Leg Distance Button
Hold Entry Course Button
Expect Further Clearance Button

Cancel Hold Button

Show on Map Button

Figure 5-122 Creating a User Defined Holding Pattern at an Active Flight Plan Waypoint

286

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Creating a user-defined hold at the aircraft present position:
1) From Home, touch Flight Plan > Flight Plan Options
2) Touch the Hold at P.POS Button. The Hold at Waypoint Window is displayed.
3) Touch the Turn Direction Button, and touch the Right Button or the Left Button to select the turn direction.
4) Touch the Course Direction Button, and touch the Inbound Button or the Outbound Button to select the
course direction.
5) Touch the Hold Entry Course Button to display the keypad. Use the keypad and the Enter Button to select the
entry angle.
6) Touch the Leg Length Mode Button, and touch the Distance Button or the Time Button to select the length
mode.
7) Touch the Leg Time Button or the Leg Distance Button to display the keypad. Use the keypad and the Enter
Button to select the length of the leg.
8) Touch the Expect Further Clearance Button to display the keypad. Use the keypad and the Enter Button to
select the time for a reminder.
9) Touch the Create Button to add the hold into the flight plan.

Hold at P.POS Button

Course Direction Button
(Inbound or Outbound)

Turn Direction Button
Hold at Present Position Button
Hold Location Information

Leg Length Mode Button
(Time or Distance)

Leg Time or Leg Distance Button
Hold Entry Course Button
Expect Further Clearance Button

Cancel Hold Button

Show on Map Button

Figure 5-123 Creating a User Defined Holding Pattern at the Aircraft Present Position

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

287

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Removing a user-defined hold:
1) From Home, touch Flight Plan
2) Scroll the list, if necessary, and touch the hold waypoint selection button. The Waypoint Options Window is
displayed.
3) Touch the Remove Hold Button.
4) Touch the OK Button in response to “Remove Holding Pattern?” The holding pattern is removed. To cancel the
request, touch the Cancel Button.

Remove Hold Button
Figure 5-124 Removing a User Defined Holding Pattern

288

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT

5.7 VERTICAL NAVIGATION
NOTE: The system supports vertical navigation for all lateral leg types except for CA, CI, FA, FM, HA, HM, PI,

VA, VD, VI, VR, and VM. Vertical constraints are not retained in stored flight plans.
The system Vertical Navigation (VNAV) feature provides vertical profile guidance during the enroute and
teminal phases of flight. Guidance based on specified altitudes at waypoints in the active flight plan or to a
direct-to waypoint is provided. It includes vertical path guidance to a descending path, which is provided as a
linear deviation from the desired path. The desired path is defined by a line joining two waypoints with specified
altitudes or as a vertical angle from a specified waypoint/altitude. The vertical waypoints are integrated into the
active flight plan. Both manual and autopilot-coupled guidance are supported.
NOTE: Making course changes greater than 90° during a descent with vertical guidance may cause excessive

and rapid movement of the vertical deviation indicator and SVS Pathways.
The system updates vertical path guidance continuously using ground speed and the calculated distance to
the Bottom of Descent (BOD). Due to turn anticipation guidance (turn-smoothing), distance to the BOD can be
affected by course changes greater than approximately 5 degrees. Ground speed can be affected by factors such as
shifts in wind direction, aircraft power management, pitch angle, and course changes. Abrupt and/or substantial
changes to either the distance to the BOD, ground speed, or both can cause similarly abrupt/substantial changes
in vertical path guidance.
Because of turn-smoothing, changes to both distance to the BOD and ground speed tend to be more extreme
when the BOD is also a waypoint that marks a large course change. These speed and distance changes will be
accounted for in the computed required vertical path and reflected in the vertical guidance indications.
VNAV
Enabled
Button

VNAV
Enabled
Button

-VNAV
Disabled

-VNAV Enabled

Figure 5-125 VNAV Profile Screen - Enable/Disable VNAV

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

289

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT

Current Vertical
Navigation Profile
Enabled (valid data)

VNAV Altitude
Contraint

Figure 5-126 Active Flight Plan Display - VNAV Enabled

Current Vertical
Navigation Profile

Disabled (fields dashed)

VNAV Altitude
Contraint

Figure 5-127 Active Flight Plan Display - VNAV Disabled

Enabling/Disabling VNAV guidance:
1) From Home, touch Flight Plan > VNAV
2) Touch the VNAV Enabled Button to enable/disable vertical navigation.

Canceling vertical navigation results in vertical deviation (V DEV), vertical speed required (VS REQ), and time
to top of descent/bottom of descent (TIME TO TOD/BOD) going invalid. The Vertical Deviation Indicator (VDI)
and Required Vertical Speed Indicator (RVSI) on the PFD are removed, and the V DEV, VS REQ, and TIME TO
TOD items displayed in the CURRENT VNAV PROFILE box are dashed. VNAV remains disabled until manually
enabled. Vertical guidance in reversionary mode can only be enabled for a direct-to waypoint.

290

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
The system allows a vertical navigation direct-to to any waypoint in the active flight plan with an altitude
constraint “designated” for vertical guidance. Selecting the VNAV ¯ Softkey on the VNAV Profile Screen
allows the flight plan to be flown, while vertical guidance based on the altitude constraint at the VNAV direct-to
waypoint is provided. The altitude change begins immediately and is spread along the flight plan from current
position to the vertical direct-to waypoint, not just along the leg for the direct-to waypoint. A direct-to with
altitude constraint activated by pressing the ¯ Key also provides vertical guidance, but would bypass flight plan
waypoints between the current position in the flight plan and the direct-to waypoint. A top of descent (TOD)
point is computed based on the default flight path angle; descent begins once the TOD is reached.

Vertical Speed Target Button

Flight Path Angle Button

VNAV ¯ Button
Figure 5-128 VNAV Profile Screen - Vertical Navigation Profile Modification

VNAV Waypoint Selection Button

Figure 5-129 Selecting the VNAV Direct To Waypoint

Activating a vertical navigation direct to:
1) From Home, touch Flight Plan > VNAV
2) Touch the VNAV ¯ Button to display the Select VNAV Direct To Screen with a list of possible Vertical
navigation direct to choices.
3) Scroll the list, if necessary, and touch a VNAV waypoint selection button.
4) Touch the Activate Button in response to “Activate Vertical ¯: NNNNNFT at XXXXXX” to initiate the
vertical navigation direct to. Vertical guidance begins to the altitude constraint for the selected waypoint. To
cancel the request, touch the Cancel Button.

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

291

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT

Current Vertical
Navigation Profile

- Prior to VNAV Direct To

Figure 5-130 Active Flight Plan Display - VNAV Direct To Not Active

Current Vertical
Navigation Profile

- After VNAV Direct To

Figure 5-131 Active Flight Plan Display - VNAV Direct To Active

The vertical navigation profile can be modified by directly entering a vertical speed target (VS TGT) and/or flight
path angle (FPA) on the VNAV Profile Scteen.
Modifying the VS TGT and FPA:
1) From Home, touch Flight Plan > VNAV
2) Touch the Vertical Speed Target Button or the Flight Path Angle Button to display the keypad.
3) Use the keypad and the Enter Button to select the vertical speed target or the flight path angle.

292

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT

ALTITUDE CONSTRAINTS
The system can use altitude constraints associated with lateral waypoints to give guidance for vertical
navigation. These altitudes are, depending on the specific instance, manually entered or retrieved from the
published altitudes in the navigation database. The navigation database only contains altitudes for procedures
that call for “Cross at” altitudes. If the procedure states “Expect to cross at,” then the altitude is not in the
database. In this case the altitude may be entered manually.
Altitude Constraint Examples

Displayed Text Examples
Light Blue Text with
Pencil Icon

5OOOFT
Cross AT or ABOVE 5,000 ft
23OOFT
Cross AT 2,300 ft

White Text
Light Blue Text

3OOOFT
Cross AT or BELOW 3,000 ft

White Text with Altitude
Restriction Bars
Figure 5-132 Active Flight Plan Screen - Waypoint Altitude Constraints

White Text

Light Blue Text

Altitude calculated by the system estimating
the altitude of the aircraft as it passes over
the navigation point, or altitude retrieved
from the navigation database. The altitude is
provided as a reference and is not designated
to be used in determining vertical speed and
deviation guidance.

Altitude is designated for use in giving
vertical speed and deviation guidance.
Altitude does not match the published
altitude in navigation database or no
published altitude exists. The pencil icon
indicates manual designation or manual
data entry.

Light Blue Subdued Text
The system cannot use this
altitude in determining vertical
speed and deviation guidance
because of an invalid constraint
condition.

Table 5-8 Altitude Constraint Color Coding

Altitudes associated with arrival and approach procedures are “auto-designated”. This means the system
automatically uses the altitudes loaded with the arrival or approach for giving vertical speed and deviation
guidance. Note that these altitudes are displayed as blue text up to, but not including, the FAF. The FAF is
always a “reference only” altitude and cannot be designated, unless the selected approach does not provide
vertical guidance. In this case, the FAF altitude can be designated.
Altitudes that have been designated for use in vertical guidance can be “un-designated”. The altitude is now
displayed only as a reference. It is not used to give vertical guidance. Other displayed altitudes may change
due to re-calculations or be rendered invalid as a result of manually changing an altitude to a non-designated
altitude.

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

293

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Designating the current waypoint altitude to be used for vertical guidance:
1) From Home, touch Flight Plan
2) Scroll the list, if necessary, and touch a VNAV ALT button to display the VNAV Altitude Window.
3) Touch the Enter Button to designate the current altitude to be used for vertical guidance. The altitude is now
shown in blue, indicating it is usable for vertical guidance.

VNAV ALT Button

Figure 5-133 Active Flight Plan Screen - Waypoint Altitude Designation

Altitude constraints are displayed and entered to the nearest foot mean sea level (MSL) or flight level to the
nearest hundred feet. An altitude constraint in feet above ground level (AGL) format is supported for airports.
When a database altitude restriction is displayed, the system allows entry of a different altitude when creating
a waypoint, effectively overriding the database restriction (only before the FAF). When a database altitude
restriction of type “AT or ABOVE” or “AT or BELOW” is activated, the system uses the “AT” portion of the
restriction to define the vertical profile.
An altitude constraint is invalid if:
• Meeting the constraint requires the aircraft to climb
• Meeting the constraint requires the maximum flight path angle or maximum vertical speed to be exceeded
• The altitude constraint results in a TOD behind the aircraft present position
• The constraint is within a leg type for which altitude constraints are not supported
• The altitude constraint is added to the FAF of an approach that provides vertical guidance (e.g., ILS or GPS
SBAS approach)
• The altitude constraint is added to a waypoint past the FAF.
Selecting and designating a new waypoint altitude to be used for vertical guidance:
1) From Home, touch Flight Plan
2) Scroll the list, if necessary, and touch a VNAV ALT button to display the VNAV Altitude Window.
3) If necessary, touch the Flight Level Button or the MSL Button to choose the altitude entry type.
4) Use the keypad to select a new VNAV altitude and touch the Enter Button to designate the new altitude to be
used for vertical guidance. The altitude is now shown in blue, indicating it is usable for vertical guidance.

294

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Altitude constraints can be modified or deleted after having been added to the flight plan. In the event
an altitude constraint is deleted and the navigation database contains an altitude restriction for the lateral
waypoint, the system displays the altitude restriction from the database provided no predicted altitude
can be provided. The system also provides a way to reinstate a published altitude constraint that has been
edited.
Removing an altitude constraint provided by the navigation database:
1) From Home, touch Flight Plan
2) Scroll the list, if necessary, and touch a VNAV ALT button to display the VNAV Altitude Window.
3) Touch the Remove VNAV ALT Button. A ‘Remove VNAV altitude?’ window is displayed.
4) Touch the OK Button. The altitude is now shown in white, indicating it is not usable for vertical guidance. To
cancel the request, touch the Cancel Button.

Manually Entered Constraint

Database Constraint

Figure 5-134 Active Flight Plan Screen - Deleting Altitude Constraints

Removing an altitude constraint that has been manually entered:
1) From Home, touch Flight Plan
2) Scroll the list, if necessary, and touch a VNAV ALT button to display the VNAV Altitude Window.
3) Touch the Remove VNAV ALT Button. A ‘Remove VNAV altitude?’ window is displayed.
4) Touch the OK Button. The altitude is now shown in white, indicating it is not usable for vertical guidance. To
cancel the request, touch the Cancel Button.

Reverting a manually entered altitude constraint back to the navigation database value:
1) From Home, touch Flight Plan
2) Scroll the list, if necessary, and touch a VNAV ALT button to display the VNAV Altitude Window.
3) Touch the Remove VNAV ALT Button. A ‘Remove or Revert to published VNAV altitude of nnnnnFT?’
confirmation window is displayed.
4) Touch the Revert Button. The altitude is now the database altitude and is shown in light blue, indicating it is
usable for vertical guidance.

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

295

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT

5.8 PROCEDURES
The system can access the whole range of instrument procedures available. Departures (DPs), arrivals (STARs),
and non-precision and precision approaches (APPRs) are stored within the database and can be loaded using the
Touchscreen Controller.
The selected procedure for the departure or arrival airport is added to the active flight plan. No waypoints are
required to be in the active flight plan to load procedures; however, if the departure and arrival airport are already
loaded, the procedure selection screen defaults to the appropriate airport, saving some time selecting the correct
airport. Whenever an approach is selected, the choice to either “Load” or “Load & Activate” is given. “Loading”
adds the approach to the end of the flight plan without immediately using it for navigation guidance. This
allows continued navigation via the intermediate waypoints in the original flight plan, but keeps the procedure
available for quick activation when needed. “Activating” also adds the procedure to the end of the flight plan but
immediately begins to provide guidance to the first waypoint in the approach.

Departure
Button
Arrival
Button
Approach
Button

Figure 5-135 Loading Procedures on the Touchscreen Controller

DEPARTURES
A Departure Procedure (DP) is loaded at the departure airport in the flight plan. Only one departure can be
loaded at a time in a flight plan. If a departure is loaded when another departure is already in the active flight
plan, the new departure replaces the previous departure. The route is defined by selection of a departure, the
transition waypoints, and a runway.

LOADING A DEPARTURE INTO THE ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN
Loading a departure into the active flight plan using the Touchscreen Controller:
1) From Home, touch PROC
2) Touch the Departure Button to display the Departure Selection Screen.
3) If necessary, touch the Airport Button to display the keypad and use it to select the departure airport.
4) Touch the Enter Button to accept the departure airport.
5) If necessary, touch the Departure Button to display the Select Departure Screen with a list of available
departures.

296

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
6) Scroll the list if necessary and touch a departure selection button to select the departure.
7) If necessary, touch the Transition Button to display the Select Transition Screen with a list of available transitions.
8) Scroll the list if necessary and touch a transition selection button to select the transition.
9) If necessary, touch the Runway Button to display the Select Runway Screen with a list of available runways.
10) Scroll the list if necessary and touch a runway selection button to select the runway and return to the Departure
Selection Screen.
11) Touch the Preview Button, then the Show on Map Button to show the preview of the departure.
12) Touch the Load Button to insert the departure into the active flight plan.
Departure
Button
Airport
Button
Transition
Button
Runway
Button
Preview
Button

Departure
Selection
Button

Runway
Selection
Button

Transition
Selection
Button

Loaded
Departure
Departure
Sequence

Load
Button
Remove
Button

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Figure 5-136 Loading a Departure into the Active Flight Plan

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

297

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Viewing available procedures at an airport:
1) From Home, touch Waypoint Info > Airport
2) If necessary, touch the Airport Selection Button to display the keypad and use it to select the airport.
3) Touch the PROC Tab to display the Airport Procedures Screen.
4) Scroll the list if necessary and touch a procedure selection button. The procedure selection screen is displayed
on the Touchscreen Controller for the selected procedure.
5) Touch the Preview Button, then the Show on Map Button to show the procedure.
6) Touch the Back Button to return to the Airport Procedures Screen to view another procedure.
7) Repeat steps 4 through 6 as necessary.

REMOVING A DEPARTURE FROM THE ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN
When plans change while flying IFR, departures can be easily removed from the Active Flight Plan.
Removing a departure from the active flight plan using the Touchscreen Controller:
1) From Home, touch PROC
2) Touch the Departure Button to display the Departure Selection Screen.
3) Touch the Remove Button. A ‘Remove departure?’ window is displayed.
4) Touch the Yes Button. The departure is removed from the active flight plan. To cancel the request, touch the
No Button.

ARRIVALS
A Standard Terminal Arrival (STAR) can be loaded at any airport that has one available. Only one arrival
can be loaded at a time in a flight plan. If an arrival is loaded when another arrival is already in the active
flight plan, the new arrival replaces the previous arrival. The route is defined by selection of an arrival, the
transition waypoints, and a runway.

LOADING AN ARRIVAL INTO THE ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN
Loading an arrival into the active flight plan using the Touchscreen Controller:
1) From Home, touch PROC
2) Touch the Arrival Button to display the Arrival Selection Screen.
3) If necessary, touch the Airport Button to display the keypad and use it to select the arrival airport.
4) Touch the Enter Button to accept the arrival airport.
5) If necessary, touch the Arrival Button to display the Select Arrival Screen with a list of available arrivals.
6) Scroll the list if necessary and touch an arrival selection button to select the arrival.
7) If necessary, touch the Transition Button to display the Select Transition Screen with a list of available transitions.
8) Scroll the list if necessary and touch a transition selection button to select the transition.

298

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
9) If necessary, touch the Runway Button to display the Select Runway Screen with a list of available runways.
10) Scroll the list if necessary and touch a runway selection button to select the runway and return to the Arrival
Selection Screen.
11) Touch the Preview Button, then the Show on Map Button to show the preview of the arrival.
12) Touch the Load Button to insert the arrival into the active flight plan.
Arrival
Button
Airport
Button
Transition
Button
Runway
Button

Arrival
Selection
Button

Preview
Button

Runway
Selection
Button
Transition
Selection
Button

Loaded
Arrival
Arrival
Sequence

Load
Button
Remove
Button

Figure 5-137 Loading an Arrival into the Active Flight Plan

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

299

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
4) Scroll the list if necessary and touch a procedure selection button. The procedure selection screen is displayed
on the Touchscreen Controller for the selected procedure
5) Touch the Preview Button, then the Show on Map Button to show the procedure.
6) Touch the Back Button to return to the Airport Procedures Screen to view another procedure.
7) Repeat steps 4 through 6 as necessary.

REMOVING AN ARRIVAL FROM THE ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN
When plans change while flying IFR, arrivals can be easily removed from the Active Flight Plan.
Removing an arrival from the active flight plan using the Touchscreen Controller:
1) From Home, touch PROC
2) Touch the Arrival Button to display the Arrival Selection Screen.
3) Touch the Remove Button. A ‘Remove arrival?’ window is displayed.
4) Touch the Yes Button. The arrival is removed from the active flight plan. To cancel the request, touch the No
Button.

APPROACHES
NOTE: If certain GPS parameters (SBAS, RAIM, etc.) are not available, some published approach procedures

for the desired airport may not be displayed in the list of available approaches.
An Approach Procedure (APPR) can be loaded at any airport that has one available, and provides guidance
for non-precision and precision approaches to airports with published instrument approach procedures.
Only one approach can be loaded at a time in a flight plan. If an approach is loaded when another approach
is already in the active flight plan, the new approach replaces the previous approach. The route is defined by
selection of an approach and the transition waypoints.
Whenever an approach is selected, the choice to either “Load” or “Load & Activate” is given. “Loading” adds
the approach to the end of the flight plan without immediately using it for navigation guidance. This allows
continued navigation via the intermediate waypoints in the original flight plan, but keeps the procedure
available for quick activation when needed. “Activating” also adds the procedure to the end of the flight plan
but immediately begins to provide guidance to the first waypoint in the approach.
When selecting an approach, a “GPS” designation to the right of the procedure name indicates the procedure
can be flown using the GPS receiver. Some procedures do not have this designation, meaning the GPS
receiver can be used for supplemental navigation guidance only. If the GPS receiver cannot be used for
primary guidance, the appropriate navigation receiver must be used for the selected approach (e.g., VOR or
ILS). The final course segment of ILS approaches, for example, must be flown by tuning the NAV receiver to
the proper frequency and selecting that NAV receiver on the CDI.
The SBAS GPS allows for flying LNAV, LNAV/VNAV, LP, and LPV approaches according to the published
chart. LNAV+V is a standard LNAV approach with advisory vertical guidance provided for assistance in
maintaining a constant vertical glidepath similar to an ILS glideslope on approach. This guidance is displayed
on the system PFD in the same location as the ILS glideslope using a magenta diamond. In all cases where
LNAV+V is indicated by the system during an approach, LNAV minima are used. The active approach type
is annunciated on the HSI as shown in the following table:
300

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
HSI Annunciation
Description
LNAV
GPS approach using published LNAV
minima
LNAV+V
GPS approach using published LNAV
minima. Advisory vertical guidance is
provided
L/VNAV
GPS approach using published LNAV/
(available only if VNAV minima (downgrades to Baro
SBAS available) VNAV if SBAS unavailable)
LP
GPS approach using published LP
(available only if minima (downgrades to LNAV if SBAS
SBAS available) unavailable)
LPV
GPS approach using published LPV
(available only if minima
SBAS available)

Example on HSI

Approach Type
- LNAV
- LNAV+V
- L/VNAV
- LP
- LPV

Table 5-9 Approach Types

LOADING AN APPROACH INTO THE ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN
Loading an approach into the active flight plan using the Touchscreen Controller:
1) From Home, touch PROC
2) Touch the Approach Button to display the Approach Selection Screen.
3) If necessary, touch the Airport Button to display the keypad and use it to select the approach airport.
4) Touch the Enter Button to accept the approach airport.
5) If necessary, touch the Approach Button to display the Select Approach Screen with a list of available
approaches.
6) Scroll the list if necessary and touch an arrival selection button to select the arrival.
7) If necessary, touch the Transition Button to display the Select Transition Screen with a list of available transitions.
8) Scroll the list if necessary and touch a transition selection button to select the transition.
9) If necessary, touch the Runway Button to display the Select Runway Screen with a list of available runways.
10) Scroll the list if necessary and touch a runway selection button to select the runway and return to the Arrival
Selection Screen.
11) Touch the Preview Button, then the Show on Map Button to show the preview of the approach.
12) Touch the Load Button to insert the approach into the active flight plan.
NOTE: When GPS is not approved for the selected final approach course, the message ‘NOT APPROVED

FOR GPS’ is displayed. GPS provides guidance to the approach, but the HSI must to be switched to a NAV
receiver to fly the final course of the approach.

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

301

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Approach
Button
Airport
Button
Transition
Button
Minimums
Button

Approach
Selection
Button

Preview
Button

Mininums
Button

Transition
Selection
Button

Loaded
Approach

Approach
Sequence
Load &
Activate
Button
Load
Button
Remove
Button

Figure 5-138 Loading an Approach into the Active Flight Plan

Viewing available procedures at an airport:
1) From Home, touch Waypoint Info > Airport
2) If necessary, touch the Airport Selection Button to display the keypad and use it to select the airport.
3) Touch the PROC Tab to display the Airport Procedures Screen.
4) Scroll the list if necessary and touch a procedure selection button. The procedure selection screen is displayed
on the Touchscreen Controller for the selected procedure
5) Touch the Preview Button, then the Show on Map Button to show the procedure.
6) Touch the Back Button to return to the Airport Procedures Screen to view another procedure.
7) Repeat steps 4 through 6 as necessary.

302

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Loading an approach into the active flight plan from the Airport Information Screen:
1) From Home, touch Waypoint Info > Airport
2) If necessary, touch the Airport Selection Button to display the keypad and use it to select the destination airport.
3) Touch the PROC Tab to display the Airport Procedures Screen.
4) Scroll the list, if necessary, and touch an approach selection button. The Approach Selection Screen is displayed
on the Touchscreen Controller for the selected approach.
5) Touch the Preview Button, then the Show on Map Button to show the preview of the approach.
6) Edit the approach, if required.
7) Touch the Load Button to insert the approach into the active flight plan.

Loading an approach into the active flight plan from the Nearest Airport Screen:
1) From Home, touch Nearest > Airport
2) If necessary, scroll the list to find the airport and touch the airport selection button to display the Waypoint
Options Window for the selected airport. If the airport is not listed, touch any airport selection button to display
the Waypoint Options Window.
3) Touch the Airport Info Button to display the Airport Information Screen. If in the previous step, the airport was
not listed, touch the airport button and use the keypad to select the destination airport.

4) Touch the PROC Tab to display the Airport Procedures Screen.
5) Scroll the list, if necessary, and touch an approach selection button. The Approach Selection Screen is displayed
on the Touchscreen Controller for the selected approach.
6) Touch the Preview Button, then the Show on Map Button to show the preview of the approach.
7) Edit the approach, if required.
8) Touch the Load Button to insert the approach into the active flight plan.

ACTIVATING AN APPROACH
A previously loaded approach can be activated from the Procedures Screen.
Activating a previously loaded approach using the Touchscreen Controller:
1) From Home, touch PROC
2) Touch the Activate Approach Button to activate the approach.

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

303

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT

Activate Approach
Button
Figure 5-139 Activating an Approach on the Touchscreen Controller

In many cases, it may be easiest to “load” the full approach while still some distance away, enroute to the
destination airport. Later, if vectored to final, select ‘Activate Vector-To-Final’, which makes the inbound
course to the FAF waypoint active.
Activating a previously loaded approach with vectors to final using the Touchscreen Controller:
1) From Home, touch PROC
2) Touch the Activate Vectors To Final Button to activate vectors to final.

Activate Vectors
To Final Button
Figure 5-140 Activating Vectors to Final on the Touchscreen Controller

REMOVING AN APPROACH FROM THE ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN
When plans change while flying IFR, approaches can be easily removed from the Active Flight Plan.
Removing an approach from the active flight plan using the Touchscreen Controller:
1) From Home, touch PROC
2) Touch the Approach Button to display the Approach Selection Screen.
3) Touch the Remove Button. A ‘Remove approach?’ window is displayed.
4) Touch the OK Button. The approach is removed from the active flight plan. To cancel the request, touch the
Cancel Button.

304

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
MISSED APPROACH
Activating a missed approach in the active flight plan:
1) From Home, touch PROC
2) Touch the Activate Missed Approach Button to activate the missed approach. The aircraft automatically
sequences to the MAHP.

Or:
Press the Go-Around Button.

Activate Missed
Approach Button
Figure 5-141 Activating a Missed Approach on the Touchscreen Controller

TEMPERATURE COMPENSATED ALTITUDE
A temperature compensated altitude can be computed and used at the FAF of a loaded approach. A
temperature compensated altitude is displayed with a snowflake ( ) icon.
Enabling temperature compensated altitude:
1) From Home, touch Flight Plan > Flight Plan Options.
2) Touch the Temp Compensation Button to display the Temp Compensation Screen.
3) Touch the Temp Compensation Annunciator Button to enable/disable temperature compensation.
4) Touch the Temp Button to display the numeric keypad. Use the keypad and the Enter Button to
select the temperature at the . The compensated altitude is computed and shown in the flight plan.

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

305

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT

Temp
Compensation
Annunciator
Button

Temp Button

Temp
Compensation
Button

FAF Altitude
and
Compensated
Altitude
Figure 5-142 Flight Plan Options Screen - Temperature Compensation

COURSE TO ALTITUDE
In this missed approach procedure, the altitude immediately following the MAP (in this case ‘1426ft’) is not
part of the published procedure. It is simply a Course to Altitude (CA) leg which guides the aircraft along
the runway centerline until the required altitude required to safely make the first turn toward the MAHP
is exceeded. In this case, if the aircraft altitude is below the specified altitude (1,426 feet) after crossing
the MAP, a direct-to is established to provide a course on runway heading until an altitude of 1,426 feet
reached. After reaching 1,426 feet, a direct-to is established to the published MAHP (in this case LYMES).
If the aircraft altitude is above the specified altitude after crossing the MAP, a direct-to is established to the
published fix (LYMES) to begin the missed approach procedure. The altitude constraint value defaults to
400 feet AGL when there is no Course to Altitude defined in the published procedure.
In some missed approach procedures this Course to Altitude leg may be part of the published procedure.
For example, the procedure dictates a climb to 5,500 feet, then turn left and proceed to the Missed Approach
Hold Point (MAHP). In this case, the altitude would be appear in the list of waypoints as ‘5500ft’. Again, if
the aircraft altitude is lower than the prescribed altitude, a direct-to is established on a Course to Altitude leg
when the missed approach procedure is activated.

Course to Altitude Leg

Figure 5-143 Course to Altitude

306

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT

5.9 TRIP PLANNING
The system allows the pilot to enter values for weight and fuel planning. The pilot can also view trip planning
information, fuel information, and other information for a specified flight plan or flight plan leg based on automatic
data, or based on manually entered data.

WEIGHT AND FUEL
Weight planning is done on the Weight and Fuel Screen by entering data on each of the tabs. The basic
operating weight is shown on the Operating Weight Tab and is calculated by adding the basic empty weight to
the pilot and stores weight.

Operating Weight
Tab

Basic Empty Weight
Pilot(s) & Stores Weight
Button
Basic Operating Weight

Set Empty Weight
Button
Figure 5-159 Weight and Fuel Screen - Operating Weight Tab

Calculating basic operating weight:
1) From Home, touch Utilities > Weight and Fuel.
2) Touch the Set Empty Weight Button to display the keypad.
3) Use the keypad to enter the basic empty weight.
4) Touch the Enter Button to accept the entry, and return to the Weight and Fuel Screen.
5) Touch the Pilot(s) & Stores weight button to display the keypad.
6) Use the keypad to enter the pilot and stores weight.
7) Touch the Enter Button to accept the entry, and return to the Weight and Fuel Screen.

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

307

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Total passenger weight is calculated by multiplying the number of passengers by the average passenger weight.
Zero Fuel Weight is calculated by adding the basic operating weight, total passenger weight, and cargo weight.
Basic Operating Weight
Number of Passengers
Button

Payload
Tab

Total Passenger Weight

Average Passenger Weight
Button

Cargo Weight
Button
Zero Fuel Weight
Figure 5-160 Weight and Fuel Screen - Payload Tab

Calculating zero fuel weight:
1) From Home, touch Utilities > Weight and Fuel.
2) Touch the Payload Tab to display the zero fuel weight calculation.
3) Touch the number of passengers button to display the keypad.
4) Use the keypad to enter the number of passengers.
5) Touch the Enter Button to accept the entry, and return to the Weight and Fuel Screen.
6) Touch the average passenger weight button to display the keypad.
7) Use the keypad to enter the average passenger weight.
8) Touch the Enter Button to accept the entry, and return to the Weight and Fuel Screen.
9) Touch the cargo weight button to display the keypad.
10) Use the keypad to enter the cargo weight.
11) Touch the Enter Button to accept the entry, and return to the Weight and Fuel Screen.

Aircraft weight is calculated by adding the zero fuel weight to the fuel on board weight. Both the fuel on
board and aircraft weight decrement as fuel is burned, providing the current value for each.
Zero Fuel Weight
Fuel On Board
Button
Aircraft Weight

Fuel
Tab

FOB SYNC Button
Figure 5-161 Weight and Fuel Screen - Fuel Tab

308

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Calculating aircraft weight:
1) From Home, touch Utilities > Weight and Fuel.
2) Touch the Fuel Tab to display the aircraft weight calculation.
3) Touch the fuel on board button to display the keypad.
4) Use the keypad to enter the fuel on board.
5) Touch the Enter Button to accept the entry, and return to the Weight and Fuel Screen.
Or:
1) From Home, touch Utilities > Weight and Fuel.
2) Touch the Fuel Tab to display the aircraft weight calculation.
3) Touch the FOB SYNC Button to insert the fuel weight from the fuel sensors.

Ramp weight is calculated by adding the zero fuel weight to the initialized fuel on board weight. Takeoff
weight is calculated by subtracting the taxi fuel weight from the ramp weight.
Zero Fuel Weight
Initialized Fuel On Board
Ramp Weight
Taxi Fuel Weight Button

Takeoff
Tab

Takeoff Weight
Figure 5-162 Weight and Fuel Screen - Takeoff Tab

Calculating takeoff weight:
1) From Home, touch Utilities > Weight and Fuel.
2) Touch the Takeoff Tab to display the takeoff weight calculation.
3) Touch the taxi fuel weight button to display the keypad.
4) Use the keypad to enter the taxi fuel weight.
5) Touch the Enter Button to accept the entry, and return to the Weight and Fuel Screen.

When the aircraft is in the air and a destination waypoint has been entered, the fuel calculations can be
completed.
• Estimated landing weight = zero fuel weight + estimated landing fuel weight.
• Estimated landing fuel weight = fuel on board weight - (fuel flow x ETE)
• Excess fuel weight = estimated landing fuel weight - fuel reserves weight

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

309

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT

Estimated Landing Weight

Estimated Landing Fuel
Fuel Reserves Weight
Button
Excess Fuel
Landing
Tab
Figure 5-163 Weight and Fuel Screen - Landing Tab

If the aircraft is on the ground or a destination waypoint has not been entered, the following fields display
invalid values consisting of four dashes:
• Estimated landing weight
• Estimated landing fuel weight
• Excess fuel weight
Estimated Landing Weight

Estimated Landing Fuel

Excess Fuel

Figure 5-164 Weight and Fuel Screen - Landing Tab with Invalid Fields

Entering fuel reserve:
1) From Home, touch Utilities > Weight and Fuel.
2) Touch the Landing Tab to display the landing weight and fuel calculations.
3) Touch the fuel reserves weight button to display the keypad.
4) Use the keypad to enter the fuel reserves weight.
5) Touch the Enter Button to accept the entry, and return to the Weight and Fuel Screen.

310

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
WEIGHT CAUTION AND WARNING CONDITIONS
If the zero fuel weight is greater than the maximum allowable zero fuel weight, then the zero fuel weight is
displayed in amber.
If the aircraft weight is greater than the maximum allowable takeoff weight, then the takeoff weight is displayed
in amber.
If the estimated landing weight is greater than the maximum allowable landing weight, then the estimated
landing weight is displayed in amber.
If the estimated landing fuel weight is positive, but less than or equal to the fuel reserves weight, the following
values are displayed in amber:
• Estimated landing fuel weight
• Excess fuel weight
If the estimated landing fuel weight is zero or negative, then the following values are displayed in red:
• Estimated landing fuel weight
• Excess fuel weight

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

311

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT

TRIP PLANNING
All of the input of data needed for calculation and viewing of the statistics is done on the Trip Planning Screen
on the Touchscreen Controller. To access the Trip Planning Screen, start at Home, touch Utilities, then Weight
and Fuel.

Trip Route Button

Selected Route Segment

Input Data (sensor/pilot)

Manual Entry Button

Figure 5-144 Trip Planning Screen - Manual Mode

- Departure Time (local)
- Ground Speed
- Fuel On Board
- Fuel Flow
- Calibrated Airspeed
- Indicated Altitude
- Barometric Pressure
- Total Air Temperature

Preview of Selected
Flight Plan/Flight Plan Leg

Selected Route Segment
Trip Statistics

Fuel Statistics

Desired Track Distance Estimated Time Enroute Estimated Time of Arrival Enroute Safe Altitude Sunrise Time (local) Sunset Time (local) -

- Efficiency
- Total Endurance
- Remaining Fuel
- Remaining Endurance
- Fuel Required
- Total Range

Other Statistics
Figure 5-145 Trip Planning Display

- Density Altitude
- True Airspeed (TAS)

The trip planning inputs are based on sensor inputs (automatic mode) or on pilot inputs (manual entry
mode). Some additional explanation of the sources for some of the inputs is as follows:
• Departure time (Depart Time) - This defaults to the current time in automatic page mode. The computations
are from the aircraft present position, so the aircraft is always just departing.
• Calibrated airspeed (Cal Airspeed) - The primary source is from the air data system, and the secondary source
of information is GPS ground speed.
• Indicated altitude (Indicated Alt) - The primary source is the barometric altitude, and the secondary source
of information is GPS altitude.
312

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
TRIP STATISTICS
The trip statistics are calculated based on the trip route selected and the trip planning inputs.
Trip Route Mode

Trip Route Button

Description

Stored Flight Plan Cumulative Mode

Waypoints are the starting and ending waypoints of the selected
flight plan.

Stored Flight Plan Leg Mode

Waypoints are the endpoints of the selected leg.

Active Flight Plan Remaining Mode

The ‘from’ waypoint is the present position of the aircraft or a
selected waypoint, and the ‘to’ waypoint is the endpoint of the
active flight plan.

Active Flight Plan Leg Mode

The ‘from’ waypoint is the present position of the aircraft or a
selected waypoint, and the ‘to’ waypoint is the endpoint of the
selected leg

Waypoint Mode

Manually selected waypoints (if there is an active flight plan,
these default to the endpoints of the active leg).

Some of the calculated trip statistics are dashed when the selected leg of the active flight plan has already
been flown.
• Desired Track (DTK) - DTK is shown as nnn° and is the desired track between the selected waypoints.
It is dashed unless only a single leg is selected.
• Distance (DIS) - The distance is shown in tenths of units up to 99.9, and in whole units up to 9999.
• Estimated time enroute (ETE) - ETE is shown as hours:minutes until less than an hour, then it is shown
as minutes:seconds.
• Estimated time of arrival (ETA) - ETA is shown as hours:minutes and is the local time at the
destination.
- If in waypoint mode then the ETA is the ETE added to the departure time.
- If a stored flight plan is selected it shows the ETA by adding to the departure time all of the ETEs of the
legs up to the selected leg. If the entire flight plan is selected, then the ETA is calculated as if the last
leg of the flight plan was selected.
- If the active flight plan is selected the ETA reflects the current position of the aircraft and the current
leg being flown. The ETA is calculated by adding to the current time the ETEs of the current leg up to
and including the selected leg. If the entire flight plan is selected, then the ETA is calculated as if the
last leg of the flight plan was selected.
• Enroute safe altitude (ESA) - The ESA is shown as nnnnnFT
• Destination sunrise and sunset times (SUNRISE, SUNSET) - These times are shown as hours:minutes
and are the local time at the destination.

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

313

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FUEL STATISTICS
The fuel statistics are calculated based on the selected starting and ending waypoints and the trip planning
inputs. Some of the calculated trip statistics are dashed when the selected leg of the active flight plan has
already been flown.
• Fuel efficiency (EFFICIENCY) - This value is calculated by dividing the current ground speed by the
current fuel flow.
• Time of fuel endurance (TOTAL ENDUR) - This time is shown as hours:minutes. This value is obtained
by dividing the amount of fuel on board by the current fuel flow.
• Fuel on board upon reaching end of selected leg (REM FUEL) - This value is calculated by taking the
amount of fuel onboard and subtracting the fuel required to reach the end of the selected leg.
• Fuel endurance remaining at end of selected leg (REM ENDUR) - This value is calculated by taking the time
of fuel endurance and subtracting the estimated time enroute to the end of the selected leg.
• Fuel required for trip (FUEL REQ) - This value is calculated by multiplying the time to go by the fuel
flow.
• Total range at entered fuel flow (TOTAL RANGE) - This value is calculated by multiplying the time of fuel
endurance by the ground speed.

OTHER STATISTICS
These statistics are calculated based on the system sensor inputs or the manual trip planning inputs.
• Density altitude (DENSITY ALT)
• True airspeed (TRUE AIRSPEED)
Selecting the Stored Flight Plan - Cumulative trip route mode:
1) From Home, touch Utilities > Trip Planning
2) Touch the Trip Route Button to display the Input Selection Window.
3) Touch the Select from Flight Plan Button to display the Select Flight Plan Screen.
4) Scroll the list, if necessary, and touch a stored flight plan button to display the Select Flight Plan Leg Screen.
5) Touch the Cumulative Flight Plan Button to select the mode and return to the Trip Planning Screen.

Selecting the Stored Flight Plan - Leg trip route mode:
1) From Home, touch Utilities > Trip Planning
2) Touch the Trip Route Button to display the Input Selection Window.
3) Touch the Select from Flight Plan Button to display the Select Flight Plan Screen.
4) Scroll the list, if necessary, and touch a stored flight plan button to display the Select Flight Plan Leg Screen.
5) Scroll the list, if necessary, and touch a flight plan leg selection button to select the mode and return to the Trip
Planning Screen.

314

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Selecting the Active Flight Plan - Remaining trip route mode:
1) From Home, touch Utilities > Trip Planning
2) Touch the Trip Route Button to display the Input Selection Window.
3) Touch the Select from Flight Plan Button to display the Select Flight Plan Screen.
4) Scroll the list, if necessary, and touch the active flight plan button to display the Select Flight Plan Leg Screen.
5) Touch the Remaining Flight Plan Button to select the mode and return to the Trip Planning Screen.

Selecting the Active Flight Plan - Leg trip route mode:
1) From Home, touch Utilities > Trip Planning
2) Touch the Trip Route Button to display the Input Selection Window.
3) Touch the Select from Flight Plan Button to display the Select Flight Plan Screen.
4) Scroll the list, if necessary, and touch the active flight plan button to display the Select Flight Plan Leg Screen.
5) Scroll the list, if necessary, and touch a flight plan leg selection button to select the mode and return to the Trip
Planning Screen.

Selecting the waypoints trip route mode:
1) From Home, touch Utilities > Trip Planning
2) Touch the Trip Route Button to display the Input Selection Window.
3) Touch the Select Starting and Ending Waypoints Button to display the Select Starting and Ending Locations
Window.
4) Touch the starting waypoint button to display the Select Starting Location Window.
5) Touch the Present Position Button to use the present position of the aircraft and return to the Select Starting
and Ending Locations Window.
Or:
6) Touch the Waypoint Button to select a waypoint using the keypad and return to the Select Starting and Ending
Locations Window.
7) Touch the ending waypoint button to to select a waypoint using the keypad and return to the Select Starting
and Ending Locations Window.
8) Touch the Accept Button to select the mode and return to the Trip Planning Screen.

When the manual entry mode is selected, the other eight trip input data fields must be entered by the pilot,
in addition to flight plan and leg selection.
Entering manual data for trip statistics calculations:
1) From Home, touch Utilities > Trip Planning
2) Touch the Manual Entry Button to enable the manual entry data field buttons.
3) Touch an input data field button and use the keypad to select the value.
4) Touch the Enter Button to accept the value and return to the Trip Planning Screen.
5) Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each of the data fields.

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

315

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT

5.10 NAVIGATING A FLIGHT PLAN
The following discussion is an example of navigating a flight plan with the SBAS capable GPS system while the
system provides vertical guidance through descents. A lateral flight plan (LNAV) would be navigated in much the
same way, but would not include vertical guidance when the final approach course is active.
NOTE: The following example flight plan is for instructional purposes only. All database information depicted

should be considered not current.
The example is a flight plan from KMKC to KCOS filed using the TIFTO3 departure, various Victor Airways,
and the DBRY2 arrival with the transition at TBE. The flight plan includes an enroute altitude of 12,000 feet, an
LPV (WAAS) approach selected for runway 35R, and a missed approach executed at the Missed Approach Point
(MAP). A few enroute changes are demonstrated.
1) Prior to departure, the TIFTO3 departure, the airways, and the DBRY2 arrival at KCOS are loaded. See the
Procedures section for loading departures and arrivals. Note the magenta arrow in Figure 5-146 indicating the
active departure leg.

After takeoff, ATC assigns a heading of 240º.
2) Figure 5-146 shows the aircraft on the assigned heading of 240º. ‘TERM’ (Terminal) is the current CDI flight
phase displayed on the HSI indicating 1.0 nm CDI scaling.

Figure 5-146 Assigned Heading of 240º

316

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
3) ATC now assigns routing to join V4. A heading of 290º is assigned to intercept V4. The aircraft turns to heading
290° as seen in Figure 5-147.

Figure 5-147 Assigned Heading of 290º

4) Enter V4 into the flight plan.
a) From Home on the Touchscreen Controller, touch the Flight Plan Button to display the Active Flight Plan
Screen as shown in Figure 5-148.

Figure 5-148 Begin Adding V4 to the Active Flight Plan

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

317

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
b) The desired entry point for V4 (TOP) must be entered. Touch the desired waypoint selection button (SLN) shown
in Figure 5-149 to display the Waypoint Options Window.

Figure 5-149 Selecting the Insertion Point

c) Touch the Insert Before Button shown in Figure 5-150 to display the keypad.

Figure 5-150 Entering V4 Entry Point

d) Use the keypad to select the desired entry point for V4, Topeka VOR (TOP), as shown in Figure 5-151.

Figure 5-151 Selecting V4 Entry Point

318

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
e) Touch the Enter Button. TOP is inserted into the flight plan as in Figure 5-152.

Figure 5-152 TOP Inserted into the Flight Plan

f) Touch the desired waypoint selection button (TOP) to display the Waypoint Options Window (Figure 5-153).

Figure 153 Begin Selecting the Airway

g) Touch the Load Airway Button to display the list of available airways for TOP as seen in Figure 5-154.

Figure 5-154 List of Available Airways for TOP

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

319

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
h) Touch the V4 Button to select the airway, and to display the list of available exit points for V4. Scroll the list to
find SLN (Figure 5-155).

Figure 5-155 List of Available Exits for V4

i) Touch the SLN Button to select the Salina VOR (SLN). The selected airway entry, exit, and waypoint sequence
are displayed as shown in Figure 5-156.

Figure 5-156 Ready to Load V4

j) Touch the Load Airway Button. V4 is loaded into the Active Flight Plan.

Figure 5-157 V4 Loaded

320

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
5) Making V4 the active leg of the flight plan.
a) Touch the ULNAZ Button to display the Waypoint Options Window as shown in Figure 5-158.

Figure 5-158 Activating V4 Leg

b) Touch the Activate Leg to Waypoint Button. The confirmation window is now displayed as in Figure 5-159.

Figure 5-159 Comfirm Active Leg

c) Touch the OK Button to activate the leg (Figure 5-160).

Figure 5-160 V4 Leg is Active

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

321

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
d) Note in Figure 5-161, the magenta arrow in the flight plan window and magenta line on the map indicating V4
is now the active flight plan leg. Note the phase of flight remained in Terminal (TERM) mode up to this point
because a departure leg was active. Since a leg after the departure is now active, the current CDI flight phase is
ENR (Enroute) and CDI scaling has changed to 2.0 nm.

Figure 5-161 V4 Now Active Leg

6) The aircraft continues on heading 290º. When crosstrack distance is less than 2.0 nm, the XTK disappears from
the HSI and the CDI is positioned on the last dot indicating a 2.0 nm distance from the centerline of the next
course.

322

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
7) As the CDI approaches center, the aircraft turns onto the active leg as seen in Figure 5-162.

Figure 5-162 Turn on to Active Leg

8) At SLN, Victor Airway 244 (V244) is intercepted. Turn prompts are displayed in the PFD Navigation Status Box
as seen in Figure 5-163.

Figure 5-163 Turn to Intercept V244

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

323

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
9) As seen in Figure 5-164, V244 is now the active flight plan leg.

Figure 5-164 V244 Now Active Leg

324

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
10) At Lamar VOR (LAA) V263 is intercepted. See Figure 5-165.

Figure 5-165 WIZGE to LAA Leg Active

11) ATC grants clearance to proceed direct to the OPSHN intersection to begin the arrival procedure. ATC advises
to expect an altitude of 10,000 feet at OPSHN.
a) From Home, touch the Direct To Button.
b) Touch the Flight Plan Tab, and scroll the list to find OPSHN.
c) Touch the OPSHN Button. The Direct To Screen is now displayed as shown in Figure 5-166.

Figure 5-166 Direct To OPSHN

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

325

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
d) Touch the VNAV Altitude Button to display the keypad to select the VNAV altitude as shown in Figure 5-167.

Figure 5-167 Enter VNAV Altitude

e) An altitude of 10,000 feet is selected as requested by ATC.
f) Touch the Enter Button to accept the altitude value and return to the Direct To Screen.
g) Touch the VNAV Offset Button to display the keypad to select the offset distance as shown in Figure 5-168.

Figure 5-168 Enter VNAV Offset Distance

h) An offset, or distance from the waypoint at which to reach the selected altitude of three miles prior to OPSHN is
selected. In other words, the system gives vertical guidance so the aircraft arrives at an altitude of 10,000 feet
three miles prior to OPSHN.
i) Touch the Enter Button to accept the offset distance and return to the Direct To Screen.

326

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
j) Press the Activate ¯ OPSHN Button to activate the direct to.
Note, in Figure 5-169, the magenta arrow indicating the direct-to OPSHN after the offset waypoint for OPSHN.
The preceding offset waypoint indicates the offset distance and altitude that were previously entered. The
remaining waypoints in the loaded arrival procedure have no database specified altitudes, therefore, dashes are
displayed. Keep the CDI centered and maintain a track along the magenta line to OPSHN.

Note the Direct-to waypoint is within the loaded arrival procedure, therefore, phase of flight scaling for the CDI
changes to Terminal Mode and is annunciated by displaying ‘TERM’ on the HSI.

Figure 5-169 Direct To Active

12) The aircraft is proceeding to OPSHN. The expected approach is the RNAV LPV approach to runway 35R, so it is
selected.
a) From Home, touch the PROC Button. to display the Procedures Screen (Figure 5-170).

Figure 5-170 Procedures Screen

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

327

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
b) Touch the Approach Button to display the Approach Selection Screen with KCOS selected as the destination
airport as shown in Figure 5-171.

Figure 5-171 Approach Selection Screen

c) Touch the Approach Button. A list of available approaches for the destination airport is displayed as in Figure
5-172.

Figure 5-172 List of Available Approaches

d) Scroll the list to select the LPV approach for 35R as shown in Figure 5-173.

Figure 5-173 RNAV 35R LPV Approach Shown

328

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
e) Touch the RNAV GPS Y 35R LPV Button. A list of available transitions for the selected approach is displayed
as in Figure 5-174.

Figure 5-174 Select Transition Screen - List of Available Transitions

f) Touch the HABUK iaf Button to select it as the transition and return to the Approach Selection Screen as shown
in Figure 5-175.

Figure 5-175 Approach Selected

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

329

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
g) If necessary, touch the Minimums Button to select the minimum descent altitude (Figure 5-176). Touch the
Minimums Button again, if necessary, then touch the Baro Button. Select the altitude using the keypad.

Figure 5-176 Selecting the Minimums

h) If necessary, touch the Enter Button to accept the minimum descent altitude and return to the Approach
Selection Screen (Figure 5-177).

Figure 5-177 Minimums Set

330

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
i) Touch the Load Button. The selected approach is added to the flight plan as seen in Figure 5-178.

Figure 5-178 Loaded Approach

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

331

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
13) Note the altitude constraints associated with each of the approach waypoints as seen in Figure 5-179. The
altitudes loaded from the database are displayed as light blue text, indicating these values are “designated” for
use in computing vertical deviation guidance.

Note: To no longer use the displayed altitude for calculating vertical deviation guidance, perform the
following:
a) Touch the altitude button (e.g. 8100FT).
b) Touch the Remove VNAV ALT Button.
c) Touch the OK Button in response to the “Remove VNAV altitude?” prompt.

After making the altitude “non-designated”, it is displayed as white text (Figure 5-180).

Altitude constraint values associated with the Final Approach Fix (FAF) and waypoints beyond the FAF cannot be
designated for vertical guidance. These altitude values are always displayed as white text, as in Figure 5-178.
Vertical guidance from the FAF and on to the Missed Approach Point (MAP) is given using the WAAS GPS
altitude source, therefore, the displayed altitude values are for reference only.

Figure 5-179 FALUR Designated for Vertical Guidance

Figure 5-180 FALUR Not Designated for Vertical Guidance

332

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
14) As the aircraft approaches OPSHN, it may be desirable to adjust the speed, or steepness of the upcoming
descent. The default Flight Path Angle (FPA) is -3.0 degrees and a required vertical speed is computed to
maintain the -3.0 FPA. To change the vertical flight path, perform the following steps.
a) From Home, touch Flight Plan > VNAV to display the VNAV Profile Screen as shown in Figure 5-181.
b) Touch the Vertical Speed Target Button to adjust the vertical speed, or touch the Flight Path Angle Button
to adjust the FPA. Touching either button will display the keypad to select the desired value.
Note the information now displayed in the ‘CURRENT VNAV PROFILE’ box (Figure 5-182). Also, note the offset
waypoint (orange box) and gray circle are now displayed on the map. The gray circle marks the Top of Descent
(TOD). In this example, vertical guidance is provided at the TOD that results in a -2.5 degree FPA descent to an
altitude of 10,000 feet upon reaching the offset waypoint.

Figure 5-181 Adjusting the Descent

Figure 5-182 Adjusting the Descent

c) Touch the Enter Button to accept the selected value.

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

333

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
15) As seen in Figure 5-183, the aircraft is approaching TOD. Note the target vertical speed required to reach the
selected altitude. The Vertical Deviation Indicator (VDI) and the Required Vertical Speed Indicator (RVSI) are
now displayed on the PFD as shown in Figure 5-184. When the aircraft is within one minute of the TOD, it is
annunciated as shown in Figure 5-184, and an aural alert ‘Vertical track’ will be heard.

Figure 5-183 Approaching Top of Descent (TOD)

Vertical Deviation
Indicator (VDI)

Required Vertical
Speed Indicator
(RVSI)

Figure 5-184 VDI & RVSI Upon Reaching Top of Descent (TOD)

334

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
16) Upon reaching TOD, a descent vertical speed is established by placing the VSI pointer in line with the RVSI as
shown in Figure 5-185 .

Keep Vertical Deviation
Indicator Centered

Align Actual Vertical Speed
with
Required Vertical Speed

Figure 5-185 VDI & RVSI Showing Correctly Established Descent

17) When the aircraft is one minute from the bottom of descent (BOD) it is annunciated as shown in Figure 5-186.
Upon reaching the offset waypoint for OPSHN, the aircraft is at 10,000 feet.

Figure 5-186 Approaching Bottom of Descent (BOD) at OPSHN Offset Waypoint

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

335

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
18) The aircraft is approaching OPSHN. The upcoming turn and next heading are annunciated on the PFD as seen
in Figure 5-187. Initiate the turn and maneuver the aircraft on a track through the turn radius to intercept the
magenta line for the OPSHN to FSHER leg and center the CDI.

Figure 5-187 Turn to intercept OPSHN to FSHER Leg

336

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
19) After passing OPSHN, the next leg of the arrival turns magenta as shown in Figure 5-188. The magenta arrow
in the flight plan list now indicates the OPSHN to FSHER leg of the arrival procedure is now active.

Figure 5-188 Tracking the OPSHN to FSHER Leg

20) The flight continues through the arrival procedure to FSHER (see Figure 5-189). At a point 31 nm from the
destination airport, the phase of flight scaling for the CDI changes to Terminal Mode and is annunciated by
displaying ‘TERM’ on the HSI.

Figure 5-189 Awaiting Vectors to Final

After FSHER, you receive a radar vector to the final approach. Annunciations for the upcoming turn and descent,
as well as the VDI and RVSI, appear on the PFD as the flight progresses.

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

337

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
21) Establish the course provided. When the course is established, activate Vectors To Final.
a) From Home, touch PROC.
b) Touch the Activate Vectors to Final Button.

Figure 5-190 Activating Vectors To Final

c) The active leg is now the established course direct to CEGIX faf (see Figure 5-191). The flight phase changes
to LPV on the HSI indicating the current phase of flight is in Approach Mode and the approach type is LPV. CDI
scaling changes accordingly and is used much like a localizer when flying an ILS approach. The RVSI is no longer
displayed and the VDI changes to the Glidepath Indicator (as shown in Figure 5-190) when the final approach
course becomes active.

The descent continues through the FAF (CEGIX) using the Glidepath Indicator, as one would use a glideslope
indicator, to obtain an altitude “AT” 8,100 feet at the FAF. Note the altitude restriction lines over and under (At)
the altitude in the ‘ALT’ field in Figure 5-191.

Figure 5-191 Vectors To Final Approach is Now Active

338

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Note: In circumstances where it is required to manually activate the approach procedure, perform the following
steps:
a) From Home, touch PROC.
b) Touch the Activate Approach Button (see Figure 5-190).
22) After crossing CEGIX, the aircraft continues following the glidepath to maintain the descent to the Missed Approach
Point (MAP) (RW35R) as seen in Figure 5-192.

Figure 5-192 Descending to the Missed Approach Point

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

339

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
23) Upon reaching the MAP, it is decided to execute a missed approach. Automatic waypoint sequencing is
suspended past the MAP. Select the SUSP Softkey on the PFD to resume automatic waypoint sequencing
through the missed approach procedure.
A direct-to is initiated to WABOP. The aircraft is climbing to reach 9,000 feet at the Missed Approach Hold Point
(MAHP). The CDI flight phase now changes from LPV to MAPR as seen on the HSI.

Figure 5-193 Missed Approach Active

340

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
24) The aircraft continues climbing to “AT or ABOVE” 9,000 feet at ADANE. A holding pattern is established at the
MAHP (ADANE) as shown in Figure 5-194.

Figure 5-194 Establishing the Holding Pattern

25) The aircraft maintains 9,000 feet while following the magenta line through the hold as in Figure 5-195.

Figure 5-195 Hold Established

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

341

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT

5.11 ABNORMAL OPERATION
This section discusses the Dead Reckoning mode of operation and the subsequent indications.
NOTE: Dead Reckoning Mode only functions in Enroute (ENR) or Oceanic (OCN) phase of flight. In all other

phases, an invalid GPS solution produces a “NO GPS POSITION” annunciation on the map and the system
stops using GPS.
While in Enroute or Oceanic phase of flight, if the system detects an invalid GPS solution or is unable to
calculate a GPS position, the system automatically reverts to Dead Reckoning (DR) Mode. In DR Mode, the system
uses its last-known position combined with continuously updated airspeed and heading data (when available) to
calculate and display the aircraft’s current estimated position.
It is important to note that estimated navigation data supplied by the system in DR Mode may become increasingly
unreliable and must not be used as a sole means of navigation. If while in DR Mode airspeed and/or heading data
is also lost or not available, the DR function may not be capable of accurately tracking estimated position and,
consequently, the system may display a path that is different than the actual movement of the aircraft. Estimated
position information displayed by the system through DR while there is no heading and/or airspeed data available
should not be used for navigation.
DR Mode is inherently less accurate than the standard GPS/SBAS Mode due to the lack of satellite measurements
needed to determine a position. Changes in wind speed and/or wind direction compound the relative inaccuracy
of DR Mode. Because of this degraded accuracy, other navigation equipment must be relied upon for position
awareness until GPS-derived position data is restored.
DR Mode is indicated on the system by the the letters ‘DR’ prominently displayed in yellow on the HSI below
and to the left of the aircraft symbol on the CDI as shown in Figure 5-196. The CDI deviation bar is removed.
Lastly, but at the same time, a ‘GPS NAV LOST’ alert message appears on the GTC. Normal navigation using GPS/
SBAS source data resumes automatically once a valid GPS solution is restored.
As a result of operating in DR Mode, all GPS-derived data is computed based upon an estimated position and is
displayed as yellow text on the display to denote degraded navigation source information.
Also, while the system is in DR Mode, the autopilot will not be coupled. TAWS is disabled. Additionally, the
accuracy of all nearest information (airports, airspaces, and waypoints) is questionable. Finally, airspace alerts
continue to function, but with degraded accuracy.

342

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT

Current Track
Indicator

Distance & ETE

Bearing Pointer/
Distance
Ground Speed

Dead Reckoning
Annunciaion

Navigation Data Bar

All data except Active
Leg, TAS, and DTK are
in yellow

Figure 5-196 Dead Reckoning Mode - GPS Derived Data Shown in Yellow

NOTE: The Inset Map is removed from the PFD any time aircraft pitch is greater than +30° or less than –20°,

or when a 65° bank angle is reached.

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

343

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT

Blank Page

344

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

HAZARD AVOIDANCE

SECTION 6 HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Hazard avoidance features available for the Embraer Prodigy Touch are designed to aid situational awareness
and provide advisory information with regard to potential hazards to flight safety associated with weather, terrain,
and air traffic.
Weather
• GDL 69A SiriusXM Weather (Subscription Optional)
• GWX 70 Airborne Color Weather Radar
Terrain Avoidance
• Terrain Awareness and Warning System Class-A (TAWS-A)
Traffic
• ACSS TCAS 3000SP™ Traffic Alert and Collision and Avoidance System II (TCAS II)

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

345

HAZARD AVOIDANCE

6.1 SIRIUSXM WEATHER
WARNING: Do not use data link weather information for maneuvering in, near, or around areas of hazardous

weather. Information contained within data link weather products may not accurately depict current
weather conditions.
The GDL 69/69A is a remote-mounted satellite data link receiver. It provides SiriusXM Weather data to the
system. The displays show graphical weather information and the associated text. The GDL 69A can also receive
SiriusXM Satellite Radio entertainment services. Both weather data and audio entertainment programming
operate in the S-band frequency range to provide continuous reception capabilities at any altitude throughout
North America.
SiriusXM services require subscriptions. For more information on specific subscription packages, visit www.
siriusxm.com.

ACTIVATING SERVICES
Before SiriusXM Weather and SiriusXM Satellite Radio can be used, the services must be activated by
providing SiriusXM’s customer service the coded IDs unique to the installed GDL 69/69A. SiriusXM Satellite
Radio (audio) and SiriusXM Weather (data) services each have coded IDs. The Data and Audio Radio IDs must
be provided to activate the weather service and entertainment subscriptions, respectively. These IDs are in the
following locations:
• The SiriusXM Info Screen on the Touchscreen Controller (Figure 6-1)
• The label on the back of the GDL 69/69A data link receiver
• The GDL 69/69A SiriusXM Satellite Radio Activation Instructions included with the unit.
Contact the installer if the Audio and Data Radio IDs cannot be located.
SiriusXM uses the coded IDs to send an activation signal to enable the system to receive weather data and/or
entertainment programming.
Establishing a SiriusXM Weather Data account:
1) From Home, touch Utilities > Setup > SiriusXM Info.
2) Note the ID shown in the Data Radio Window as seen in Figure 6-1.
3) Contact SiriusXM customer service through the telephone number listed on its website, www.siriusxm.com.
Follow the instructions provided by SiriusXM customer service.

Activating SiriusXM Weather services:
1) Position the aircraft so the GDL 69/69A antenna has an unobstructed view of the sky, away from buildings.
2) From Home, touch Utilities > Setup > SiriusXM Info.
3) Touch the Start Button in the Activation Window (Figure 6-1). The Activation Window shows ‘ACTIVATING’
while processing the activation.
4) In the Weather Products Window, scroll as needed to view available weather products. Available weather
products appear as white text; unavailable weather products appear in gray (diminished) text. It may take
several minutes before all subscribed-to weather products become available.

346

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
5) When the available weather products match all the weather products in the SiriusXM weather subscription,
touch the Lock Button to save the activation changes, or touch the Cancel, Back, or Home Buttons to exit
without saving changes.
Data Radio ID
(for SiriusXM
Weather)
Audio Radio ID
(for SiriusXM
Entertainment)
Service Class of
SiriusXM Weather
Subscription

Weather Products
(Available Products
for Service
Class Indicated
in White, Not
Available are
Diminished)

Start Service
Activation
Figure 6-1 SiriusXM Info Screen

ACCESSING SIRIUSXM WEATHER PRODUCTS
The SiriusXM Weather Pane is the principal map pane for viewing SiriusXM Weather information (Figure
6-2). This is the only map pane capable of showing information for all available SiriusXM Weather products.
Viewing the SiriusXM Weather Pane:
1) From Home, touch the Weather Button. Button is highlighted and becomes the Weather Selection Button.
The selected pane shows a weather pane. If a weather pane other than ‘SiriusXM WEATHER’ is shown (such as
‘WEATHER RADAR’ in the pane title), continue with the procedure to view the SiriusXM Weather Pane.
2) Touch the Weather Selection Button.
3) Touch the SiriusXM Weather Button. Button is highlighted and becomes the SiriusXM Settings Button.
The system shows the SiriusXM Weather Pane.

The system provides the ability to select a map orientation for the SiriusXM Weather Pane for a the selected
display pane location. In addition to the Heading Up, Track Up, and North Up display options, the system can
also synchronize the SiriusXM Weather Pane orientation to the Navigation Map Pane orientation.
Selecting a map orientation for the SiriusXM Weather Pane:
1) From Home, touch Weather > Weather Selection > SiriusXM Weather > SiriusXM Weather Settings.
2) Touch the Orientation Button to change the selected map orientation (displayed in light blue)
3) Touch the desired map orientation button (Heading Up, Track Up, North Up, Sync To Nav Map).

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

347

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
NEXRAD
Weather
Product Symbol

Weather
Product Age
in Minutes

SiriusXM Weather Pane in Full Mode

Dashes Indicate
Weather Product
Expired

Touchscreen Controller (SiriusXM Weather Settings Screen)

Enable/Disable a
Background
Weather
Product

View the Legends
for Enabled
Weather Products

348

Enable/Disable
Weather
Product
Overlay(s)

Figure 6-2 Viewing SiriusXM Weather
Products on the SiriusXM Weather Pane

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

HAZARD AVOIDANCE

WARNING: Do not use the indicated data link weather product age to determine the age of the weather

information shown by the data link weather product. Due to time delays inherent in gathering and processing
weather data for data link transmission, the weather information shown by the data link weather product
may be significantly older than the indicated weather product age.
For each enabled SiriusXM Weather product, the system displays a weather product icon and product age.
The product age is the elapsed time (in minutes) since the weather data provider compiled the weather product
on the ground. The product age display does not indicate the age of the information contained within the
weather product, which can be significantly older than the displayed weather product age.
The SiriusXM Weather service broadcasts weather products at specific intervals (defined in the Broadcast
Rate column in Table 6-1). If for any reason, a product is not broadcast within the Expiration Time intervals
(see Table 6-1), the system removes the expired data from the display, and shows dashes instead of the product
age. This ensures the displayed information is consistent with what is currently being transmitted by the
SiriusXM Weather service. If more than half of the expiration time has elapsed, the color of the product age
changes to yellow. If data for a weather product is not available for any reason, the system displays ‘N/A’ next
to the weather product symbol instead of the product age.
Table 6-1 shows the weather product symbols, the expiration times and the broadcast rates. The broadcast
rate represents how often the SiriusXM Weather service transmits new signals that may or may not contain
updated weather products. It does not represent the rate at which the weather information is updated or when
the Data Link Receiver receives new data. SiriusXM and its weather data suppliers define and control the data
update intervals, which are subject to change.

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

349

HAZARD AVOIDANCE

SiriusXM Weather Product

Product
Symbol

Expiration Time
Broadcast Rate
(Minutes)
(Minutes)

Next-generation Radar
(NEXRAD)

5 (U.S.)
10 (Canada)

Cloud Tops

Echo Tops

7.5

SiriusXM Lightning

Storm Cell Movement

SIGMETs

AIRMETs

Meteorological Aerodrome Reports
(METARs)

City Forecast

Surface Analysis

Freezing Levels

Winds Aloft

County Warnings

Cyclone (Hurricane) Warnings
(CYCLONE)

Icing Potential (CIP and SLD)

Pilot Weather Reports
(PIREPs)

Air Reports (AIREPs)

Turbulence

180

no product image

No Radar Coverage
Temporary Flight Restrictions
(TFRs)
Terminal Aerodrome Reports
(TAFs)

Table 6-1 SiriusXM Weather Product Symbols and Data Timing

350

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

HAZARD AVOIDANCE

PFD Inset Navigation Map

Navigation Map Panes

SiriusXM Weather Pane

Table 6-2 shows which SiriusXM Weather products can be displayed (indicated with a ‘+’ symbol) on specific
maps.

NEXRAD

No Radar Coverage (Displayed
with NEXRAD)

SiriusXM Weather Product

Cloud Tops

Echo Tops

SiriusXM Lightning

Storm Cell Movement

SIGMETs/AIRMETs
METARs

+
+

City Forecast

Surface Analysis

Freezing Levels

Winds Aloft

County Warnings

Cyclone Warnings

Icing Potential

PIREPs

AIREPs

Turbulence

TFRs

TAFs

+
+

Table 6-2 Weather Product Display Maps

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

351

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Softkeys control which weather products are shown on the PFD Inset Navigation Map. The Touchscreen
Controller controls the display of weather information on other map display panes such as the Navigation
Map and SiriusXM Weather Panes. When most weather products are enabled for display, the corresponding
button annunciator or softkey annunciator changes from gray (disabled) to green (enabled). For the NEXRAD
weather product, pressing the NEXRAD Softkey cycles through the various coverage sources (USA, Canada,
or Off), indicated by light blue text on the Softkey. On the SiriusXM Weather Settings Screen, touching the
Nexrad Button allows the selection of those coverage sources, with the current selection shown in light blue
on the Nexrad Button.
The Map Settings Screen on the Touchscreen Controller controls the maximum map range at which the
system displays a weather product on a map; selecting a map range higher than this range will declutter the
weather product from the map.
The SiriusXM Weather Settings Screen controls the enabling/disabling of weather products for the
SiriusXM Weather Pane The Map Settings Screen controls the enabling/disabling of weather products for the
Navigation Map Panes.
Enabling/Disabling the display of SiriusXM Weather Products on Navigation Map Panes:
1) From Home, touch Map > Map Settings.
2) If necessary, touch the Sensor Tab.
3) Scroll through the list to view the available weather products.
4) Touch a weather product annunciator button to enable/disable the selected weather product. Button annunciator
is green when a weather product is enabled, or gray when disabled.

Weather Product
Map Range
Settings

Figure 6-3 Map Settings Screen
(Sensor Tab Selected)

Selecting maximum map range to show SiriusXM Weather products:
1) From Home, touch Map > Map Settings.
2) If necessary, touch the Sensor Tab.
3) Scroll to the list to view the weather products.

352

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
4) To select the maximum map range to display Graphical METARs or SiriusXM Lightning, touch the range button
next to the weather product. Then scroll through the list and touch the desired map range above which the
product will be removed, or touch Auto Range to select the maximum map range available to display that
weather product.
5) To select the maximum map range to display NEXRAD Data, touch the NEXRAD Data Settings Button, followed
by the NEXRAD Data range button. Then scroll through the list and touch the desired map range above which
the product will be removed, or touch ‘Auto Range’ to select the maximum map range to display the NEXRAD
weather product.

Weather information displayed on maps other than the SiriusXM Weather Pane use settings based on those
selected on the Map Settings Screen.
The SiriusXM Settings Screen on the Touchscreen Controller can display a legend for each weather product
currently enabled on the SiriusXM Weather Pane.
Viewing legends for weather products enabled on the SiriusXM WEATHER Pane:
1) From Home, touch Weather > Weather Selection > SiriusXM Weather > SiriusXM Settings
2) Touch the Legend Button. The Weather Legends Window appears on the Touchscreen Controller.
3) Scroll as needed to view the weather legends for the enabled weather products.
4) To remove the Weather Legends Window, touch Back or Home.

The system displays additional information about the following weather products by panning over the product
on the map with the map pointer.
• Echo Tops

• County Warnings

• Storm Cell Movement

• TFRs

• SIGMETs

• PIREPSs

• AIRMETs

• AIREPs

• METARs
To enable the Map Pointer for panning, press the Joystick, then move the Joystick to position the Map
Pointer over the desired product. To stop panning, press the Joystick again, or touch the Back Button on the
Touchscreen Controller. Turn the Joystick clockwise to increase map range, counter-clockwise to decrease
map range. If the map range is adjusted while panning is enabled, the map is re-centered on the Map Pointer.

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

353

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Raw METAR Text

Airport with
METAR Flag
Selected with
Map Pointer

Figure 6-4 Panning on the SiriusXM Weather Pane

354

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
NEXRAD
WARNING: Do not use the indicated data link weather product age to determine the age of the weather

or icing data.
The National Weather Service (NWS) operates the WSR-88D, or NEXRAD (NEXt-generation RADar)
system, an extensive network of 156 high-resolution Doppler radar systems. The NEXRAD network provides
centralized meteorological information for the continental United States and selected overseas locations. The
maximum range of a single NEXRAD site is 250 nm. In addition to a wide array of services, the NEXRAD
network provides important information about severe weather and air traffic safety.
Individual NEXRAD sites supply the network with radar images, and the images from each site may arrive
at the network at different rates and times. Periodically, the weather data provider compiles the available
individual site images from the network to form a composite image, and assigns a single time to indicate when
it created the image. This image becomes the NEXRAD weather product. Individual images--gathered from
each NEXRAD site--differ in age, and are always older than the displayed NEXRAD weather product age. The
data provider then sends the NEXRAD data to the SiriusXM Weather service, whose satellites transmit this
information during the next designated broadcast time for the NEXRAD weather product.
Because of the time required to detect, assemble, and distribute the NEXRAD weather product, the displayed
weather information contained within the product may be significantly older than the current radar synopsis
and may not depict the current weather conditions. The NEXRAD weather product should never be used as a
basis for maneuvering in, near, or around areas of hazardous weather regardless of the information it contains.

No Radar Coverage

Figure 6-5 NEXRAD Weather Product on the SiriusXM Weather Pane

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

355

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Showing NEXRAD weather information on PFD Inset Navigation Map (FULL Mode PFD):
1) Press the Inset Map Settings Softkey.
2) Press the NEXRAD Softkey to cycle through following coverage modes: Off (disables NEXRAD information),
USA, Canada (softkey label changes to indicate the selected coverage option with each softkey press).
3) Press the Back Softkey to return to the top-level PFD Softkeys.

Displaying NEXRAD weather information (Navigation Map panes)
1) From Home, Touch Map > Map Settings.
2) If necessary, touch the Sensor Tab.
3) Scroll as needed and touch the NEXRAD Data Button to enable/disable the display of the NEXRAD weather
product.
4) To change the coverage mode of the NEXRAD weather product displayed on the Navigation Map Pane, touch the
NEXRAD Data Settings Button. The NEXRAD Data Coverage Button displays the currently selected coverage
area in light blue text (‘USA’ or ‘Canada’).
a) Touch the NEXRAD Data Coverage Button.
b) Touch either the USA or Canada Button.
5) When finished changing NEXRAD settings for the Navigation Maps, touch Back or Home.

Displaying NEXRAD weather information (SiriusXM Weather Pane)
1) From Home, touch Weather > Weather Selection > SiriusXM Weather > SiriusXM Settings.
2) Find the Nexrad Button in the Background window. Light blue text inside the button indicates the currently
selected coverage mode (‘Off’, ‘USA’ or ‘Canada’).
3) To change the selected coverage mode, touch the Nexrad Button, then touch one of the following buttons: Off
(removes NEXRAD information from the pane), USA, or Canada.

The display shows composite data from all available NEXRAD radar sites in the selected coverage area
(either United States or Canada.) This data is composed of the maximum reflectivity from the individual
radar sweeps. The display of the information is color-coded to indicate the strength of the radar returns. All
weather product legends can be viewed on the Touchscreen Controller. For the NEXRAD legend (Figure 6-6),
touch the Legend Button when NEXRAD is enabled for display on the SiriusXM Weather Settings Screen.

No Radar Coverage
Figure 6-6 NEXRAD Legend

356

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
The display of No Radar Coverage is always active when either the NEXRAD or Echo Tops weather products
are enabled for display. Areas where NEXRAD radar coverage and Echo Tops information is not currently
available, or outside of the selected coverage source area, or is not being collected are indicated in a gray shade
of purple (Figure 6-6).

Reflectivity
Reflectivity is the amount of transmitted power returned to the radar receiver. Colors on the NEXRAD
display are directly correlative to the level of detected reflectivity. Reflectivity as it relates to hazardous
weather can be very complex.
The role of radar is essentially to detect moisture in the atmosphere. Simply put, certain types of weather
reflect radar better than others. The intensity of a radar reflection is not necessarily an indication of the
weather hazard level. For instance, wet hail returns a strong radar reflection, while dry hail does not. Both
wet and dry hail can be extremely hazardous.
The different NEXRAD echo intensities are measured in decibels (dB) relative to reflectivity (Z). NEXRAD
measures the radar reflectivity ratio, or the energy reflected back to the radar receiver (designated by the
letter Z). The value of Z increases as the returned signal strength increases.

NEXRAD Limitations
NEXRAD radar images may have certain limitations:
• NEXRAD base reflectivity does not provide sufficient information to determine cloud layers or precipitation
characteristics (wet hail vs. rain). For example, it is not possible to distinguish between wet snow, wet
hail, and rain.
• NEXRAD base reflectivity is sampled at the minimum antenna elevation angle. An individual NEXRAD
site cannot depict high altitude storms at close ranges. It has no information about storms directly over
the site.
• When zoomed in to a range of 30 nm, each square block on the display represents an area of four square
kilometers. The intensity level reflected by each square represents the highest level of NEXRAD data
sampled within the area.
The following may cause abnormalities in displayed NEXRAD radar images:
• Ground clutter
• Strobes and spurious radar data
• Sun strobes (when the radar antenna points directly at the sun)
• Interference from buildings or mountains, which may cause shadows
• Metallic dust from military aircraft, which can cause alterations in radar scans

NEXRAD Limitations (Canada)
• Radar coverage extends to 55ºN.
• Any precipitation displayed between 52ºN and 55ºN is displayed as mixed regardless of actual precipitation
type.

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

357

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
ECHO TOPS
NOTE: When the Echo Tops product is enabled on the SiriusXM Weather Pane, NEXRAD and Cloud Tops data

are removed.
The Echo Tops weather product (Figure 6-7) shows the location, elevation, and direction of the highest
radar echo. The highest radar echo does not indicate the top of a storm or clouds; rather it indicates the
highest altitude at which precipitation is detected. Information is derived from NEXRAD data.

No Radar Coverage

Figure 6-7 Echo Tops Weather Product

Enabling/Disabling Echo Tops information:
1) From Home, touch Weather > Weather Selection > SiriusXM Weather > SiriusXM Settings.
2) Touch the Echo Tops Button in the Background Window.

Touch the Legend Button on the SiriusXM Weather Settings Screen to display the Echo Tops legend when it
Echo Tops is enabled. Since Echo Tops and Cloud Tops use the same color scaling to represent altitude, only
one of these products may be displayed at a time. When Echo Tops is enabled, the system disables NEXRAD
and Cloud Tops information.

No Radar Coverage
Figure 6-8 Echo Tops Legend

The display of No Radar Coverage is always active when either NEXRAD or Echo Tops is selected. Areas
where NEXRAD radar coverage and Echo Tops information is not currently selected, not available, or is not
being collected are indicated in gray shade of purple (Figures 6-7, 6-8).
358

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
CLOUD TOPS
NOTE: The Cloud Tops and Echo Tops weather products cannot be displayed at the same time on the

SiriusXM Weather Pane.
The Cloud Tops weather product (Figure 6-9) depicts cloud top altitudes as determined from satellite
imagery. When the Cloud Tops background is enabled, the system disables Echo Tops data.

Figure 6-9 Cloud Tops Weather Product

Enabling/Disabling Cloud Tops information:
1) From Home, touch Weather > Weather Selection > SiriusXM Weather > SiriusXM Settings.
2) Touch the Cloud Tops Button in the Background window.

Touch the Legend Button on the SiriusXM Weather Settings Screen to display weather legend(s) for enabled
weather product(s). Scroll as necessary to view the information, then touch Back or Home.

Figure 6-10 Cloud Tops Legend

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

359

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SIRIUSXM LIGHTNING
The SiriusXM Lightning weather product (Figure 6-11) shows the approximate location of cloud-to-ground
lightning strikes. A strike icon represents a strike has occurred within a two-kilometer region. The system
does not display the exact location of lightning strikes.

Lightning
Strikes

Figure 6-11 SiriusXM Lightning Weather Product

Enabling/Disabling SiriusXM Lightning information (SiriusXM Weather Pane):
1) From Home, touch Weather > Weather Selection > SiriusXM Weather > SiriusXM Settings.
2) Touch the Lightning Button in the Overlays Window.

Touch the Legend Button on the SiriusXM Weather Settings Screen to display weather legend(s) for enabled
weather product(s). Scroll as necessary to view the information, then touch Back or Home.

Figure 6-12 SiriusXM Lightning Legend

Displaying SiriusXM Lightning information (Navigation Map Panes):
1) From Home, touch Map > Map Settings.
2) If necessary, touch the Sensor Tab.
4) Scroll as needed and touch the SiriusXM Lightning Button.

Displaying SiriusXM Lightning information (PFD Inset Navigation Map):
1) If the Traffic Inset Map is displayed, press the Traffic Map Softkey to disable the Traffic Inset Map.
2) Press the Inset Map Settings Softkey.
3) Press the SiriusXM Lightning Softkey to enable/disable display lightning information.
4) Press the Back Softkey to return to the top-level softkeys.

360

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
STORM CELL MOVEMENT
The Cell Movement map overlay (Figure 6-13) shows the location and movement of storm cells as identified
by the ground-based system. Yellow squares represent cells, with short orange arrows indicating the direction
of cell movement.

Storm Cells

Figure 6-13 Storm Cell Movement Weather Product

Enabling/Disabling Storm Cell Movement Information SiriusXM Weather Pane)
1) From Home, touch Weather > Weather Selection > SiriusXM Weather > SiriusXM Settings.
2) Touch the Storm Cell Movement Button in the Overlays window.

Touch the Legend Button on the SiriusXM Weather Settings Screen to display weather legend(s) for enabled
weather product(s). Scroll as necessary to view the information, then touch Back or Home.

Figure 6-14 Cell Movement Legend

Displaying Storm Cell Movement Information (Navigation Map Pane)
1) From Home, touch Map > Map Settings.
2) If necessary, touch the Sensor Tab.
3) Scroll as needed and touch the NEXRAD Data Settings Button.
4) Touch the Storm Cell Movement Button. When button annunciator is green, the system will show the Storm
Cell Movement with the NEXRAD weather product when NEXRAD is enabled.

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

361

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SIGMETS AND AIRMETS
The National Weather Services issues SIGMETs (SIGnificant METeorological Information) and AIRMETs
(AIRmen’s METeorological Information) for potentially hazardous weather. The service issues a Convective
SIGMET for hazardous convective weather. A localized SIGMET is a significant weather condition occurring
at a localized geographical position.

AIRMET
Convective
SIGMET
Selected with
Map Pointer

Figure 6-15 AIRMET and SIGMET Weather Products

Enabling/Disabling AIRMET and SIGMET information:
1) From Home, touch Weather > Weather Selection > SiriusXM Weather > SiriusXM Settings.
2) Scroll as needed and touch the AIRMETs and/or SIGMETs Buttons in the Overlays window.
3) To view the text of a AIRMET or SIGMET, press the Joystick and move the map pointer with the Joystick over
the SIGMET or AIRMET border or icon until it is highlighted.
5) Touch the AIRMET/SIGMET Button to show the AIRMET / SIGMET Information Screen with the selected
AIRMET or SIGMET.
6) Scroll as needed to view full text of the report, then touch the Back or Home buttons.

Touch the Legend Button on the SiriusXM Weather Settings Screen to display weather legend(s) for enabled
weather product(s). Scroll as necessary to view the information, then touch Back or Home.

Figure 6-16 SIGMET/AIRMET Legend

362

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
METARS
NOTE: Atmospheric pressure as reported for METARs is given in hectopascals (hPa), except for in the United

States, where it is reported in inches of mercury (in Hg). Temperatures are reported in Celsius.
NOTE: METAR information is only displayed within the installed navigation database coverage area.

METARs (METeorological Aerodrome Reports) describe observed weather conditions at airports and
reporting stations. METARs are generally updated hourly, but may be updated more frequently if conditions
warrant. METARs typically contain information about the temperature, dewpoint, wind, precipitation, cloud
cover, cloud heights, visibility, and barometric pressure. They can also contain information on precipitation
amounts, lightning, and other critical data. METARs are shown as colored flags at airports that provide them.
Full METAR Text

Airport with
METAR Flag
Selected with
Map Pointer

Figure 6-17 Panning on the SiriusXM Weather Pane

Showing METAR text (SiriusXM Weather Pane):
1) From Home, touch Weather > Weather Selection > SiriusXM Weather > SiriusXM Settings.
2) Touch the METARs Button in the Overlays window. The system displays METAR flags at available reporting
stations when METARs are enabled (button annunciator is green).
3) To view METAR text, press the Joystick and move the map pointer with the Joystick over a METAR reporting
station.

Touch the Legend Button on the SiriusXM Weather Settings Screen to display weather legend(s) for weather
product(s) enabled on the SiriusXM Weather Pane. Scroll as necessary to view the information, then touch
Back or Home.

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

363

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Showing METAR text (Navigation Map Panes):
1) From Home, touch Map > Map Settings.
2) If necessary, touch the Sensor Tab.
3) Scroll as needed and touch the Graphical METARs Button.

Textual METAR information is also available on the Airport Information screens on the Touchscreen
Controllers. When viewing the Airport Information screen for an airport, touch the Weather Tab and scroll
as needed to view the METAR text.
The graphical METAR flag color shown on the maps is determined by the information in the METAR text.
The system displays a gray METAR flag when the METAR text does not contain adequate information.

Figure 6-18 METAR Legend

SURFACE ANALYSIS AND CITY FORECAST
NOTE: Surface Analysis and City Forecast data are displayed only within the installed navigation database

coverage area.
The Surface Analysis and City Forecast weather products are available for current and forecast weather
conditions. Forecasts are available for intervals of 12, 24, 36, and 48 hours.

Figure 6-19 Current Surface Analysis Weather Product

364

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Displaying Surface Analysis and City Forecast information:
1) From Home, touch Weather > Weather Selection > SiriusXM Weather > SiriusXM Settings.
2) Scroll as needed in the Overlays window and touch the Surface Conditions Button.
3) If needed, touch the Surface Conditions forecast period button (to the right of the Surface Conditions Button)
and select from Current, 12 Hours, 24 Hours, 36 hours, or 48 Hours forecast periods from the pop-up
selection window.

Touch the Legend Button on the SiriusXM Weather Settings Screen to display weather legend(s) for enabled
weather product(s). Scroll as necessary to view the information, then touch Back or Home.

Figure 6-20 Surface Analysis and City Forecast Legend

FREEZING LEVELS
Freezing Level data shows the color-coded contour lines for the altitude and location at which the first
isotherm is found (Figure 6-21). When no information is displayed for a given altitude, the data for that
altitude has not been received, or is out of date and has been removed from the display.

Figure 6-21 Freezing Level Weather Product

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

365

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Displaying Freezing Level information:
1) From Home, touch Weather > Weather Selection > SiriusXM Weather > SiriusXM Settings.
2) Scroll as needed in the Overlays window and touch the Freezing Level Button.

Touch the Legend Button on the SiriusXM Weather Settings Screen to display weather legend(s) for enabled
weather product(s). Scroll as necessary to view the information, then touch Back or Home.

Figure 6-22 Freezing Level Legend

WINDS ALOFT
The Winds Aloft weather product (Figure 6-23) shows the predicted wind speed and direction at the
surface and at selected altitudes. Altitude can be displayed in 3,000-foot increments from the surface up to
42,000 feet MSL.
Displaying Winds Aloft data:
1) From Home, touch Weather > Weather Selection > SiriusXM Weather > SiriusXM Settings.
2) Scroll as needed in the Overlays window and touch the Winds Aloft Button.
3) To change the selected winds aloft altitude, touch the Winds Aloft altitude button and select the desired winds
aloft altitude from Surface to 42,000 feet MSL from the pop-up window.

366

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Winds Aloft Overlay at 12,000 Feet

Data Age
(US and
Canada)
Selected Winds
Aloft Altitude

SiriusXM Weather Settings Screen

Selects Winds Aloft
Altitude (Surface
Currently Selected)

Touch to Enable/
Disable Winds
Aloft Overlay

Figure 6-23 Displaying Winds Aloft Information

Touch the Legend Button on the SiriusXM Weather Settings Screen to display weather legend(s) for enabled
weather product(s). Scroll as necessary to view the information, then touch Back or Home.

Figure 6-24 Winds Aloft Data with Legend

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

367

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
COUNTY WARNINGS
The County Warnings weather product (Figure 6-25) provides specific public awareness and protection
weather warnings from the National Weather Service (NWS). This can include information on severe
thunderstorms, tornadoes, and flood conditions.

Flood Warning
Selected with
Map Pointer

Figure 6-25 County Warnings Weather Product

Displaying County Warning information:
1) From Home, touch Weather > Weather Selection > SiriusXM Weather > SiriusXM Settings.
2) Scroll as needed in the Overlays window and touch the County Warnings Button.
3) To view additional information (such as county name), press the Joystick to activate the map pointer and
move the Joystick to highlight a County Warning. County Warning information appears in a box near the map
pointer.
4) When finished, press the Joystick to deactivate the map pointer.

Touch the Legend Button on the SiriusXM Weather Settings Screen to display weather legend(s) for enabled
weather product(s). Scroll as necessary to view the information, then touch Back or Home.

Figure 6-26 County Warnings Legend

368

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
CYCLONE WARNINGS
The Cyclone weather product shows the current location of cyclones (hurricanes), tropical storms, and
their projected tracks.

Cyclone with
Track Information

Figure 6-27 Cyclone (Hurricane) Weather Product

Enabling/Disabling cyclone (hurricane) weather product:
1) From Home, touch Weather > Weather Selection > SiriusXM Weather > SiriusXM Settings.
2) Scroll as needed in the Overlays window and touch the Cyclone Warnings Button.

Touch the Legend Button on the SiriusXM Weather Settings Screen to display weather legend(s) for enabled
weather product(s). Scroll as necessary to view the information, then touch Back or Home.

Figure 6-28 Cyclone Legend

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

369

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
ICING (CIP & SLD)
NOTE: Icing data cannot be displayed at the same time as NEXRAD weather product.

Current Icing Product (CIP) data (Figure 6-29) shows a graphical view of the icing environment. Icing
severity is displayed in four categories: light, moderate, severe, and extreme (not specific to aircraft type). The
CIP product is not a forecast, but a presentation of the conditions at the time of the analysis.
Supercooled Large Droplet (SLD) icing conditions are characterized by the presence of relatively large,
super cooled water droplets indicative of freezing drizzle and freezing rain aloft. SLD threat areas are depicted
as magenta dots over the CIP colors.
Displaying Icing data:
1) From Home, touch Weather > Weather Selection > SiriusXM Weather > SiriusXM Settings.
2) Scroll as needed in the Overlays window and touch the Current Icing Potential Button.
3) Touch the Current Icing Potential altitude button (to the right of the Current Icing Potential annunciator
Button) and scroll to and touch the desired altitude button (from 1,000 feet up to 30,000 feet.)
Current
Icing
Potential

Selected Current
Icing Potential
Altitude

SLD Threat
Area

Figure 6-29 Current Icing Potential Overlay at 21,000 Feet

Touch the Legend Button on the SiriusXM Weather Settings Screen to display weather legend(s) for enabled
weather product(s). Scroll as necessary to view the information, then touch Back or Home.

Figure 6-30 Icing Potential Legend

370

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
TURBULENCE
NOTE: The Turbulence weather product cannot be displayed at the same time as NEXRAD weather product.

The Turbulence weather product (Figure 6-31) identifies the potential for erratic movement of high-altitude
air mass associated winds. Turbulence is classified as light, moderate, severe or extreme, at altitudes between
21,000 and 45,000 feet. Turbulence data is intended to supplement AIRMETs and SIGMETs.
Displaying Turbulence data:
1) From Home, touch Weather > Weather Selection > SiriusXM Weather > SiriusXM Settings.
2) Scroll in the the Overlays window and touch the Turbulence Button.
3) Touch the Turbulence altitude button (to the right of the Turbulence annunciator button) and touch to select
an altitude from which to display turbulence data (from 1,000 feet up to 45,000 feet).

Selected
Turbulence
Altitude

Figure 6-31 Turbulence Weather Product at 33,000 Feet

Touch the Legend Button on the SiriusXM Weather Settings Screen to display weather legend(s) for enabled
weather product(s). Scroll as necessary to view the information, then touch Back or Home.

Figure 6-32 Turbulence Legend

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

371

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
PIREPS AND AIREPS
Pilot Weather Reports (PIREPs) (Figure 6-33) provide weather observations collected from pilots. When
significant weather conditions are reported or forecast, Air Traffic Control (ATC) facilities are required to solicit
PIREPs. A PIREP may contain adverse weather conditions, such as low in-flight visibility, icing conditions,
wind shear, and turbulence. PIREPs are issued as either Routine (UA) or Urgent (UUA).
Another type of PIREP is an Air Report (AIREP). AIREPs are used almost exclusively by commercial airlines.

AIREP

Urgent PIREP
Selected with
Map Pointer
PIREP

Figure 6-33 AIREPs and PIREPs on the SiriusXM Weather Pane

Displaying PIREP or AIREP data:
1) From Home, touch Weather > Weather Selection > SiriusXM Weather > SiriusXM Settings.
2) Scroll in the Overlays window as needed and touch the AIREPs or PIREPs Buttons.
3) To view PIREP/AIREP text, push the joystick to activate the map pointer and move the pointer with the Joystick
until the selected report is highlighted, then touch the PIREP Info or AIREP Info Button.
4) Scroll as needed through the report text, then touch Back or Home.

Touch the Legend Button on the SiriusXM Weather Settings Screen to display weather legend(s) for enabled
weather product(s). Scroll as necessary to view the information, then touch Back or Home.
The PIREP color is determined by the type (routine or urgent).

Figure 6-34 AIREPs & PIREPs Legend

372

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

HAZARD AVOIDANCE

6.2 AIRBORNE COLOR WEATHER RADAR
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The Garmin GWX 70 Airborne Color Weather Radar is a solid-state pulsed-Doppler radar with forty watts of
output power. It combines excellent range and adjustable scanning profiles with high-definition target displays.
The effective pulse length is 27.31 microseconds (µs), and the system optimizes the pulse length to maximize
resolution at each range setting. This reduces the targets smearing together on the displays for better target
definition at close range.
The Embraer Phenom 300 uses a 12-inch phased array antenna that is fully stabilized to accommodate 30º
of pitch and roll.
To focus radar scanning on specific areas, Sector Scanning offers pilot-adjustable horizontal scan angles of
20º, 40º, 60º, or a full 90º scan. A vertical scanning function helps to analyze storm tops, gradients, and cell
buildup activity at various altitudes.
Radar features include:
• Extended Sensitivity Time Constant (STC) logic that automatically correlates distance of the return echo with
intensity, so cells do not suddenly appear to get larger as they get closer.
• Turbulence Detection (optional) presents areas of turbulence associated with precipitation using the color
magenta.
• WATCH® (Weather ATtenuated Color Highlight) helps identify possible shadowing effects of short-range cell
activity, identifying areas where radar return signals are weakened or attenuated by intense precipitation (or
large areas of lesser precipitation) and may not fully depict the weather occurring behind a storm.
• Weather Alert that looks ahead for intense cell activity in the 80-320 nm range, even if these ranges beyond
the currently selected map range.
• Altitude-Compensated Tilt (ACT) management which automatically adjusts the antenna tilt as the aircraft
altitude changes.
• Ground Clutter Suppression (GCS) (optional) removes ground clutter from the displays.

PRINCIPLES OF AIRBORNE WEATHER RADAR
The term RADAR is an acronym for RAdio Detecting And Ranging. Pulsed radar locates targets by transmitting
a microwave pulse beam that, upon encountering a target, is reflected back to the radar receiver as a return echo.
The microwave pulses are focused and radiated by the antenna, with the most intense energy in the center of
the beam and decreasing intensity near the edge. The same antenna is used for both transmitting and receiving.
Radar detection is a two-way process that requires 12.36 µs for the transmitted microwave pulses to travel out
and back for each nautical mile of target range. It takes 123.6 µs for a transmitted pulse to make the round trip
if a target is ten nautical miles away.
The GWX 70, as installed on the Phenom 300, has the capability to detect the velocity of precipitation moving
toward or away from the radar antenna. As the radar pulse beam strikes a moving object, the frequency of
the returned echo shifts in relation to the speed at which the object is moving. This effect is analogous to the
audible pitch change observed when an emergency vehicle’s siren gets closer or moves away. Doppler radar

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

373

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
employs this effect to detect areas of precipitation moving at a high rate of speed (indicative of turbulence), and
to determine when an object, such as the ground, is stationary. The system can use this information to suppress
the display of ground clutter.
Airborne weather radar should be used to avoid severe weather. The decision to fly into an area of radar
targets depends on target intensity, spacing between the targets, aircraft capabilities, and crew experience.
Airborne weather radar detects rain or hail, not clouds or mist. The display may indicate clear areas between
intense returns, but this does not necessarily mean it is safe to fly between them. In addition, Doppler radar
measurement of precipitation velocity only occurs when rain or hail is moving along the radar beam and either
toward or away from the antenna. This system cannot detect clear air turbulence.
Airborne weather radar has other capabilities beyond weather detection. It also has the ability to detect and
provide distance to cities, mountains, coastlines, rivers, lakes, and oceans.

NEXRAD AND AIRBORNE WEATHER RADAR
Both Airborne Weather Radar and NEXRAD measure weather reflectivity in decibels (dB). A decibel is a
logarithmic expression of the ratio of two quantities. Airborne Weather Radar measures the ratio of power
against the gain of the antenna, while NEXRAD measures the energy reflected back to the radar, or the radar
reflectivity ratio.
Both systems use colors to identify the different echo intensities, but the colors are not interchangeable.
Airborne color radar values from the GWX 70 not be confused with NEXRAD radar values.

ANTENNA BEAM ILLUMINATION
The radar beam is much like the beam of a spotlight. The further the beam travels, the wider it becomes.
The radar is only capable of seeing what is inside the boundaries of the beam. The figure below depicts a radar
beam’s characteristics. The figure illustrates vertical dimensions of the radar beam, although the same holds
true for the horizontal dimensions. In other words, the beam is as wide as it is tall. Note that it is possible to
miss areas of precipitation on the radar display because of the antenna tilt setting. With the antenna tilt set to
zero in this illustration, the beam overshoots the precipitation at 15 nautical miles.

Altitude (x1000 ft.)
80

Antenna at Zero Tilt
18,000 ft.

8°

Half Power at

Beam Sidelobe

Max Power at Beam Center

18,000 ft.
30

Range (nautical miles)

Figure 6-35 Radar Beam from a 12 inch Antenna

The curvature of the earth can also be a factor in missing areas of precipitation, especially at range settings of
150 nautical miles or more. Here the beam overshoots the precipitation at less than 320 nautical miles.

374

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

HAZARD AVOIDANCE

320 nm

Figure 6-36 Radar Beam in Relation to the Curvature of the Earth

RADAR SIGNAL ATTENUATION
The phenomenon of radar signal attenuation affects the operation of weather radar. When the radar signal
is transmitted, it is progressively absorbed and scattered, making the signal weaker. This weakening, or
attenuation, is caused by two primary sources, distance and precipitation.
Attenuation because of distance is due to the fact that the radar energy leaving the antenna is inversely
proportional to the square of the distance. The reflected radar energy from a target 40 miles away that fills
the radar beam is one fourth the energy reflected from an equivalent target 20 miles away. This would appear
to the operator that the storm is gaining intensity as the aircraft gets closer. Internal signal processing within
the GWX 70 system compensates for much of this distance attenuation.
Attenuation due to precipitation is not as predictable as distance attenuation. It is also more intense. As the
radar signal passes through moisture, a portion of the radar energy is reflected back to the antenna. However,
much of the energy is absorbed. If precipitation is very heavy, or covers a large area, the signal may not
reach completely through the area of precipitation. The weather radar system cannot distinguish between an
attenuated signal and an area of no precipitation. If the signal has been fully attenuated, the radar displays
a radar shadow. This appears as an end to the precipitation when, in fact, the heavy rain may extend much
further. A cell containing heavy precipitation may block another cell located behind the first, preventing it
from being displayed on the radar. Never fly into these shadowed areas and never assume that all of the heavy
precipitation is being displayed unless another cell or a ground target can be seen beyond the heavy cell. The
WATCH® feature of the GWX 70 Weather Radar system can help to identify these shadowed areas. Areas
in question appear as shadowed or gray on the radar display. Proper use of the antenna tilt control can also
help detect radar shadows.
Attenuation can also be due to poor maintenance or degradation of the radome. Even the smallest amount
of wear and scratching, pitting, and pinholes on the radome surface can cause damage and system inefficiency.

RADAR SIGNAL REFLECTIVITY
Precipitation
Precipitation or objects more dense than water, such as the surface of the earth or solid structures, are
detected by the weather radar. The weather radar does not detect clouds, thunderstorms, or turbulence
directly. It detects precipitation associated with clouds, thunderstorms, and turbulence. The best radar
signal reflectors are raindrops, wet snow, or wet hail. The larger the raindrop, the better the reflectivity. The
size of the precipitation droplet is the most important factor in radar reflectivity. Because large drops in a
small concentrated area are characteristic of a severe thunderstorm, the radar displays the storm as a strong

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

375

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
return. Ice crystals, dry snow, and dry hail have low levels of reflectivity as shown in the illustration, and
often not displayed by the radar. Additionally, a cloud that contains only small raindrops, such as fog or
drizzle, does not reflect enough radar energy to produce a measurable target return.

Figure 6-37 Precipitation Type and Reflectivity

Ground Returns
The intensity of ground target returns depends upon the angle at which the radar beam strikes the
ground target (Angle of Incidence) and the reflective properties of that target. The gain can be adjusted so
shorelines, rivers, lakes, and cities are well defined. Increasing the gain too much causes the display to fill
in between targets, thus obscuring some landmarks.
Cities normally provide a strong return signal. While large buildings and structures provide good returns,
small buildings can be shadowed from the radar beam by the taller buildings. As the aircraft approaches
and shorter ranges are selected, details become more noticeable as the highly reflective regular lines and
edges of the city become more defined.
Bodies of water such as lakes, rivers, and oceans are not good reflectors and normally do not provide good
returns. The energy is reflected in a forward scatter angle with inadequate energy being returned. They
can appear as dark areas on the display. However, rough or choppy water is a better reflector and provides
stronger returns from the downwind sides of the waves.
Mountains also provide strong return signals to the antenna, but also block the areas behind. However,
over mountainous terrain, the radar beam can be reflected back and forth in the mountain passes or off
canyon walls, using up all or most of the radar energy. In this case, no return signal is received from this
area, causing the display to show a dark spot which could indicate a pass where no pass exists.

Angle of Incidence
The angle at which the radar beam strikes the target is called the Angle of Incidence. The figure illustrates
the incident angle (‘A’). This directly affects the detectable range, the area of illumination, and the intensity
of the displayed target returns. A large incident angle gives the radar system a smaller detectable range and
lower display intensity due to minimized reflection of the radar energy.

376

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

HAZARD AVOIDANCE

Figure 6-38 Angle of Incidence

A smaller incident angle gives the radar a larger detectable range of operation and the target display shows
a higher intensity. Since more radar energy is reflected back to the antenna with a low incident angle, the
resulting detectable range is increased for mountainous terrain.

SAFE OPERATING DISTANCE
The following information establishes a minimum safe distance from the antenna for personnel near
operating weather radar. The minimum safe distance is based on the FCC’s exposure limit at 9.3 to 9.5 GHz for
general population/uncontrolled environments, which is 1 mW/cm2. See Advisory Circular 20-68B for more
information on safe distance determination.

MAXIMUM PERMISSIBLE EXPOSURE LEVEL (MPEL)
The zone in which the radiation level exceeds the US Government standard of 1 mW/cm2 is the semicircular
area of at least 11 feet from the 12-inch antenna. All personnel must remain outside of this zone. With a
scanning or rotating beam, the averaged power density at the MPEL boundary is significantly reduced.

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

377

HAZARD AVOIDANCE

MPEL
Boundary

11’ for 12”
antenna

Figure 6-39 MPEL Boundary

BASIC ANTENNA TILT SETUP
The following discussion is a simple method for setting up the weather radar antenna tilt for most situations.
It is not to be considered an all encompassing setup that works in all situations, but this method does provide
good overall parameters for the monitoring of threats. Ultimately, it is desired to have the antenna tilted so that
the bottom of the radar beam is four degrees below parallel with the ground. The following example explains
one way of achieving this.
With the aircraft flying level, adjust the antenna tilt so ground returns are displayed at a distance that equals
the aircraft’s current altitude (AGL) divided by 1,000. For example, if the aircraft is at 14,000 feet, adjust the
tilt so the front edge of ground returns are displayed at 14 nautical miles. Note this antenna tilt angle setting.
Now, raise the antenna tilt 6 degrees above this setting. The bottom of the radar beam is now angled down 4º
from parallel with the ground.

378

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
PRACTICAL APPLICATION USING THE BASIC TILT SETUP
With the antenna tilt set as previously described, any displayed target return should be scrutinized when
flying at altitudes between 2,000 and 30,000 feet AGL. If the displayed target advances on the screen to
within 5 nautical miles of the aircraft, avoid it. This may be either weather or ground returns that are 2,000
feet or less below the aircraft. Raising the antenna tilt 4 degrees can help separate ground returns from
weather returns in relatively flat terrain. This aligns the bottom of the radar beam parallel with the ground.
Return the antenna tilt to the previous setting after a few sweeps.
If the aircraft is above 29,000 feet, be cautious of any target return that gets to within 30 nautical miles.
This is likely a thunderstorm that has a top high enough that the aircraft cannot fly over it safely.
If the aircraft altitude is 15,000 feet or lower, setting the displayed range to 60 miles may be more helpful.
Closely monitor anything that enters the display.

4000
Change in Antenna Tilt
+4°
+3°
+2°
+1°
0°
-1°
-2°
-3°
-4°

3000
2000
1000
0
1000
2000
3000

10 nm

4000

Vertical Change of Radar Beam (feet)

Also, after setting up the antenna tilt angle as described previously, ground returns can be monitored for
possible threats. The relationship between antenna tilt angle, altitude, and distance is one degree of tilt equals
100 feet of altitude for every one nautical mile.

Figure 6-40 Vertical Change in Radar Beam per Nautical Mile

Therefore, with the antenna tilt set so that the bottom of the beam is four degrees below parallel with
the ground, a target return at 10 nm is approximately 4,000 feet below the aircraft; at 20 nm, 8,000 feet;
at 50 nm, 20,000 feet. In other words, at this tilt setting, a ground return (such as a mountain peak) being
displayed at 10 nm would have a maximum distance below the aircraft of 4,000 feet. A ground target return
being displayed at 5 nm would have a maximum distance below the aircraft of 2,000 feet. This setup provides
a good starting point for practical use of the GWX 70. There are many other factors to consider in order to
become proficient at using weather radar in all situations.

ALTITUDE COMPENSATED TILT (ACT)
The Altitude Compensated Tilt feature of the GWX 70 enables the system to automatically adjust the
antenna beam tilt angle setting based on changes of the aircraft’s altitude. For example, if the ACT feature
is enabled and the aircraft climbs, the system compensates by adjusting the tilt downward. As the aircraft
descends with ACT enabled, the system adjusts the antenna tilt upward. The system uses the ground as a
reference for adjusting the antenna tilt angle setting with ACT enabled.

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

379

HAZARD AVOIDANCE

WEATHER MAPPING AND INTERPRETATION
WEATHER DISPLAY INTERPRETATION
When evaluating various target returns on the weather radar display, the colors denote precipitation
intensity and rates shown in the table.

Weather Mode Color

Intensity (in dBz)

Black
Green
Yellow
Red

< 23 dBZ
23 dBZ to < 33 dBZ
33 dBZ to < 41 dBZ
41 dBZ and greater

Approximate
Precipitation Rate (in/
hr.)
< .01.
.01 - 0.1.
0.1 - 0.5
greater than 0.5

Table 6-3 Precipitation Intensity Levels

In addition, when Turbulence Detection feature is enabled on the Touchscreen Controller, the system uses
the color magenta to show areas of rain or hail which likely contain turbulence.

Thunderstorms
Updrafts and downdrafts in thunderstorms carry water through the cloud. The more severe the drafts, the
greater the number and size of the precipitation droplets. With this in mind, the following interpretations
can be made from what is displayed on the weather radar. Avoid these areas by an extra wide margin.
• In areas where the displayed target intensity is red or magenta (indicating large amounts of precipitation),
the turbulence is considered severe.
• Areas that show steep color gradients (intense color changes) over thin bands or short distances suggest
irregular rainfall rate and strong turbulence.
• Areas that show red or magenta are associated with hail or turbulence, as well as heavy precipitation.
Vertical scanning and antenna tilt management may be necessary to identify areas of maximum intensity.
Along squall lines (multiple cells or clusters of cells in a line) individual cells may be in different stages
of development. Areas between closely spaced, intense targets may contain developing clouds not having
enough moisture to produce a return. However, these areas could have strong updrafts or downdrafts.
Targets showing wide areas of green are generally precipitation without severe turbulence.

380

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Irregularities in the target return may also indicate turbulence, appearing as hooks, fingers, or scalloped
edges. These irregularities may be present in green areas with no yellow, red, or magenta areas and should
be treated as highly dangerous areas. Avoid these areas as if they are red or magenta.
Squall Line

Steep Gradient

Hook or Finger

Scalloped Edge

Figure 6-41 Cell Irregularities

Thunderstorm development is rapid. A course may become blocked within a short time. When displaying
shorter ranges, periodically select a longer range to see if problems are developing further out. That can
help prevent getting trapped in a blind alley or an area that is closed at one end by convective weather.

Figure 6-42 The Blind Alley - Horizontal Scan

In areas of multiple heavy cells, use the Vertical Scan feature along with antenna tilt management to
examine the areas. Remember to avoid shadowed areas behind targets.

The Blind Alley at Close Range

The Large Storm Behind
Figure 6-43 The Blind Alley

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

381

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Tornadoes
There are no conclusive radar target return characteristics which identify a tornado. However, tornadoes
may be present if the following characteristics are observed:
• A narrow, finger-like portion extends and in a short time curls into a hook and closes on itself.
• A hook, which may be in the general shape of the numeral 6 (numeral 9 in the southern hemisphere),
especially if bright and projecting from the southwest quadrant (northeast quadrant in the southern
hemisphere) of a major thunderstorm.
• V-shaped notches.
• Doughnut shapes.
These shapes do not always indicate tornadoes, and tornado returns are not limited to these characteristics.
Confirmed radar observations of tornadoes most often have not shown shapes different from those of a
normal thunderstorm display.

Hail
Hail results from updrafts carrying water high enough to freeze. Therefore, the higher the top of a
thunderstorm, the greater the probability that it contains hail. Vertically scanning the target return can
give the radar top of a thunderstorm that contains hail. Radar top is the top of a storm cell as detected by
radar. It is not the actual top, or true top of the storm. The actual top of a storm cell is seen with the eyes
in clear air and may be much higher than the radar top. The actual top does not indicate the top of the
hazardous area.
Hail can fall below the minimum reflectivity threshold for radar detection. It can have a film of water on
its surface, making its reflective characteristics similar to a very large water droplet. Because of this film of
water, and because hail stones usually are larger than water droplets, thunderstorms with large amounts
of wet hail return stronger signals than those with rain. Some hail shafts are extremely narrow (100 yards
or less) and make poor radar targets. In the upper regions of a cell where ice particles are dry (no liquid
coating), target returns are less intense.
Hail shafts are associated with the same radar target return characteristics as tornados. U-shaped cloud
edges three to seven miles across can also indicate hail. These target returns appear quite suddenly along
any edge of the cell outline. They also change in intensity and shape in a matter of seconds, making vigilant
monitoring essential.

TESTING THE WEATHER RADAR
The weather radar provides a Test Mode which activates the radar antenna sweep movement and generates
a test pattern on the selected display pane. The test pattern should display a green filled arc from the first
range marker to the second, a yellow arc from the second range marker to the third, and a red arc from the
third range marker to the forth. Each arc should have a uniform color and shape. The test pattern is available
in both Horizontal and Vertical scan modes.
Testing the Weather Radar:
1) From Home, touch Weather > Weather Selection > WX RADAR > WX RADAR Settings.
2) If necessary, touch the Radar On Button to enable the weather radar and settings buttons. Button annunciator
is green when radar is on, and gray when off.

382

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
3) Touch the Display Mode Button.
4) Touch the Test Button. Radar antenna begins sweep and test pattern appears on the selected display pane.
5) Touch the Scan Button to view the scan mode selections.
6) Touch the Vertical or Horizontal Button Buttons to view the scan in a Vertical or Horizontal scan mode,
respectively.

OPERATION IN WEATHER MODE
WARNING: Begin transmitting only when it is safe to do so. When transmitting while the aircraft is on the

ground, no personnel or objects should be within 11 feet of the antenna.
CAUTION: In Standby mode, the antenna is parked at the center line. It is always a good idea to put the

radar in Standby mode before taxiing the aircraft to prevent the antenna from bouncing on the bottom stop
and possibly causing damage to the radar assembly.
When the weather radar system is in the Weather or Ground Map mode, the system automatically switches
to Standby mode on landing.
In Reversionary modes, the weather radar system continues to operate as long as at least one Touchscreen
Controller is operating. If both Touchscreen Controllers fail, the radar system automatically switches to
Standby Mode and cannot be controlled.
Radar Feature
Status Indications

Radar Mode

Scan Line
Bearing Line

Radar Legend

Tilt and Bearing
Settings
Figure 6-44 Weather Radar Pane with a Horizontal Scan

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

383

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Showing Weather Radar Information on the Weather Radar Pane:
1) From Home, touch Weather > Weather Selection > WX RADAR > WX RADAR Settings.
2) Touch the Radar On Button. Radar options are enabled when button annunciator is green, off when gray.
3) Touch the Display Mode Button.
4) Touch the Weather Button. If the aircraft is airborne, the radar begins transmitting.
5) If the aircraft is on the ground, the Touchscreen Controller displays a prompt shown in the figure below to
confirm radar activation. Touch the OK Button to begin transmitting, or touch the Cancel Button to return to
the Weather Radar Settings screen.

Figure 6-45 Confirm Activating Radar while on Ground

4) Turn the Joystick to select the desired map range.
5) The system displays a horizontal scan. To change to a vertical scan, refer to the following procedure, “Vertically
scanning a storm cell.”

384

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Vertically scanning a storm cell:
NOTE: Vertical scanning of a storm cell should be done with the aircraft wings level to avoid constant

adjustment of the Bearing Line.
1) From Home, touch Weather > Weather Selection > WX RADAR > WX RADAR Settings.
2) While on a Horizontal Scan view, touch the Bearing Line Button if necessary to show the Bearing Line on the
Weather Radar Pane.
2) Press the Joystick. This enables the Joystick to set the Bearing Line position and displays a bearing and tilt
Joystick legend.
3) Push the Joystick left or right to place the Bearing Line on the desired storm cell or other area to be vertically
scanned. When finished, press the Joystick again to disable the bearing line adjustment Joystick function.

Scan Line

Bearing Line

Joystick Legend

Tilt and Bearing
Settings
Figure 6-46 Weather Radar Pane with a
Horizontal Scan

4) Touch the Scan Button.
5) Touch the Vertical Button. The Weather Radar display shows a vertical scan.
6) Push the Joystick left or right as needed to move the bearing line a few degrees left or right.
7) Turn the Joystick to adjust the range as needed.

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

385

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
8) To select a new area to be vertically scanned, return to the Horizontal scan mode.
a) Touch the Scan Button.
b) Touch the Horizontal Button.
c) Return to Step 2 of this procedure.

Figure 6-47 Weather Radar Display with Vertical Scan Mode
Selected

Adjusting Antenna Tilt Angle
In order to make an accurate interpretation of a storm cell, the radar beam should be pointed at the wet
part of the weather cell to record the proper rainfall intensity (color level). The ideal aiming point is just
below the freezing level of the storm. The best way to find this point is to use the Vertical Scan feature. The
antenna tilt angle can be centered on the strongest return area in the vertical scan to get a more accurate
view of the coverage and intensity of the target in the horizontal scan.
Adjusting antenna tilt on the Weather Radar Display in Horizontal Scan Mode:
1) Push the Joystick to activate the tilt adjustment function of the Joystick. The Weather Radar displays a
bearing and tilt Joystick legend.
2) Use the Joystick to adjust the antenna tilt angle.
3) Press the Joystick again to disable the tilt adjustment function of the Joystick and remove the legend.

386

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Altitude Compensated Tilt (ACT) Angle Adjustment
The Attitude Compensated Tilt feature enables automatic management of the antenna tilt angle as the
aircraft altitude changes. With ACT enabled, the antenna beam position remains centered at the set position
for the current map range. The system automatically decreases the tilt angle as the aircraft climbs, and
increases the tilt angle as the aircraft descends. ACT is available in the Horizontal Scan Mode when the
system is operating in Weather Mode and GPS altitude is available.
Enabling/Disabling Altitude Compensated Tilt (ACT):
1) From Home, touch Weather > Weather Selection > WX RADAR > WX RADAR Settings.
2) Touch the Altitude Comp Tilt Button. Feature is enabled when button annunciator is green, disabled when
gray.

Adjusting antenna tilt on the Weather Radar Display in Vertical Scan Mode:
1) While in Vertical Scan Mode, press the Joystick to activate the tilt adjustment function of the Joystick and
display the Tilt Line on the Weather Radar Display.
2) Use the Joystick to adjust the tilt angle.
3) Press the Joystick to disable the tilt adjustment function of the Joystick.

The selected tilt angle applies when Horizontal Scan Mode is enabled again.

Figure 6-48 Adjusting Tilt During Vertical Scan

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

387

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Adjusting Gain
WARNING: Changing the gain in weather mode causes precipitation intensity to be displayed as a color

not representative of the true intensity. Remember to return the gain setting to Calibrated for viewing the
actual intensity of precipitation.
1) From Home, touch Weather > Weather Selection > WX RADAR > WX RADAR Settings.
2) If the Calibrated Gain button annunciator is green (enabled), touch the Calibrated Gain Button to disable
Calibrated Gain. Calibrated Gain Button annunciator is gray when disabled.
3) Touch and slide the Gain slider as shown in Figure 6-50.
Or:
Touch the + pointer to increase gain, or - pointer to decrease gain. Each touch increases or decreases the gain
by one increment. A gray bar across the slider bar serves as a reference to the calibrated gain setting position.
4) To return to the calibrated gain setting, touch the Calibrated Gain Button.

388

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

HAZARD AVOIDANCE

Weather Radar Pane with Calibrated Gain Setting

Calibrated Gain
Enabled

Manual Gain
Adjustment
Unavailable
when Calibrated
Gain is Enabled

Touchscreen Controller with Calibrated Gain Setting
Enabled
Figure 6-49 Calibrated Gain

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

389

HAZARD AVOIDANCE

Weather Radar Pane set Above Calibrated Gain Setting

Reference to
Calibrated Gain
Setting Position

Calibrated Gain
Disabled

Current Manual
Gain Setting

Touchscreen Controller with Manual Gain
Adjustment Enabled
Figure 6-50 Manual Gain

Sector Scan
1) From Home, touch Weather > Weather Selection > WX RADAR > WX RADAR Settings.
2) While in Horizontal Scan Mode, touch the Bearing Line Button if necessary to show the Bearing Line on the
Weather Radar display/.
2) Press the Joystick to enable bearing pointer adjustment.

390

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
3) Move the Joystick left or right to place the Bearing Line in the desired position. The location of the Bearing
Line becomes the center point of the Sector Scan.
4) Touch the Sector Scan Button.
5) Touch a button to select a 20˚, 40˚, 60˚, or touch the FULL Button to resume a 90˚ degree scan.
6) If desired, readjust the Bearing Line as discussed previously to change the center of the Sector Scan.
7) Press the Joystick again to remove the bearing selection function of the Joystick. The bearing reference is reset
to 0º.

Figure 6-51 Weather Radar Pane on a 60 Degree Sector Scan

Antenna Stabilization
1) From Home, touch Weather > Weather Selection > WX RADAR > WX RADAR Settings.
2) To activate or deactivate the antenna stabilization, touch the Stabilizer Button. Antenna stabilization is
enabled when button annunciator is green; stabilization is disabled when button annunciator is gray. The
system indicates the current stabilization condition in the upper right of the Weather Radar Pane.

Turbulence Detection
The Turbulence Detection feature assists in identifying of areas of turbulence associated with precipitation
using the color magenta during a horizontal scan. These magenta areas represent precipitation moving at a
high rate of speed either toward or away from the radar antenna, using Doppler radar measurements. This
feature cannot detect areas of Clear Air Turbulence. Turbulence Detection is unavailable while performing
a vertical scan.

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

391

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Enabling/Disabling Turbulence Detection during a Horizontal Scan:
1) From Home, touch Weather > Weather Selection > WX RADAR > WX RADAR Settings.
2) To activate or deactivate the turbulence detection feature, touch the Turbulence Detection Button.
Turbulence detection is enabled when button annunciator is green; turbulence detection is disabled when
button annunciator is gray. The system indicates the current turbulence detection condition in the upper right
of the Weather Radar Display.

Weather Attenuated Color Highlight (WATCH®)
WATCH® identifies deceptively strong or unknown intensity parts of a storm. While in horizontal
scan mode, this feature may assist the crew in determining areas of possible inaccuracies in displayed
intensity due to weakening of the radar energy. This weakening is known as attenuation. The radar energy
weakens as it passes through areas of intense precipitation, large areas of lesser precipitation, and distance.
Imperfections in the with the radome attenuate the radar energy. All these factors have an effect on the
return intensity. The more energy that dissipates, the lesser the displayed intensity of the return. Accuracy
of the displayed intensity of returns located in the shaded areas are suspect. Make maneuvering decisions
with this information in mind. Proper antenna tilt management should still be employed to determine the
extent of attenuation in a shaded area.
Enabling/Disabling WATCH display feature:
1) From Home, touch Weather > Weather Selection > WX RADAR > WX RADAR Settings.
2) To activate or deactivate the WATCH feature, touch the WX Watch Button. WATCH is enabled when button
annunciator is green; WATCH is disabled when button annunciator is gray.

Areas of
Attenuated Signal
Shown in Gray

Figure 6-52 Horizontal Scan with WATCH® Enabled

392

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Weather Alert
The Weather Alert feature indicates the presence of heavy precipitation between the ranges of 80 and 320
nm regardless of the currently displayed range. Weather Alert targets appear as red bands along the outer
range ring at the approximate azimuth of the detected returns.
When the system detects a Weather Alert target within ±10° of the aircraft heading, the Touchscreen
Controller may also display a WX Alert system message on the Notifications Screen. The WX Alert system
message is enabled/disabled on the Weather Radar Settings Screen.
If the antenna tilt adjustment is too low, ground returns may cause Weather Alert targets or WX Alert
system messages to appear. The optional Ground Clutter Suppression feature, discussed later in this
section, may reduce the occurrence of ground returns appearing as Weather Alert targets.

Weather Alert Indicates
Possible Severe
Weather Ahead

Figure 6-53 Weather Alerts on the Weather Radar Pane

Enabling/Disabling WX Alert System Message:
1) From Home, touch Weather > Weather Selection > WX RADAR > WX RADAR Settings.
2) To enable or disable the WX Alert system message, touch the WX Alert Button. WX Alert system messages are
enabled when button annunciator is green, and disabled when annunciator is gray.

Figure 6-54 WX Alert System Message on the Notifications Screen

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

393

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Removing Ground Clutter
NOTE: The ground clutter suppression feature is optional.

The system can distinguish between reflected ground returns (such as terrain features and buildings) and
airborne weather phenomena when operating in Weather display mode. Ground clutter may increase when
using a low antenna tilt angle, or when approaching mountainous terrain.
When Ground Clutter suppression is enabled, the system removes ground clutter from the display.
Enabling/Disabling Ground Clutter Suppression:
1) From Home, touch Weather > Weather Selection > WX RADAR > WX RADAR Settings.
2) To enable or disable the ground clutter suppression feature, touch the GND Cluttter Suppression Button.
Ground clutter suppression is enabled when button annunciator is green; ground clutter suppression is disabled
when annunciator is gray.

GROUND MAPPING AND INTERPRETATION
A secondary use of the weather radar system is for the presentation of terrain. This can be a useful tool for
verifying aircraft position. A picture of the ground is represented much like a topographical map that can be
used as a supplement to the navigation map.
Ground Map mode uses a different gain range than Weather mode. Different colors are also used to represent
the intensity levels. The displayed intensity of ground target returns are defined in the table below. Use of
the Gain and Tilt controls help improve contrast so that specific ground targets can be recognized more easily.
As previously discussed, the type and orientation of the target in relation to the aircraft affects the intensity
displayed.
When the weather radar system is in either the Weather or Ground Map mode, the system automatically
switches to Standby mode upon landing.
Ground Map
Mode Color
Black
Light blue
Yellow
Magenta
Blue

Intensity
0 dB
> 0 dB to < 13 dB
at least 13 dB to less than 21 dB
at least 21 dB to less than 29 dB
29 dB and greater

Table 6-4 Ground Target Return Intensity Levels

394

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Operation in Ground Map Mode
1) From Home, touch Weather > Weather Selection > WX RADAR > WX RADAR Settings.
2) Touch the Display Mode Button.
3) Touch the Ground Button to place the radar in Ground Map mode.
4) Press the Joystick to activate the antenna tilt selection function.
5) Use the Joystick to select the desired antenna tilt angle.
7) When ground returns are shown at the desired distance, press the Joystick to disable the tilt adjustment
function of the Joystick.

ADDITIONAL RADAR DISPLAYS
NOTE: The NEXRAD weather product cannot be displayed simultaneously on the on the Navigation Map

Pane with weather radar information.
The Weather Radar Pane is the principal map pane for viewing weather radar information. Weather Radar
information is also available as an overlay on the Navigation Map Pane.
Enabling/Disabling display of Weather Radar information on the Navigation Maps Pane:
1) From Home, touch Map > Map Settings.
2) If necessary, touch the Sensor Tab.
3) Touch the Weather Radar Button to enable or disable the display of weather radar information.
4) If necessary, touch the Weather Radar Settings Button to access the Weather Radar Settings screen.

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

395

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Radar Mode
Selected Radar
Range
Antenna Tilt
Direction and
Angle

Weather Radar information shown on the Navigation Map Pane

Map Settings Screen with Weather Radar on
Navigation Maps Enabled

Weather Radar Settings for the Navigation
Maps

Figure 6-55 Displaying Weather Radar Information on the Navigation Map Pane

396

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

HAZARD AVOIDANCE

SYSTEM STATUS
The system displays the radar mode annunciation in the upper left corner of the Weather Radar Display.
Additional information may be displayed in the center of the Weather Radar Pane as a banner annunciation.
Radar Mode
Annunciation

Radar Feature
Status
Annunciations

Center Banner
Annunciation

Figure 6-56 Radar System Status on the Weather Radar Pane

Radar Mode

Radar Mode Annunciation Box

Center Banner Annunciation

Standby

STANDBY

Weather

WEATHER

None

Ground Mapping
Off
Radar Failed*

GROUND MAPPING
OFF
FAIL

None
OFF
RADAR FAIL

* See Table 6-7 for additional failure annunciations
Table 6-5 Radar Modes on the Weather Radar Pane

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

397

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
The system displays the status of the weather radar features in the upper-right corner of the Weather Radar
Pane.
Radar Antenna Feature Status
STAB ON
STAB OFF
STAB INOP
ALTITUDE COMP TILT ON
ALTITUDE COMP TILT OFF
GND CLTR SUPPRESS ON
GND CLTR SUPPRESS OFF
GND CLTR SUPPRESS INACTIVE
GND CLTR SUPPRESS UNAVAILABLE
TURB DETECTION ON
TURB DETECTION OFF
TURB DETECTION INACTIVE
TURB DETECTION UNAVAILABLE

Description
Antenna stabilization is selected on.
Antenna stabilization is selected off.
The radar is not receiving pitch and roll information. The antenna
stabilization feature is inoperative.
The altitude-compensated tilt feature is selected on.
The altitude-compensated tilt feature is selected off.
The optional ground clutter supersession feature is selected on.
The optional ground clutter supersession feature is selected off.
The radar scan is not receiving any ground clutter data to suppress.
The radar is missing data needed to suppresses ground clutter.
The optional turbulence detection feature is selected on.
The optional turbulence detection feature is selected off.
The optional turbulence detection is inactive when map range is greater
than 160 nm, or radar is in a mode which cannot support turbulence
detection.
The optional turbulence detection feature is missing data necessary to
detect turbulence.

Table 6-6 Antenna Stabilization Annunciations on the Weather Radar Pane

If the unit fails, an annunciation as to the cause of the failure is shown as a banner in the center of the Weather
Radar Pane.
Weather Radar
Pane Center Banner
Description
Annunciation
BAD CONFIG
The radar configuration is invalid. The radar should be serviced.
RDR FAULT
The radar unit is reporting a fault. The radar should be serviced.
The system is not receiving valid data from the radar unit. The system
RADAR FAIL
should be serviced.
Table 6-7 Abnormal Radar Status Annunciations on the Weather Radar Pane

398

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

HAZARD AVOIDANCE

6.3 TAWS-A
WARNING: Do not use TAWS information for primary terrain avoidance. TAWS is intended only to enhance

situational awareness.
NOTE: Government agencies provide data for the TAWS databases. Garmin accurately processes and cross-

validates the data but cannot guarantee the accuracy and completeness of the data.
NOTE: Terrain information is not available when the aircraft is outside of the installed terrain database

coverage area.
TAWS-A (Terrain Awareness and Warning System - Class A) provides increased situational awareness and aids
in reducing controlled flight into terrain (CFIT). TAWS-A provides visual annunciations and voice alerts when
terrain and obstacles are within the given altitude threshold from the aircraft. The displayed alerts and warnings
are advisory in nature only.
TAWS-A satisfies TSO-C151b Class A and TSO-92c requirements for certification.
TAWS-A requires the following components:
• A valid terrain and obstacle database
• A valid 3-D GPS position solution
• Valid flap and landing gear status inputs
• A valid radar altimeter
TAWS-A uses terrain and obstacle information from government sources. Terrain information is based on
terrain elevation information in a database that may contain inaccuracies. Individual obstructions may be shown
if available in the database. The data undergoes verification by Garmin to confirm accuracy of the content, per
TSO-C151b. However, the displayed information should never be understood as being all-inclusive and data
may be inaccurate.
TAWS-A uses information from the GPS receiver to provide a horizontal position and altitude, along with
additional altitude input from the radar altimeter. GPS altitude is derived from satellite measurements. GPS
altitude is then converted to a height above geodetic sea level (GSL), which is the height above mean seal level
(MSL) calculated geometrically. GSL altitude accuracy is affected by factors such as satellite geometry, but it is not
subject to variations in pressure and temperature that normally affect pressure altitude devices. GSL altitude does
not require local altimeter settings to determine MSL altitude. Therefore, GSL altitude provides a highly accurate
and reliable MSL altitude source to calculate terrain and obstacle alerts.
The terrain and obstacle databases used by TAWS-A are referenced to mean sea level (MSL). Using the GPS
position and GSL altitude, TAWS-A displays a 2-D picture of the surrounding terrain and obstacles relative to the
position and altitude of the aircraft. Furthermore, the GPS position and GSL altitude are used to calculate and
“predict” the aircraft’s flight path in relation to the surrounding terrain and obstacles. In this manner, TAWS-A
can provide advanced alerts of predicted dangerous terrain conditions.

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

399

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
TAWS-A incorporates radar altimeter input with the GSL altitude to provide a more accurate position reference
when at lower altitudes for certain alert types, and to retain a level of ground proximity warning capability in the
unlikely event of a terrain or obstacle database failure.
Baro-corrected altitude (or indicated altitude) is derived by adjusting the altimeter setting for local atmospheric
conditions. The most accurate baro-corrected altitude can be achieved by frequently updating the altimeter setting
to the nearest reporting station along the flight path. However, because actual atmospheric conditions seldom
match the standard conditions defined by the International Standard Atmosphere (ISA) model (where pressure,
temperature, and lapse rates have fixed values), it is common for the baro-corrected altitude (as read from the
altimeter) to differ from the GPS-GSL altitude. This variation results in the aircraft’s true altitude differing from
the baro-corrected altitude.
TAWS-A provides the following alert types:
• Forward Looking Terrain Avoidance (FLTA) Alerting, which consists of:
• Required Terrain Clearance (RTC) / Required Obstacle Clearance (ROC) Alerting
• Imminent Terrain Impact (ITI) / Imminent Obstacle Impact (IOI) Alerting
• Premature Descent Alerting (PDA)
• Ground Proximity Warning System (GPWS) Alerting, which consists of:
• Excessive Descent Rate (EDR) Alerting
• Excessive Closure Rate (ECR) to Terrain Alerting
• Flight Into Terrain (FIT) Alerting
• Negative Climb Rate (NCR) after takeoff Alerting
• Excessive below Glideslope/Glidepath Deviation (GSD) Alerting
• Altitude Voice Call Out (VCO) Alerting

DISPLAYING TAWS-A INFORMATION
TAWS-A uses yellow (caution) and red (warning) to depict terrain and obstacles (with heights greater than
200 feet above ground level, AGL) alerts relative to aircraft altitude. Colors are adjusted automatically as the
aircraft altitude changes. The colors and symbols in Figure 6-57 and Tables 6-8 and 6-9 are used to represent
terrain, obstacles, and potential impact points.

Figure 6-57 Terrain Altitude/Color Correlation for TAWS-A

400

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Unlighted Obstacle
Lighted Obstacle
< 1000’ AGL > 1000’ AGL < 1000’ AGL > 1000’ AGL

Obstacle Location
Red obstacle is above or within 100 ft
below the aircraft altitude
Yellow obstacle is between 100 ft and
1000 ft below the aircraft altitude

Table 6-8 TAWS-A Obstacle Colors and Symbology

Potential Impact
Point Symbol

Alert Type

Example Annunciation

Warning
Caution
Table 6-9 TAWS-A Potential Impact Point Symbols with Alert Types

The system shows TAWS-A information on the TAWS Pane, the navigation map panes, and on the PFD Inset
Navigation Map.
Enabling/disabling relative terrain information (navigation map panes):
1) From Home, touch Map > Map Settings.
2) If necessary, touch the Sensor Tab.
3) Touch the Relative Terrain Button to display/remove relative terrain information on the selected navigation
map pane.

Enabling/Disabling obstacle information (Navigation Map Pane and PFD Inset Navigation Map)
1) From Home, touch Map > Map Settings
2) If necessary, touch the Land Tab.
3) Scroll to and touch the Obstacle Data Button.

The system can overlay relative terrain and obstacle information on the PFD Inset Navigation Map. If the
Inset Map is currently displaying the traffic map (Traffic Map Softkey annunciator is green), the traffic map must
first be disabled in order to view the PFD Inset Navigation Map.

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

401

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Enabling/disabling relative terrain and obstacle information (PFD Inset Navigation Map)
1) Press the Inset Map Settings Softkey.
2) Press the Terrain Softkey.

When enabling TAWS-A relative terrain information on maps other than the TAWS Pane, an icon indicates
the feature is enabled. A legend for TAWS-A terrain colors will accompany the icon on the navigation map
panes (Figure 6-58). The legend is shown without the terrain icon on the TAWS Pane.

Figure 6-58 Terrain Icon and Legend

The Map Settings Screen on the Touchscreen Controller enables adjustment of map range settings above
which the system declutters terrain and obstacle data from the display. If the crew selects a map range larger
than the map range setting, the system removes the information from the map. For relative terrain information,
the enable/disable function applies only to the display panes, while the range setting also affects the PFD Inset
Map.
The system can display terrain data independently from obstacle data; however, the system will display
obstacles for which cautions or warnings exist when terrain is enabled for display and the map range is within
the setting limit.
Maps besides the TAWS Pane use settings based on those selected for the navigation maps. The maximum
display ranges for obstacles on each map are dependent on the range setting made for the navigation maps.
If the maximum range for obstacle display on the navigation maps is adjusted to below 20 nm, the highest
obstacle display range settings on the other applicable maps are also adjusted proportionally.
Selecting a relative terrain display range on the navigation maps:
1) From Home, touch Map > Map Settings.
2) If necessary, touch the Sensor Tab.
3) Touch the Relative Terrain Settings Button.
4) Touch the Map Settings Button.
6) Touch the Map Terrain Range Button (displays current terrain map range in light blue)
7) Scroll in the list of ranges and touch a range button to select the maximum map range at which the system
shows terrain information.
8) When finished, touch Back or Home.

Selecting an obstacle display range on the navigation maps:
1) From Home, touch Map > Map Settings.
2) If necessary, touch the Land Tab.

402

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
3) Touch the Obstacle Data Range Button (displays current obstacle range in light blue).
4) Scroll in the list of ranges and touch a range button to select the maximum map range at which the system
shows obstacle information.

TAWS PANE
The TAWS Pane shows terrain, obstacle, and potential impact point information in relation to the aircraft’s
current altitude, without clutter from the basemap. It is the principal map pane for viewing TAWS information.
The flight crew can also enable/disable the display of aviation data on the TAWS Pane such as the following
items:
• Airports
• VORs
• NDBs

• Intersections

If an obstacle and the projected flight path of the aircraft intersect, the display automatically adjusts the map
range if necessary to emphasize the display of the potential impact point(s).
Aircraft orientation on the TAWS pane is always heading up unless there is no valid heading. A box on the
map range arc indicates the selected map range. Turn the Joystick clockwise to increase the map range, or
counter-clockwise to decrease the map range.
Showing the TAWS Pane:
From Home, touch the TAWS Button.
Enabling/disabling aviation data on the TAWS Pane:
1) From Home, touch TAWS > TAWS Settings.
2) Touch the Show Aviation Data Button to display/remove aviation data on the TAWS Pane.
Map Orientation

Current Aircraft
GPS-derived GSL
Altitude

TAWS Pane Map
Range

Black Terrain
(More than 1000’
Below the Aircraft
Altitude)

Red Terrain
(Above or Within
100’ Below the
Aircraft Altitude)

Yellow Lighted
Obstacles (Between
100’ and 1000’
Below Aircraft
Altitude)

Red Lighted Obstacle
(Above or Within
100’ Below Aircraft
Altitude)

Yellow Terrain
(Between 100’
and 1000’ Below
the Aircraft
Altitude)
Terrain Legend

TAWS-A
Annunciations
Figure 6-59 TAWS Pane

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

403

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
TAWS-A ALERTS
The system issues TAWS-A alerts when flight conditions meet parameters that are set within TAWS-A
software algorithms. TAWS-A alerts typically employ a CAUTION or a WARNING alert severity level, or
both. When an alert is issued, visual annunciations are displayed and aural alerts are simultaneously issued.
Table 6-10 shows TAWS-A alert types with corresponding annunciations and aural messages.
When the system issues an alert, annunciations appear on the PFDs, the TAWS Pane (if displayed), and on
the Touchscreen Controllers. The PFD shows the annunciation to the left of the Altimeter. The TAWS Pane
shows the alert in the lower-left corner of the pane. In addition, a pop-up alert appears on each Touchscreen
Controller. To acknowledge the pop-up alert:
• Touch the TAWS Button (displays the TAWS Pane).
• Touch the Inhibit TAWS Button to inhibit TAWS-A alerting.
• Touch the OK Button acknowledge the alert and return to the previous screen on the Touchscreen Controller.
Acknowledging the alert on either Touchscreen Controller acknowledges the alert for the TAWS-A system.

PFD Alert Annunciation
TAWS Pane Alert
Annunciation

Touchscreen
Controller Pop-Up
Alert Annunciation
Touch to show
TAWS Pane

Figure 6-60 TAWS-A Alert Annunciations

404

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
PFD/TAWS Pane
Annunciation

Alert Type

Touchscreen Controller
Pop-Up Alert

Aural Message

Reduced Required Terrain Clearance
Warning (RTC)

“Terrain, Terrain; Pull Up, Pull Up”

Imminent Terrain Impact Warning (ITI)

“Terrain, Terrain; Pull Up, Pull Up”

Reduced Required Obstacle Clearance
Warning (ROC)

“Obstacle, Obstacle; Pull Up, Pull Up”

Imminent Obstacle Impact Warning (IOI)

“Obstacle, Obstacle; Pull Up, Pull Up”

Excessive Descent Rate Warning (EDR)

“ Pull Up”

Excessive Closure Rate Warning (ECR)

“ Pull Up”

Reduced Required Terrain Clearance
Caution (RTC)

“Caution, Terrain; Caution, Terrain”

Imminent Terrain Impact Caution (ITI)

“Caution, Terrain; Caution, Terrain”

Reduced Required Obstacle Clearance
Caution (ROC)

“Caution, Obstacle; Caution, Obstacle”

Imminent Obstacle Impact Caution (IOI)

“Obstacle Ahead; Obstacle Ahead”

Premature Descent Alert Caution (PDA)

“Too Low, Terrain”

Excessive Descent Rate Caution (EDR)

“Sink Rate”

Excessive Closure Rate Caution (ECR)

“Terrain, Terrain”

Negative Climb Rate Caution (NCR)

“Don’t Sink”

Flight Into Terrain High Speed Caution
(FIT)

“Too Low, Terrain”

Flight Into Terrain Gear Caution (FIT)

“Too Low, Gear”

Flight Into Terrain Flaps Caution (FIT)

“Too Low, Flaps”

Flight Into Terrain Takeoff Caution (FIT)

“Too Low, Terrain”

Glide Slope Deviation Caution (GSD)
(depends on approach type)
Altitude Voice Callout (VCO)

“Glideslope”
or
“Glidepath”

None

“Five-Hundred”, “Four-Hundred”, “Three-Hundred”, “Two-Hundred”, “One-Hundred”

Table 6-10 TAWS-A Alerts Summary

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

405

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
EXCESSIVE DESCENT RATE ALERT
The purpose of the Excessive Descent Rate (EDR) alert is to provide notification when the aircraft is
determined to be closing (descending) upon terrain a rate that is calculated to be excessive relative to height
above terrain. Figure 6-61 shows the parameters for the alert as defined by TSO-C151b.
6000
5500
5000

Height Above Terrain (Feet)

4500
4000

NK
: “SI

ion

Caut

3500

”

RATE

3000
2500
2000

Warning: “PULL UP”

1500
1000

12000

11000

Descent Rate (FPM)

10000

9000

8000

7000

6000

5000

4000

3000

2000

1000

500

Figure 6-61 Excessive Descent Rate Alert Criteria

FORWARD LOOKING TERRAIN AVOIDANCE (FLTA)
The Forward Looking Terrain Avoidance (FLTA) feature of TAWS-A compares the projected flight path as
derived from GPS data with terrain features and obstacles from the terrain and obstacle databases. The system
issues aural and visual FLTA alerts when the projected flight path conflicts with terrain or obstacles.
The projected flight path is a calculated area ahead of, to the sides, and below the aircraft. The size of
the projected flight path varies based on factors including ground speed (the path ahead is larger when the
ground speed is higher), whether the aircraft is level, turning, or descending, and the proximity to the nearest
runway along the current track. As the aircraft approaches the runway, the projected flight path becomes
narrower until the system automatically disables FLTA alerts or the pilot manually inhibits them.
There are two types of FLTA alerts, Reduced Required Terrain/Obstacle Clearance (RTC or ROC respectively)
and Imminent Terrain/Obstacle Impact (ITI or IOI respectively).
Reduced Required Terrain Clearance (RTC) and Reduced Required Obstacle Clearance (ROC)
alerts are issued when the aircraft flight path is above terrain, yet is projected to come within the minimum
clearance values in Figure 6-62. When an RTC alert is issued, a potential impact point is displayed on the
TAWS Pane.
Imminent Terrain Impact (ITI) and Imminent Obstacle Impact (IOI) alerts are issued when the
aircraft is below the elevation of a terrain or obstacle in the aircraft’s projected path. ITI and IOI alerts are

406

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
accompanied by a potential impact point displayed on the TAWS Pane. The alert is annunciated when the
projected vertical flight path is calculated to come within minimum clearance altitudes in Figure 6-62.
Required Terrain Clearance
RTC Level (FT)

RTC Descending (FT)

800

Required
Terrain Clearance
(FT)
Required
Terrain
Clearance
(FT)

700

600

500

400

300

200

100

0
0

Distance From Runway (NM)
Distance
From Runway (NM)

Figure 6-62 FLTA Alert Minimum Terrain and Obstacle Clearance Values

FLTA alerts are automatically disabled when the aircraft is less than 200 feet above the destination runway
elevation while within 0.5 nm of the approach runway or the aircraft is between runway ends.

PREMATURE DESCENT ALERTING
A Premature Descent Alert (PDA) is issued when the system detects that the aircraft is significantly
below the normal approach path to a runway (Figure 6-63).
PDA alerting begins when the aircraft is below 700 feet AGL within 15 nm of the destination airport and
ends when the aircraft is 0.5 nm from the runway threshold.
800

Height Above Destination (Feet)

700

600

500

400

300

PDA ALERTING AREA

200

100

Distance to Destination (NM)
Figure 6-63 PDA Alerting Threshold

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

407

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
INHIBITING FLTA AND PDA ALERTS
NOTE: The ‘Inhibit TAWS’ function only inhibits FLTA and PDA alerts. Alerting for GPWS alerts (EDR, ECR,

NCR, FIT) and GSD is controlled independently from FLTA and PDA alerts.
FLTA and PDA visual annunciations and voice alerts can be manually inhibited. Discretion should be used
when inhibiting alerts; they should be enabled when appropriate. When PDA and FLTA alerts are inhibited,
the alert annunciation ‘TAWS INH’ is shown on the PFDs and on the TAWS Pane.

Figure 6-64 TAWS FLTA and PDA Alerting
Inhibited Annunciation

Inhibiting/enabling TAWS-A FLTA and PDA alerting:
1) From Home, touch TAWS > TAWS Settings.
2) Touch the TAWS Inhibit Button. When the annunciator on the button is green, TAWS-A alerting is inhibited.
When the button annunciator is gray, TAWS-A alerting is enabled.
Or:
1) From Home, touch Map > Map Settings.
2) If necessary, touch the Sensor Tab.
2) Touch the Relative Terrain Settings Button.
3) Touch the TAWS Inhibit Button. TAWS-A alerting is inhibited when the button annunciator is green, enabled
when gray.

Inhibiting TAWS-A alerting while an alert is occurring:
Touch the Inhibit TAWS Button on the Terrain Alert pop-up window on either Touchscreen Controller.

If TAWS-A FLTA alerts are inhibited when the Final Approach Fix is the active waypoint in a GPS SBAS
approach, the system may show a ‘LOW ALT’ annunciation on the PFDs next to the Altimeter if the current
aircraft altitude is at least 164 feet below the prescribed altitude at the Final Approach Fix. See the Flight
Instruments Section for details.

EXCESSIVE DESCENT RATE ALERT
The purpose of the Excessive Descent Rate (EDR) alert is to provide suitable notification when the
aircraft is determined to be closing (descending) upon terrain at an excessive speed. Figure 6-65 shows the
parameters for the alert as defined by TSO-C151b.

408

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
6000
5500
5000

Height Above Terrain (Feet)

4500
4000

NK
: “SI

ion

Caut

3500

”

RATE

3000
2500
2000

Warning: “PULL UP”

1500
1000

12000

11000

Descent Rate (FPM)

10000

9000

8000

7000

6000

5000

4000

3000

2000

1000

500

Figure 6-65 Excessive Descent Rate Alert Criteria

EXCESSIVE CLOSURE RATE ALERT
The Excessive Closure Rate (ECR) alert provides suitable notification when the aircraft is determined to
be closing upon terrain at an excessive speed for a given aircraft gear and flap configuration.
Figures 6-136 and 6-137 show the ECR alerting criteria for flaps in the landing configuration and for all
other flight phases respectively.

Height Above Terrain (Feet)

ECR alerts are automatically disabled when the aircraft is 5 nm from the nearest airport, except when FLTA
is not available (causing the TAWS N/A or TAWS FAIL annunciation to be displayed), in which case ECR
alerting will remain active until landing.

Closure Rate (FPM)
Figure 6-66 Excessive Closure Rate Alert Criteria (Flaps Up or Takeoff Configuration)

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

409

Height Above Terrain (Feet)

HAZARD AVOIDANCE

Closure Rate (FPM)
Figure 6-67 Excessive Closure Rate Alert Criteria (Flaps in Landing Configuration)

FLIGHT INTO TERRAIN ALERT

Height Above Terrain (Feet)

Flight Into Terrain (FIT) alerts occur when the aircraft is too low with respect to terrain based on landing
gear status, flap position, and groundspeed. FIT caution alerts are issued when flight conditions meet the
criteria shown in Figure 6-68.

*
*

Altitude Change Rate (FPM)
* Flap position will not trigger alert if Flap Override option is enabled; see discussion below.
Figure 6-68 Flight Into Terrain Caution Alert Criteria

410

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
To reduce nuisance FIT alerts on approaches where flap extension is not desired (or is intentionally delayed),
the pilot may override FIT alerting based on the flap position, while all other FIT alerting remains in effect.
PFD Flap Override Annunciation

TAWS Pane
Flap Override
Annunciation

“Too Low - Flaps”
Warning Inhibited when
Flap Override Button is
Enabled

Figure 6-69 Overriding Flaps
Configuration-Based FIT Alerts

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

411

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Overriding Flaps-based FIT alerting:
1) From Home, touch TAWS > TAWS Settings.
2) Touch the Flap Override button. FIT alerts based on flap position are overridden (disabled) when button
annunciator is green, available when gray.

When the Flaps Override option is enabled, the annunciation ‘FLAP OVR’ is annunciated on the PFDs
and on the TAWS Pane (Figure 6-69). If GPWS alerts are also inhibited (which include FIT), the ‘FLAP OVR’
annunciation is not shown.

Height Above Terrain (Feet)

FIT alerts also occur during takeoff or go-around if the aircraft’s height above ground level (as determined
by the radar altimeter) is too close to rising terrain. The system displays a ‘TERRAIN’ caution or warning
annunciation on the PFDs, and a ‘TOO LOW - TERRAIN’ pop-up annunciation on the Touchscreen
Controllers. The system also issues a “Too Low, Terrain” voice alert.

“TOO LOW, TERRAIN”

Radio Altitude Loss (Feet)
Figure 6-70 FIT Alerting After Takeoff

NEGATIVE CLIMB RATE AFTER TAKEOFF ALERT
The Negative Climb Rate (NCR) After Takeoff alert (also referred to as “Altitude Loss After Takeoff”)
provides alerts when the system determines the aircraft is losing altitude (closing upon terrain) after takeoff.
The system displays a ‘TERRAIN’ caution annunciation on the PFDs, and a ‘DON’T SINK’ pop-up annunciation
on the Touchscreen Controllers. The system also generates a “Don’t Sink” voice alert.
NCR alerting for TAWS-A is only active when departing from an airport and when the following conditions
are met:
• Height above the terrain is less than 700 feet
• Distance from the departure airport is 5 nm or less

412

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
• Heading change from the departure heading is less than 110 degrees
• Landing gear or flaps are configured for takeoff
NCR alerts can be triggered by either altitude loss (Figure 6-71) or sink rate (6-72).
1000

Height Above Terrain (Feet)

900
800
700
600
500
400

“DON’T SINK”

300
200
100
0
0

100

120

140

Altitude Loss (Feet)
Figure 6-71 Negative Climb Rate (NCR) Altitude Loss
1000

Height Above Terrain (Feet)

900
800
700
600
500

“DON’T SINK”

400
300
200
100
0
0

500

1000

1500

2000

2500

3000

3500

4000

4500

5000

5500

6000

6500

7000

Sink Rate (FPM)
Figure 6-72 Negative Climb Rate (NCR) Sink Rate

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

413

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Inhibiting GPWS Alerts (EDR, ECR, FIT, and NCR)
NOTE: The ‘Inhibit GPWS’ function only affects GPWS alerts (EDR, ECR, NCR, and FIT). Alerting for FLTA,

PDA, and GSD is controlled independently from the GPWS alerts listed below.
EDR, ECR, FIT, and NCR alerts can be manually inhibited as a group. Discretion should be used when
inhibiting alerts, and the GPWS system should be enabled when appropriate. When these alerts are inhibited,
the status annunciation ‘GPWS INH’ is shown on the PFDs and on the TAWS Pane (Figure 6-73).
PFD GPWS Inhibit Annunciation

TAWS Pane
GPWS Inhibit
Annunciation

Figure 6-73 Inhibiting GPWS Alerts

Inhibiting/enabling GPWS alerting:
1) From Home, touch TAWS > TAWS Settings.
2) Touch the GPWS Inhibit button. Button annunciator is green when GPWS alerts are inhibited, gray when
alerting is enabled.

414

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
EXCESSIVE BELOW GLIDESLOPE/GLIDEPATH DEVIATION ALERT

Radio Altitude (Feet)

A Glideslope Deviation or Glidepath Deviation (GSD) caution alert is issued when the system detects
that the aircraft is significantly below the glidepath for the selected approach in relation to the aircraft’s height
above terrain (Figure 6-74).

“GLIDESLOPE”
or
“GLIDEPATH”

Number of Dots Below Glideslope/Glidepath
Figure 6-74 Excessive Below Glideslope/Glidepath Deviation Alert Criteria

GSD alerting is only active after departure and the following conditions are met:
• An ILS, LPV, LNAV/VNAV, or LNAV+V approach is active and vertical navigation indications are being
displayed.
• Aircraft is below 1000 feet AGL
• Gear is in the landing configuration.
When a GSD caution alert occurs on an ILS approach, the system displays a ‘GLIDESLOPE’ annunciation
on the PFDs and Touchscreen Controllers and provides a “Glideslope” voice alert. If a GSD caution alert
occurs on an LPV, LNAV/VNAV, or LNAV+V approach, the system displays a ‘GLIDEPATH’ annunciation and
provides a “Glidepath” voice alert (Figure 6-75).

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

415

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Inhibiting GSD Alerts
NOTE: GSD alerting may only be inhibited while a GSD alert is occurring. GSD alerts are inhibited

independently from all other FLTA, PDA, and GPWS alerts.
GSD Alerts may be inhibited on either Touchscreen Controller.
PFD Glideslope Annunciation

Figure 6-75 GSD Alerts on PFD and Touchscreen Controller

Inhibiting an active GSD Pop-Up alert:
1) Touch the Inhibit GS/GP Button.
2) Touch the OK Button to confirm and inhibit Glideslope and Glidepath alerts, or touch Cancel.

Inhibiting an active GSD Alert (TAWS Settings Screen):
1) From Home, touch TAWS > TAWS Settings.
2) Touch the Glideslope Inhibit or Glidepath Inhibit Button (button name dependent type of alert occurring).
GSD alerting is inhibited when button annunciator is green, enabled when gray.

416

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
ALTITUDE VOICE CALLOUT (VCO)
TAWS-A provides voice alerts as the aircraft descends, beginning at 500 feet above the terrain, as determined
by the radar altimeter (if greater than 5 nm from the nearest airport) or 500 feet above the nearest runway
threshold elevation (if less than 5 nm from the nearest airport). Upon descent to this altitude, TAWS-A issues
a “Five-hundred” voice alert. This system also issues voice alerts corresponding to 400, 300, 200, and 100
feet. There are no display annunciations or pop-up alerts that accompany the aural message(s). VCO alerts
cannot be inhibited.

SYSTEM STATUS
During power-up, TAWS-A conducts a self-test of its visual annunciations and voice alerts. The system test
can also be manually initiated. The system issues a voice alert when the test has concluded. TAWS-A System
Testing is disabled when ground speed exceeds 30 knots. TAWS-A terrain alerts will not be issued while a test
is in progress.
TAWS Pane
Center Banner
Annunciation

Voice Alert

TAWS System Fail

TAWS FAIL

“TAWS System Failure”

GPWS System Fail

None

“GPWS System Failure”

System Test in progress

TAWS TEST

None

“TAWS System Test OK”

Alert Type

System Test pass

PFD/TAWS Pane
Annunciation

None

Table 6-11 TAWS-A System Test Status Annunciations

Manually testing the TAWS-A System:
1) From Home, touch TAWS > TAWS Settings.
2) Touch the Test TAWS Button.
Or:
1) From Home, touch Map > Map Settings.
2) If necessary, touch the Sensor Tab.
3) Touch the Relative Terrain Settings Button.
4) Touch the Test TAWS Button.

TAWS-A ABNORMAL OPERATIONS
The TAWS-A system continually monitors several system-critical items such as database validity, flap and
landing gear position, altitude inputs, and GPS accuracy and position.
If any alerts are unavailable due to an abnormal condition, the system displays annunciation(s) on the PFDs
and on the TAWS Pane. In addition, the system generates voice alert(s), provided the audio alerting system is
available.

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

417

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Conditions which may be automatically recoverable (such as a excessive vertical position error) are typically
accompanied by a ‘TAWS N/A’ annunciation and “TAWS Not Available” voice alert. While the aircraft is in the
air, if the condition(s) which caused the ‘TAWS N/A’ annunciation are no longer applicable, the system issues a
“TAWS Available” voice alert.

Alert Cause(s)

PFD/TAWS Pane
Annunciation(s)

No GPS Position
Excessive vertical position
error
LRU software mismatch,
TAWS configuration
mismatch, or audio
alerting system failed or
is unavailable, or GPS and
barometric altitude invalid or
unavailable
Vertical Speed and Barometric
Altitude invalid or unavailable

and

TAWS Pane Center Banner
Annunciation

Voice Alert(s)

TAWS Alert
Types
Not
Available

NO GPS POSITION

“TAWS Not
Available”

PDA, FLTA,
GSD, VCO

None

“TAWS Not
Available”

PDA, FLTA

TAWS FAIL

“TAWS System
Failure” and “GPWS
System Failure”

All Alerts
Unavailable

None

and

Radar altimeter is invalid or
unavailable

None

TAWS Database Mismatch or
Failure
Terrain elevation from
database unavailable or
Aircraft is outside of terrain/
obstacle coverage area for
the installed database
Terrain or Obstacle databases
from the MFD unavailable
or invalid. System operating
with PFD databases

TAWS FAIL

“TAWS Not
Available” and
“GPWS System
Failure”
“GPWS System
Failure”
“TAWS System
Failure”

All alerts
unavailable
EDR, ECR,
NCR, FIT, GSD,
VCO*
PDA, FLTA
PDA, FLTA,

“TAWS Not
Available”

None

TERRAIN DATABASE FAILURE

Not applicable
None

* Alert fails if GPS position and terrain database elevation is also unavailable.

Table 6-12 TAWS-A Abnormal Conditions and Alert Failures

If the aircraft bank angle exceeds 30˚, TAWS-A will disable ECR alerts. ECR alert availability returns when
the bank angle is reduced for at least eight seconds.
418

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

HAZARD AVOIDANCE

6.4 TCAS II TRAFFIC
WARNING: Traffic information shown on system displays is provided as an aid in visually acquiring

traffic. Traffic avoidance maneuvers are based upon TCAS II Resolution Advisories , ATC guidance, or
positive visual acquisition of conflicting traffic.
WARNING: Do not rely solely upon the display of traffic information to accurately depict all of the traffic

information within range of the aircraft. Due to lack of equipment, poor signal reception, and/or inaccurate
information from other aircraft, traffic may be present but not represented on the displays.
NOTE: Refer to the documentation from the manufacturer for a complete discussion of the TCAS II system.

The ACSS TCAS 3000SP is a Traffic Alert and Collision Avoidance System II (TCAS II) device. It monitors
the airspace and detects the presence of other aircraft in the vicinity equipped with operating Mode A, C, and S
transponders. It also provides traffic advisory (TA) and resolution advisory (RA) alerts to the flight crew. The
system displays traffic information using the symbology shown below.
Traffic Symbol

Description
Non-Threat Traffic
Proximity Advisory (PA)
Traffic Advisory (TA)
Traffic Advisory Off Scale
Resolution Advisory (RA)
Resolution Advisory Off Scale

Table 6-13 TCAS II Traffic Symbol Description

Non-Threat Traffic, shown as an open white diamond, indicates that an intruding aircraft is at greater than
±1200 feet relative altitude or the distance is beyond 5 nm.
A Proximity Advisory indicates that the intruding aircraft is within ±1200 feet and is within a 6 nm range,
but is still not considered a threat.
A Traffic Advisory (TA) alerts the crew to a potentially hazardous intruding aircraft closing to within 20-48
seconds of a potential collision area. A Traffic Advisory beyond the selected display range is indicated by a half
TA symbol at the edge of the screen at the relative bearing of the intruder.
A Resolution Advisory (RA) alerts the crew to an intruding aircraft that is closing to within 15 to 35 seconds
of a potential collision area. RAs include vertical guidance maneuvers designed to increase or maintain vertical
separation from intruding aircraft. An RA beyond the selected map display range (off scale) is indicated by a
half RA symbol at the edge of the screen at the relative bearing of the intruder.
190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

419

HAZARD AVOIDANCE

TCAS II ALERTS
NOTE: Refer to TCAS II manufacturer’s documentation for information on the types of resolution advisories

and voice alerts generated by the TCAS II system.
When the TCAS II system issues a TA or RA, the following occur:
• The TCAS II unit issues a voice alert.
• A ‘TRAFFIC’ annunciation appears at the bottom right of the airspeed indicator on the PFDs, flashes for 5
seconds, and remains displayed until no TAs or RAs are detected in the area. RA ‘TRAFFIC’ annunciations
are white text with red backgrounds; TA ‘TRAFFIC’ annunciations are black text with yellow backgrounds. If
a TA and RA occur simultaneously, only the RA ‘TRAFFIC’ annunciation is shown.
• If the PFD is operating in FULL mode, the PFD automatically displays an inset map. If no inset map was
enabled prior to the TA or RA, the system displays the PFD Inset Traffic Map. If the PFD Inset Navigation Map
was enabled prior to the TA or RA, the system displays the PFD Inset Navigation Map with the traffic overlay
enabled.
• During an RA only, voice alert(s) from the TCAS II unit provide vertical guidance to resolve the traffic conflict.
The Vertical Speed Indicator displays a range of vertical speeds to fly to or avoid as applicable (Figure 6-76).
Additional voice alerts occur to denote changes in the RA status or when the aircraft is clear of the conflict.
No-Fly Pitch Cue
Fly-To Pitch
Cue

RA Annunciation

Fly-To Vertical
Speed Range
No-Fly Vertical
Speed Range

TA Annunciation

Inset Traffic Map
Displays When TA
or RA is Detected

Figure 6-76 Traffic Annunciation with Resolution Advisory (PFD in FULL Mode)

420

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
RESOLUTION ADVISORIES
NOTE: Refer to TCAS II manufacturer’s documentation for information on the types of resolution advisories

and voice alerts generated by the TCAS II system.
During an RA, vertical guidance indications appear on the Attitude Indicator and Vertical Speed Indicator
of the PFDs to provide visual pitch cues for the flight crew to use in order to achieve (or maintain) vertical
separation from intruding traffic (Figure 6-77).
The Attitude Indicator depicts a range of pitch attitudes to avoid using one or two no-fly pitch cues positioned
on the pitch ladder. The no-fly pitch cues are indicated by red open trapezoid-shaped areas encompassing
the range of pitch attitudes to be avoided during an RA. If an RA requires a change in existing pitch attitude,
a green rectangular fly-to pitch cue appears above or below the no-fly pitch cue to indicate a recommended
pitch attitude. If multiple intruding aircraft limit available pitch travel in both directions, two no-fly pitch
cues appear on the pitch ladder, indicating the appropriate pitch attitude is between the two no-fly pitch cues.
While an RA is occurring, the Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI) shows vertical speeds required to resolve
the traffic conflict. A red vertical bar appears on the VSI scale to indicate the range of vertical speeds to be
avoided during the RA. If the current aircraft vertical speed is within this red range, the pointer on the VSI
appears red. The vertical speed readout appears in white when shown within the red VSI range. When an
RA directs the flight crew to fly to (or maintain) a vertical speed range, a green vertical bar appears on the VSI
scale at the recommended vertical speed range.
The system removes the pitch cues on the Attitude Indicator and vertical bars on the Vertical Speed Indicator
when the RA condition has been resolved. The TCAS II system issues a voice alert when the aircraft is clear
of the RA conflict.

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

421

HAZARD AVOIDANCE

Descend

Climb

Maintain, Don’t Climb

Maintain, Don’t Descend

Maintain, Don’t Climb and Don’t Descend

Increase Climb

Figure 6-77 Example Resolution Advisory Displays

DISPLAYING TCAS II TRAFFIC
TRAFFIC MAP PANE
The Traffic Map Pane shows surrounding traffic data in relation to the aircraft’s current position and altitude,
without basemap clutter. It is the principal map pane for viewing traffic information. Aircraft orientation
is always heading up unless there is no valid heading. Range rings indicate map ranges. Turn the Joystick
counter-clockwise to decrease the map range, or clockwise to increase the range.

422

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
The traffic operating mode and altitude display mode appear in the upper right corner of the Traffic Map
Pane.
To show the Traffic Map Pane, touch the Traffic Button on the Home Screen of the Touchscreen Controller.
In addition, when the PFD is operating in Split Mode, pressing the Traffic Softkey also displays the Traffic
Map Pane on the PFD.
Operating
Mode
Map Orientation

Altitude
Mode

Traffic Display
Range Rings

Non-Threat
Traffic, 2200’
Above,
Descending

No-Bearing
Traffic Advisory,
4.0 nm,
300’ Above,
Descending
Proximity
Advisory, 900’
Above, Level
Non-Threat
Traffic, Altitude
Not Reported

Traffic Advisory,
200’ Above,
Level
Off-Scale Traffic
Advisory, 600’
Below, Level

Figure 6-78 Traffic Map Pane (MFD in Full Mode)

Traffic Softkey also
displays Traffic Map
Pane when PFD is in
Split Mode
Figure 6-79 Using the Traffic Softkey to show Traffic Map
Pane (PFD in Split Mode)

ADDITIONAL TRAFFIC DISPLAYS
The system can overlay traffic information on the Navigation Map Pane as well as the PFD Inset Navigation
Map. Traffic information is also available on the PFD when the Synthetic Vision Technology (SVT) display is
enabled. See the Additional Features Section for details.

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

423

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Enabling/disabling display of traffic information (Navigation Map Pane):
1) From Home, touch Map > Map Settings.
2) If necessary, touch the Sensor Tab.
3) Touch the Traffic Button to enable/disable the traffic overlay on the Navigation Map Pane.

When the display of traffic is enabled on maps other than the Traffic Map Pane, the system shows a traffic
status icon in the lower right corner of the map (Figure 6-80).

Non-Threat
Traffic, Altitude
Not Reported

Traffic
Advisory,
500’ Below,
Climbing

TA Off Scale Banner
Annunciation

Proximity
Advisory

Non-Bearing Traffic
Advisory Banner
Annunciation

Traffic
Enabled Icon
Figure 6-80 TCAS II Traffic on Navigation Map Pane

Displaying/removing the PFD Inset Traffic Map (available when PFD is in Full Mode)
Press the Traffic Inset Softkey to display/remove the PFD Traffic Inset Map.
PFD Inset Traffic Map

Enables/Disables PFD
Inset Traffic Map
Figure 6-81 Displaying the PFD Inset Traffic Map

424

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

HAZARD AVOIDANCE

OPERATION
The Traffic Settings screen on the Touchscreen Controller provides controls for selecting the traffic system
mode, selecting the altitude ranges of traffic to display, and controlling whether the system displays relative or
absolute altitude of traffic.

Traffic System Test
in Progress
Figure 6-82 Testing the Traffic System (Traffic Settings Screen)

Testing the Traffic System:
1) From Home, touch Traffic > Traffic Settings.
2) Turn the Joystick as necessary to set the Traffic Map Pane range so the outer ring indicates ‘6 NM’. This will
allow the system to show all traffic symbols in the traffic test pattern.
3) Touch the Test Button. Button annunciator is green while test is in progress. If system test is successful, the
traffic maps show a test pattern of traffic symbols, the PFDs show pitch cues and vertical speed ranges indicating
not to climb or descend greater than 2000 feet per minute, and the TCAS II system issues a voice alert indicating
the system test has passed. If the test fails, the traffic system issues the voice alert indicating the system test
has failed, and the system enters Standby mode.
Or:
1) From Home, touch Map > Map Settings.
2) If necessary, touch the Sensor tab.
3) Touch the Traffic Settings Button.
4) Touch the Test Button. Button annunciator is green while test is in progress. If system test is successful, the
traffic maps show a test pattern of traffic symbols, the PFDs show pitch cues and vertical speed ranges indicating
not to climb or descend greater than 2000 feet per minute, and the TCAS II system issues a voice alert indicating
the system test has passed. If the test fails, the traffic system issues the voice alert indicating the system test
has failed, and the system enters Standby mode.

Selecting a TCAS II Mode (Traffic Settings Screen):
1) From Home, touch Traffic > Traffic Settings.
2) In the Operating Mode Window, touch one of the following buttons:

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

425

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
• TA/RA: Display traffic information and issues RA vertical guidance when applicable to resolve traffic
conflicts.
• TA Only: Displays traffic information without RA vertical guidance. RA traffic will be classified and displayed
as TA traffic in this mode.
• Standby: Traffic system enters Standby Mode and does not interrogate or display traffic.

The TCAS II modes can also be selected on the Transponder Screen. Selecting the Standby mode on the
Transponder screen also selects the Standby mode for the active transponder; selecting the TA/RA or TA Only
modes on this screen will cause the transponder to operate in Altitude Reporting mode, if it is not already
selected. Refer to the Audio & CNS section for more information about transponder modes.
Selecting a TCAS II Mode (Transponder Screen):
1) In the CNS Bar, touch the transponder settings button.
2) Touch the TCAS Mode Button (current mode displayed in light blue)
3) Touch one of the following buttons: TA/RA, TA Only, or Standby.

Accesses
Transponder Screen
Selected TCAS II
Mode

Current TCAS II
Mode
Selects/Displays
TCAS II Mode

Selected TCAS II mode
causes Transponder to
use Altitude Reporting
mode

TA/RA mode
selected
Figure 6-83 Selecting a TCAS II Mode on the Transponder Screen

426

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Altitude Range
The altitude range selection features allows flight crew to select the volume of airspace in which nonthreat and proximity traffic is displayed. Note the system will still show RAs and TAs occurring outside of
these limits regardless of the selected altitude range.
Changing the altitude range:
1) From Home, touch Traffic > Traffic Settings.
2) Touch one of the following Altitude Range Buttons:
• Unrestricted: All traffic is displayed from 9900 feet above and 9900 feet below the aircraft.
• Above: Displays non-threat and proximity traffic from 9000 feet above the aircraft to 2700 feet below the
aircraft. Typically used during the climb phase of flight.
• Normal: Displays non-threat and proximity traffic from 2700 feet above the aircraft to 2700 feet below the
aircraft. Typically used during enroute phase of flight.
• Below: Displays non-threat and proximity traffic from 2700 feet above the aircraft to 9000 feet below the
aircraft. Typically used during descent phase of flight.

Changing the display of Intruding Traffic Altitude:
1) From Home, touch Traffic > Traffic Settings.
2) If desired, touch the Relative Button to display the altitude of intruding aircraft relative to own aircraft altitude.
3) If desired, touch the Absolute Button to display the absolute altitude of intruding aircraft. The system may
revert to displaying relative altitude after 30 seconds if the TCAS II system is providing altitude which is not
corrected for the local barometric pressure setting.
Selects the
Altitude Range of
Intruding Traffic
to Display

Displays other aircraft
altitude relative to own
altitude
Displays absolute
altitude of other aircraft

Figure 6-84 Selecting Altitude Range and Altitude Mode for
displaying traffic

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

427

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Enabling/disabling display of traffic information on the Navigation Map Pane:
1) From Home, touch Map > Map Settings.
2) If necessary, touch the Sensor Tab.
3) Touch the Traffic Button to enable/disable overlay of traffic information.

Displaying/removing the Traffic Inset Map on the PFD:
Press the Traffic Inset Softkey to show or hide the PFD Traffic Inset Map.
Enabling/disabling display of traffic information on the PFD Inset Navigation Map
1) Press the Inset Map Settings Softkey.
2) Press the Traffic Softkey to enable/disable the overlay of traffic information on the map.

Customizing the display of traffic on the Navigation Map Panes:
1) From Home, touch Map > Map Settings.
2) If necessary, touch the Sensor Tab.
3) Touch the Traffic Settings Button.
4) Touch the Map Settings Button.
5) To change the map range above which the system removes traffic symbols from the display, touch the Symbols
Button, then scroll to and touch to select maximum map range to show traffic symbols.
6) Touch the Labels Annunciator Button to enable/disable the display of labels on traffic (such as altitude).
7) To change the map range at which the system removes traffic labels from the display, touch the Labels range
button, then scroll to and touch to select the maximum map range to show traffic labels.
8) When finished, touch the Back or Home Button.

428

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

HAZARD AVOIDANCE

SYSTEM STATUS
The traffic mode is annunciated in the upper right corner of the Traffic Map Pane
Mode

PFD Mode
Annunciation

TCAS II System Test In
Progress

None

Traffic Advisory and
Resolution Advisory
(TA/RA)
Traffic Advisory Only
(TA Only)
TCAS II Standby

Traffic Map Pane Mode
Annunciation
TEST
(‘TEST MODE’ also shown in white on
top center of pane)

Traffic Display Status Icon
(Other Maps)

TA/RA

None

TA ONLY

o Or:
*

STANDBY
(shown in white in center of pane on
ground, yellow in the air)
FAIL

TCAS II Failed**
* Annunciation appears in yellow while in the air.
** See Table 6-15 for additional failure annunciations.

Table 6-14 TCAS II Modes

If the traffic unit fails, an annunciation as to the cause of the failure is shown in the center of the Traffic Map
Pane.
Traffic Map Pane
Annunciation
NO DATA
DATA FAILED
FAILED

Description
Data is not being received from the TCAS II unit
Data is being received from the TCAS II unit, but the
unit is self-reporting a failure
Incorrect data format received from the TCAS II unit

Table 6-15 TCAS II Failure Annunciations

The annunciations to indicate the status of traffic information appear in a banner at the lower left corner of
maps on which traffic can be displayed.

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

429

HAZARD AVOIDANCE

Traffic Status Banner
Annunciation

Description

A Resolution Advisory is outside the selected display
range*. Annunciation is removed when traffic comes within
the selected display range
A Traffic Advisory is outside the selected display range*.
TA OFF SCALE
Annunciation is removed when traffic comes within the
selected display range.
System cannot determine bearing of Resolution Advisory**.
RA X.X ± XX Annunciation indicates distance in nm, altitude separation
or
in hundreds of feet, and altitude trend for climbing
for descending traffic.
System cannot determine bearing of Traffic Advisory**.
TA X.X ± XX or Annunciation indicates distance in nm, altitude separation

in hundreds of feet, and altitude trend for climbing
or for descending traffic.
TCAS II unit has failed (unit is self-reporting a failure or
TRFC FAIL
sending incorrectly formatted data)
NO TCAS DATA
Data is not being received from the TCAS II unit
RA OFF SCALE

*Shown as symbol on Traffic Map Pane
**Shown in center of Traffic Map Pane
Table 6-16 TCAS II Traffic Status Annunciations

430

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM

SECTION 7 AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
NOTE: The approved Airplane Flight Manual (AFM) always supersedes the information in this Pilot’s Guide.
NOTE: A failure of the primary (#1) GIA 63W Integrated Avionics Unit (IAU) results in loss of the flight

director. Any IAU failure results in loss of the autopilot and manual electric trim.
The GFC 700 is a digital Automatic Flight Control System (AFCS), fully integrated within the avionics
architecture. The System Overview section provides a block diagram to support this system description.
GFC 700 AFCS functionality is distributed across the following Line Replaceable Units (LRUs):
• GDU 1400W Primary Flight Displays (2) (PFD)

• GSA 81 AFCS Servos (3)

• GIA 63W Integrated Avionics Units (2)

• GSM 85A Servo Gearboxes (3)

• GMC 715 AFCS Control Unit

• GSA 80 AFCS Servo (1)

The GFC 700 AFCS can be divided into these main operating functions:
• Flight Director (FD) — The GFC 700 flight director function can be coupled to either the pilot-side or
copilot-side PFD data. The CPL Key selects the PFD source for the Flight Director. Commands for the selected
flight director source are displayed on both PFDs. The flight director provides:
– Vertical/lateral mode selection and processing
– Command Bars showing pitch/roll guidance
– Pitch and roll commands to the autopilot
• Autopilot (AP) — Autopilot operation occurs within the pitch and roll servos. It provides automatic flight
control in response to flight director steering commands, Attitude and Heading Reference System (AHRS)
attitude and rate information, and airspeed.
• Yaw Damper (YD) — The yaw servo provides Dutch roll damping and turn coordination in response to yaw
rate, roll angle, lateral acceleration, and airspeed.
• Manual Electric Pitch Trim (MEPT) — The pitch trim system provides manual electric pitch trim capability.
• Automatic Pitch Trim (APT)/Mach Trim (MT) — The pitch trim system provides automatic pitch trim
when the autopilot is engaged and Mach trim when the autopilot is not engaged.

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

431

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM

BASIC AUTOPILOT OPERATION
This section provides an overview for autopilot engagement and disengagement. A more detailed description
follows in Section 7.5.
• Autopilot Engagement — The autopilot may be engaged by pushing the AP Key on the AFCS Control Unit.
Annunciations regarding the engagement are indicated on the PFDs.
• Autopilot Engagement with Flight Director Off — Upon engagement, the autopilot will be set to hold the
current attitude of the airplane, if the flight director was not previously on. In this case, ‘PIT’ and ‘ROL’ will be
annunciated.
• Autopilot Engagement with Flight Director On — If the flight director is on, the autopilot will smoothly
pitch and roll the airplane to capture the FD command bars. The prior flight directore modes remain unchanged.
• Autopilot Disengagement — The most common way to disconnect the autopilot is to press and release the
AP DISC Switch, which is located on each control wheel. An autopilot disconnect tone will be heard and
annunciated on the PFDs. Other ways to disconnect the autopilot include:
– Pressing the AP Key on the AFCS Control Unit
– Pressing the GA Switch (located on the throttle handle)
– Operating the MEPT Switch (located on each control wheel)
– Pulling the autopilot circuit breaker
In the event of unexpected autopilot behavior, pressing and holding the AP DISC Switch will disconnect the
autopilot and remove all power to the servos.

432

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM

7.1 AFCS CONTROLS
The AFCS Control Unit is positioned above the MFD, and has the following controls:
1

FD Keys

Activate/deactivate the selected flight director (pilot- or copilot-side) in default
vertical and lateral modes
Press the other FD Key to toggle the corresponding PFD’s Command Bars off/on

NAV Key

HDG Key
4 AP Key
5 YD Key
6 ALT Key
7 VNV Key
8 VS Key
9 FLC Key
20 CRS Knobs
3

Selects/deselects Navigation Mode
Selects/deselects Heading Select Mode
Engages/disengages the autopilot
Engages/disengages the yaw damper
Selects/deselects Altitude Hold Mode
Selects/deselects Vertical Path Tracking Mode for Vertical Navigation flight control
Selects/deselects Vertical Speed Mode
Selects/deselects Flight Level Change Mode
Adjust the Selected Course (while in VOR, LOC, or OBS Mode) in 1° increments on
the Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI) of the corresponding PFD

Press to re-center the Course Deviation Indicator (CDI) and return course pointer
directly TO the bearing of the active waypoint/station
12 SPD SEL Knob Adjusts the Airspeed Reference and bug in 1-kt (0.01 M) increments

Press to toggle the Airspeed Reference units from IAS to Mach
UP/DN Wheel Adjusts the Vertical Speed Reference and bug in 100-fpm increments
ALT SEL Knob Adjusts the Selected Altitude and bug in 100-ft increments (a finer resolution of 10
feet is available under approach conditions)
Selects/deselects Current Speed Control (if available) when Altitude Hold Mode is
CSC Key
active
Selects the PFD data source (pilot-side or copilot-side) for the Flight Director.
CPL Key

When the flight director source is switched, the modes revert to default. An arrow
in the AFCS Status Box indicates the active FD source (pilot- or copilot-side).
Adjusts the Selected Heading and bug in 1° increments on the HSI (both PFDs)

13
14
15

HDG SEL
Knob

APR Key
19 BANK Key

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Press to synchronize the Selected Heading to the current heading on the pilot-side PFD
Selects/deselects Approach Mode
Manually selects/deselects Low Bank Mode

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

433

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
1

19 18 17

Figure 7-1 GMC 715 AFCS Control Unit

The following AFCS controls are located separately from the AFCS Control Unit:
AP DISC Switch
(Autopilot
Disconnect)

Disengages the autopilot, yaw damper, and flight director and interrupts pitch trim
operation
An AP DISC Switch is located on each control wheel.
This switch may be used to acknowledge an autopilot disconnect alert and mute
the associated aural alert.

CWS Button
(Control Wheel
Steering)

While pressed, allows manual control of the aircraft while the autopilot is engaged and
synchronizes the flight director’s Command Bars with the current aircraft pitch (if not
in Glideslope or Glidepath Mode) and roll (if in Roll Hold Mode)
A CWS Button is located on each control wheel.
Upon release of the CWS Button, the flight director may establish new pitch and
roll references, depending on the current vertical and lateral modes. CWS operation
details are discussed in the respective mode sections of this manual.

GA Switch
(Go Around)

Disengages the autopilot, if engaged, and selects flight director Takeoff Mode (on
ground) or Go Around Mode (in air)
This switch also activates the missed approach when the selected navigation source
is GPS or when the navigation source is VOR/LOC and a valid frequency has been
tuned.
The GA Switch is located on the throttle handle.

Used to command manual electric pitch trim
MEPT Switch
(Manual Electric An MEPT Switch is located on each control wheel.
Pitch Trim)
The pilot side MEPT Switch has priority over the copilot side MEPT Switch.
This composite switch is split into left and right sides. The left switch is the
ARM contact and the right switch controls the DN (forward) and UP (rearward)
contacts. Manual trim commands are generated only when both sides of the switch
are operated simultaneously. Pushing either MEPT Switch disengages the autopilot,
if engaged, but does not affect yaw damper operation.

434

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM

7.2 FLIGHT DIRECTOR OPERATION
The flight director function provides pitch and roll commands to the AFCS and displays them on the PFDs.
With the flight director active, the aircraft can be hand-flown to follow the path shown by the Command Bars.
Maximum commanded pitch (±20°) and roll (25°) angles, vertical acceleration, and roll rate are limited to values
established during AFCS certification. The flight director also provides commands to the autopilot.

ACTIVATING THE FLIGHT DIRECTOR
An initial press of a key listed in Table 7-1 activates the flight director in the listed modes.
Control Pressed

Modes Selected
ROL

Vertical
Pitch Hold (default)

PIT

Roll Hold (default)

ROL

Pitch Hold (default)

PIT

ALT Key
VS Key

Roll Hold (default)
Roll Hold (default)
Roll Hold (default)
Roll Hold (default)
Roll Hold (default)
Roll Hold (default)

ROL
ROL
ROL
ROL
ROL
ROL

PIT
PIT
TO
GA
ALT
VS

VNV Key

Roll Hold (default)

ROL

Pitch Hold (default)
Pitch Hold (default)
Takeoff (on ground)
Go Around (in air)
Altitude Hold
Vertical Speed
Vertical Path
Tracking**

FD Key (pilot-side)*
FD Key (copilotside)*
AP Key
CWS Button
GA Switch

Lateral
Roll Hold (default)

NAV Key

Navigation***

APR Key

Approach***

HDG Key

Heading Select

FMS
VOR
LOC
BC
FMS
VOR
LOC
HDG

VPTH

Pitch Hold (default)

PIT

Pitch Hold (default)

PIT

Pitch Hold (default)

PIT

*Subsequent presses of the FD Key will toggle the flight director on/off on its respective
side. However, pressing the FD Key for the inactive flight director only removes the
Command Bars from the corresponding display. The FD Keys are disabled when the
autopilot is engaged.
** Valid VNAV flight plan must be entered before VNV Key press activates flight director.
***The selected navigation receiver must have a valid VOR or LOC signal or active FMS
course before NAV or APR Key press activates flight director.
Table 7-1 Flight Director Activation

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

435

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM

FLIGHT DIRECTOR SELECTION
The GFC 700 flight director can be coupled to either the pilot-side or copilot-side PFD data using the CPL
Key. When the pilot-side or copilot-side data source is changed, the vertical and lateral modes revert to default.
The autopilot follows the selected flight director only, indicated by an arrow pointing toward either the pilot or
copilot side, in the center of the AFCS Status Box.
The currently active flight director may be turned off and the Command Bars removed from the displays
by pressing the active FD Key again. Pressing the FD Key for the inactive flight director only removes the
Command Bars from the corresponding display. The FD key for the selected flight director is disabled when
the autopilot is engaged.
Copilot-side Flight Director Selected

Pilot-side Flight Director Selected

Figure 7-2 Flight Director Selection Indications

AFCS STATUS BOX
Flight director mode annunciations are displayed on the PFDs when the flight director is active. Flight
director selection and autopilot and yaw damper statuses are shown in the center of the AFCS Status Box.
Lateral flight director modes are displayed on the left and vertical modes on the right. Armed modes are
displayed in white. Active modes are displayed in magenta when using FMS navigation, or green when using
other navigation sources.
Active

Yaw
Autopilot Damper
Status
Status

Lateral Modes

Flight Director
Indicator Arrow

Active

Armed

Vertical Modes

Selected
Altitude

Command
Bars

Figure 7-3 PFD AFCS Display

436

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM

COMMAND BARS
Upon activation of the flight director, Command Bars are displayed in magenta on the PFDs as single cue or
dual cue. The aircraft symbol (in yellow) changes to accommodate the Command Bar format; the Command
Bars do not override the aircraft symbol. The single cue Command Bars (Figure 7-4) move together vertically to
indicate pitch commands and bank left or right to indicate roll commands. Command Bars displayed as a cross
pointer (Figure 7-5) move independently to indicate pitch (horizontal bar) and roll (vertical bar) commands.
Both PFDs show the same Command Bar format.
NOTE: Dual cue command bars are not available when SVS is installed.
Command Bars

Aircraft Symbol
Figure 7-4 Single Cue Command Bars

Command Bars

Aircraft Symbol

Figure 7-5 Dual Cue Command Bars

Changing the selected Flight Director format:
1) From the Home Screen, touch Utilities >Setup > Avionics Settings.
3) Touch the System Tab.
4) Touch the Flight Director Active Format Data Field.
5) Touch desired setting (Single Cue or Dual Cue).

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

437

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM

Figure 7-6 Flight Director Format Settings

FLIGHT DIRECTOR MODES
Flight director modes are normally selected independently for the pitch and roll axes. Unless otherwise
specified, all mode keys are alternate action (i.e., press on, press off). In the absence of specific mode selection,
the flight director reverts to the default pitch and/or roll modes(s).
Under normal operation when the control for the active flight director mode is pressed, the flight director
reverts to the default modes(s) for the axis(es). Automatic transition from armed to active mode is indicated
by the white armed mode annunciation moving to the green or magenta active mode field and flashing for 10
seconds.
If the information required to compute a flight director mode becomes invalid or unavailable, the flight
director automatically reverts to the default mode for that axis. A flashing yellow mode annunciation and
annunciator light indicate loss of sensor (ADC) or navigation data (VOR, LOC, FMS, SBAS) required to compute
commands. When such a loss occurs, the system automatically rolls the wings level and then enters Roll Hold
Mode, or maintains the pitch angle (enters Pitch Hold Mode), depending on the affected axis. The flashing
annunciation stops when the affected mode key is pressed or another mode for the axis is selected. If after 10
seconds no action is taken, the flashing annunciation stops.

Figure 7-7 Loss of VOR Signal

The flight director is automatically disabled if the attitude information required to compute the default flight
director modes becomes invalid or unavailable.

438

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM

7.3 VERTICAL MODES
Table 7-2 lists the vertical modes with their corresponding controls and annunciations. The mode reference is
displayed next to the active mode annunciation for Altitude Hold, Vertical Speed, and Flight Level Change modes.
The UP/DN Wheel can be used to change the vertical mode reference while operating under Pitch Hold, Vertical
Speed, or Flight Level Change Mode. Increments of change and acceptable ranges of values for each of these
references using the UP/DN Wheel are also listed in the table.

Vertical Mode

Pitch Hold
Selected Altitude Capture
Altitude Hold
Vertical Speed

Flight Level Change

Vertical Path Tracking
VNAV Target Altitude Capture
Glidepath
Glideslope
Takeoff
Go Around

Description

Control Annunciation

Reference
Range

Holds aircraft pitch attitude; may
be used to climb/descend to the (default)
PIT
-15° to +20°
Selected Altitude
Captures the Selected Altitude
*
ALTS
Holds current Altitude Reference ALT Key ALT nnnnn ft
Holds aircraft vertical speed; may
-2000 to
be used to climb/descend to the
VS Key VS nnnn fpm
+1500 fpm
Selected Altitude
80 to 200 kts
Holds aircraft airspeed while
(350)
aircraft is climbing/descending to FLC Key FLC nnn kt
80 to 210 kts
the Selected Altitude
(400)
Captures and tracks descent legs
VNV
VPTH
of an active vertical profile
Key
Captures the Vertical Navigation
**
ALTV
(VNAV) Target Altitude
Captures and tracks the SBAS
or baro-VNAV glidepath on
GP
APR
approach
Key
Captures and tracks the ILS
GS
glideslope on approach
Commands a constant pitch angle
and wings level on the ground in
TO
8°
GA
preparation for takeoff
Switch
Commands a constant pitch
GA
7°
angle and wings level

Reference
Change
Increment
0.5°

100 fpm

1 kt

* ALTS is armed automatically when PIT, VS, FLC, TO, or GA is active, and under VPTH when the Selected Altitude is to be
captured instead of the VNAV Target Altitude.
** ALTV is armed automatically under VPTH when the VNAV Target Altitude is to be captured instead of the Selected Altitude.
Table 7-2 Flight Director Vertical Modes

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

439

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM

PITCH HOLD MODE (PIT)
When the flight director is activated (the FD Key is pressed), Pitch Hold Mode is selected by default. Pitch
Hold Mode is indicated as the active pitch mode by the green annunciation ‘PIT’. This mode may be used for
climb or descent to the Selected Altitude (shown above the Altimeter), since Selected Altitude Capture Mode is
automatically armed when Pitch Hold Mode is activated.
In Pitch Hold Mode, the flight director maintains a constant pitch attitude, the pitch reference. The pitch
reference is set to the aircraft pitch attitude at the moment of mode selection. If the aircraft pitch attitude
exceeds the flight director pitch command limitations, the flight director commands a pitch angle equal to the
nose-up/down limit.

CHANGING THE PITCH REFERENCE
When operating in Pitch Hold Mode, the pitch reference can be adjusted by:
• Using the UP/ DN Wheel
• By pressing the CWS Button, hand-flying the aircraft to establish a new pitch reference, then releasing the
CWS Button
Pitch Hold
Mode Active

Selected Altitude
Capture Mode Armed

Selected
Altitude

Command Bars Maintain
Desired Pitch Reference
Figure 7-8 Pitch Hold Mode

440

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM

SELECTED ALTITUDE CAPTURE MODE (ALTS)
Selected Altitude Capture Mode is automatically armed with activation of the following modes:
• Pitch Hold

• Takeoff/Go Around (if the Selected Altitude is at
least 400 feet above the current aircraft altitude)

• Vertical Speed

• Vertical Path Tracking (if the Selected Altitude is to
be captured instead of the VNAV Target Altitude)

• Flight Level Change

The white ‘ALTS’ annunciation indicates Selected Altitude Capture Mode is armed (see Figure 7-2 for
example). The ALT SEL Knob is used to set the Selected Altitude (shown above the Altimeter) until Selected
Altitude Capture Mode becomes active.
As the aircraft nears the Selected Altitude, the flight director automatically transitions to Selected Altitude
Capture Mode with Altitude Hold Mode armed (Figure 7-8). This automatic transition is indicated by the green
‘ALTS’ annunciation flashing for up to 5 seconds and the appearance of the white ‘ALT’ annunciation.
At 50 feet from the Selected Altitude, the flight director automatically transitions from Selected Altitude
Capture to Altitude Hold Mode and holds the Selected Altitude. As Altitude Hold Mode becomes active, the
white ‘ALT’ annunciation moves to the active vertical mode field and flashes green for 5 seconds to indicate the
automatic transition.
Flash up to Five
Seconds, Indicating
Automatic Transition

Figure 7-9 Automatic Mode Transitions During Altitude Capture

CHANGING THE SELECTED ALTITUDE
NOTE: Pressing the CWS Button while in Selected Altitude Capture Mode does not cancel the mode.

Use of the ALT SEL Knob to change the Selected Altitude while Selected Altitude Capture Mode is active
causes the flight director to revert to Pitch Hold Mode with Selected Altitude Capture Mode armed for the
new Selected Altitude.

ALTITUDE HOLD MODE (ALT)
If Altitude Hold Mode is activated by pressing the ALT Key; the flight director maintains the current aircraft
altitude (to the nearest 10 feet). Altitude Hold Mode active is indicated by an ‘ALT’ annunciation in the AFCS
Status Box.
Altitude Hold Mode is automatically armed when the flight director is in either of the following modes:
• Selected Altitude Capture
• VNV Target Altitude Capture

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

441

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
The transition to Altitude Hold Mode automatically occurs when the altitude error is less than 50 feet. In
this case, the Selected or VNV Target Altitude becomes the flight director’s altitude reference. The active mode
annunciation ‘ALT’ appears if the transition was made from VNV Target Altitude Capture Mode.

CHANGING THE ALTITUDE REFERENCE
NOTE: Turning the ALT SEL Knob while in Altitude Hold Mode changes the Selected Altitude, but not the

flight director’s altitude reference, and does not cancel the mode.
With the CWS Button pressed, the aircraft can be hand-flown to a new altitude reference. When the CWS
Button is released at the desired altitude, the new altitude is established as the altitude reference.

CURRENT SPEED CONTROL (IF AVAILABLE)
Current Speed Control (if available) can be engaged if the autopilot is engaged and Altitude Hold Mode (ALT)
or VNV Target Altitude Capture (ALTV) Mode is active. When the CSC Key is pressed, the Full Authority
Digital Engine Control (FADEC) varies engine thrust to maintain the desired Airspeed Reference (green Airspeed
Reference Bug), within a certain control range.
NOTE: For CSC engagement and disengagement detailed conditions, see the approved Pilot’s Operating

Handbook (POH).
Current Speed Altitude Hold
Control Active Mode Active

Airspeed
Reference

Selected
Altitude

Airspeed
Reference
Bug

Selected
Altitude
Bug

Command Bars Hold Pitch Attitude
to Maintain Altitude Reference
Figure 7-10 Altitude Hold Mode

442

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM

VERTICAL SPEED MODE (VS)
In Vertical Speed Mode, the flight director acquires and maintains a Vertical Speed Reference (shown above
the Vertical Speed Indicator). Current aircraft vertical speed (to the nearest 100 fpm) becomes the Vertical
Speed Reference at the moment of Vertical Speed Mode activation. This mode may be used for climb or descent
to the Selected Altitude (shown above the Altimeter) since Selected Altitude Capture Mode is automatically
armed when Vertical Speed Mode is selected.
When Vertical Speed Mode is activated by pressing the VS Key, ‘VS’ is annunciated in green in the AFCS Status
Box. The Vertical Speed Reference is displayed above the Vertical Speed Indicator. A Vertical Speed Reference
Bug corresponding to the Vertical Speed Reference is shown on the indicator.

CHANGING THE VERTICAL SPEED REFERENCE
The Vertical Speed Reference (shown above the Vertical Speed Indicator) may be changed by:
• Using the UP/DN Wheel
• Pressing the CWS Button, hand-flying the aircraft to attain a new Vertical Speed Reference, then releasing
the CWS Button
Selected Altitude
Capture Mode
Armed

Vertical Speed
Mode Active

Selected
Altitude

Vertical
Speed
Reference
Vertical
Speed
Reference
Bug

Command Bars Indicate Climb to
Attain Vertical Speed Reference
Figure 7-11 Vertical Speed Mode

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

443

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM

FLIGHT LEVEL CHANGE MODE (FLC)
NOTE: The Selected Altitude should be set before selecting Flight Level Change Mode.

Flight Level Change Mode is selected by pressing the FLC Key. This mode acquires and maintains the
Airspeed Reference (in IAS or Mach) while climbing or descending to the Selected Altitude (shown above
the Altimeter). When Flight Level Change Mode is active, the flight director continuously monitors Selected
Altitude, airspeed, Mach, and altitude.
The Airspeed Reference is set to the current airspeed upon mode activation. Flight Level Change Mode
is indicated by a green ‘FLC’ annunciation in the AFCS Status Box. The Airspeed Reference is displayed
directly above the Airspeed Indicator, along with a cyan Airspeed Reference Bug corresponding to the Airspeed
Reference along the tape.
Engine power must be adjusted to allow the autopilot to fly the aircraft at a pitch attitude corresponding
to the desired flight profile (climb or descent) while maintaining the Airspeed Reference. The flight director
maintains the current altitude until either engine power or the Airspeed Reference are adjusted and does not
allow the aircraft to climb or descend away from the Selected Altitude.
Selected Altitude
Capture Mode
Armed

Flight Level Change
Mode Active

Airspeed
Reference

Airspeed
Reference
Bug

Command Bars Indicate Climb
to Attain Selected Altitude
Figure 7-12 Flight Level Change Mode

CHANGING THE AIRSPEED REFERENCE (FLC MODE)
The Airspeed Reference (shown above the Airspeed Indicator) may be adjusted by:
• Using the SPD SEL Knob
• Pressing the CWS Button, hand-flying the aircraft to attain a new Airspeed Reference, then releasing the
CWS Button

444

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
During climb, the Airspeed Reference units automatically change from IAS to Mach when either the altitude
or the airspeed listed in Table 7-3 are attained. For descent, the units switch back at the specified altitude
or airspeed. The system determines aircraft climb or descent by the relationship between the current and
Selected altitudes.
Airspeed Reference Units
Default Units Change To:
Climb
IAS
Mach
Descent
Mach
IAS

Unit Type Changes At:
Altitude
Airspeed
> 31,500 ft > M 0.55
< 30,500 ft < 250 kt

Table 7-3 FLC Mode Unit Changes

Airspeed Reference units can be manually toggled between IAS and Mach units by pressing the SPD SEL
Knob. When the FLC Airspeed Reference is displayed in Mach, the Airspeed Reference Bug is displayed
on the Airspeed Indicator at the IAS corresponding to the selected Mach target speed and the current Mach
number is shown below the Airspeed Indicator.
The Airspeed Reference Bug can be set at all times (to be used as a visual reference) except when CSC is
engaged. In CSC mode the Airspeed Reference Bug is fixed and set at the airspeed existing at the time of CSC
engagement. While the bug can be set during these modes it is only being controlled when in FLC mode,
when CSC is engaged, etc.

VERTICAL NAVIGATION MODES (VPTH , ALTV)
NOTE: VNAV is disabled when parallel track or dead reckoning mode is active.
NOTE: The Selected Altitude takes precedence over any other vertical constraints.

Vertical Navigation (VNAV) flight control is available for enroute/terminal cruise and descent operations when
VNAV flight planning is available. Refer to the Flight Management Section for more information on VNAV flight
plans. Conditions for availability include, but are not limited to:
• The selected navigation source is FMS.
• A VNAV flight plan (with at least one altitude-constrained waypoint) or vertical direct-to is active.
• VNAV is enabled.
• Crosstrack error is valid and within certain limits.
• Desired/actual track are valid or track angle error is within certain limits.
• The VNAV Target Altitude of the active waypoint is no more than 250 ft above the current aircraft altitude.
• Parallel track is not active.
The flight director may be armed for VNAV at any time, but no target altitudes are captured during a climb.
The Command Bars provide vertical profile guidance based on specified altitudes (entered manually or loaded
from the database) at waypoints in the active flight plan or vertical direct-to. The appropriate VNAV flight
control modes are sequenced by the flight director to follow the path defined by the vertical profile. Upon
reaching the last waypoint in the VNAV flight plan, the flight director transitions to Altitude Hold Mode and
cancels any armed VNAV modes.
190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

445

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
VERTICAL PATH TRACKING MODE (VPTH)
NOTE: If another pitch mode key is pressed while Vertical Path Tracking Mode is selected, Vertical Path

Tracking Mode reverts to armed.
NOTE: Pressing the CWS Button while Vertical Path Tracking Mode is active does not cancel the mode. The

autopilot guides the aircraft back to the descent path upon release of the CWS Button.

When a vertical profile (VNAV flight plan) is active and the VNV Key is pressed, Vertical Path Tracking
Mode is armed in preparation for descent path capture. ‘VPTH’ (or ‘/V’ when Glidepath or Glideslope Mode
is concurrently armed) is annunciated in white in addition to previously armed modes. If applicable, the
appropriate altitude capture mode is armed for capture of the next VNAV Target Altitude (ALTV) or the
Selected Altitude (ALTS), whichever is greater.

Figure 7-13 Vertical Path Tracking Armed Annunciations

Prior to descent path interception, the Selected Altitude must be set below the current aircraft altitude
by at least 75 feet. For the flight director to transition from Altitude Hold to Vertical Path Tracking Mode,
acknowledgment is required within 5 minutes of descent path interception by:
• Pressing the VNV Key
• Adjusting the Selected Altitude
If acknowledgment is not received within 1 minute of descent path interception, the white ‘VPTH’
annunciation starts to flash. Flashing continues until acknowledged or the descent path is intercepted. If
the descent is not confirmed by the time of interception, Vertical Path Tracking Mode remains armed and the
descent is not captured.
In conjunction with the “TOD [top of descent] within 1 minute” annunciation in the Navigation Status
Box and the “Vertical track” voice message, VNAV indications (VNAV Target Altitude, vertical deviation, and
vertical speed required) appear on the PFDs in magenta (Figure 7-14).

446

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
VNAV Target
Altitude

Selected
Altitude

Altitude Hold
Mode Active

Vertical Path Tracking
Armed and flashing
Vertical
Deviation
Indicator

Required
Vertical
Speed
Indicator

Terminal
Phase
of Flight

FMS is
Selected
Navigation
Source

Figure 7-14 Vertical Path Capture

When a descent leg is captured (i.e., vertical deviation becomes valid), Vertical Path Tracking becomes
active and tracks the descent profile (Figure 7-15). An altitude capture mode (‘ALTS’ or ‘ALTV’) is armed as
appropriate.
Vertical Path VNAV Target Altitude
Tracking Active
Capture Armed

VNAV
Target
Altitude

Required
Vertical
Speed
Indication

FMS is
Selected
Navigation
Source

Terminal
Phase of
Flight

Command Bars Indicate Descent to
Maintain Required Vertical Speed

Vertical
Deviation
Indicator

Figure 7-15 Vertical Path Tracking Mode

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

447

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
If the Altimeter’s barometric setting is adjusted while Vertical Path Tracking is active, the flight director
increases/decreases the descent rate by up to 500 fpm to re-establish the aircraft on the descent path (without
commanding a climb). Adjusting the altimeter barometric setting creates discontinuities in VNAV vertical
deviation, moving the descent path. For large adjustments, it may take several minutes for the aircraft to reestablish on the descent path. If the change is made while nearing a waypoint with a VNAV Target Altitude,
the aircraft may not re-establish on the descent path in time to meet the vertical constraint.

Automatic Reversion to Pitch Hold Mode
Several situations can occur while Vertical Path Tracking Mode is active which cause the flight director to
revert to Pitch Hold Mode:
• Vertical deviation exceeds 200 feet during an overspeed condition.
• Vertical deviation experiences a discontinuity that both exceeds 200 feet in magnitude and results in the
vertical deviation exceeding 200 feet in magnitude. Such discontinuities are usually caused by flight plan
changes that affect the vertical profile.
• Vertical deviation becomes invalid (the Vertical Deviation Indicator is removed from the PFD).
• A display enters Reversionary Mode (this does not apply to an active vertical direct-to).
Unless VNAV is disabled, Vertical Path Tracking Mode and the appropriate altitude capture mode become
armed following the reversion to Pitch Hold Mode to allow for possible profile recapture.

Non-Path Descents
Pitch Hold, Vertical Speed, and Flight Level Change modes can also be used to fly non-path descents
while VNAV flight control is selected. If the VS or FLC Key is pressed while Vertical Path Tracking Mode
is selected, Vertical Path Tracking Mode reverts to armed along with the appropriate altitude capture mode
to allow profile re-capture.

Figure 7-16 Flight Level Change VNV Non-Path Descent

To prevent immediate profile re-capture, the following must be satisfied:
• At least 10 seconds have passed since the non-path transition was initiated
• Vertical deviation from the profile has exceeded 250 feet, but is now less than 200 feet
Pressing the VNV Key twice re-arms Vertical Path Tracking for immediate profile re-capture.

448

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
VNAV TARGET ALTITUDE CAPTURE MODE (ALTV)
NOTE: Armed VNAV Target Altitude and Selected Altitude capture modes are mutually exclusive. However,

Selected Altitude Capture Mode is armed implicitly (not annunciated) whenever VNAV Target Altitude
Capture Mode is armed.
VNAV Target Altitude Capture is analogous to Selected Altitude Capture Mode and is armed automatically
after the VNV Key is pressed and the next VNAV Target Altitude is to be intercepted before the Selected
Altitude. The annunciation ‘ALTV’ indicates that the VNAV Target Altitude is to be captured. VNAV Target
Altitudes are shown in the active flight plan or vertical direct-to, and can be entered manually or loaded
from a database (see the FMS Navigation Section for details). At the same time as “TOD within 1 minute”
is annunciated in the Navigation Status Box, the active VNAV Target Altitude is displayed above the Vertical
Speed Indicator (see Figure 7-14).
As the aircraft nears the VNAV Target Altitude, the flight director automatically transitions to VNAV Target
Altitude Capture Mode with Altitude Hold Mode armed. This automatic transition is indicated by the magenta
‘ALTV’ annunciation flashing for up to 10 seconds and the appearance of the white ‘ALT” annunciation.
The VNAV Target Altitude is shown as the Altitude Reference beside the ‘ALTV’ annunciation and remains
displayed above the Vertical Speed Indicator. The Required Vertical Speed Indication (RVSI) is removed once
VNAV Target Altitude Capture Mode becomes active.
At 50 feet from the VNAV Target Altitude, the flight director automatically transitions from VNAV Target
Altitude Capture to Altitude Hold Mode and tracks the level leg. As Altitude Hold Mode becomes active,
the white ‘ALT’ annunciation moves to the active vertical mode field and flashes magenta for 10 seconds to
indicate the automatic transition. The flight director automatically arms Vertical Path Tracking, allowing
upcoming descent legs to be captured and subsequently tracked.

Figure 7-17 Automatic Mode Transitions During Altitude Capture

Changing the VNAV Target Altitude
NOTE: Pressing the CWS Button while in VNAV Target Altitude Capture Mode does not cancel the mode.

Changing the current VNAV Target Altitude while VNAV Target Altitude Capture Mode is active causes
the flight director to revert to Pitch Hold Mode. Vertical Path Tracking and the appropriate altitude capture
mode are armed in preparation to capture the new VNAV Target Altitude or the Selected Altitude, depending
on which altitude is to be intercepted first.
VNAV target altitudes can be changed while editing the active flight plan (see the Flight Management
Section for details).

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

449

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM

GLIDEPATH MODE (GP)
NOTE: Pressing the CWS Button while Glidepath Mode is active does not cancel the mode. The autopilot

guides the aircraft back to the glidepath upon release of the CWS Button.

Glidepath Mode is used to track the SBAS or baro-VNAV glidepath. When Glidepath Mode is armed, ‘GP’ is
annunciated in white in the AFCS Status Box.
Selecting Glidepath Mode:
1) Ensure a FMS approach is loaded into the active flight plan. The active waypoint must be part of the flight plan
(cannot be a direct-to a waypoint not in the flight plan).
2) Ensure that FMS is the selected navigation source (use the Active Nav Softkey to cycle through navigation
sources).
3) Press the APR Key.
NOTE: Some RNAV (FMS) approaches provide a vertical descent angle as an aid in flying a stabilized

approach. These approaches are NOT considered Approaches with Vertical Guidance (APV). Approaches
that are annunciated on the HSI as LNAV or LNAV+V are considered Nonprecision Approaches (NPA) and
are flown to an MDA even though vertical glidepath (GP) information may be provided.
WARNING: When flying an LNAV approach (with vertical descent angle) with the autopilot coupled, the

aircraft will not level off at the MDA even if the MDA is set in the altitude preselect.
Upon reaching the glidepath, the flight director transitions to Glidepath Mode and begins to capture and
track the glidepath.

Figure 7-18 Glidepath Mode Armed

Once the following conditions have been met, the glidepath can be captured:
• A GPS approach with vertical guidance (LPV, LNAV/VNAV, LNAV+V) is loaded into the active flight plan.
• The active waypoint is at or after the final approach fix (FAF).
• Vertical deviation is valid.
• The CDI is at less than full scale deviation
• Automatic sequencing of waypoints has not been suspended (no ‘SUSP’ annunciation on the HSI)

450

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
FMS Approach
Mode Active

FMS is Selected
Navigation
Source

Glidepath
Mode Active

LNAV/VNAV
Approach
Active

Command Bars Indicate
Descent on Glidepath

Glidepath
Indicator

Figure 7-19 Glidepath Mode

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

451

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM

GLIDESLOPE MODE (GS)
NOTE: Pressing the CWS Button while Glideslope Mode is active does not cancel the mode. The autopilot

guides the aircraft back to the glideslope upon release of the CWS Button.

Glideslope Mode is available for LOC/ILS approaches to capture and track the glideslope. When Glideslope
Mode is armed (annunciated as ‘GS’ in white), LOC Approach Mode is armed as the lateral flight director
mode.
Selecting Glideslope Mode:
1) Ensure a valid localizer frequency is tuned.
2) Ensure that LOC is the selected navigation source (use the Active Nav Softkey to cycle through navigation
sources).
3) Press the APR Key.
Or:
1) Ensure that FMS is the selected navigation source (use the Active Nav Softkey to cycle through navigation
sources).
2) Ensure a LOC/ILS approach is loaded into the active flight plan.
3) Ensure the corresponding LOC frequency is tuned.
4) Press the APR Key.

Figure 7-20 Glideslope Mode Armed

Once LOC is the navigation source, the localizer and glideslope can be captured. Upon reaching the glideslope,
the flight director transitions to Glideslope Mode and begins to intercept and track the glideslope.
Approach
Mode Active

NAV1 (localizer) is Selected
Navigation Source

Glideslope
Mode Active

Command Bars Indicate Descent
on Localizer/Glideslope Path

Glideslope
Indicator

Figure 7- 21 Glideslope Mode

452

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM

TAKEOFF (TO) AND GO AROUND (GA) MODES
In Go Around and Takeoff modes, the flight director commands a constant set pitch attitude. The TO/GA
Switch is used to select both modes. The mode entered by the flight director depends on whether the aircraft
is on the ground. Selected Altitude Capture Mode is automatically armed when the aircraft is at least 400 feet
below the Selected Altitude at the time Takeoff or Go Around Mode is selected. When Takeoff or Go Around
mode is activated, the lateral mode is annunciated as ‘ROL’.
Takeoff Mode provides an attitude reference during rotation and takeoff. This mode can be selected only
while on the ground by pushing the TO/GA Switch. The flight director Command Bars assume a wings-level,
pitch-up attitude. Autopilot engagement while Takeoff Mode is active is inhibited while the aircraft is on the
ground.
Pressing the TO/GA Switch while in the air activates the flight director in a wings-level, pitch-up attitude,
allowing the execution of a missed approach or a go around. Selecting Go Around Mode disengages the
autopilot; however, subsequent autopilot engagement is allowed. Attempts to modify the aircraft attitude (i.e.,
with the CWS Button) result in reversion to Pitch Hold Mode.
Go Around
Mode Active

Takeoff
Mode Active

Command Bars Indicate Climb
Figure 7-22 Takeoff and Go Around Modes

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

453

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM

7.4 LATERAL MODES
The following table relates each GFC 700 lateral mode to its respective control and annunciation. Refer to the
vertical modes section for information regarding Takeoff and Go Around mode.
Annunciation

Maximum Roll
Command
Limit

ROL

30˚

15˚

HDG

30˚

Navigation, FMS **

FMS

Navigation, VOR Enroute Capture/Track ** Captures and tracks the
selected navigation source
(FMS, VOR, LOC)
Navigation, LOC Capture/Track

VOR

30˚
25˚ Capture
10˚ Track
25˚ Capture
10˚ Track

Lateral Mode

Description

Control

Holds the current aircraft roll
attitude or rolls the wings level,
(default)
depending on the commanded
bank angle
Limits the maximum
BANK Key
commanded roll angle
Captures and tracks the
HDG Key
Selected Heading

Roll Hold

Low Bank
Heading Select **

(No Glideslope)

NAV Key

Captures and tracks a
Navigation, Backcourse Arm/Capture/Track localizer signal for backcourse
approaches
Approach, FMS
Approach, VOR Capture/Track
Approach, LOC Capture/Track
(Glideslope Mode automatically armed)

Captures and tracks the
selected navigation source
(FMS, VOR, LOC)

LOC
BC
FMS

APR Key

VAPP
LOC

25˚ Capture
10˚ Track
30˚
25˚ Capture
10˚ Track
25˚ Capture
10˚ Track

* No annunciation appears in the AFCS Status Box. The acceptable bank angle range is indicated in green along the Roll
Scale of the Attitude Indicator.
** The Heading, Navigation FMS and Navigation VOR mode maximum roll command limit will be limited to the Low Bank
mode value if it is engaged.
The GFC 700 limits turn rate to 3 degrees per second (standard rate turn).
Table 7-3 Flight Director Lateral Modes

The CWS Button does not change lateral references for Heading Select, Navigation, Backcourse, or Approach
modes. The autopilot guides the aircraft back to the Selected Heading/Course upon release of the CWS Button.

454

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM

ROLL HOLD MODE (ROL)
NOTE: If Roll Hold Mode is activated as a result of a mode reversion, the flight director rolls the wings level.

When the flight director is activated, Roll Hold Mode is selected by default. This mode is annunciated as
‘ROL’ in the AFCS Status Box. The current aircraft bank angle is held, subject to the bank angle conditions listed
in Table 7-4.

Figure 7-23 Roll Hold Mode Annunciation

Bank Angle
Flight Director Response
< 6°
Rolls wings level
6° to 30° Maintains current aircraft roll attitude
> 30°
Limits bank to 30°
Table 7-4 Roll Hold Mode Responses

CHANGING THE ROLL REFERENCE
The roll reference can be changed by pressing the CWS Button, establishing the desired bank angle, then
releasing the CWS Button.

LOW BANK MODE
When in Low Bank Mode, the flight director limits the maximum commanded roll angle to 15°. Low bank
arc limits are displayed in green along the Roll Scale. Low Bank Mode can be manually selected/deselected by
pressing the BANK Key while in Heading Select or Navigation Modes (FMS and VOR).

Figure 7-24 Low Bank Mode Limits

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

455

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM

HEADING SELECT MODE (HDG)
Heading Select Mode is activated by pressing the HDG Key. Heading Select Mode acquires and maintains
the Selected Heading. The Selected Heading is shown by a light blue bug on the HSI and in the box to the
upper left of the HSI.

CHANGING THE SELECTED HEADING
NOTE: Pressing the HDG Knob synchronizes the Selected Heading to the current heading.

The Selected Heading is adjusted using the HDG Knob. Pressing the CWS Button and hand-flying the
aircraft does not change the Selected Heading. The autopilot guides the aircraft back to the Selected Heading
upon release of the CWS Button.
Turns are commanded in the same direction as Selected Heading Bug movement, even if the Bug is turned
more than 180° from the present heading (e.g., a 270° turn to the right). However, Selected Heading changes
of more than 340° at a time result in turn reversals.
Heading Select
Mode Active

Selected
Heading

Selected
Heading Bug

Pitch Mode
Active

Command Bars Track
Selected Heading

Figure 7-25 Heading Select Mode

456

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM

NAVIGATION MODES (FMS, VOR, LOC, BC)
NOTE: The selected navigation receiver must have a valid VOR or LOC signal or active FMS course for the

flight director to enter Navigation Mode.
NOTE: When intercepting a flight plan leg, the flight director gives commands to capture the active leg at

approximately a 45° angle to the track between the waypoints defining the active leg. The flight director
does not give commands fly to the starting waypoint of the active leg.
Pressing the NAV Key selects Navigation Mode. Navigation Mode acquires and tracks the selected navigation
source (FMS, VOR, LOC). The flight director follows FMS roll steering commands when FMS is the selected
navigation source. When the navigation source is VOR or LOC, the flight director creates roll steering commands
from the Selected Course and deviation. Navigation Mode can also be used to fly non-precision FMS and LOC
approaches where glideslope capture is not required.
Backcourse Mode captures and tracks a localizer signal in the backcourse direction. The mode may be selected
by pressing the NAV Key. When making a backcourse approach, set the Selected Course to the localizer front
course. The flight director creates roll steering commands from the Selected Course and deviation.
If the Course Deviation Indicator (CDI) shows greater than one dot when the NAV Key is pressed, the selected
mode is armed. If the CDI is less than one dot, Navigation Mode is automatically captured when the NAV Key
is pressed. The armed annunciation appears in white to the left of the active roll mode.

Figure 7-26 FMS Navigation Mode Armed

When the CDI has automatically switched from FMS to LOC during a LOC/ILS approach, FMS Navigation
Mode remains active, providing FMS steering guidance until the localizer signal is captured. LOC Navigation
Mode is armed when the automatic navigation source switch takes place. If the APR Key is pressed prior to the
automatic navigation source switch, LOC Navigation Mode is armed.
If Navigation Mode is active and either of the following occur, the flight director reverts to Roll Hold Mode
(wings rolled level):
• Different VOR tuned while in VOR Navigation Mode (VOR Navigation Mode reverts to armed)
• Navigation source manually switched (with the Active Nav Softkey)
• During a LOC/ILS approach, the FAF is crossed while in FMS Navigation Mode after the automatic navigation
source switch from FMS to LOC.

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

457

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
Pressing the CWS Button and hand-flying the aircraft does not change the Selected Course while in
Navigation Mode. The autopilot guides the aircraft back to the Selected Course (or FMS flight plan) when
the CWS Button is released.
Pitch Mode
Active

FMS Navigation
Mode Active

Selected
Course

FMS is Selected
Navigation
Source

Selected Altitude
Capture Mode
Armed

Command Bars Indicate Left
Turn to Track FMS Course and Climb
to Intercept Selected Altitude

Figure 7-27 FMS Navigation Mode
Backcourse
Mode Active

LOC2 is Selected Navigation Source

Pitch Hold
Mode Active

Command Bars Hold Pitch Attitude

Figure 7-28 Navigation Backcourse Mode

458

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM

APPROACH MODES (FMS, VAPP, LOC)
NOTE: The selected navigation receiver must have a valid VOR or LOC signal or active FMS course for the

flight director to enter Approach Mode.
Approach Mode is activated when the APR Key is pressed. Approach Mode acquires and tracks the
selected navigation source (FMS, VOR, or LOC), depending on loaded approach. This mode uses the selected
navigation receiver deviation and desired course inputs to fly the approach. Pressing the APR Key when
the CDI is greater than one dot arms the selected approach mode (annunciated in white to the left of the
active lateral mode). If the CDI is less than one dot, the LOC is automatically captured when the APR Key
is pressed.
VOR Approach Mode (VAPP) provides greater sensitivity for signal tracking than VOR Navigation Mode .
Selecting VOR Approach Mode:
1) Ensure a valid VOR frequency is tuned.
2) Ensure that VOR is the selected navigation source (use the Active Nav Softkey to cycle through navigation
sources if necessary).
3) Press the APR Key.

When FMS Approach Mode is armed, Glidepath Mode is also armed.
Selecting FMS Approach Mode:
1) Ensure a FMS approach is loaded into the active flight plan. The active waypoint must be part of the flight plan
(cannot be a direct-to a waypoint not in the flight plan).
2) Ensure that FMS is the selected navigation source (use the Active Nav Softkey to cycle through navigation
sources if necessary).
3) Press the APR Key.

Figure 7-29 Navigation/Approach Mode Armed

LOC Approach Mode allows the autopilot to fly a LOC/ILS approach with a glideslope. When LOC Approach
Mode is armed, Glideslope Mode is also armed automatically. LOC captures are inhibited if the difference
between aircraft heading and localizer course exceeds 105°.
Selecting LOC Approach Mode:
1) Ensure a valid localizer frequency is tuned.
2) Ensure that LOC is the selected navigation source (use the Active Nav Softkey to cycle through navigation
sources if necessary).
3) Press the APR Key.

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

459

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
Or:
1) Ensure that FMS is the selected navigation source (use the Active Nav Softkey to cycle through navigation
sources if necessary).
2) Ensure a LOC/ILS approach is loaded into the active flight plan.
3) Ensure the corresponding LOC frequency is tuned.
4) Press the APR Key.

If the following occurs, the flight director reverts to Roll Hold Mode (wings rolled level):
• Approach Mode is active and a Vectors-To-Final is activated
• Approach Mode is active and Navigation source is manually switched
• During a LOC/ILS approach, FMS Navigation Mode is active and the FAF is crossed after the automatic
navigation source switch from FMS to LOC

CHANGING THE SELECTED COURSE
If the navigation source is VOR or LOC, or OBS Mode has been enabled when using FMS, the Selected
Course is controlled using the CRS Knob corresponding to the selected flight director (CRS1 for the pilot
side, CRS2 for the copilot side).
Pressing the CWS Button and hand-flying the aircraft does not change the Selected Course while in
Approach Mode. The autopilot guides the aircraft back to the Selected Course (or FMS flight plan) when the
CWS Button is released.

INTERCEPTING AND FLYING A DME ARC
The AFCS will intercept and track a DME arc that is part of the active flight plan provided that FMS
Navigation Mode is engaged, FMS is the active navigation source on the CDI, and the DME arc segment is
the active flight plan leg. It is important to note that automatic navigation of DME arcs is based on FMS.
Thus, even if the APR key is pressed and LOC or VOR Approach Mode is armed prior to reaching the Initial
Approach Fix (IAF), Approach Mode will not activate until the arc segment is completed.
If the pilot decides to intercept the arc at a location other than the published IAF (i.e. ATC provides vectors
to intercept the arc) and subsequently selects Heading Mode or Roll Mode, the AFCS will not automatically
intercept or track the arc unless the pilot activates the arc leg of the flight plan and arms FMS Navigation
Mode. The AFCS will not intercept and fly a DME arc before reaching an IAF that defines the beginning of the
arc segment. Likewise, if at any point while established on the DME arc the pilot deselects FMS Navigation
Mode, the AFCS will no longer track the arc.

460

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM

7.5 AUTOPILOT AND YAW DAMPER OPERATION
NOTE: Refer to the Airplane Flight Manual (AFM) for specific instructions regarding emergency procedures.

The autopilot and yaw damper operate the flight control surface servos to provide automatic flight control. The
autopilot controls the aircraft pitch and roll attitudes following commands received from the flight director. Pitch
autotrim provides trim commands to the pitch trim actuator to relieve any sustained effort required by the pitch
servo.
The yaw damper reduces Dutch roll tendencies and coordinates turns. It can operate independently of the
autopilot and may be used during normal hand-flight maneuvers. Yaw rate commands are limited by the yaw
damper.

FLIGHT CONTROL
Pitch and roll commands are provided to the servos based on the active flight director modes. Yaw damping
is provided by the yaw servo. Servo motor control limits the maximum servo speed and torque. The servo
gearboxes are equipped with slip-clutches that allow the servos to be overridden in case of an emergency.

PITCH AXIS AND TRIM
The autopilot pitch axis uses pitch rate to stabilize the aircraft pitch attitude during upsets and flight
director maneuvers. Flight director pitch commands are rate- and attitude-limited, combined with pitch
damper control, and sent to the pitch servo motor.
When the autopilot is engaged, the automatic pitch trim (APT) function commands the pitch trim actuator
to reduce the average pitch servo effort. When the autopilot is not engaged and airspeed is within a certain
range, the pitch trim system provides Mach trim (MT).
Manual electric pitch trim (MEPT) functionality is available at any time via the pilot and copilot MEPT
Switches. Manual trim commands are generated only when both halves of the MEPT Switch are operated
simultaneously. Operating the MEPT Switches when the autopilot is engaged will cause the autopilot to
disconnect. Trim speeds are scheduled with airspeed to provide more consistent response.
The pilot side MEPT Switch has priority over the copilot side MEPT Switch.

ROLL AXIS
The autopilot roll axis uses roll rate to stabilize aircraft roll attitude during upsets and flight director
maneuvers. The flight director roll commands are rate- and attitude-limited, combined with roll damper
control, and sent to the roll servo motor.

YAW AXIS
The yaw damper uses yaw rate and roll attitude to dampen the aircraft’s natural Dutch roll response. It also
uses lateral acceleration to coordinate turns. Yaw damper operation is independent of autopilot engagement.

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

461

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM

ENGAGING THE AUTOPILOT AND YAW DAMPER
NOTE: Autopilot engagement/disengagement is not equivalent to servo engagement/disengagement. Use

the CWS Button to disengage the pitch and roll servos while the autopilot remains active.

When the AP Key is pressed, the autopilot, yaw damper, and flight director (if not already active) are activated.
The flight director engages in Pitch and Roll Hold Modes when initially activated. When the YD Key is pressed,
the system engages the yaw damper independently of the autopilot. Autopilot and yaw damper status are
displayed in the center of the AFCS Status Box. Engagement is indicated by green ‘AP’ and ‘YD’ annunciations,
respectively.
Autopilot
Engaged

Figure 7-30 Autopilot and Yaw Damper Engaged

CONTROL WHEEL STEERING
During autopilot operation, the aircraft may be hand-flown without disengaging the autopilot. Pressing and
holding the CWS Button disengages the pitch and roll servos from the flight control surfaces and allows the
aircraft to be hand-flown. At the same time, the flight director is synchronized to the aircraft attitude during
the maneuver. Pitch trim operation is interrupted during CWS activity; yaw damper engagement is unaffected.
The ‘AP’ annunciation is temporarily replaced by ‘CWS’ in white for the duration of CWS maneuvers.
Touch Control Steering

Figure 7-31 TCS Annunciation

DISENGAGING THE AUTOPILOT AND YAW DAMPER
NOTE: Pressing the AP Key does not disengage the yaw damper.

Manual autopilot disengagement is indicated by a five-second flashing red ‘AP’ annunciation and an autopilot
disconnect aural alert, “Autopilot”. The autopilot is manually disengaged by pushing the AP Key on the
AFCS Control Unit, the GA Switch, the MEPT Switches, or the AP DISC Switch (also disengages the yaw
damper, if engaged). Pressing the YD Key disengages the yaw damper independently of the autopilot. The ‘YD’
annunciation is removed upon disengagement.
After manual disengagement, the autopilot disconnect aural alert and flashing ‘AP’ annunciation may be
cancelled by pushing the AP DISC Switch.

462

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM

Figure 7-32 Manual Autopilot Disengagement

Automatic autopilot disengagement is indicated by a flashing red and white ‘AP’ annunciation and the autopilot
disconnect aural alert, which continue until acknowledged by pushing the AP DISC Switch. Automatic
autopilot disengagement occurs due to:
• System failure

• Stall warning (YD also disengages)

• Invalid sensor data

• Inability to compute default flight director modes
(FD also disengages automatically)

Automatic yaw damper disengagement is indicated by a five-second flashing yellow ‘YD’ annunciation. The
yaw damper automatically disengages when autopilot disengagement is caused by failure in a parameter also
affecting the yaw damper. This means the yaw damper can remain operational in some cases where the autopilot
automatically disengages. A localized failure in the yaw damper system or invalid sensor data also cause yaw
damper disengagement.

Figure 7-33 Automatic Autopilot and Yaw Damper Disengagement

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

463

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM

7.6 EXAMPLE PROCEDURES
NOTE: The following example flight plan and diagrams (not to be used for navigation) in this section are

for instructional purposes only and should be considered not current. Numbered portions of accompanying
diagrams correspond to numbered procedure steps.
This section provides a scenario-based set of procedures showing various GFC 700 AFCS modes used during a
flight. In this scenario, the aircraft departs Charles B. Wheeler Downtown Airport (KMKC), enroute to Colorado
Springs Airport (KCOS). After departure, the aircraft climbs to 12,000 ft and airway V4 is intercepted, following
ATC vectors.
Airway V4 is flown to Salina VOR (SLN) using VOR navigation, then airway V244 is flown using FMS Navigation.
The ILS approach for runway 35L and LPV (WAAS) approach for runway 35R are shown and a missed approach
is executed.

30
27

Lamar
VOR
(LAA)

Topeka
VOR
(TOP)

Hays
VOR
(HYS)

V 244

Salina
VOR
(SLN)

V 244

KCOS

KMKC

Figure 7-34 Flight Plan Overview

DEPARTURE
Climbing to the Selected Altitude and flying an assigned heading:
1) Before takeoff:
a) Use the ALT SEL Knob to set the Selected Altitude to 12,000 feet.
b) Push the GA Switch to activate Takeoff Mode. The flight director Command Bars establish a pitch up attitude
to follow.

464

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
c) Press the AP Key to engage the autopilot in a climb, holding the pitch angle commanded in Takeoff Mode and
wings level.

2) In this example, Vertical Speed Mode is used to capture the Selected Altitude (Pitch Hold, Vertical Speed, or
Flight Level Change Mode may be used).
a) Press the VS Key to activate Vertical Speed and Roll Hold modes and arm Selected Altitude Capture Mode.

The Vertical Speed Reference may be adjusted after Vertical Speed Mode is selected using the UP/DN Wheel or
pushing the CWS Button while hand-flying the aircraft to establish a new Vertical Speed Reference.

3) Use the HDG Knob to set the Selected Heading, complying with ATC vectors to intercept Airway V4.

Press the HDG Key to activate Heading Select Mode while the autopilot is engaged in the climb. The autopilot
follows the Selected Heading Bug on the HSI and turns the aircraft to the desired heading.

4) As the aircraft nears the Selected Altitude, the flight director transitions to Selected Altitude Capture Mode,
indicated by the green ‘ALTS’ annunciation flashing for up to 10 seconds.

At 50 feet from the Selected Altitude, the green ‘ALT’ annunciation flashes for up to 10 seconds; the autopilot
transitions to Altitude Hold Mode and levels the aircraft.

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

465

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM

TO M
o

Selected Altitude of 12,000 MSL
ALT Mode

4
KMKC

Mod

ode

M
TO

Figure 7-35 Departure

466

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM

INTERCEPTING A VOR RADIAL
During climb-out, the autopilot continues to fly the aircraft in Heading Select Mode. Airway V4 to Salina
VOR (SLN) should now be intercepted. Since the enroute flight plan waypoints correspond to VORs, flight
director Navigation Mode using either VOR or FMS as the navigation source may be used. In this scenario, VOR
Navigation Mode is used for navigation to the first VOR waypoint in the flight plan.
Intercepting a VOR radial:
1) Arm VOR Navigation Mode:
a) Tune the VOR frequency.
b) Press the Active Nav Softkey to set the navigation source to VOR.
c) Use the CRS1 or CRS2 Knob to set the Selected Course to the desired value, 255°. Note that at this point, the
flight director is still in Heading Select Mode and the autopilot continues to fly the Selected Heading, 290°.
d) Press the NAV Key. This arms VOR Navigation Mode and the white ‘VOR’ annunciation appears below the active
lateral mode.

2) As the aircraft nears the Selected Course, the flight director transitions from Heading Select to VOR Navigation
Mode and the ‘VOR’ annunciation flashes green. The autopilot begins turning to intercept the Selected
Course.

3) The autopilot continues the turn until the aircraft is established on the Selected Course.
0

Hd
29 g
0o

255

Salina
VOR
(SLN)

VO
R

NA
V

2
HD

VO
R

21
18

Figure 7-36 Intercepting a VOR Radial

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

467

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM

FLYING A FLIGHT PLAN/FMS COURSE
NOTE: Changing the navigation source cancels Navigation Mode and causes the flight director to revert to

Roll Hold Mode (wings rolled level).
As the aircraft closes on Salina VOR, FMS is used to navigate the next leg, airway V244. The aircraft is
currently tracking inbound on Airway V4.
Flying a FMS flight plan:
1) Transition from VOR to FMS Navigation Mode:
a) Press the Active Nav Softkey until FMS is the selected navigation source.
b) Press the NAV Key to activate FMS Navigation Mode. The autopilot guides the aircraft along the active flight
plan leg.

2) Following the flight plan, the autopilot continues to steer the aircraft under FMS guidance. Note that in FMS
Navigation Mode, course changes defined by the flight plan are automatically made without pilot action
required.
0

075

d
AV Mo

GPS N

260

Hays
VOR
(HYS)

Salina
VOR
(SLN)

V 244

076

d
AV Mo

VOR N

Figure 7-37 Transition to GPS Flight Plan

468

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM

DESCENT
While flying the arrival procedure, the aircraft is cleared for descent in preparation for the approach to KCOS.
Three methods are presented for descent:
• Flight Level Change descent – Flight Level Change Mode can be used to descend to the Selected Altitude at a
constant airspeed. This descent method does not account for flight plan waypoint altitude constraints.
• Vertical Path Tracking descent – Vertical Path Tracking Mode is used to follow the vertical descent path
defined in the FMS flight plan. Altitude constraints correspond to waypoints in the flight plan. Before VNAV
flight control can provide vertical profile guidance, a VNAV flight plan must be entered and enabled.
• Non-path descent in a VNAV scenario – A VNAV flight plan is entered and enabled, however Pitch Hold,
Vertical Speed, or Flight Level Change Mode can be used to descend to the VNAV Target Altitude prior to
reaching the planned TOD. Flight Level Change Mode is used in the example.
Flight Level Change descent:
1) Select Flight Level Change Mode:
a) Using the ALT SEL Knob, set the Selected Altitude to 10,000 feet.
b) Press the FLC Key to activate Flight Level Change Mode. The annunciation ‘FLC’ appears next to the
Airspeed Reference, which defaults to the current aircraft airspeed. Selected Altitude Capture Mode is armed
automatically.

2) Use the UP/DN Wheel or push the CWS Button while hand-flying the aircraft to adjust the commanded airspeed
while maintaining the same power, or reduce power to allow descent in Flight Level Change Mode while the
autopilot maintains the current airspeed.
3) As the aircraft nears the Selected Altitude, the flight director transitions to Selected Altitude Capture Mode,
indicated by the green ‘ALTS’ annunciation flashing for up to 10 seconds.

The green ‘ALT’ annunciation flashes for up to 10 seconds upon reaching 50 feet from the Selected Altitude; the
autopilot transitions to Altitude Hold Mode and levels the aircraft.

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

469

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM

Cruise Altitude of 12,000 MSL
ALT Mode

2
FLC

Mod

3
Selected Altitude of 10,000 MSL
ALT Mode

Figure 7-38 FLC Descent

Vertical Path Tracking descent to VNAV Target Altitude:
1) Select coupled VNAV:
a) Press the VNV Key to arm Vertical Path Tracking Mode. The white annunciation ‘VPTH’ appears.

b) Using the ALT SEL Knob, set the Selected Altitude 75 feet below the flight plan’s VNAV Target Altitude of
10,000 feet.

If the Selected Altitude is not at least 75 feet below the VNAV Target Altitude, the flight director captures the
Selected Altitude rather than the VNAV Target Altitude once Vertical Path Tracking Mode becomes active (ALTS
is armed rather than ALTV).
c) If Vertical Path Tracking Mode is armed more than 5 minutes prior to descent path capture, acknowledgment is
required for the flight director to transition from Altitude Hold to Vertical Path Tracking Mode. To proceed with
descent path capture if the white ‘VPTH’ annunciation begins flashing, do one of the following

• Press the VNV Key

• Turn the ALT SEL Knob to adjust the Selected Altitude

If the descent is not confirmed by the time of interception, Vertical Path Tracking Mode remains armed and the
descent is not captured.
2) When the top of descent (TOD) is reached, the flight director transitions to Vertical Path Tracking Mode and
begins the descent to the VNAV Target Altitude. Intention to capture the VNAV Target Altitude is indicated by
the white ‘ALTV’ annunciation.

3) As the aircraft nears the VNAV Target Altitude, the flight director transitions to VNAV Target Altitude Capture
Mode, indicated by the magenta ‘ALTV’ annunciation flashing for up to 10 seconds.

470

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM

The magenta ‘ALT’ annunciation flashes for up to 10 seconds upon reaching 50 feet from the VNAV Target
Altitude; the autopilot transitions to Altitude Hold Mode and levels the aircraft at the vertical waypoint.

ALT Mode

TOD

Cruise Altitude of 12,000 MSL

2
VPT

ode

3
BOD

VNAV Target Altitude of 10,000 MSL

ALT Mode

Selected Altitude (set below VNAV Target Altitude)
Along-track Offset, 3 nm before OPSHN
3 nm

Figure 7-39 VPTH Descent

Non-path descent using Flight Level Change Mode:
1) Using Flight Level Change Mode, command a non-path descent to an intermediate altitude above the next
VNAV flight plan altitude.:
a) Using the ALT SEL Knob, set the Selected Altitude below the current aircraft altitude to an altitude (in this case,
9,400 feet) at which to level off between VNAV flight plan altitudes.
b) Press the FLC Key before the planned TOD during an altitude hold while VPTH is armed. The Airspeed Reference
defaults to the current aircraft airspeed. Vertical Path Tracking and Selected Altitude Capture Mode are armed
automatically.

2) Reduce power to allow descent in Flight Level Change Mode. The autopilot maintains the Airspeed Reference.
3) As the aircraft nears the Selected Altitude, the flight director transitions to Selected Altitude Capture Mode,
indicated by the green ‘ALTS’ annunciation flashing for up to 10 seconds.

The green ‘ALT’ annunciation flashes for up to 10 seconds upon reaching 50 feet from the Selected Altitude; the
autopilot transitions to Altitude Hold Mode and levels the aircraft. After leveling off, reset selected altitude at
or below 9,000 ft.

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

471

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM

4) When the next TOD is reached, Vertical Path Tracking becomes active (may require acknowledgment to allow
descent path capture).

5) As the aircraft nears the VNAV Target Altitude, the flight director transitions to VNAV Target Altitude Capture
Mode, indicated by the magenta ‘ALTV’ annunciation flashing for up to 10 seconds.

e
Planned
TOD

BOD

ALT Mode

Pla

Selected Altitude of 9,400 MSL

VNAV Target Altitude of 10,000 MSL

sce

ALT Mode

Pa
th
TOD

VNAV Target Altitude of 9,000 MSL

BOD

ALT Mode

Selected Altitude

3 nm

OPSHN

HABUK

Figure 7-40 Non-path Descent

472

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM

APPROACH
Flying an ILS approach:
1) Transition from FMS Navigation Mode to Heading Select Mode.
a) Select the Runway 35L ILS approach for KCOS and select ‘VECTORS’ for the transition. Load and activate the
approach into the flight plan.
b) Use the HDG Knob to set the Selected Heading after getting vectors from ATC.
c) Press the HDG Key. The autopilot turns the aircraft to the desired heading.
d) Use Heading Select Mode to comply with ATC vectors as requested.

2) Arm LOC Approach and Glideslope modes.
a) Ensure the appropriate localizer frequency is tuned.
b) Press the APR Key when cleared for approach to arm Approach and Glideslope modes. ‘LOC’ and ‘GS’ appear
in white as armed mode annunciations.

c) The navigation source automatically switches to LOC. After this switch occurs, the localizer signal can be captured
and the flight director determine when to begin the turn to intercept the final approach course. The flight director
now provides guidance to the missed approach point.
3) There are two options available at this point, as the autopilot flies the ILS approach:
• Push the AP DISC Switch at the decision height and land the aircraft.
• Use the GA Switch to execute a missed approach.

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

473

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
KCOS

LOC APR/
GS Mode

3
PETEY

2
HD
G
e
od
M

PYNON

1
GPS NAV Mode

Figure 7-41 ILS Approach to KCOS

Flying a RNAV FMS approach with vertical guidance:
1) Arm flight director modes for a RNAV FMS approach with vertical guidance:
a) Make sure the navigation source is set to FMS (use Active Nav Softkey to change navigation source).
b) Select the Runway 35R LPV approach for KCOS. Load and activate the approach into the flight plan.
2) Press the APR Key once clearance for approach has been received. FMS Approach Mode is activated and
Glidepath Mode is armed.

3) Once the glidepath is captured, Glidepath Mode becomes active. The flight director now provides guidance to
the missed approach point.

4) There are two options available at this point, as the autopilot flies the approach:
• Push the AP DISC Switch at the decision height and land the aircraft.
• Use the GA Switch to execute a missed approach.

474

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM

KCOS

GPS APR/
GP Mode

CEGIX

2
FALUR

HABUK

PYNON

1
GPS NAV Mode

Figure 7-42 LPV Approach to KCOS

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

475

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM

GO AROUND/MISSED APPROACH
NOTE: As a result of calculations performed by the system while flying the holding pattern, the display may

re-size automatically and the aircraft may not precisely track the holding pattern as depicted on the PFD and
MFD.
Flying a missed approach:
1) Push the GA Switch at the Decision height and apply go-around power to execute a missed approach. The
flight director Command Bars establish a nose-up climb to follow. If flying an ILS or LOC approach the CDI also
switches to FMS as the navigation source.

Note that when the GA Switch is pushed, the missed approach is activated and the autopilot disconnects,
indicated by the ‘AP’ annunciation flashing yellow for 5 seconds and the autopilot disconnect aural alert.
Flashes 5 sec

2) Start the climb to the prescribed altitude in the published Missed Approach Procedure.
a) Press the AP Key to re-engage the autopilot.
b) Press the NAV Key to have the autopilot fly to the hold.

3) Use the ALT SEL Knob to set a Selected Altitude to hold.

To hold the current airspeed during the climb, press the FLC Key.

As the aircraft nears the Selected Altitude, the flight director transitions to Selected Altitude Capture Mode,
indicated by the green ‘ALTS’ annunciation flashing for up to 10 seconds.

The green ‘ALT’ annunciation flashes for up to 10 seconds upon reaching 50 feet from the Selected Altitude; the
autopilot transitions to Altitude Hold Mode and levels the aircraft.

476

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM

4) The autopilot flies the holding pattern after the missed approach is activated. Annunciations are displayed in
the Navigation Status Box.

MOGAL

GPS NAV Mode

3
2
GA Mode

KCOS

Figure 7-43 Go Around/Missed Approach

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

477

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM

7.7 AFCS ANNUNCIATIONS AND ALERTS
AFCS CAS MESSAGES
Crew Alerting System (CAS) messages related to the AFCS are listed in Table 7-5. CAS messages appear on
the PFDs in the window to the right of the Altimeter. Refer to the EAS Section for details.
CAS Message

Description

AP FAIL

Loss of AP function

AUTO PTRIM FAIL

Auto pitch trim failure; other pitch trim functions still available

AP PITCH MISTRIM

Airplane mistrimmed in pitch axis when AP is engaged

AP ROLL MISTRIM

Airplane mistrimmed in roll axis when AP is engaged

YD FAIL
YD MISTRIM

Loss of yaw damper function
Airplane mistrimmed in yaw axis when YD is engaged

PTRIM NML FAIL

Loss of normally-operating pitch trim actuator

PTRIM BKP FAIL

Loss of backup pitch trim actuator

PTRIM SW1 FAIL

Failure of pilot pitch trim switch

PTRIM SW2 FAIL

Failure of copilot pitch trim switch
Table 7-5 AFCS CAS Messages

AFCS VOICE ALERTS
The voice alerts listed in Table 7-6 relate to the AFCS; for a complete list of voice alerts, see Appendix A.
Voice Alert
“Autopilot”

Description

Warning – Autopilot is disengaged
Single alert for manual AP disengagement
Continuous alert for automatic AP disengagement; cancelled with AP DISC Switch
“Flight Director” Single warning – Flight director has reverted to a default mode
“Trim, Trim, Trim” Continuous advisory (stops after 6 seconds) – MEPT Switch malfunction
Table 7-6 AFCS Voice Alerts

478

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM

OVERSPEED PROTECTION
While Pitch Hold, Vertical Speed, Flight Level Change, Vertical Path Tracking, or an altitude capture mode is
active, airspeed is monitored by the flight director and pitch commands are limited for overspeed protection.
Overspeed protection is provided in situations where the flight director cannot acquire and maintain the mode
reference for the selected vertical mode without exceeding the certified maximum autopilot airspeed.
When an autopilot overspeed condition occurs, a flashing yellow ‘MAXSPD’ annunciation appears above the
Airspeed Indicator and the voice alert “High Speed” is generated. Engine power should be reduced and/or the
pitch reference adjusted to slow the aircraft. The annunciation disappears when the overspeed condition is
resolved.

Airspeed
Indicator
Figure 7-45 Overspeed Annunciation

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

479

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM

Blank Page

480

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

ADDITIONAL FEATURES

SECTION 8 ADDITIONAL FEATURES
NOTE: Regardless of the availability of SafeTaxi®, ChartView, or FliteCharts®, it may be necessary to carry

another source of charts on-board the aircraft.
Additional features of the Vision Flight Deck include the following:
• SafeTaxi® diagrams
• ChartView and FliteCharts® electronic charts
• Airport Directory (AOPA or AC-U-KWIK)
• Iridium satellite telephone
• Data Link Services

• SiriusXM Satellite Radio entertainment
• Scheduler
• Electronic Documents
• Flight Data Logging
• Electronic Checklists

SafeTaxi diagrams provide detailed taxiway, runway, and ramp information at more than 700 airports in the United
States. By decreasing range on an airport that has a SafeTaxi diagram available, a close up view of the airport layout
can be seen.
FliteCharts and optional ChartView provide on-board electronic terminal procedures charts. Electronic charts
offer the convenience of rapid access to essential information. Either ChartView or FliteCharts may be configured
in the system, but not both.
The AOPA or AC-U-KWIK Airport Directory offer detailed information for a selected airport, such as available
services, hours of operation, and lodging options.
Telephone and Data Link Services are optional subscription services offered through Garmin Flight Data Services
and Iridium Satellite LLC. Voice and SMS messaging communications are through the Iridium Satellite Network.
Data communications are through Iridium Data Services, or a wireless network (Wi-Fi) when the aircraft is on the
ground. Incorporated in this feature set is a System Data Logging function which records aircraft system parameters
specified by the aircraft manufacturer. This data is then uploaded to Garmin Flight Data Services through one of the
data communications options.
The optional SiriusXM Satellite Radio entertainment audio feature of the GDL 69A Data Link Receiver handles
more than 170 channels of music, news, and sports. SiriusXM Satellite Radio offers more entertainment choices and
longer range coverage than commercial broadcast stations.
The Scheduler feature can be used to enter and display short term or long term reminder messages such as Switch
fuel tanks, Change oil, or Altimeter-Transponder Check in the Messages display on the Touchscreen Controller.
The Electronic Document function allows viewing of electronic documents on PFD and/or MFD displays.
Optional electronic checklists help to quickly find the proper procedure on the ground or during flight.
The Flight Data Logging feature automatically stores critical flight and engine data on an SD data card. Approximately
1,000 flight hours can be recorded for each 1GB of available space on the card.

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

481

ADDITIONAL FEATURES

8.1 SAFETAXI
SafeTaxi is an enhanced feature that gives greater map detail when viewing airports at close range on the
Navigation Map or the Inset Map on the PFD. The maximum map ranges for enhanced detail are pilot configurable.
When viewing at ranges close enough to show the airport detail, the map reveals taxiways with identifying
letters/numbers, airport Hot Spots, and airport landmarks including ramps, buildings, control towers, and other
prominent features. Resolution is greater at lower map ranges. When the aircraft’s current position is within the
SafeTaxi view, the airplane symbol on the airport provides enhanced position awareness.
Designated Hot Spots are recognized at airports with many intersecting taxiways and runways, and/or complex
ramp areas. Airport Hot Spots are outlined to caution pilots of areas on an airport surface where positional
awareness confusion or runway incursions happen most often. Hot Spots are defined with a magenta circle or
outline around the region of possible confusion.
Any map display that show the navigation view can also show the SafeTaxi airport layout within the maximum
configured range. The following is a list of displays where the SafeTaxi feature can be seen:
• Navigation Map

• VOR Information

• Inset Map (PFD)

• User Waypoint Information

• Weather Datalink

• Trip Planning

• Airport Information

• Nearest

• Intersection Information

• Active Flight Plan

• NDB Information

• Stored Flight Plan

During ground operations the aircraft’s position is displayed in reference to taxiways, runways, and airport
features. In the example shown, the aircraft is on taxiway Charlie approaching a designated Airport Hot Spot
boundary on KSFO airport. Airport Hot Spots are outlined in magenta. When panning over the airport, features
such as runway holding lines and taxiways are shown at the cursor.

Taxiway
Identification
Airport
Features
Aircraft
Position
Airport Hot
Spot Outline

Figure 8-1 SafeTaxi Depiction on the Navigation Map Display

482

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Enabling/Disabling SafeTaxi:
1) From the Home Screen, touch Map > Map Settings.
2) If not already selected, touch the Aviation Tab.
3) If necessary, scroll to display the SafeTaxi Annunciator Button.
4) Touch the SafeTaxi Button to enable or disable the display of SafeTaxi on the Navigation and Inset maps. A
green annunciator on the button indicates SafeTaxi is enabled.

Configuring SafeTaxi range:
1) From the Home Screen, touch Map > Map Settings.
2) If not already selected, touch the Aviation Tab.
3) If necessary, scroll to display the SafeTaxi Range Button.
4) Touch the SafeTaxi Range Button. A selection of ranges is displayed.
5) Touch the desired range. In Figure 8-2, 4 NM has been selected. With this setting, SafeTaxi will be displayed
on the Navigation Map for range settings up to, and including 4 NM.

Figure 8-2 SafeTaxi Map Settings

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

483

ADDITIONAL FEATURES

SAFETAXI DATABASE INFORMATION
The SafeTaxi database is revised every 56 days. SafeTaxi is available for use after the expiration date. When
turning on the system, the MFD Power-up Display indicates the expiration date and status of the database.

SafeTaxi Database

Figure 8-3 Power-up Page, SafeTaxi Database

Power-up Page Display

Definition
Normal operation. SafeTaxi database is valid and within current cycle.
SafeTaxi database has expired.
Database card contains no SafeTaxi data.

Table 8-1 SafeTaxi Annunciation Definitions

The SafeTaxi Region, Version, Cycle, Effective date and Expires date of the database cycle can be viewed by
selecting the MFD1, PFD1, and PFD2 Databases Screen.

484

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Viewing SafeTaxi database information:
1) From the Home Screen, touch Utilities > Setup > Avionics Status.
2) If not already selected, touch the Database Tab.
3) Touch the desired button (PFD1, PFD2, or MFD1).
4) Scroll to view the SafeTaxi database information, as shown in Figure 8-4.

Figure 8-4 MFD SafeTaxi Database Information

The SafeTaxi database cycle number shown in the figure, 12S3, is deciphered as follows:
12 – Indicates the year 2012
S – Indicates the data is for SafeTaxi
3 – Indicates the third issue of the SafeTaxi database for the year
The SafeTaxi ‘Effective’ date 3–MAY–2012 is the beginning date for the current database cycle. The SafeTaxi
‘Expires’ date 26–JUL–2012 is the revision date for the next database cycle.
The ‘Effective’ date is the beginning date for this database cycle. The ‘Effective’ date appears in yellow when
the current date is before the effective date (Figure 8-5). The ‘Expires’ date is the revision date for the next
database cycle. The ‘Expires’ date appears in yellow when expired. ‘Not Available’ indicates the SafeTaxi
database is not available on the database card or no database card is inserted. An expired SafeTaxi database is
not disabled and will continue to function indefinitely.
Refer to Appendix B for instructions on revising the SafeTaxi database.

Current Date is before Effective Date

SafeTaxi Database has Expired

SafeTaxi Database Not Installed

Figure 8-5 SafeTaxi Database Status

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

485

ADDITIONAL FEATURES

8.2 CHARTVIEW (OPTIONAL)
ChartView resembles the paper version of Jeppesen terminal procedures charts. The charts are displayed in
full color with high-resolution. The Display Pane depiction shows the aircraft position on the moving map in the
planview of approach charts and on airport diagrams. Airport Hot Spots are outlined in magenta.
The geo-referenced aircraft position is indicated by an aircraft symbol displayed on the chart when the current
position is within the boundaries of the chart. Inset boxes (Figure 8-6) are not considered within the chart
boundaries. Therefore, when the aircraft symbol reaches a chart boundary line, or inset box, the aircraft symbol
is removed from the display.
Figure 8-6 shows examples of off-scale areas, indicated by the grey shading. Note, the grey shading is for
illustrative purposes only and will not appear on the published chart or Display Pane. These off-scale areas
appear on the chart to convey supplemental information. However, the depicted geographical position of this
information, as it relates to the chart planview, is not the actual geographic position. Therefore, when the aircraft
symbol appears within one of these areas, the aircraft position indicated is relative to the chart planview, not to
the off-scale area.

Off-Scale
Area

Off-Scale
Areas

Figure 8-6 Sample Chart Indicating Off-Scale Areas

NOTE: Do not maneuver the aircraft based solely upon the geo-referenced aircraft symbol.

The ChartView database subscription is available from Jeppesen, Inc. Available data includes:
• Arrivals (STAR)
• Airport Diagrams
• Departure Procedures (DP)

• Chart NOTAMs

• Approaches
NOTE: Only NOTAMs applicable to specific information conveyed on the displayed Jeppesen chart are

available. There may be other NOTAMs available pertaining to the flight that may not be displayed. Contact
Jeppesen for more information regarding Jeppesen database-published NOTAMs.
486

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

ADDITIONAL FEATURES

CHART SELECTION
When a flight plan is active, or when flying direct-to a destination, the initial set of charts made available
pertain to the departure airport. After departing the airport environment, the initial chart set made available
pertains to the destination airport. When no flight plan is active, or when not flying to a direct-to destination,
the initial chart set is made available for the nearest airport.
Selecting Charts using the Charts Screen:
1) From the Home Screen, touch Charts.
2) The airport for which charts will be displayed is shown at the top of the Charts Screen. Touch the Airport Button
to enter another airport.
3) Touch the Info Tab to display the airport information selection buttons for the selected airport (Figure 8-7).
• Departure Tab to display a list of possible departures for the selected airport.
• Arrival Tab to display a list of possible arrivals for the selected airport.
• Approach Tab to display a list of possible approaches for the selected airport.
4) Touch the desired information button in any of these lists to display the applicable chart on the selected Display
Pane.

Figure 8-7 Airport Diagram Selection

Figure 8-8 Airport Diagram View Options

5) Touch the Charts Options Button to select the desired display option for the selected chart (Figure 8-8).
6) Touch All to display the complete Airport Diagram. Fit Width displays the full width of the Airport Diagram. Plan
displays only the diagram portion of the chart. Minimums displays only the approach minimums on an approach
chart. Profile displays only the descent profile on the approach chart. Header displays the chart heading. Only
appropriate views are available for the selected chart.
7) Touch Back to return to the Charts Screen.

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

487

ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Selecting Airport Diagrams from the Nearest Airports Screen:
1) From the Home Screen, touch Nearest > Airport.
2) Touch the desired airport button. KCOS is selected in this example. The Waypoint Options buttons are
displayed as shown in Figure 8-9.

Figure 8-9 Airport Diagram Selection

3) Touch the Airport Chart Button. The Info Tab selections are displayed on the Touchscreen Controller (Figure
8-9) and the Airport Diagram is displayed on the selected Display Pane (Figure 8-10).

Figure 8-10 Airport Chart for Selected Airport

The aircraft symbol is shown on the chart only if the chart is to scale and the aircraft position is within the
boundaries of the chart. The aircraft symbol is not displayed when the Aircraft Not Shown Icon appears. If the
Chart Scale Box displays a banner ‘NOT TO SCALE’, the aircraft symbol is not shown. The Aircraft Not Shown
Icon may appear at certain times, even if the chart is displayed to scale.

488

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

ADDITIONAL FEATURES
When no terminal procedure chart is available for the nearest airport or the selected airport, the banner
‘CHART NOT AVAILABLE’ appears on the screen. The ‘CHART NOT AVAILABLE’ banner does not refer to
the Jeppesen subscription, but rather the availability of a particular airport chart selection or procedure for a
selected airport.

Figure 8-11 Chart Not Available Banner

If there is a problem in rendering the data (such as a data error or a failure of an individual chart), the banner
‘UNABLE TO DISPLAY CHART’ is then displayed.

Figure 8-12 Unable To Display Chart Banner

DAY/NIGHT VIEW
ChartView can be displayed on a white or black background for day or night viewing. The Day View offers
a better presentation in a bright environment. The Night View gives a better presentation for viewing in a dark
environment.
Selecting Day, Night, or Auto View:
1) From the Home Screen, touch Charts > Charts Options.
2) Touch the Light Mode Button (Figure 8-8).
3) Touch the Day, Night, or Auto button (Figure 8-13). The selection is annunciated on the Light Mode Button.
When Auto is selected, the display will change to the appropriate day or night setting, dependent on ambient
lighting.

Figure 8-13 Selecting Day/Night View

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

489

ADDITIONAL FEATURES
4) Touch the Threshold button (Figure 8-14). The Auto Light Mode Threshold window is displayed.

Select Chart Options

Adjust Threshold Setting

Figure 8-14 Setting Day/Night Switching Threshold

5) Move the slider left or right to set the desired threshold. Setting the Threshold Level percentage to the same
percentage shown as the Current MFD Backlight Level will cause the Day/Night view to switch at the current
backlight setting. Adjusting the Threshold Level setting larger than the Current MFD Backlight Level will cause
the display to remain in Night Mode longer. Adjusting the Threshold Level setting smaller than the Current MFD
Backlight Level will cause the display to change to Day Mode sooner.

Figure 8-15 Airport Diagram, Day View

490

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

ADDITIONAL FEATURES

Figure 8-16 Airport Diagram, Night View

CHARTVIEW DATABASE INFORMATION
The ChartView database is revised every 14 days. Charts are still viewable during a period that extends from
the cycle expiration date to the disables date. ChartView is disabled 70 days after the expiration date and is no
longer available for viewing. When turning on the system, the MFD Power-up Display shows the current status
of the ChartView database. See the following table for the various ChartView Power-up Display annunciations
and the definition of each.

ChartView Database

Figure 8-17 Power-up Page, ChartView Database

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

491

ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Power-up Display

Definition
Blank Line. System is not configured for ChartView. Contact a Garminauthorized service center for configuration.
System is configured for ChartView but no chart database is installed.
Contact Jeppesen for a ChartView database.
Normal operation. ChartView database is valid and within current
cycle.
ChartView database is within 1 week after expiration date. A new cycle
is available for update.
ChartView database is beyond 1 week after expiration date, but still
within the 70 day viewing period.
ChartView database has timed out. Database is beyond 70 days after
expiration date. ChartView database is no longer available for viewing.
System time is not available. GPS satellite data is unknown or the
system has not yet locked onto satellites. Check database cycle number
for effectivity.
System is verifying chart database when new cycle is installed for the
first time.
After verifying, chart database is found to be corrupt. ChartView is not
available.
Table 8-2 ChartView Annunciations and Definitions

The ChartView status information can be found on the MFD1, PFD1, PFD2, GTC1, and GTC2 Databases
Screen (Figure 8-18). The ‘Expires’ date is the revision date for the next database cycle. The ‘Expires’ date
appears in yellow when expired. ChartView becomes inoperative 70 days after the ChartView ‘Expires’ date is
reached. This is shown as the ‘Disables’ date. When the disables date is reached, the date is displayed in yellow.
Also, the Charts Button on the Home Screen appears subdued and is disabled until a new issue of ChartView
is installed.

492

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Viewing ChartView database information:
1) From the Home Screen, touch Utilities > Setup > Avionics Status.
2) Touch the Database Tab.
3) Touch the button corresponding to the display (MFD1, PFD1, PFD2, GTC1, or GTC2) for which the database
information will be viewed.
4) Scroll to display the ChartView database information as shown in Figure 8-18.

Figure 8-18 MFD ChartView Database Information

The ChartView database cycle number shown in Figure 8-18, 1218, is deciphered as follows:
12 – Indicates the year 2012
18 – Indicates the eightenth issue of the ChartView database for the year
The ‘Expires’ date 16–SEP–2012 is the date that this database should be replaced with the next issue.
The ‘Disables’ date 25–NOV–2012 is the date that this database becomes inoperative.
The ChartView database is obtained directly from Jeppesen. Refer to Updating Jeppesen Databases in
Appendix B for instructions on revising the ChartView database.

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

493

ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Example database currency conditions are shown in Figure 8-19. The ‘Expires’ date, in yellow, is the revision
date for the next database cycle. The ‘Disables’ date, in yellow, is the date that this database cycle is no longer
viewable. ‘Not Available’ indicates no ChartView data is available on the database card or no database card is
inserted.

ChartView Database has expired,
but is not Disabled

ChartView Database is Disabled

ChartView Database Not Installed

Figure 8-19 ChartView Database Status

494

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

ADDITIONAL FEATURES

8.3 FLITECHARTS
FliteCharts resemble the paper version of AeroNav Services terminal procedures charts. The charts are displayed
with high-resolution and in color for applicable charts.
The geo-referenced aircraft position is indicated by an aircraft symbol displayed on the chart when the current
position is within the boundaries of the chart. An aircraft symbol may be displayed within an off-scale area
depicted on some charts.
Figure 8-20 shows examples of off-scale areas, indicated by the grey shading. Note, these areas are not shaded on
the published chart. These off-scale areas appear on the chart to convey supplemental information. However, the
depicted geographical position of this information, as it relates to the chart planview, is not the actual geographic
position. Therefore, when the aircraft symbol appears within one of these areas, the aircraft position indicated is
relative to the chart planview, not to the off-scale area.
The FliteCharts database subscription is available from Garmin. Available data includes:
• Arrivals (STAR)
• Approaches
• Departure Procedures (DP)

• Airport Diagrams

Off-Scale
Areas

Off-Scale
Area

Off-Scale
Areas
Off-Scale
Area

Figure 8-20 Sample Chart Indicating Off-Scale Areas

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

495

ADDITIONAL FEATURES

NOTE: Do not maneuver the aircraft based solely upon the geo-referenced aircraft symbol.

CHART SELECTION
When a flight plan is active, or when flying direct-to a destination, the initial set of charts made available
pertains to the departure airport. After departing the airport environment, the initial chart set made available
pertains to the destination airport. When no flight plan is active, or when not flying to a direct-to destination,
the initial chart set is made available for the nearest airport.
Selecting Charts using the Charts Screen:
1) From the Home Screen, touch Charts.
2) The airport for which charts will be displayed is shown at the top of the Charts Screen. Touch the Airport Button
to enter another airport.
3) Touch the Info Tab to display the airport information selection buttons for the selected airport (Figure 8-21).
• Departure Tab to display a list of possible departures for the selected airport.
• Arrival Tab to display a list of possible arrivals for the selected airport.
• Approach Tab to display a list of possible approaches for the selected airport.
4) Touch the desired information button in any of these lists to display the applicable chart on the selected Display
Pane.

Figure 8-21 Airport Diagram Selection

Figure 8-22 Airport Diagram Viewing Options

5) Touch the Charts Options Button to display the viewing options available for the selected chart (Figure 8-22).
6) Touch Fit Width to display the full width of the chart.
7) Touch Back to return to the Charts Screen.

496

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Selecting Airport Diagrams from the Nearest Airports Screen:
1) From the Home Screen, touch Nearest > Airport.
2) Touch the desired airport button. KCOS is selected in Figure 8-23. The Waypoint Options buttons are now
displayed.

Figure 8-23 Airport Diagram Selection

3) Touch the Airport Chart Button. The Info Tab selections are displayed on the Touchscreen Controller (Figure
8-23) and the Airport Diagram is displayed on the selected Display Pane (Figure 8-24).

Figure 8-24 Airport Chart for Selected Airport

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

497

Figure 8-25 Chart Not Available Banner

If there is a problem in rendering the data (such as a data error or a failure of an individual chart), the banner
‘UNABLE TO DISPLAY CHART’ is then displayed.

Figure 8-26 Unable To Display Chart Banner

DAY/NIGHT VIEW
ChartView can be displayed on a white or black background for day or night viewing. The Day View offers
a better presentation in a bright environment. The Night View gives a better presentation for viewing in a dark
environment.
Selecting Day, Night, or Auto View:
1) From the Home Screen, touch Charts > Charts Options.
2) Touch the Light Mode Button (Figure 8-28).
3) Touch the Day, Night, or Auto button. The selection is annunciated on the Light Mode Button. When Auto
is selected, the display will change to the appropriate day or night setting, dependent on ambient lighting.

Figure 8-27 Selecting Day/Night View

498

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

ADDITIONAL FEATURES
4) Touch the Threshold button (Figure 8-28). The Auto Light Mode Threshold window is displayed.

Select Chart Options

Adjust Threshold Setting

Figure 8-28 Setting Day/Night Switching Threshold

Figure 8-29 Airport Diagram, Day View

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

499

ADDITIONAL FEATURES

Figure 8-30 Airport Diagram, Night View

FLITECHARTS CYCLE NUMBER AND EXPIRATION DATE
FliteCharts data is revised every 28 days. Charts are still viewable during a period that extends from the cycle
expiration date to the disables date. FliteCharts is disabled 180 days after the expiration date and are no longer
available for viewing upon reaching the disables date. When turning on the system, the MFD Power-up Display
shows the current status of the FliteCharts database. See the following table for the various FliteCharts Powerup Display annunciations and the definition of each.

FliteCharts Database

Figure 8-31 Power-up Display, FliteCharts Database

500

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Power-up Display

Definition
Blank Line. System is not configured for FliteCharts. Contact a Garminauthorized service center for configuration.
System is configured for FliteCharts but no chart database is installed.
Refer to Updating Garmin Databases in Appendix B for the FliteCharts
database
Normal operation. FliteCharts database is valid and within current
cycle.
FliteCharts database is beyond the expiration date, but still within the
180 day viewing period.
FliteCharts database has timed out. Database is beyond 180 days
after expiration date. FliteCharts database is no longer available for
viewing.
Table 8-3 FliteCharts Annunciations and Definitions

‘FliteCharts Expires’ plus a date in white, indicates the chart database is current. ‘Chart data is out of date!’
in yellow, indicates charts are still viewable, but approaching the disable date.
When the 180 day grace period has expired, ‘Chart data is disabled.’ in yellow indicates that the FliteCharts
database has expired and is no longer viewable. ‘Chart Data: N/A’ appears in white if no FliteCharts data is
available on the database card or no database card is inserted.
FliteCharts status information can be found on the MFD1, PFD1, PFD2, GTC1, and GTC2 Databases Screen
(Figure 8-32). The ‘Expires’ date is the revision date for the next database cycle. The ‘Expires’ date appears in
yellow when expired.
FliteCharts becomes inoperative 180 days after the FliteCharts ‘Expires’ date is reached, and is no longer
available for viewing. This date is shown as the ‘Disables’ date. When the disables date is attained, the date is
displayed in yellow. Also, Charts Button on the Home Screen then appears subdued and is disabled until a
new issue of FliteCharts is installed.

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

501

ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Viewing FliteCharts database information:
1) From the Home Screen, touch Utilities > Setup > Avionics Status.
2) Touch the Database Tab.
3) Touch the button corresponding to the display (MFD1, PFD1, PFD2, GTC1, or GTC2) for which the database
information will be viewed.
4) Scroll to display the FliteCharts database information as shown in Figure 8-32.

Figure 8-32 MFD FliteCharts Database Information

The FliteCharts database cycle number shown in the figure, 1208, is deciphered as follows:
12 – Indicates the year 2012
08 – Indicates the eighth issue of the FliteCharts database for the year
The FliteCharts ‘Expires’ date 16–JUN–12 is the last date that this database is current.
The ‘Disables’ date 25–NOV–12 is the date that this database becomes inoperative.
The FliteCharts database is obtained from Garmin. Refer to Updating Garmin Databases in Appendix B for
instructions on revising the FliteCharts database.
Example database currency conditions are shown in Figure 8-33. The ‘Expires’ date, in yellow, is the revision
date for the next database cycle. The ‘Disables’ date, in yellow, is the date that this database cycle is no longer
viewable. ‘Not Available’ indicates no FliteCharts data is available on the database card or no database card is
inserted.

FliteCharts Database has expired,
but is not Disabled

FliteCharts Database is Disabled

FliteCharts Database Not Installed

Figure 8-33 FliteCharts Database Status

502

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

ADDITIONAL FEATURES

8.4 AIRPORT DIRECTORY
The Aircraft Owners and Pilots Association (AOPA) or AC-U-KWIK Airport Directory databases offer detailed
information regarding services, hours of operation, lodging options, and more for various airports. This
information is viewed on the Airport Directory Info Screen as shown in Figure 8-35.
Selecting the Airport Directory Info Screen:
1) From the Home Screen, touch Nearest > Airports.
2) A list of the nearest airports to the aircraft present position is displayed, beginning with the closest. Touch the
desired airport, in this case KCOS. The Waypoint Options buttons are displayed as shown in Figure 8-34.
3) Touch the Airport Info Button to display the Airport Directory Info Screen.
4) Touch the AOPA Tab to display the Airport Directory information for the selected airport as shown in Figure
8-35.

Figure 8-34 Nearest Airport Selection

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Figure 8-35 AOPA Airport Directory Information

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

503

ADDITIONAL FEATURES

AIRPORT DIRECTORY DATABASE CYCLE NUMBER & REVISION
The Airport Directory database is revised every 56 days. Check fly.garmin.com for the current database. The
Airport Directory is always available for use after the expiration date. When turning on the system, the Powerup Display indicates whether the databases are current, out of date, or not available.

Airport Database

Figure 8-36 Power-up Page, Airport Directory Database

Power-up Display

Definition
Normal operation. Airport Directory database is valid and within
current cycle.
Airport Directory database has expired.
Database card contains no Airport Directory data.

Table 8-4 Airport Directory Annunciation Definitions

The Airport Directory ‘Region’, ‘Version’, ‘Cycle’, ‘Effective’ date and ‘Expires’ date of the database cycle can
also be found on the Touchscreen Controller, as seen in Figure 8-37.

504

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Viewing Airport Directory database information:
1) From the Home Screen, touch Utilities > Setup > Avionics Status.
2) Touch the Database Tab.
3) Touch the button corresponding to the display (MFD1, PFD1, PFD2, GTC1, or GTC2) for which the database information
will be viewed.
4) Scroll to display the Airport Directory database information as shown in Figure 8-37.

Figure 8-37 MFD Airport Directory Database Information

The Airport Directory database cycle number shown in the figure, 12D3, is deciphered as follows:
12 – Indicates the year 2012
D – Indicates the data is for Airport Directory
3 – Indicates the third issue of the Airport Directory database for the year
The Airport Directory ‘Effective’ date 31–MAY–2012 is the beginning date for the current database cycle. The
Airport Directory ‘Expires’ date 26–JUL–2012 is the revision date for the next database cycle.
The ‘Effective’ date appears in yellow when the current date is before the effective date. The ‘Expires’ date
appears in yellow when expired (Table 8-4). ‘Not Available’ appears in the ‘Region’ field if Airport Directory
data is not available on the database card. An expired Airport Directory database is not disabled and will
continue to function indefinitely.

Current Date is before Effective Date

Airport Directory Database has Expired

Airport Directory Database Not Installed

Figure 8-38 Airport Directory Airport Database Status

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

505

ADDITIONAL FEATURES

8.5 SATELLITE TELEPHONE AND DATALINK SERVICES
NOTE: Separate accounts must be established to access the Iridium satellite network for voice and Garmin

Flight Data Services for data transmission of maintenance reports.
The optional GDL 59 Data Link provides an aircraft systems data logger for communication of potential
maintenance issues and, while the aircraft is on the ground, a high speed (IEEE 802.11g) Wi-Fi data link between
the aircraft and a ground computer network. The GDL 59 can also be paired with an optional GSR 56 Iridium
Transceiver providing an airborne low speed data link, Iridium Satellite Telephone service and SMS text messaging.

REGISTERING WITH CONNEXT
A subscriber account must be established prior to using the Iridium Satellite System. Before setting up an
Iridium account, obtain the System ID and serial number of the Iridium Transceiver (GSR1) by performing the
following procedure. Contact Garmin International Aviation Product Services at 1-866-739-5687 in the United
States or 913-397-8200, ext. 1135.
Registering the system for data link services:
1) From the Home Screen, touch Utilities > Setup > Avionics Status.
2) If necessary, touch the Airframe Tab. Note the System ID number as seen in Figure 8-39. This number will be
needed when contacting Garmin Connext Services to establish the account.

Figure 8-39 System ID Number

Figure 8-40 Iridium Transceiver Serial Number (GSR1)

3) Touch the LRU Info Tab. Scroll to view ‘GSR1’ and note the serial number (Figure 8-40), which will also be
needed when contacting Garmin Flight Data Services.
4) Contact Garmin International Aviation Product Services to establish an account and receive an access code.

506

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

ADDITIONAL FEATURES
5) From the Home Screen, touch Utilities > Setup > Connext Registration > Register (Figure 8-41).

Figure 8-41 Connext Registration Display

Figure 8-42 Entering the Access Code

6) Enter the access code as shown in Figure 8-42.
7) Touch the Enter Button.

CONTACTS
Names, telephone numbers, and email addresses may be entered and stored. These contacts may be used
to place telephone calls or send email and text messages.
Creating a new contact:
1) From the Home Screen, touch Services > Contacts.
2) The Contacts Screen is displayed as shown in Figure 8-44.

Figure 8-43 Services Menu

Figure 8-44 Contact List

3) Touch New Contact... at the top of the list (Figure 8-44).

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

507

ADDITIONAL FEATURES
4) Touch Name, shown in Figure 8-45. The Contact Name entry screen is displayed.

Figure 8-45 Enter New Contact Information

Figure 8-46 Enter Name

5) Enter the name of the new contact as the example shows in Figure 8-46.
6) Touch Enter.
7) Touch Telephone Number. The Telephone Number entry screen is displayed.

Figure 8-47 Select Telephone Number

Figure 8-48 Enter Telephone Number

8) Enter the telephone number of the new contact as the example shows in Figure 8-48.
9) Touch Enter.

508

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

ADDITIONAL FEATURES
10) Touch Email Address. The Email Address entry screen is displayed.

Figure 8-49 Select Email Address

Figure 8-50 Enter Email Address

11) Enter the email address of the new contact as the example shows in Figure 8-50.
12) Touch Enter.
13) Touch Create. The new contact is created and appears in the list of contacts as shown in Figure 8-52.

Figure 8-51 New Contact Info Complete

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Figure 8-52 Enter Email Address

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

509

ADDITIONAL FEATURES

TELEPHONE COMMUNICATION (OPTIONAL)
The pilot or copilot can place and answer calls on the Iridium satellite network.
Viewing the Telephone Status:
1) From the Home Screen, touch Services > Telephone.
2) The Telephone Screen is displayed as shown in Figure 8-54.

Figure 8-53 Telephone Service Selection

Figure 8-54 Telephone Status Information

The Telephone Screen, as shown in Figure 8-54, gives a graphical representation of the current disposition
of voice and/or data transmissions.

ENABLE/DISABLE THE IRIDIUM SYSTEM CONNECTION
Connection with the Iridium Satellite System may be turned on or off by using the page menu.
To enable/disable the Iridium system connection:
1) From the Home Screen, touch Services > Telephone.
2) Touch the Iridium #1 Button to display the Iridium #1 Transceiver Screen, as shown in Figure 8-55.
3) Touch the Disable Iridium Transmission Annunciator Button to disable (green annunciator an in Figure
8-56) the transceiver. Touch the button again to enable (gray annunciator) the transceiver.

Figure 8-55 Iridium Transceiver Enabled

510

Figure 8-56 Iridium Transceiver Disabled

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

ADDITIONAL FEATURES
INCOMING CALLS
Incoming voice calls from an external telephone phone through the Iridium Satellite Network , or the cabin
telephone, are annunciated by a flashing TEL Button on the GTC Button Bar, as shown in Figure 8-57, and
an “Incoming Call” voice alert. Incoming external calls can be answered by either the cockpit or cabin phone.
To answer a call from the cockpit:
1) Touch the flashing TEL Button. The Notifications Screen is displayed as in Figure 8-58.
2) Touch the Answer Button. The call is now connected as indicated in Figure 8-60. Touching the Ignore Button
extinguishes the new call annunciation and the call remains disconnected. Touching Telephone will display
the Telephone Screen as shown in Figure 8-59.

Figure 8-57 Incoming Call Notification

Figure 8-58 Telephone Notification Selected

Figure 8-59 Incoming Call on Telephone Screen

Figure 8-60 Ending the Connected Call

3) When the call is finished, touch End Call (Figure 8-60) to disconnect the call.

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

511

ADDITIONAL FEATURES
OUTGOING CALLS
Voice calls can be made from the cockpit or the cabin to an external telephone through the Iridium Satellite
Network. Calls are made from the cabin are made using the cabin handset.
To make an external call from the cockpit:
1) From the Home Screen, touch Services > Telephone.
2) Touch the Cockpit Phone Button. The Cockpit Phone Screen is displayed as shown in Figure 8-61.
3) Touch Dial. The phone number entry screen is displayed as shown in Figure 8-62.

Figure 8-61 Cockpit Telephone Status

Figure 8-62 Telephone Number Entry

5) Using the number keys, enter the phone number. Touch Find to select a phone number from the Contact List.
The International dialing sequence is necessary to place a call from the cockpit to an external phone: Country
Code + City/Area Code (if any) + Telephone Number. The following country codes may be used when calling
other satellite telephone systems.

Satellite System
Inmarsat
ICO
Ellipso
Iridium
Globalstar

512

Country Code
870
8810 or 8811
8812 or 8813
8816 or 8817
8818 or 8819

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

ADDITIONAL FEATURES
6) Touch Enter. The system now begins establishing a connection as indicated in Figure 8-63. The system will
indicate a completed connection, as shown in Figure 8-64, when the telephone to which the call is made is
answered.

Figure 8-63 Establishing a Connection

Figure 8-64 Telephone Connected

To end a call:
1) From the Home Screen, touch Services > Telephone.
2) Touch the Cockpit Phone Button. The Cockpit Phone Screen is displayed as shown in Figure 8-65.
3) Touch End Call.

Figure 8-65 Ending the Call

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Figure 8-66 System is Idle After Ending Call

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

513

ADDITIONAL FEATURES
MAKING A CALL TO THE CABIN
1) From the Home Screen, touch Services > Telephone.
2) Touch the Cockpit Phone Button. The Cockpit Phone Screen is displayed as shown in Figure 8-65.
2) Touch Call Cabin. A display similar to Figure 8-67 will be shown.

Figure 8-67 Connecting to the Cabin Telephone

Figure 8-68 Cabin Telephone Connected

3) When the cabin phone is answered, the connection is indicated as seen in Figure 8-68.

PLACING THE COCKPIT PHONE ON HOLD
A call connected to the cockpit phone can be placed on hold from the Telephone Screen. The cabin phone
cannot be placed on hold using the Touchscreen Controller, however, the cabin handset may used to place a
cabin call on hold.
1) From the Home Screen, touch Services > Telephone.
2) Touch the Cockpit Phone Button. The Cockpit Phone Screen is displayed as in Figure 8-69.
3) Touch Hold. The Telephone Screen indicates the call is on hold as in Figure 8-70.

Figure 8-69 Selecting the Cockpit Phone for Hold

Figure 8-70 Hold Activated

4) Touch Hold again to return to the call.

514

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

ADDITIONAL FEATURES
TRANSFERRING A CALL FROM THE COCKPIT
From the cockpit phone, an external call can be transferred to the cabin phone, or a call with the cabin
phone can be transferred to an external phone.
Transferring a call:
1) From the Home Screen, touch Services > Telephone.
2) Touch the Cockpit Phone Button. The Cockpit Phone Screen is displayed as in Figure 8-72.
3) Touch the Transfer to Cabin or Transfer to Iridium Button. When the cockpit phone is connected to an
external call, the Transfer to Cabin Button is displayed. When the cockpit phone is connected to the cabin
phone, the Transfer to Iridium Button is displayed. In this example, the call is transfered to the cabin phone
by selecting the Transfer to Cabin Button. The Telephone Screen indicates a connection is being established
with the cabin phone as in Figure 8-73.
4) When the cabin phone is answered, the transfer is completed as shown in Figure 8-74.

Figure 8-71 Cockpit Phone Connected to Iridium Call

Figure 8-72 Transfer Call to Cabin Phone

Figure 8-73 Connecting Call to Cabin Phone

Figure 8-74 Transfer to Cabin Phone Complete

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

515

ADDITIONAL FEATURES
MAKING A CONFERENCE CALL FROM THE COCKPIT
The cabin or an external phone can be added to a call already in progress.
Adding another phone to an active call:
1) From the Home Screen, touch Services > Telephone.
2) Touch the Cockpit Phone Button. In this example, the cabin phone is conferenced in with an external call
connected to the cockpit phone. The Cockpit Button is touched, displaying the Cockpit Phone Screen as in
Figure 8-76.
3) Touch the Conference with Cabin or Conference with Iridium Button. When the cockpit phone is
connected to an external call, the Conference with Cabin Button is displayed. When the cockpit phone is
connected to the cabin phone, the Conference with Iridium Button is displayed. In this example, the call is
conferenced with the cabin phone by selecting the Conference with Cabin Button. The Telephone Screen
indicates a connection is being established with the cabin phone as in Figure 8-77.
4) When the cabin phone is answered, the conference call is completed as shown in Figure 8-78.

516

Figure 8-75 Cockpit Phone Connected to Iridium Call

Figure 8-76 Conferencing in Cabin Phone

Figure 8-77 Connecting to Cabin Phone

Figure 8-78 Cabin Phone Conference Complete

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

ADDITIONAL FEATURES
MANAGING TELEPHONE AUDIO
NOTE: The Push-to-Talk switch is not utilized for telephone communication. The microphone is active

whenever a call is connected and telephone audio is enabled.
When an incoming call is received, or an outgoing call is made, telephone audio (which includes headset
and microphone) is automatically enabled for either the pilot or copilot, depending on which Touchscreen
Controller was used to make or answer the call. If the pilot or copilot wishes to join an existing call, the
telephone audio must be enabled manually on the appropriate Touchscreen Controller. When the call is
ended, telephone audio is automatically disabled. The green Pilot Audio Annunciator Button in Figure
8-79 indicates the enabled pilot audio on the pilot-side Touchscreen Controller. The copilot-side controller
will, likewise, indicate a green Copilot Audio Annunciator Button. Pilot and copilot telephone audio can be
enabled and disabled manually by performing the following steps.
To enable/disable telephone audio and adjust volume:
1) From the Home Screen, touch Services > Telephone.
2) Touch the Cockpit Phone Button. The Cockpit Phone Screen is displayed as shown in Figure 8-79.

Figure 8-79 Conferencing in Cabin Phone

3) Touch the Pilot Audio or Copilot Audio Annunciator Button to disable telephone audio, including microphone
(gray annunciator).
4) Touch the Annunciator Button again to enable telephone audio, including microphone (green annunciator).
5) Touch and move the Volume Slider on the appropriate Touchscreen Controller to adjust the telephone volume.

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

517

ADDITIONAL FEATURES

TEXT MESSAGING (SMS)
The pilot or copilot can send and receive text messages on the Iridium satellite network. Messages may be
sent to an email address or text message capable cellular telephone. Message length is limited to 160 characters,
including the email address.

VIEWING A TEXT MESSAGE WHEN RECEIVED
1) Touch the flashing SMS Button as shown in Figure 8-80. The SMS Text Inbox Tab is automatically selected
and the newly received text message is shown at the top of the list, as in Figure 8-81.

Figure 8-80 New SMS Text Message Annunciation

Figure 8-81 New Text Message at Top of List

2) Touch the desired message to display its contents as seen in Figure 8-82.

Figure 8-82 New Text Message Contents

3) If desired, touch Reply to create a reply to the message.
4) Touch Delete to delete the message from the list.
5) Touching Save Contact saves the contact information in the system contact list.

518

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

ADDITIONAL FEATURES
REPLY TO A TEXT MESSAGE
While viewing the text message content, touch the REPLY Button.
Or:
1) From the Home Screen, touch Services > SMS Text (Figure 8-83).

Figure 8-83 SMS Text Services Selection

Figure 8-84 Touch Desired Message

2) Touch the desired text message in the Inbox list as in Figure 8-84. If necessary, scroll to the desired message.
The text message is displayed as in Figure 8-85.
3) Touch the REPLY Button. The Opened SMS Text Message Screen is displayed as shown in Figure 8-86.

Figure 8-85 Message Content

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Figure 8-86 New Reply Message Screen

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

519

ADDITIONAL FEATURES
4) Touch the ‘Message’ Window to display the alphanumeric buttons.

Figure 8-87 Message Content

Figure 8-88 Reply Message

5) Enter the reply text as seen in Figure 8-87.
6) Touch the Enter Button. The reply message is displayed as in Figure 8-88.
7) Touch the Send Button. The SMS Message Replied To Screen is displayed as seen in Figure 8-89.

Figure 8-89 Reply Message Sent

8) If desired, touch the Reply Again Button to resend the reply.
9) Touch Delete to delete the message from the list.
10) Touching Save Contact saves the contact information in the system contact list.

520

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SENDING A TEXT MESSAGE
1) From the Home Screen, touch Services > SMS Text.

Figure 8-90 SMS Text Services Selection

Figure 8-91 Select Options

2) Touch the Options Button as seen in Figure 8-91. The available options are displayed as in Figure 8-92.
3) Touch the Draft New Message Button. The SMS Text Message Draft Screen is displayed as shown in Figure
8-93. The Draft New Message option is also available from within the Drafts and Outbox Tabs.

Figure 8-92 Select Draft New Message

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Figure 8-93 Touch ‘To’ Window

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

521

ADDITIONAL FEATURES
4) Touch the ‘To’ Window. A selection screen is displayed like in Figure 8-94. If the text message is to be sent to
SMS compatible telephone, touch the Phone Button. If the message is to be sent to an email address, touch
Email.

Alpha Buttons are
displayed when the
Email Button is
touched

Numeric Buttons
are displayed when
the Phone Button is
touched

Figure 8-94 Select Message Destination

Figure 8-95 Enter Number or Address

5) Enter the telephone number or email address as seen in Figure 8-95. The number or address may be obtained
from the Contacts by touching the Find Button.
6) Touch the Enter Button. The number or address is now displayed as in Figure 8-96.
7) Touch the ‘Message’ Window. The alphanumeric buttons are displayed as in Figure 8-97.

Figure 8-96 Touch Message Window

Figure 8-97 Reply Message

8) Enter the message text.

522

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

ADDITIONAL FEATURES
9) Touch the Enter Button. The message text is displayed in the ‘Message’ Window as shown in Figure 8-98.

Figure 8-98 Message Ready to Send

10) Touch the Send Button.

TEXT MESSAGE BOXES
Received text messages reside in the Inbox as ‘Read’ or ‘Unread’ messages. The Outbox contains ‘Sent” and
‘Unsent’ text messages. Saved messages that are meant to be sent later are stored as Drafts.
View Inbox messages:
1) From the Home Screen, touch Services > SMS Text.
2) Touch the Inbox Tab. A list of received messages is displayed as in Figure 8-99. The Inbox Tab is selected by
default when accessing the SMS Text Messaging Screen.

Figure 8-99 SMS Text Inbox

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

523

ADDITIONAL FEATURES
View Draft messages:
1) From the Home Screen, touch Services > SMS Text.
2) Touch the Draft Tab. A list of draft messages is displayed as in Figure 8-100, provided messages have been
previously saved.
3) Touch a message to access the Send or Delete Buttons.

Figure 8-100 SMS Text Drafts

View Outbox messages:
1) From the Home Screen, touch Services > SMS Text.
2) Touch the Outbox Tab. A list of sent or unsent messages is displayed as in Figure 8-101.
3) Touch a message to access the Send Again, Delete, and Save Contact Buttons.

Figure 8-101 SMS Text Outbox

524

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

ADDITIONAL FEATURES
MANAGING TEXT MESSAGES
The following table illustrates the various message status icons.
Message Symbol

Description
Received text message that has not been opened
Received text message that has been opened
A reply has been sent for this text message
Saved text message, draft not sent
System is sending text message
Text message has been sent
System failed to send text message
Table 8-5 Text Message Symbols

The viewed messages in the Inbox, Outbox, or Drafts may be listed according to the date/time the message
was sent or received or by message address.
Viewing messages sorted by message date/time:
1) From the Home Screen, touch Services > SMS Text.
2) Touch the Options Tab. The ‘Sort Messages By’ selections are displayed as in Figure 8-102.

Figure 8-102 Message Sort Options

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

525

ADDITIONAL FEATURES
3) Touch the Time Button. A green annunciator indicates an active selection.
4) Touch the Back Button to return to the previously selected message box.

Viewing messages sorted by address:
1) From the Home Screen, touch Services > SMS Text.
2) Touch the Options Tab. The ‘Sort Messages By’ selections are displayed as in Figure 8-102.
3) Touch the Address Button. A green annunciator indicates an active selection.
4) Touch the Back Button to return to the previously selected message box.

Marking all messages as read:
1) From the Home Screen, touch Services > SMS Text.
2) Touch the Options Tab. The selection buttons are displayed as in Figure 8-102.
3) Touch the Mark All Read Button.
4) Touch the Back Button to return to the Inbox. All messages in the Inbox now indicate they have been opened.

Delete all messages:
1) From the Home Screen, touch Services > SMS Text.
2) Touch the Options Tab. The selection buttons are displayed as in Figure 8-102.
3) Touch the Delete All Messages Button. A confirmation screen is displayed as in Figure 8-103.

Figure 8-103 Confirm Deletion of Messages

4) Touch the OK Button.

526

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

ADDITIONAL FEATURES

WIFI CONNECTIONS (OPTIONAL)
Wi-Fi connections are used for transferring maintenance data to the aircraft manufacturer. The system can
connect to a IEEE 802.11g compatible network provided the aircraft is on the ground and located within range
of a network. The system is capable of WEP64, WEP128,WPA-PSK, and WPA2-PSK encryption formats. WPAEnterprise and WPA2-Enterprise are not supported. Connections that require web proxies, captive portals, or
other elements that require user credentials, including a username and password or a redemption or access
code; or require action such as accepting a user agreement, are not supported.
Connecting to a Wi-Fi network:
1) From the Home Screen, touch Utilities > Setup > Wi-Fi Setup.
2) A list of available Wi-Fi networks is displayed as in Figure 8-104. If necessary, scroll the displayed list of
networks to find the desired network. If a specific network is expected to be present in the list, but is not
displayed, try rescanning networks by performing the following steps:\
a) Touch the Wi-Fi Options Button.
b) Touch Rescan as seen in Figure 8-105.

Figure 8-104 Wi-Fi Networks Available for Connection

Figure 8-105 Rescan Networks

3) Touch the network to be connected. In this example, GarminGuests is selected. A confirmation screen is
displayed as in Figure 8-106.

Figure 8-106 Confirm Network Connection

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Figure 8-107 Confirm Favorite Selection

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

527

ADDITIONAL FEATURES
4) Touch OK.
5) The system now asks if it is desired to make the connected network a Favorite network, as shown in Figure 8-107.
6) Touch OK to place the network in the Favorites list, or touch Cancel to connect to the selected network without
make it a Favorite network. Networks shown in the Available networks list which have been designated as a
Favorite network are indicated by a star, as shown in Figure 8-108. Connected networks are indicated by a
green antenna symbol as seen in Figure 8-109.

Figure 8-108 Favorite Network Indication

Figure 8-109 Connected Network Indication

Disconnecting a Wi-Fi network:
1) From the Home Screen, touch Utilities > Setup > Wi-Fi Setup.
2) Touch the Wi-Fi Options Button.
3) Touch Disconnect.

Making changes a Favorite network:
1) From the Home Screen, touch Utilities > Setup > Wi-Fi Setup.
2) Touch the Favorites Tab to display the Favorite networks list, as in Figure 8-110.
3) Touch the network to which changes will be made. The Network Options are displayed as shown in Figure 8-111.

Figure 8-110 Favorite Networks List

528

Figure 8-111 Network Options

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

ADDITIONAL FEATURES
4) Touch Auto Connect, as in Figure 8-111 to enable (green annunciator) an automatic connection to this
network whenever the aircraft is on the ground and in range of the network.
5) Touch Edit to display the edit screen as in Figure 8-112.

Figure 8-112 Favorite Network Indication

6) Touch the desired parameter for editing and make selections accordingly.
7) When finished making desired changes, touch Save.

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

529

ADDITIONAL FEATURES

8.6 SIRIUSXM SATELLITE RADIO (OPTIONAL)
NOTE: Refer to the Hazard Avoidance Section for information and activation of SiriusXM Weather products.

The optional SiriusXM Satellite Radio entertainment feature of the GDL 69A Data Link Receiver provides audio
entertainment for passengers and crew. The GDL 69A can receive SiriusXM Satellite Radio entertainment services
at any altitude throughout the Continental United States.
SiriusXM Satellite Radio offers a variety of radio programming over long distances without having to constantly
search for new stations. Based on signals from satellites, coverage far exceeds land-based transmissions.
SiriusXM Satellite Radio services are subscription-based. For more information on specific service packages, visit
www.siriusxm.com.

ACTIVATING SIRIUSXM SATELLITE SERVICES
The SiriusXM Weather and/or SiriusXM Radio services are activated by first establishing an account with
SiriusXM Satellite Radio. The Audio Radio ID and/or Data Radio ID must be provided to SiriusXM Satellite
Radio to activate the weather and/or entertainment subscription.
SiriusXM Satellite Radio uses the coded radio ID to send an activation signal that, when received by the GDL
69A, allows it to play entertainment programming and display weather data.
These radio IDs is located:
• On the label on the back of the Data Link Receiver
• On the SiriusXM Info Screen on the Touchscreen Controller (Figure 8-113)
Contact the installer if the radio ID cannot be located.
Establishing a SiriusXM Satellite Radio account:
1) From the Home Screen, touch Utilities > Setup > SiriusXM Info.
2) Note the Audio Radio ID and/or Data Radio ID as seen in Figure 8-113.
3) Contact SiriusXM Satellite Radio. Follow the instructions provided by SiriusXM Satellite Radio services.

Figure 8-113 SiriusXM Information Display

530

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

ADDITIONAL FEATURES

NOTE: The LOCK Button on the SiriusXM Info Screen is used to save GDL 69A activation data when the

SiriusXM services are initially set up. It is not used during normal SiriusXM Radio operation, but there
should be no adverse effects if inadvertently selected during flight.
Activating SiriusXM Satellite services on the system:
1) From the Home Screen, touch Utilities > Setup > SiriusXM Info.
2) Verify the Data Radio and/or Audio Radio show a signal strength, indicating the system is communicating with
the satellite.
3) Touch the Start Button in the Activation field (Figure 8-114).

Figure 8-114 Activating Radios

4) Touch the LOCK Button in the Activation field as seen in Figure 8-115. The system is now activated and ready
for use.

Figure 8-115 Locking Activation Settings

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

531

ADDITIONAL FEATURES

USING SIRIUSXM RADIO
The Music Screen provides information and control of the audio entertainment features of the SiriusXM
Satellite Radio.

Add Current Channel
to Favorites
Select Channel
By Number

Channel List
for Selected
Category

Select Channel
Categories
Select Channel
Categories

Figure 8-116 SiriusXM Satellite Radio Controls

SELECTING CHANNELS
The Channel field on the Music Screen shows the available channels for the selected audio entertainment
category. The Now Playing field shows information for the currently active channel.
Selecting a channel from the channel list:
1) From the Home Screen, touch Services > Music to access the Music Screen as in Figure 8-116.
2) Touch the desired channel in the channel list. The selected channel is now shown in the Now Playing field.

Selecting a channel directly:
1) From the Home Screen, touch Services > Music > Channel.
2) The numeric keypad is displayed. Enter the desired channel number.
3) Press the Enter Button. The selected channel is now shown in the Now Playing field.

532

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

ADDITIONAL FEATURES
ENTERTAINMENT CATEGORIES
The Category field on the Music Screen shows the currently selected entertainment category. Categories of
audio entertainment, such as jazz, rock, talk/news, sports, etc., can be selected to list the available channels
for a type of music or other contents.
Selecting a category:
1) From the Home Screen, touch Services > Music > Category.
2) The list of categories is displayed as shown in Figure 8-117.

Figure 8-117 Channel Categories

3) Scroll to view the available categories.
4) Touch the desired category to select. The selected category is displayed on the Category Button and the
channel list displays channels available for the selected category.

FAVORITES
Channels can be saved to a list of favorites and recalled for listening later.
Save a channel to favorites list:
1) From the Home Screen, touch Services > Music to access the Music Screen as in Figure 8-116.
2) Select a desired channel as the ‘Now Playing’ channel.
3) Touch the Favorite Annunciator Button. The current channel is placed in the favorites list. Note, a green
annunciator indicates a favorite channel is ‘Now Playing’.

Select a favorite channel for listening:
1) From the Home Screen, touch Services > Music > Category.
2) The list of categories is displayed as shown in Figure 8-117.
3) If necessary, scroll to view the Favorites Button.
4) Touch the Favorites Button to view the favorite channel list.
5) Touch the desired channel in the list. The channel is now displayed in the Now Playing field.

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

533

ADDITIONAL FEATURES
ADJUSTING VOLUME
Entertainment audio volume is shown in the Volume field (Figure 8-118) as a percentage of full volume.
Adjusting the volume:
1) From the Home Screen, touch Services > Music > Volume.
2) The volume adjustment slider is displayed as shown in Figure 8-118.
3) Touch and drag the slider to the right or left to adjust the volume. Drag to the right increases volume. Drag to
the left to decrease the volume.

Figure 8-118 Adjusting Volume

Muting or unmuting the volume:
1) From the Home Screen, touch Services > Music > Volume.
2) Touch the Music Annunciator Button to mute or unmute the volume. Muted volume is indicated by a gray
annunciator. Unmuted volume is indicated by a green annunciator.
3) Touch the Back Button to return to the Music Screen. When the volume is muted, ‘Muted’ is displayed in the
Volume field.

534

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

ADDITIONAL FEATURES

8.7 SCHEDULED MESSAGES
The Scheduled Messages feature can be used to enter and display reminder messages (e.g., Change oil, Switch
fuel tanks, or Altimeter-Transponder Check) on the Messages Screen of the Touchscreen Controller. Messages
can be set to display based on a specific date and time (Event), once the message timer reaches zero (One
Time), or recurrently whenever the message timer reaches zero (Periodic). Message timers set to periodic alerting
automatically reset to the original timer value once the message is displayed. When power is cycled, all messages
are retained until deleted, and message timer countdown is resumed.
Entering a scheduled message:
1) From the Home Screen, touch Utilities > Scheduled Messages.
2) Touch the Add Message Button as shown in Figure 8-119.
3) Touch the Message Button as shown in Figure 8-120.

Figure 8-119 Touch Add Message

Figure 8-120 Touch Message Button

4) The keypad is displayed as in Figure 8-121. Enter the message name using the keypad. The large and small
Right Knob can also be used to enter the characters.
5) Touch the Enter Button. The message name is displayed on the Message Button.
6) Touch the Frequency Button as shown in Figure 8-122.

Figure 8-121 Enter Message Name

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Figure 8-122 Touch Frequency Button

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

535

ADDITIONAL FEATURES
7) Touch Event, One Time, or Periodic. The selection is displayed on the Frequency Button as in Figure 8-124.

Figure 8-123 Touch One Time Button

Figure 8-124 Touch Time Button

8) Touch the Time Button as seen in Figure 8-124.
9) The numeric keypad is displayed as in Figure 8-125. Enter the time value using the keypad. If One Time or
Periodic were selected in step 7, the time is entered in a HH:MM:SS format. If Event was selected in step 7,
time is entered in a clock format (HH:MM lcl) as local time.
10) Touch the Enter Button. The time is displayed on the Time Button.

Figure 8-125 Enter Time

Figure 8-126 Message

11) If Event was selected in step 7, touch the Date Button. The Date Button is subdued and disabled when One
Time or Periodic were selected in step 7.

536

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

ADDITIONAL FEATURES
12) Touch the desired year, as in Figure 8-127, then the month followed by the day.

Touch Month

Touch Year

Touch Day

Figure 8-127 Event Date Entry

Edit a scheduled message:
1) From the Home Screen, touch Utilities > Scheduled Messages.
2) Touch the name of the message to be edited. The Message Options Window is displayed as in Figure 8-129.
3) Touch the Edit Message Button.
4) Select the desired message parameter to be edited and perform the needed steps as discussed previously for
entering a scheduled message.

Figure 8-128 Select Message for Editing

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Figure 8-129 Select Edit Option

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

537

ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Deleting a scheduled message:
1) From the Home Screen, touch Utilities > Scheduled Messages.
2) Touch the name of the message to be deleted. The Message Options Window is displayed as in Figure 8-129.
3) Touch the Delete Message Button. Touch the Delete All Messages Button to delete all saved messages.

When a scheduled message is activated, the MSG Button flashes inverse video (Figure 8-130). Touching the
MSG Button on the Touchscreen Controller opens the Messages Screen (Figure 8-131) and acknowledges the
message, indicated by the MSG Button ceasing to flash. Touching the MSG Button again removes the Messages
Screen from view, and the scheduled message is deleted from the message queue.

Figure 8-130 Message Annunciation on Touchscreen Controller

Figure 8-131 Scheduled Message Example

538

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

ADDITIONAL FEATURES

8.8 ELECTRONIC DOCUMENTS
The Electronic Document function allows viewing of electronic documents on MFD and/or PFD displays.
The system allows the display of electronic documents from two sources. These sources are Installed and User
documents.

INSTALLED DOCUMENTS
‘Installed’ Documents are typically provided by the aircraft manufacturer. These documents are stored on the
Supplemental Data Cards, along with the databases, located in the bottom SD Card slot of each PFD and the MFD.
Each Supplemental Data Card contains identical document files.

USER DOCUMENTS
‘User’ Documents are those loaded by the crew. User Documents must be in .pdf format and reside on an
SD Card no larger than 16GB. The Maximum document file size is 1.5GB. The maximum number of pages
per document is limited to 9,999. Pages with large and/or numerous images may exceed RAM memory limits,
therefore, may not be displayed correctly or not displayed at all.
An SD card must be inserted into the top card slot of each display on which it is desired to view the user
documents. Each display can only access electronic documents on the SD Cards that are inserted in that display.
User Documents can be unique to the display on which they are viewed.

SUPPORTED PDF FEATURES
User Documents must be in .pdf format. The following .pdf features are not supported. If a file contains any
of these features, the system will ignore the feature and display the document.
• Embedded files (attachments)
• Alternate images (using a different image for display and printing)
• Page labels (alternate page numbers; e.g. for i, ii, iii, iv for table of contents)
• Additional annotations, including file attachment annotation, sound annotation, movie annotation, widget
annotation, and trap network annotation.
• Digital signatures
• Javascript
• Logical structure (structuring documents into chapters, paragraphs, headings, footnotes)
• Web capture information (annotations for search engines)
• Prepress support (annotations for newspapers, etc.)

SD CARD FILE STRUCTURE FOR USER DOCUMENTS
User document files must reside on the SD card in a directory named “Documents”. The list of available User
Documents is limited to 100 documents and are shown in alphabetical order based on filename.

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

539

ADDITIONAL FEATURES

VIEWING ELECTRONIC DOCUMENTS
To select a document:
1) From the Home Screen, touch Utilities > Documents. The Document Viewer is now displayed as in Figure
8-132.

Figure 8-132 Electronic Document Viewer

Figure 8-133 Document Selection

2) Touch the Selected Document Button.
3) Touch the Installed or User Tab to select the desired document source as seen in Figure 8-133. In this
example, Installed documents is selected.
4) Touch the desired document button. The selected document name is displayed in the Selected Document
Button, as shown in Figure 8-134. The document is displayed in the selected pane, such as the MFD as shown
in Figure 8-135.

Figure 8-134 Selected Document Indicated

540

Figure 8-135 Document Viewed on MFD

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

ADDITIONAL FEATURES
To change Document Viewer options:
1) From the Home Screen, touch Utilities > Documents > Options. Document Viewer Options is displayed as
in Figure 8-136.
2) Touch Document Info to view information pertaining to the document, such as files size and creation date as
seen in Figure 8-137.

Figure 8-136 Document Viewer Options

Figure 8-137 Document Information

3) Touch Fit Page to view the complete page in the selected pane (Figure 8-136).
4) Touch Fit Width to enlarge the displayed page to fill the width of the selected pane.
5) Touching the Rotate Page Buttons will rotate the displayed page 90 degrees to the right or left (depending on
button touched) within the selected pane. Each subsequent touch will rotate the page another 90 degrees.
6) Touch the Brightness Slider to adjust the brightness of the displayed page.

To browse the document:
1) After selecting the desired document, touch the Next Page and Prev Page buttons to increment and decrement
one page with each touch.
2) The Page Select Button (Figure 8-138) shows the number of pages contained in the document and the page
currently being displayed. Touch the Page Select Button (Figure 8-138) to jump to a specific page number. The
Enter Page Number screen is displayed, as in Figure 8-139.

Page Select Button

Current Page

Total Pages

Figure 8-138 Document Browsing Options

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Figure 8-139 Enter Document Page Number

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

541

ADDITIONAL FEATURES
3) Touch the Find Button to display the Document Viewer Find screen as shown in Figure 8-140.

Figure 8-140 Table of Contents

Figure 8-141 Flight Instruments Section Displayed

4) If necessary, touch the Table of Contents Tab to display the document Table of Contents (Figure 8-140).
5) Touch [+] to expand a topic. Touch [–] to return to the collapsed view of the topic.
6) Touch the desired topic to jump to that portion of the document. In this example, Flight Instruments is selected
and the Flight Instruments section is displayed (Figure 8-141).

Creating bookmarks in the document:
1) While viewing the page to bookmark, touch the Find Button on the appropriate Touchscreen Controller.
2) Touch the Bookmark Tab to display the Bookmark Window as in Figure 8-142.

Figure 8-142 Select Bookmark Tab

Figure 8-143 Enter Bookmark Name

3) Touch the Bookmark Current Page Button. The Enter Bookmark Name Screen is displayed as shown in
Figure 8-143.

542

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

ADDITIONAL FEATURES
4) Touch Enter. A confirmation screen is displayed as seen in Figure 8-144.

Figure 8-144 Bookmark Created

Figure 8-145 Bookmark Created

5) Touch OK. The newly created bookmark is displayed as in Figure 8-145.

Deleting document bookmarks:
1) With the desired document displayed, touch the Find Button (Figure 8-138) to display the Document Viewer
Find Screen.
2) Touch the Bookmark Tab to display the Bookmark Window.
3) Touch the X Button next to the bookmark to be deleted (Figure 8-145).

Figure 8-146 Delete Bookmark

Figure 8-147 Bookmark Deleted

4) Touch OK on the confirmation screen as in Figure 8-146.
5) Again, touch OK.

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

543

ADDITIONAL FEATURES

8.9 FLIGHT DATA LOGGING
NOTE: Some aircraft installations may not provide all aircraft/engine data capable of being logged by the

system.
The Flight Data Logging feature will automatically store critical flight and engine data on an SD data card (up
to 16GB) inserted into the top card slot of the MFD. Approximately 1,000 flight hours can be recorded for each
1GB of available space on the card.
Data is written to the SD card once each second while the MFD is powered on. All flight data logged on a
specific date is stored in a file named in a format which includes the date, time, and nearest airport identifier. The
file is created automatically each time the system is powered on, provided an SD card has been inserted.
The .csv file may be viewed with Microsoft Excel® or other spreadsheet applications.
The following is a list of data parameters the system is capable of logging for the Phenom 300 aircraft.
• GPS fix

• Time

• Longitude (degrees; geodetic;
+East)

• GPS altitude (MSL)

• Magnetic Heading (degrees)

• GPS vertical alert limit

• GPS altitude (WGS84 datum)

• HSI source

• Baro-Corrected altitude (feet)

• Selected course

• SBAS GPS horizontal protection
level

• Baro Correction (in/Hg)

• Com1/Com2 frequency

• Indicated airspeed (kts)

• Nav1/Nav2 frequency

• SBAS GPS vertical protection
level

• Vertical speed (fpm)

• CDI deflection

• Fuel Qty (gal.)

• GPS vertical speed (fpm)

• VDI/GP/GS deflection

• Fuel Flow (gph)

• OAT (degrees C)

• Wind Direction (degrees)

• Fuel Pressure (psi)

• True airspeed (knots)

• Wind Speed (knots)

• Voltage 1 and/or 2

• Pitch Attitude Angle (degrees)

• Active Waypoint Identifier

• Amps 1 and/or 2

• Roll Attitude Angle (degrees)

• Distance to next waypoint (nm)

• Oil Pressure (psi)

• Lateral and Vertical G Force (g)

• Bearing to next waypoint
(degrees)

• Oil Temperature (deg. F)

• Magnetic variation (degrees)

• Manifold Pressure (in. Hg)

• Date

• Ground Speed (kts)
• Ground Track (degrees
magnetic)

• TIT (deg. F)

• Autopilot On/Off

• Latitude (degrees; geodetic;
+North)

544

• GPS horizontal alert limit

• AFCS roll/pitch modes
• AFCS roll/pitch commands

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

ADDITIONAL FEATURES
The file containing the recorded data will appear in the format shown in Figure 8-148. This file can be imported
into most computer spreadsheet applications.

Local Date
YYMMDD

Local 24hr Time
HHMMSS

Nearest Airport
(A blank will be
inserted if no
airport is found)

log_130210_104506_KIXD.csv
Figure 8-148 Log File Format

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

545

ADDITIONAL FEATURES

8.10 CHECKLISTS
NOTE: The checklist shown in the following illustrations are examples only.

The Display Panes are able to display optional electronic checklists (supplied by the manufacturer) which
allow the pilot to quickly find the proper procedure on the ground and during each phase of flight. The system
accesses the checklists from the Supplemental Data Cards located in the bottom card slot of each GDU.
The following colors are used for checklist items:

• Light Blue - Items not selected or checked

• White - Item is selected

• Green - Item has been checked

• Gray - General notes
• Yellow - Caution notes
• Red - Warning notes

Accessing and navigating checklists:
1) From the Home Screen, touch Checklist. The checklist structure is displayed as shown in Figure 8-150.

Figure 8-149 Home Screen

Figure 8-150 List of Checklists

2) Touch the desired checklist group tab on the left side of the screen. In Figure 8-150, Normal is selected in this
example.
3) Touch the desired checklist from those listed in the center of the screen. If necessary, scroll through the list to
see all the available checklists for the selected group. In Figure 8-150, BEFORE TAKEOFF is selected and the
checklist is displayed in the previously selected GDU Display Pane as in Figure 8-151. The first checklist item is
selected as indicated by the white text surrounded by a white box.

Figure 8-151 First Checklist Item Selected

546

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

ADDITIONAL FEATURES
4) Press the FMS Knob to check the selected checklist item. The line item turns green and a checkmark is placed
in the associated box as shown in Figure 8-152. The next line item is automatically selected for checking.

Figure 8-152 First Checklist Item Completed and Checked

Either FMS Knob can be used to scroll through the checklist and select the desired checklist item.
Selecting a checked item and pressing the FMS Knob will return the item to the unchecked state.
5) When all checklist items have been checked, ‘*Checklist Finished*’ is displayed in green text at the bottom
left of the checklist window and ‘GO TO NEXT CHECKLIST?’ is highlighted as in Figure 8-153. If ‘GO TO NEXT
CHECKLIST?’ is selected prior to checking all the checklist items, ‘*CHECKLIST NOT FINISHED*’ will be displayed
in yellow text.

Figure 8-153 Checklist Complete

6) Press the FMS Knob to display the next checklist in the group or choose another by touching the desired
checklist on the Touchscreen Controller.

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

547

ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Resetting A Specific Checklist:
1) From the Home Screen, touch Checklist.
2) Touch the desired checklist to reset. DC BUS 1 OFF is selected in Figure 8-154.
3) Touch the Checklist Options Button.
4) Touch Reset Current Checklist as seen in Figure 8-155.

Figure 8-154 Checklist Screen

Figure 8-155 Checklist Options

Resetting All Checklists:
1) From the Home Screen, touch Checklist.
2) Touch the Checklist Options Button shown in Figure 8-154.
3) Touch Reset All Checklists as seen in Figure 8-155.

548

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

ADDITIONAL FEATURES

8.11 ABNORMAL OPERATION
GDL 69A DATA LINK RECEIVER TROUBLESHOOTING
Some quick troubleshooting steps listed below can be performed to find the possible cause of a failure.
• Ensure the owner/operator of the aircraft in which the Data Link Receiver is installed has subscribed to
SiriusXM
• Ensure the SiriusXM subscription has been activated
• Check the circuit breakers to ensure that power is applied to the Data Link Receiver
For troubleshooting purposes, check the LRU Information for Data Link Receiver (GDL 69A) status, serial
number, and software version number. If a failure has been detected in the GDL 69A the status is marked with
a red X.
To check LRU status:
1) From the Home Screen, touch Utilities > Setup > Avionics Status.
2) If necessary, touch the LRU Info Tab.
3) Scroll to display the GDL69A field as shown in Figure 8-156.

Figure 8-156 Detected Failure in Data Link Reciever

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

549

ADDITIONAL FEATURES
If a failure still exists, the following messages may provide insight as to the possible problem:
Message

Message Location

CHECK ANTENNA

SiriusXM Info Screen (Touchscreen Controller)

UPDATING

SiriusXM Info (Touchscreen Controller)

LOADING
OFF AIR
---

SiriusXM Info (Touchscreen Controller)
Weather Datalink Display (MFD)
Music Screen (Touchscreen Controller)
Music Screen (Touchscreen Controller)
Music Screen (Touchscreen Controller)

WEATHER DATA LINK FAILURE

Weather Datalink Display (MFD)

ACTIVATION REQUIRED

SiriusXM Info Screen (Touchscreen Controller)
Weather Datalink Display (MFD)

NO SIGNAL

Description
Data Link Receiver antenna error;
service required
Data Link Receiver updating encryption
code
Loss of signal; signal strength too low
for receiver
Acquiring channel audio or information
Channel not in service
Missing channel information
No communication from Data Link
Receiver within last 5 minutes
SiriusXM subscription is not activated

Table 8-6 GDL 69A Data Link Receiver Messages

550

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

APPENDIX A

ANNUNCIATIONS AND ALERTS
CREW ALERTING SYSTEM (CAS)
NOTE: Aural alerts associated with abnormal conditions and advisories are managed through the audio

panels. Refer to the Audio Panel and CNS Section for more information.
When Crew Alerting System (CAS) messages are generated, the CAS Window opens to the right of the
Altimeter (on the PFDs). Up to 14 messages can be displayed; when more than 14 messages accumulate, the
CAS Softkey becomes available. Pressing the CAS Softkey displays softkeys for scrolling up and down through
the messages in the CAS Window.

CAS
Window
Softkey Annunciation
(Press to Acknowledge
CAS Message)
Figure A-1 CAS Display

CAS Scrolling Softkey

Figure A-2 Softkey Annunciations (MSG Softkey Labels)

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

551

APPENDIX A
A CAS message does not appear more than once at a given time. Warning and caution CAS messages flash
when they are generated, and continue to flash until acknowledged. Advisory CAS messages, flash for 5
seconds or until acknowledged.
Some CAS messages are differentiated as root causes of other failures and should be considered first during
the decision-making process when multiple CAS messages are displayed. These “golden” messages flash until
acknowledged and remain in inverse video after being acknowledged manually.
After the acknowledgment, a message remains displayed at the top of its respective priority group in the CAS
Window until either a newer message of the same priority appears or the condition(s) that caused the alert to
display no longer exist.
CAS messages listed in tables 3-9 through 3-12 are shown in the acknowledged state (colored text on black
backgrounds), with Caution and Advisory “golden” CAS messages shown in black text on colored backgrounds
corresponding to their alert levels.

CAS MESSAGES
NOTE: The Airplane Flight Manual (AFM) supersedes information found in this document. Refer to the AFM
for recommended pilot actions.

WARNING MESSAGES
See the Airplane Flight Manual (AFM) for recommended pilot actions. Accompanied by a triple chime tone
which repeats until acknowledged.
Message
BAG SMK
CAB ALTITUDE HI
DOOR EMER OPEN
DOOR PAX OPEN
E1 FIRE
E2 FIRE
E1 OIL LO PRES
E2 OIL LO PRES
ELEC EMERGENCY
ELEC XFR FAIL
LG LEVER DISAG
NO TO CONFIG

552

Description
Smoke detected in baggage compartment
Cabin altitude pressure altitude high
Emergency door open
Passenger door open
Fire in engine 1
Fire in engine 2
Low oil pressure in engine 1
Low oil pressure in engine 2
Generators offline
Generators offline and electrical emergency transfer has failed
Landing gear position and control lever disagreement
No takeoff configuration

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

APPENDIX A
CAUTION MESSAGES
See the Airplane Flight Manual (AFM) for recommended pilot actions. Accompanied by a single chime
tone which repeats until acknowledged.
Message
ADS 1 FAIL
ADS 2 FAIL
ADS 1 HTR FAIL
ADS 2 HTR FAIL
AHRS 1 FAIL
AHRS 2 FAIL
A-I E1 FAIL
A-I E2 FAIL
A-I LO CAPACITY
A-I WINGSTB FAIL
A-I WINGSTB INHB
A-I WINGSTB LEAK
AMS CTRL FAIL
ANTI-SKID FAIL
AP FAIL
AP PITCH MISTRIM
AP ROLL MISTRIM
AUDIO PNL 1 FAIL
AUDIO PNL 2 FAIL
AURAL WRN FAIL
AUTO PTRIM FAIL
BAG SMK FAIL
BATT DISCHARGE
BATT 1 OFF BUS
BATT 2 OFF BUS
BATT EXCEEDANCE
BLEED 1 FAIL
BLEED 2 FAIL
BLEED 1 LEAK
BLEED 2 LEAK
BLEED 1 OVERPRES
BLEED 2 OVERPRES
BRK FAIL
CAB DELTA-P FAIL
CLUTCH PIT FAIL
CLUTCH ROL FAIL
CLUTCH VNTRL FAIL
CLUTCH YAW FAIL
CONFIG MDL FAIL
DOORBAG AFT OPEN
DOORBAG LH OPEN
DOORBAG RH OPEN
DUCT 1 OVERTEMP

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Description
ADS 1 offline or failed
ADS 2 offline or failed
Pitot heater 1 offline or heater element failed
Pitot heater 2 offline or heater element failed
AHRS 1 failure
AHRS 2 failure
Anti-ice system failure in engine 1
Anti-ice system failure in engine 2
Not enough thermal energy available for WHSAIS (Wing and Horizontal Stabilizer Anti-ice System) operation
Component failure (AIV, pressure transducers, AMS Controller, other)
WHSAIS switched ON outside the icing envelope. Or, aircraft is in single bleed configuration and above the 15,000 ft.
icing envelope when WHSAIS is switched on.
Bleed hot air leakage at WHSAIS pneumatic ducting
Pneumatic sources and icing protection are not available
Anti-skid function lost; main brake still available
Loss of AP function
Airplane mistrimmed in pitch axis when AP is engaged
Airplane mistrimmed in roll axis when AP is engaged
Audio panel 1 is offline
Audio panel 2 is offline
Aural warning system failure due to non-communicating LRUs
Auto pitch trim failure; other pitch trim functions still available
Baggage compartment smoke detector has failed
Battery discharging under normal operation
Battery 1 offline
Battery 2 offline
Battery voltage has exceeded 29 VDC
Bleed 1 system not under control.
Bleed 2 system not under control.
Bleed 1 hot air leakage at some region of the ducting
Bleed 2 hot air leakage at some region of the ducting
Pressure in bleed ducting is higher than an acceptable value chosen to not compromise ECS and Anti-ice components
integrity
Pressure in bleed ducting is higher than an acceptable value chosen to not compromise ECS and Anti-ice components
integrity
Main brake system lost
Excessive cabin pressure differential
Slip clutch maintenance test failed
Slip clutch maintenance test failed
Ventral slip clutch maintenance test failed
Slip clutch maintenance test failed
Master Configuration Module failed or non-communicative
Crew baggage door open
Forward left-hand baggage door open
Forward right-hand baggage door open
Duct 1 temperature over specified safe value

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

553

APPENDIX A
Message
DUCT 2 OVERTEMP
E1 CTRL FAULT
E2 CTRL FAULT
E1 FAIL
E2 FAIL
E1 FIRE DET FAIL
E2 FIRE DET FAIL
E1 FIREX FAIL
E2 FIREX FAIL
E1 FUEL IMP BYP
E2 FUEL IMP BYP
E1 TLA FAIL
E2 TLA FAIL
E1 TT0 HTR FAIL
E2 TT0 HTR FAIL
E1 TT0 PROBE ICE FAIL
E2 TT0 PROBE ICE FAIL
EBAY LEAK
EBAY OVHT
ECS 1 VALVE FAIL
ECS 2 VALVE FAIL
EMER BRK LO PRES
EMER LT NOT ARM
ENG EXCEEDANCE
ENG NO DISPATCH
ENG NO TO DATA
FLAP FAIL
FUEL 1 LO LEVEL
FUEL 2 LO LEVEL
FUEL 1 LO PRES
FUEL 2 LO PRES
FUEL 1 SOV FAIL
FUEL 2 SOV FAIL
FUEL IMBALANCE
FUEL PUMP 1 FAIL
FUEL PUMP 2 FAIL
FUEL XFEED FAIL
GEN 1 OFF BUS
GEN 2 OFF BUS
GEN OVLD
GEN START FAULT
GIA 1 FAIL
GIA 2 FAIL
GIA 1 OVHT
GIA 2 OVHT
GND SPLR FAIL
GTC 1 OVHT
GTC 2 OVHT
HYD HI TEMP
HYD LO PRES

554

Description
Duct 2 temperature over specified safe value
Engine 1 responds slowly or not at all to thrust commands
Engine 2 responds slowly or not at all to thrust commands
Uncommanded shutdown detected for engine 1
Uncommanded shutdown detected for engine 2
Fire detection system failure in engine 1
Fire detection system failure in engine 2
Fire extinguisher failure in engine 1
Fire extinguisher failure in engine 2
Fuel filter impending bypass condition for engine 1
Fuel filter impending bypass condition for engine 2
Thrust Lever Angle failure for engine 1
Thrust Lever Angle failure for engine 2
Heater failure in engine 1
Heater failure in engine 2
Engine 1 probe frozen
Engine 2 probe frozen
Leak inside E-Bay
Electrical bay over temperature
Flow control valve monitor for ECS 1 detected improper valve operation
Flow control valve monitor for ECS 2 detected improper valve operation
Few emergency brake functions available
Emergency lights switch not in ARMED position
Limit exceeded in engine(s) during flight
FADEC detected no dispatch fault condition in engine(s)
No takeoff data entered
Loss of flaps deployment or retraction
Low fuel level in tank 1
Low fuel level in tank 2
Fuel pressure low in engine 1 feed line
Fuel pressure low in engine 2 feed line
Fuel feed SOV 1 closed or unavailable
Fuel feed SOV 2 closed or unavailable
Fuel is imbalanced between the tanks
Fuel pump 1 failure
Fuel pump 2 failure
Disagreement between valve command and its feedback
Generator 1 offline
Generator 2 offline
Generator(s) overload
Generator start fault
Failure of GIA 1
Failure of GIA 2
GIA 1 over temperature
GIA 2 over temperature
Loss of ground spoilers
GTC 1 over temperature
GTC 2 over temperature
Hydraulic temperature high
Hydraulic pressure low

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

APPENDIX A
Message
HYD SOV 1 FAIL
HYD SOV 2 FAIL
ICE CONDITION*
LG WOW SYS FAIL
MFD CONFIG
MFD FAULT
MFD OVHT
OXY LO PRES
PARK BRK NOT REL
PAX OXY NO PRES
PFD 1 CONFIG
PFD 2 CONFIG
PFD 1 FAULT
PFD 2 FAULT
PFD 1 OVHT
PFD 2 OVHT
PRESN AUTO FAIL
PTRIM BKP FAIL
PTRIM NML FAIL
PUSHER FAIL
PUSHER OFF
RUD OVERBOOST
STBY HTR FAIL
STEEP FAIL*
SWPS FAIL
SWPS FAULT
SWPS UNTESTED
TCAS FAIL*
WSHLD 1 HTR FAIL
WSHLD 2 HTR FAIL
YD FAIL
YD MISTRIM

Description
EDP 1 Fire Shutoff valve was commanded to close, but failed to close
EDP 2 Fire Shutoff valve was commanded to close, but failed to close
Aircraft is flying in icing conditions
Landing gear weight-on-wheels system failure
MFD configuration error
Fault with the MFD
MFD over temperature
Oxygen system pressure low
Parking brake not released
Cabin altitude high and passenger oxygen system pressure low
PFD 1 configuration error
PFD 2 configuration error
Fault with PFD 1
Fault with PFD 2
PFD 1 over temperature
PFD 2 over temperature
Pressurization controller failure
Loss of backup pitch trim actuator
Loss of normally-operating pitch trim actuator
Stall Warning & Protection System pusher has failed
Stall Warning Pusher is off
SLRB (Spring Loaded Rudder Booster) uncommanded actuation
Failure of standby heater
Steep approach mode has failed
Stall Warning & Protection System inoperative
Stall Warning & Protection System activation angles anticipated to conservative settings
Stall Warning & Protection System has not been tested
Traffic & Collision Avoidance System failure. TCASII installations only.
Windshield 1 heater failure
Windshield 2 heater failure
Loss of yaw damper function
Airplane mistrimmed in yaw axis when YD is engaged

* Optional

ADVISORY MESSAGES
See the Airplane Flight Manual (AFM) for recommended pilot actions.
Message
A-I E1 FAULT
A-I E2 FAULT
A-I E1 ON
A-I E2 ON
A-I WINGSTB ARM
A-I WINGSTB ON
ADS 1 SLIP FAIL
ADS 2 SLIP FAIL
ADS HTR SW ON
AHRS 1 FAULT
AHRS 2 FAULT
AMS CTRL FAULT

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Description
Engine 1 Anti-ice system valve failed when commanded to close
Engine 2 Anti-ice system valve failed when commanded to close
Anti-ice system on in engine 1
Anti-ice system on in engine 2
WINGSTAB toggle switch has been armed prior to takeoff
WHSAIS is operating
ADS 1 side-slip compensation is off
ADS 2 side-slip compensation is off
ADS Probe switch is on
Fault with AHRS 1
Fault with AHRS 2
One pneumatic and Anti-ice controller channel is inoperative

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

555

APPENDIX A
Message
ATC DLK FAIL
AUDIO PNL 1 FAULT
AUDIO PNL 2 FAULT
AURAL WRN FAULT
AVNX FAN FAIL
BAG SMK FAULT
BLEED 1 OFF
BLEED 2 OFF
CLUTCH PIT PASS
CLUTCH PIT PROG
CLUTCH ROLL PASS
CLUTCH ROLL PROG
CLUTCH VNTRL PASS
CLUTCH VNTRL PROG
CLUTCH YAW PASS
CLUTCH YAW PROG
DC BUS 1 OFF
DC BUS 2 OFF
DOOR REFUEL OPEN
E1 CHIP DETECTED
E2 CHIP DETECTED
E1 FADEC FAULT
E2 FADEC FAULT
E1 OIL IMP BYP
E2 OIL IMP BYP
ECS 1 OFF
ECS 2 OFF
ELEC SYS FAULT
EMER BUS OFF
ENG FIREX DISCH
FLAP NOT AVAIL
FUEL EQUAL
FUEL 1 FEED FAULT
FUEL 2 FEED FAULT
FUEL 1 PSW FAIL
FUEL 2 PSW FAIL
GEA 1 FAIL
GEA 2 FAIL
GEA 3 FAIL
GPU CONNECTED
GSD 1 FAIL
GSD 2 FAIL
GTC 1 FAN FAIL
GTC 2 FAN FAIL
GTC 1 FAULT
GTC 2 FAULT
HSDB FAULT
HSDB SW REV POS
HYD SYS FAULT
ICE DET FAIL*

556

Description
CPDLC system failure
Fault with audio panel 1
Fault with audio panel 2
Partial loss of aural warning function
Avionics fan failure
Two baggage compartment smoke detectors have failed
Bleed pressure regulator 1 and shut-off valve closed
Bleed pressure regulator 2 and shut-off valve closed
Pitch slip clutch maintenance test passed
Pitch slip clutch maintenance test in progress
Roll slip clutch maintenance test passed
Roll slip clutch maintenance test in progress
Ventral slip clutch maintenance test passed
Ventral slip clutch maintenance test in progress
Yaw slip clutch maintenance test passed
Yaw slip clutch maintenance test in progress
DC bus 1 offline
DC bus 2 offline
Refueling door is open
Chip detected by engine 1 oil chip detector
Chip detected by engine 2 oil chip detector
FADEC fault in engine 1
FADEC fault in engine 2
Engine 1 oil filter impending bypass set
Engine 2 oil filter impending bypass set
Flow control valve monitor detected improper valve operation
Flow control valve monitor detected improper valve operation
Electrical system fault
Emergency bus OFF
Engine fire extinguisher discharge
Flaps not available
Fuel quantity asymmetry corrected; XFEED SOV is open
DC pump on due to low fuel pressure
DC pump on due to low fuel pressure
Fuel pressure switch stuck in “high” position
Fuel pressure switch stuck in “high” position
Failure of GEA 1
Failure of GEA 2
Failure of GEA 3
Ground power unit connected to the aircraft
GSD 1 non-communicative
GSD 2 non-communicative
Failure of GTC 1 fan
Failure of GTC 2 fan
Fault with GTC 1
Fault with GTC 2
An LRU has stopped communicating over an HSDB
HSDB switch in reversionary position
Degradation of hydraulic system available power
Ice Detector failure

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

APPENDIX A
Message
MFD FAN FAIL
NAV 1 FAIL
NAV 2 FAIL
OXY SW NOT AUTO
PFD 1 FAN FAIL
PFD 2 FAN FAIL
PTRIM LO RATE
PTRIM SW1 FAIL
PTRIM SW2 FAIL
RALT FAIL*
RAM AIR FAIL
RUD BOOST FAIL
SHED BUS OFF
SPDBRK SW DISAG

SPOILER FAULT

STEEP NOT AVAIL
SWPS ICE SPEED
VENTRAL RUD FAIL
VHF3 FAIL
XBLEED FAIL
XBLEED SW OFF
XPDR 1 FAIL
XPDR 2 FAIL

Description
Failure of MFD fan
Failure of NAV 1
Failure of NAV 2
Oxygen system switch in manual mode
Failure of PFD 1 fan
Failure of PFD 2 fan
Pitch trim is being actuated in low rate
Failure of pilot pitch trim switch
Failure of copilot pitch trim switch
Radar altitude failure
Ram air valve failure
Loss of SLRB (Spring Loaded Rudder Booster) force assistance in case of thrust asymmetry
Shed bus off
Speed brake switch position is in disagreement with the spoiler surfaces position
Ground Spoiler arm logic failed
Ground Spoiler command disagree
Spoiler position disagree
Ground Spoiler Control Valve failed
Speed brake command failed
Speed brake command inhibit failed
Steep Approach Mode is not available
Stall Warning System activation angles anticipated due to icing conditions
Ventral rudder has failed
Failure of VHF3
Cross bleed valve has failed closed or open
Cross bleed switch is in the OFF position
Failure of XPDR 1
Failure of XPDR 2

* Optional

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

557

APPENDIX A

COMPARATOR ANNUNCIATIONS
The Comparator monitors critical values generated by redundant sensors. If differences in the sensors exceed
a specified amount, this discrepancy is annunciated in the Comparator Window as a ‘MISCOMP’ (miscompare)
as seen in Figure A-3. If one or both of the sensed values are unavailable, it is annunciated as a ‘NO COMP’ (no
compare). The following is a list of the possible annunciations:

Figure A-3 Miscompare Annunciations (PFD)

Annunciation

Figure A-4 No Compare Annunciations (PFD)

Description

Condition
Altitude Miscompare Difference in altitude sensors is > 200 ft.
Indicated Airspeed
Miscompare

If both airspeed sensors detect < 35 knots, this is inhibited.
If either airspeed sensor detects > 35 knots, and the difference in sensors is > 10 knots.
If either airspeed sensor detects > 80 knots, and the difference in sensors is > 7 knots.

Heading Miscompare Difference in heading sensors is > 6 degrees.
Pitch Miscompare

Difference in pitch sensors is > 5 degrees.

Roll Miscompare

Difference in roll sensors is > 6 degrees.

Altitude No Compare

No data from one or both altitude sensors.

Indicated Airspeed No No data from one or both airspeed sensors.
Compare
Heading No Compare No data from one or both heading sensors.

558

Pitch No Compare

No data from one or both pitch sensors.

Roll No Compare

No data from one or both roll sensors..

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

APPENDIX A

REVERSIONARY SENSOR ANNUNCIATIONS
Reversionary AHRS and Air Data Computer selection is annunciated in the Reversionary Sensor Window, as
shown in Figure A-5. These annunciations reflect reversionary sensors selected on one or both PFDs. Selecting
the SENSOR Softkey gives access to ADC1, ADC2, ADC STBY, AHRS1, AHRS2, and AHRS STBY Softkeys. These
softkeys allow manual switching of sensors. In the case of certain types of sensor failures, the system may make
some sensor selections automatically. The GPS sensor cannot be switched manually.
The ADC STBY and AHRS STBY Softkeys are normally dimmed and unavailable for manual selection. If the
system detects that inputs for both the #1 and #2 AHRS or both the #1 and #2 ADC are invalid, the respective
standby sensor mode is automatically selected. The softkey label is no longer dimmed, and a green annunciator
is displayed, indicating the mode is active.

Figure A-5 Reversionary Sensor Annunciations

Reversionary Sensor
Window Text
BOTH ON ADC 1
BOTH ON ADC 2
BOTH ON ADC STBY
BOTH ON AHRS 1
BOTH ON AHRS 2
BOTH ON ATT STBY
BOTH ON GPS 1
BOTH ON GPS 2
USING ADC 1
USING ADC 2
USING ADC STBY
USING AHRS 1
USING AHRS 2
USING ATT STBY
USING GPS 1
USING GPS 2

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Condition
Both PFDs are displaying data from the #1 Air Data Computer.
Both PFDs are displaying data from the #2 Air Data Computer.
Both PFDs are displaying data from the standby air data input.
Both PFDs are displaying data from the #1 AHRS.
Both PFDs are displaying data from the #2 AHRS.
Both PFDs are displaying data from the standby attitude and heading reference input.
Both PFDs are displaying data from the #1 GPS receiver.
Both PFDs are displaying data from the #2 GPS receiver.
PFD2 is displaying data from the #1 Air Data Computer.
PFD1 is displaying data from the #2 Air Data Computer.
PFD1 or PFD2 is displaying data from the standby air data input.
PFD2 is displaying data from the #1 AHRS.
PFD1 is displaying data from the #2 AHRS.
PFD1 or PFD2 is displaying data from the standby attitude and heading reference input.
PFD2 is displaying data from the #1 GPS.
PFD1 is displaying data from the #2 GPS.

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

559

APPENDIX A

PRODIGY® TOUCH FLIGHT DECK 300 SYSTEM ANNUNCIATIONS
When the system issues a message, the MSG Button flashes on the Touchscreen Controllers to alert the pilot
and copilot of a new message. The buttons continue to flash until acknowledged by touching the MSG Button
on either the Touchscreen Controller. Active messages are displayed in white text. Messages that have become
inactive change to gray text. The MSG Button flashes if the state of a displayed alert changes or a new message
is displayed.
When an LRU or an LRU function fails, a yellow ‘X’ is typically displayed on items associated with the failed
data. The following section describes various system annunciations. Refer to the Airplane Flight Manual (AFM)
for additional information regarding pilot responses to these annunciations.
NOTE: Upon power-up of the system, certain windows remain invalid as the equipment begins to initialize.

All windows should be operational within one minute of power-up. If any window continues to remain
flagged, the system should be serviced by a Garmin-authorized repair facility.

System
Annunciation
Yellow ‘X’

Figure A-6 System Annunciations (PFD)

Figure A-7 System Messages Annunciation
(Touchsreen Controller)

.
560

Touch to View
System Messages
Screen

Figure A-8 System Messages Screen After MSG
Button Touched (Touchscreen Controller)

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

APPENDIX A
System Annunciation

Comment

System Annunciation

Attitude and Heading
Reference System is aligning.

Comment

Display system is not receiving
airspeed input from air data
computer.

Display system is not receiving
attitude information from the
AHRS.
Display system is not receiving
vertical speed input from the
air data computer.

AHRS calibration incomplete or
configuration module failure.
This annunciation is seen only
when the autopilot is engaged.
The annunciation indicates an
AHRS monitor has detected
an abnormal flight parameter,
possibly caused by strong
turbulence. In this case, the
situation should correct itself
within a few seconds. If there
is an actual failure, a yellow
“X” soon appears over the
Attitude Indicator.
‘GPS LOI’ Indicates Loss of
Integrity of GPS information.
GPS information is either
not present or is invalid for
navigation use. Note that
AHRS uses GPS inputs during
normal operation. AHRS
operation may be degraded
if GPS signals are not present
(see AFM).
Display system is not receiving
valid ISA information from air
data computer.

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Display system is not receiving
heading input from the AHRS.

Display system is not receiving
altitude input from the air data
computer.

Display system is not receiving
valid SAT information from air
data computer.
Display system is not receiving
valid TAT information from air
data computer.
Display system is not receiving
valid transponder information.
Other Various Yellow X
Indications

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

A yellow ‘X’ through any other
display field indicates the field
is not receiving valid data.

561

APPENDIX A

PRODIGY® TOUCH VOICE ALERTS
The system issues voice messages when specific system conditions are met. Other voice alerts associated with
the TAWS and traffic avoidance systems are listed in their respective discussions.
Message
“Autopilot”
“Cabin”
“Fire, Fire”
“High Speed”
“Landing Gear”
“No Takeoff Brake”
“No Takeoff Flaps”
“No Takeoff Spoilers”
“No Takeoff Trim”
“Stall, Stall”
“Altitude”
“Minimums, minimums”
“Rudder Overboost”
“Thrust, Thrust”
“Trim Trim Trim”
“Vertical track”
“Aural Warning OK”
“Aural Warning One Channel”
“Flight Director”
“Incoming Call”
“Message ATC”
“SelCal”
“Takeoff OK”
“Timer Expired”

Priority

Description

Warning – Autopilot is disengaged
Single alert for manual AP disengagement
Continuous alert for automatic AP disengagement; cancelled with AP DISC Switch
High cabin altitude
Engine fire
Warning Maximum operating speed exceeded
Gear up in landing condition
No Takeoff Configuration due to brake status
No Takeoff Configuration due to flap status
No Takeoff Configuration due to spoiler status
No Takeoff Configuration due to trim status
Airplane in stall condition
Aircraft has deviated ±200 feet of the selected altitude
The aircraft has descended below the preset barometric minimum descent altitude.
SLRB (Spring Loaded Rudder Booster) uncommanded actuation
Advisory CSC (if available) disengaged abnormally
Trim switch malfunction
The aircraft is one minute from Top of Descent. Issued only when vertical navigation is
enabled.
Aural warning system test passes
Aural warning system test detects failure in one channel
Flight director has reverted to pitch or roll default mode
Satellite telephone is receiving a call
Status
New Data Link message received from ATC
Incoming communication through the HF radio
Takeoff configuration test passed
Countdown timer on the PFD has reached zero

PRODIGY® TOUCH FLIGHT DECK 300 SYSTEM MESSAGES
NOTE: This Section provides information regarding system message advisories that may be displayed by

the system. Knowledge of the aircraft, systems, flight conditions, and other existing operational priorities
must be considered when responding to a message. Always use sound pilot judgment. The Airplane Flight
Manual (AFM) takes precedence over any conflicting guidance found in this section.
This section describes various system message advisories. Certain messages are issued due to an LRU or
LRU function failure. Such messages are normally accompanied by a corresponding yellow ‘X’ annunciation as
shown previously in the Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 System Annunciations section.

562

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

APPENDIX A
GDU 1400W PRIMARY FLIGHT DISPLAY & MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY
System Message
XTALK ERROR – A flight display crosstalk error
has occurred.
PFD1 SERVICE – PFD1 needs service. Return unit
for repair.
PFD2 SERVICE – PFD2 needs service. Return unit
for repair.
MFD1 SERVICE – MFD1 needs service. Return
unit for repair.
PFD1 MANIFEST – PFD 1 software mismatch,
communication halted.
PFD2 MANIFEST – PFD 2 software mismatch,
communication halted.
MFD1 MANIFEST – MFD 1 software mismatch,
communication halted.
PFD1 CONFIG – PFD1 config error. Config service
req’d.
PFD2 CONFIG – PFD2 config error. Config service
req’d.
MFD1 CONFIG – MFD1 config error. Config
service req’d.
PFD1 SOFTWARE – PFD1 mismatch,
communication halted.
PFD2 SOFTWARE – PFD2 mismatch,
communication halted.
MFD1 SOFTWARE – MFD1 mismatch,
communication halted.
PFD1 COOLING – PFD1 has poor cooling.
Reducing power usage.
PFD2 COOLING – PFD2 has poor cooling.
Reducing power usage.
MFD1 COOLING – MFD1 has poor cooling.
Reducing power usage.
PFD1 FAN FAIL – PFD1 internal fan failure. Unit
needs service.
PFD2 FAN FAIL – PFD2 internal fan failure. Unit
needs service.
MFD1 FAN FAIL – MFD1 internal fan failure. Unit
needs service.
PFD1 BKLT CAL INV – PFD1 bklt cal lost or
mismatch. Return for repair.
PFD2 BKLT CAL INV – PFD2 bklt cal lost or
mismatch. Return for repair.
MFD1 BKLT CAL INV – MFD1 bklt cal lost or
mismatch. Return for repair.

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Comments
The MFD, PFD and GTC are not communicating with each other. The system
should be serviced.

The PFD and/or MFD self-test has detected a problem. The system should be
serviced.

The PFD and/or MFD has incorrect software installed. The system should be
serviced.

The PFD configuration settings do not match backup configuration memory.
The system should be serviced.
The MFD configuration settings do not match backup configuration memory.
The system should be serviced.

The specified GDU has different software versions installed. The system should
be serviced.

The PFD and/or MFD is overheating and is reducing power consumption by
dimming the display. If problem persists, the system should be serviced.

The PFD and/or MFD internal cooling fan has failed. The system should be
serviced.

The PFD and/or MFD backlight calibration cannot be found or found or is
invalid. The system should be serviced.

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

563

APPENDIX A
System Message
PFD1 KEYSTK – PFD1 [key name] is stuck.
PFD2 KEYSTK – PFD2 [key name] is stuck.
MFD1 KEYSTK – MFD1 [key name] is stuck.
CNFG MODULE – PFD1 configuration module is
inoperative.
PFD1 VOLTAGE – PFD1 has low voltage. Reducing
power usage
PFD2 VOLTAGE – PFD2 has low voltage. Reducing
power usage
MFD1 VOLTAGE – MFD1 has low voltage.
Reducing power usage
PFD1 CARD1 REM – PFD1 card 1 was removed.
Reinsert card.
PFD1 CARD2 REM – PFD1 card 2 was removed.
Reinsert card.
PFD1 CARD3 REM – PFD1 card 3 was removed.
Reinsert card.
PFD2 CARD1 REM – PFD2 card 1 was removed.
Reinsert card.
PFD2 CARD2 REM – PFD2 card 2 was removed.
Reinsert card.
PFD2 CARD3 REM – PFD2 card 3 was removed.
Reinsert card.
MFD1 CARD1 REM – MFD1 card 1 was removed.
Reinsert card.
MFD1 CARD2 REM – MFD1 card 2 was removed.
Reinsert card.
MFD1 CARD3 REM – MFD1 card 3 was removed.
Reinsert card.
PFD1 CARD1 ERR – PFD1 card 1 is invalid.
PFD1 CARD2 ERR – PFD1 card 2 is invalid.
PFD1 CARD3 ERR – PFD1 card 3 is invalid.
PFD2 CARD1 ERR – PFD2 card 1 is invalid.
PFD2 CARD2 ERR – PFD2 card 2 is invalid.
PFD2 CARD3 ERR – PFD2 card 3 is invalid.
MFD1 CARD1 ERR – MFD1 card 1 is invalid.
MFD1 CARD2 ERR – MFD1 card 2 is invalid.
MFD1 CARD3 ERR – MFD1 card 3 is invalid.

564

Comments
A key is stuck on the PFD and/or MFD bezel. Attempt to free the stuck key by
pressing it several times. The system should be serviced if the problem persists.
The PFD1 configuration module backup memory has failed. The system should
be serviced.
The PFD1 voltage is low. The system should be serviced.
The PFD2 voltage is low. The system should be serviced.
The MFD voltage is low. The system should be serviced.

The SD card was removed from the top card slot of the specified PFD. The SD
card needs to be reinserted.

The SD card was removed from the top card slot of the MFD. The SD card
needs to be reinserted.

The SD card in the top card slot of the specified PFD is invalid.

The SD card in the top card slot of the MFD is invalid.

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

APPENDIX A
DATABASE SYSTEM MESSAGES
Message
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 navigation database error
exists.
PFD1 DB ERR – PFD1 navigation database error
exists.
PFD2 DB ERR – PFD2 navigation database error
exists.
GTC1 DB ERR – GTC1 database error exists.
GTC2 DB ERR – GTC2 database error exists.
DB MISMATCH – Navigation database mismatch.
Xtalk is off.

DB MISMATCH – Standby Navigation database
mismatch.

DB MISMATCH – Terrain database mismatch.

DB MISMATCH – Obstacle database mismatch.

NAV DB UPDATED – Active navigation database
updated.
PFD1 TERRAIN DSP – [PFD1 Terrain awareness
display unavailable.
PFD2 TERRAIN DSP – PFD2 Terrain awareness
display unavailable.
MFD1 TERRAIN DSP – MFD1 Terrain awareness
display unavailable.

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Comments
The specified PFD or MFD detected a failure in one or more databases. Ensure
the data card is properly inserted. Replace data card. If problem persists, the
system should be serviced.

The GTC detected a failure in one or more databases. Ensure the data card is
properly inserted. Replace data card. If problem persists, the system should be
serviced.
The PFDs and MFD have different navigation database versions or regions
installed. Crossfill is off. Check the Avionics Status Screen to determine
versions or regions. Also, check the Avionics Status Screen for a database
synchronization function not completed. After synchronization is complete,
power must be turned off, then on.
The PFDs and MFD have different standby navigation database versions or
regions installed. Check the Avionics Status Screen to determine versions or
regions. Also, check the Avionics Status Screen for a database synchronization
function not completed. After synchronization is complete, power must be
turned off, then on.
The PFDs and MFD have different terrain database versions or regions installed.
Check the Avionics Status Screen to determine versions or regions. Also,
check the Avionics Status Screen for a database synchronization function not
completed. After synchronization is complete, power must be turned off, then
on.
The PFDs and MFD have different obstacle database versions or regions
installed. Check the Avionics Status Screen to determine versions or regions.
Also, check the Avionics Status Screen for a database synchronization function
not completed. After synchronization is complete, power must be turned off,
then on.
System has updated the active navigation database from the standby
navigation database.

One of the terrain, airport terrain, or obstacle databases required for TAWS in
the specified PFD or MFD is missing or invalid.

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

565

APPENDIX A
GIA 63W INTEGRATED AVIONICS UNIT SYSTEM MESSAGES
System Message
GIA1 CONFIG – GIA1 config error. Config
service req’d.
GIA2 CONFIG – GIA2 config error. Config
service req’d.
GIA1 CONFIG – GIA1 audio config error.
Config service req’d.
GIA2 CONFIG – GIA2 audio config error.
Config service req’d.

Comments
The GIA1 and/or GIA2 configuration settings do not match backup configuration
memory. The system should be serviced.

The GIA1 and/or GIA2 have an error in the audio configuration. The system
should be serviced.

GIA1 COOLING – GIA1 temperature too low.
GIA2 COOLING – GIA2 temperature too low.

The GIA1 and/or GIA2 temperature is too low to operate correctly. Allow units to
warm up to operating temperature.

GIA1 COOLING – GIA1 over temperature.
GIA2 COOLING – GIA2 over temperature.
GIA1 SERVICE – GIA1 needs service. Return
the unit for repair.
GIA2 SERVICE – GIA2 needs service. Return the
unit for repair.
HW MISMATCH – GIA1 hardware mismatch,
GIA1 communication halted.
HW MISMATCH – GIA hardware mismatch,
GIA2 communication halted.
GIA1 MANIFEST – GIA1 software mismatch,
communication halted.
GIA2 MANIFEST – GIA2 software mismatch,
communication halted.
GFC MANIFEST – GFC software mismatch,
communication halted.
COM1 TEMP – COM1 over temp. Reducing
transmitter power.
COM2 TEMP – COM2 over temp. Reducing
transmitter power.
COM1 CONFIG – COM1 config error. Config
service req’d.
COM2 CONFIG – COM2 config error. Config
service req’d.

566

The GIA1 and/or GIA2 temperature is too high. If problem persists, the system
should be serviced.

The GIA1 and/or GIA2 self-test has detected a problem in the unit. The system
should be serviced.

A GIA mismatch has been detected, where only one is WAAS capable.

The GIA1 and/or GIA 2 has incorrect software installed. The system should be
serviced.
Incorrect servo software is installed, or gain settings are incorrect.
The system has detected an over temperature condition in COM1 and/or COM2.
The transmitter operates at reduced power. If the problem persists, the system
should be serviced.

The COM1 and/or COM2 configuration settings do not match backup
configuration memory. The system should be serviced.

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

APPENDIX A
System Message
Comments
COM1 SERVICE – COM1 needs service. Return
unit for repair.
The system has detected a failure in COM1 and/or COM2. COM1 and/or COM2
COM2 SERVICE – COM2 needs service. Return may still be usable. The system should be serviced when possible.
unit for repair.
COM1 MANIFEST – COM1 software mismatch,
communication halted.
COM2 MANIFEST – COM2 software mismatch,
communication halted.
COM1 PTT – COM1 push-to-talk key is stuck.
COM2 PTT – COM2 push-to-talk key is stuck.
COM1 RMT XFR – COM1 remote transfer key
is stuck.
COM2 RMT XFR – COM2 remote transfer key
is stuck.

The COM 1 and/or COM 2 has incorrect software installed. The system should be
serviced.

The COM1 and/or COM2 external push-to-talk switch is stuck in the enable (or
“pressed”) position. Press the PTT switch again to cycle its operation. If the
problem persists, the system should be serviced.
The COM1 and/or COM2 transfer switch is stuck in the enabled (or “pressed”)
position. Press the transfer switch again to cycle its operation. If the problem
persists, the system should be serviced.

LOI – GPS integrity lost. Crosscheck with other
NAVS.

GPS integrity is insufficient for the current phase of flight.

GPS NAV LOST – Loss of GPS navigation.
Insufficient satellites.

Loss of GPS navigation due to insufficient satellite coverage.

GPS NAV LOST – Loss of GPS navigation.
Position error.

Loss of GPS navigation due to position error.

GPS NAV LOST – Loss of GPS navigation. GPS
fail.

Loss of GPS navigation due to GPS failure.

ABORT APR – Loss of GPS navigation. Abort
approach.

Abort approach due to loss of GPS navigation.

APR DWNGRADE – Apr downgraded.

Vertical guidance generated by SBAS is unavailable. Use only LNAV minimums.

TRUE APR – True north approach. Change
HDG reference to true.

Displayed after passing the first waypoint of a true north approach when the nav
angle is set to ‘AUTO’.

RAIM UNAVAIL – RAIM is not available from
FAF to MAP waypoints.

GPS satellite coverage is insufficient to perform Receiver Autonomous Integrity
Monitoring (RAIM) from the FAF to the MAP waypoints.

GPS1 SERVICE – GPS1 needs service. Return
unit for repair.
GPS2 SERVICE – GPS2 needs service. Return
unit for repair.

A failure has been detected in the GPS1 and/or GPS2 receiver. The receiver may
still be available. The system should be serviced.

GPS1 FAIL – GPS1 is inoperative.
GPS2 FAIL – GPS2 is inoperative.

190-01537-00 Rev. B

A failure has been detected in GPS receiver #1 and/or GPS receiver #2. The system
should be serviced.

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

567

APPENDIX A
System Message
NAV1 SERVICE – NAV1 needs service. Return
unit for repair.
NAV2 SERVICE – NAV2 needs service. Return
unit for repair.
NAV1 RMT XFR – NAV1 remote transfer key is
stuck.
NAV2 RMT XFR – NAV2 remote transfer key is
stuck.
NAV1 MANIFEST – NAV1 software mismatch,
communication halted.
NAV2 MANIFEST – NAV2 software mismatch,
communication halted.

Comments
A failure has been detected in the NAV1 and/or NAV2 receiver. The receiver may
still be available. The system should be serviced.

The remote NAV1 and/or NAV2 transfer switch is stuck in the enabled (or
“pressed”) state. Press the transfer switch again to cycle its operation. If the
problem persists, the system should be serviced.

The NAV 1 and/or NAV 2 has incorrect software installed. The system should be
serviced.

G/S1 FAIL – G/S1 is inoperative.
A failure has been detected in glideslope receiver 1 and/or receiver 2. The system
should be serviced.

G/S2 FAIL – G/S2 is inoperative.
G/S1 SERVICE – G/S1 needs service. Return
unit for repair.
G/S2 SERVICE – G/S2 needs service. Return
unit for repair.

A failure has been detected in glideslope receiver 1 and/or receiver 2. The receiver
may still be available. The system should be serviced when possible.

GEA 71 ENGINE/AIRFRAME UNIT SYSTEM MESSAGES
Message
GEA1 CONFIG – GEA1 config error. Config
service req’d.
GEA2 CONFIG – GEA2 config error. Config
service req’d.
GEA3 CONFIG – GEA3 config error. Config
service req’d.
GEA1 MANIFEST – GEA1 software mismatch,
communication halted.
GEA2 MANIFEST – GEA2 software mismatch,
communication halted.
GEA3 MANIFEST – GEA3 software mismatch,
communication halted.

568

Comments
The GEA1 configuration settings do not match those of backup configuration
memory. The system should be serviced.
The GEA2 configuration settings do not match those of backup configuration
memory. The system should be serviced.
The GEA3 configuration settings do not match those of backup configuration
memory. The system should be serviced.
The #1 GEA 71 has incorrect software installed. The system should be serviced.
The #2 GEA 71 has incorrect software installed. The system should be serviced.
The #3 GEA 71 has incorrect software installed. The system should be serviced.

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

APPENDIX A
GSD 41 MESSAGE ADVISORIES
Message
GSD1 CONFIG – GSD1 config error. Config
service req’d.
GSD2 CONFIG – GSD2 config error. Config
service req’d.
GSD1 COOLING – GSD1 temperature too
low.
GSD1 COOLING – GSD1 over temperature.
GSD2 COOLING – GSD2 temperature too
low.
GSD2 COOLING – GSD2 over temperature.
GSD1 SERVICE – GSD1 needs service. Return
unit for repair.
GSD2 SERVICE – GSD2 needs service. Return
unit for repair.
GSD1 MANIFEST – GSD1 software mismatch.
Communication halted.
GSD2 MANIFEST – GSD2 software mismatch.
Communication halted.

Comments
GSD1 and the CDU have different copies of the GSD1 configuration.
GSD2 and the CDU have different copies of the GSD2 configuration.
GSD1 is reporting a low temperature condition.
GSD1 is reporting an over-temperature condition.
GSD2 is reporting a low temperature condition.
GSD2 is reporting an over-temperature condition.
GSD1 is reporting an internal error condition. The GSD may still be usable.
GSD2 is reporting an internal error condition. The GSD may still be usable.
GSD1 has incorrect software installed. The system should be serviced.
GSD2 has incorrect software installed. The system should be serviced.

GMU 44 MAGNETOMETER SYSTEM MESSAGES
Message
HDG FAULT – AHRS1 magnetometer fault has
occurred.
HDG FAULT – AHRS2 magnetometer fault has
occurred.
GMU1 MANIFEST – GMU1 software
mismatch, communication halted.
GMU2 MANIFEST – GMU2 software
mismatch, communication halted.

Comments
A fault has occurred in the #1 GMU 44. Heading is flagged as invalid. The AHRS
uses GPS for backup mode operation. The system should be serviced.
A fault has occurred in the #2 GMU 44. Heading is flagged as invalid. The AHRS
uses GPS for backup mode operation. The system should be serviced.
The GMU 44 has incorrect software installed. The system should be serviced.

GRS 77 ATTITUDE AND HEADING REFERENCE SYSTEM MESSAGES
System Message
AHRS1 TAS – AHRS1 not receiving airspeed.

AHRS2 TAS – AHRS2 not receiving airspeed.

AHRS1 GPS – AHRS1 using backup GPS
source.

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Comments
The #1 AHRS is not receiving true airspeed from the air data computer. The AHRS
relies on GPS information to augment the lack of airspeed. The system should be
serviced.
The #2 AHRS is not receiving true airspeed from the air data computer. The AHRS
relies on GPS information to augment the lack of airspeed. The system should be
serviced.
The #1 AHRS is using the backup GPS path. Primary GPS path has failed. The
system should be serviced when possible.

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

569

APPENDIX A
System Message
AHRS2 GPS – AHRS2 using backup GPS
source.
AHRS1 GPS – AHRS1 not receiving any GPS
information.
AHRS2 GPS – AHRS2 not receiving any GPS
information.
AHRS1 GPS – AHRS1 not receiving backup
GPS information.
AHRS2 GPS – AHRS2 not receiving backup
GPS information.
AHRS1 GPS – AHRS1 operating exclusively in
no-GPS mode.
AHRS2 GPS – AHRS2 operating exclusively in
no-GPS mode.
AHRS MAG DB – AHRS magnetic model
database version mismatch.
AHRS1 SRVC – AHRS1 Magnetic-field model
needs update.
AHRS2 SRVC – AHRS2 Magnetic-field model
needs update.
GRS1 SERVICE – GRS1 needs service. Return
unit for repair.
GRS2 SERVICE – GRS2 needs service. Return
unit for repair.
GEO LIMITS – AHRS1 too far north/south, no
magnetic compass.
GEO LIMITS – AHRS2 too far north/south, no
magnetic compass.
GRS1 CONFIG – GRS1 config error. Config
service req’d.
GRS2 CONFIG – GRS2 config error. Config
service req’d.
GRS1 MANIFEST – GRS1 software mismatch,
communication halted.
GRS2 MANIFEST – GRS2 software mismatch,
communication halted.

Comments
The #2 AHRS is using the backup GPS path. Primary GPS path has failed. The
system should be serviced when possible.
The #1 AHRS is not receiving any or any useful GPS information. Check AFMS
limitations. The system should be serviced.
The #2 AHRS is not receiving any or any useful GPS information. Check AFMS
limitations. The system should be serviced.
The #1 AHRS is not receiving backup GPS information. The system should be serviced.
The #2 AHRS is not receiving backup GPS information. The system should be serviced.
The #1 AHRS is operating exclusively in no-GPS mode. The system should be
serviced.
The #2 AHRS is operating exclusively in no-GPS mode. The system should be
serviced.
The #1 AHRS and #2 AHRS magnetic model database versions do not match.
The #1 AHRS earth magnetic field model is out of date. Update magnetic field model
when practical.
The #2 AHRS earth magnetic field model is out of date. Update magnetic field model
when practical.
The #1 AHRS should be serviced when possible.
The #2 AHRS should be serviced when possible.
The aircraft is outside geographical limits for approved AHRS operation. Heading is
annunciated as invalid.

GRS configuration settings do not match those of backup configuration memory.
The system should be serviced.
The #1 AHRS has incorrect software installed. The system should be serviced.
The #2 AHRS has incorrect software installed. The system should be serviced.

GTC 570 TOUCHSCREEN CONTROLLER SYSTEM MESSAGES
System Message
GTC1 CONFIG – GTC1 config error. Config
service req’d.
GTC2 CONFIG – GTC2 config error. Config
service req’d.

570

Comments
GTC configuration settings do not match those of backup configuration memory.
The system should be serviced.

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

APPENDIX A
System Message
GTC1 SERVICE – GTC1 needs service. Return
unit for repair.
GTC2 SERVICE – GTC2 needs service. Return
unit for repair.
GTC1 COOLING – GTC1 has poor cooling.
Reducing power usage.
GTC2 COOLING – GTC2 has poor cooling.
Reducing power usage.
GTC1 VOLTAGE – GTC1 has low voltage.
Reducing power usage
GTC2 VOLTAGE – GTC2 has low voltage.
Reducing power usage
GTC1 FAN FAIL – GTC1 internal fan failure.
Unit needs service.
GTC2 FAN FAIL – GTC2 internal fan failure.
Unit needs service.
GTC1 MANIFEST – GTC 1 software mismatch,
communication halted.
GTC2 MANIFEST – GTC 2 software mismatch,
communication halted.
GTC1 CARD1 ERR – GTC1 card 1 is invalid.
GTC2 CARD1 ERR – GTC2 card 1 is invalid.
GTC1 CARD1 REM – GTC1 card 1 was
removed. Reinsert card.
GTC2 CARD1 REM – GTC2 card 1 was
removed. Reinsert card.
GTC1 KEYSTK – GTC1 [key name] key is stuck.
GTC2 KEYSTK – GTC2 [key name] key is stuck.

Comments
The GTC should be serviced..

The GTC has insufficient cooling. If the problem persists, the system should be
serviced.

The GTC voltage is low. The system should be serviced.

The internal fan in the GTC has failed. The system should be serviced.

The GTC has incorrect software installed. The system should be serviced.
The internal SD card in the GTC contains invalid data. The system should be
serviced.
The internal SD card in the GTC was removed. The system should be serviced.
A knob or joystick is stuck on the GTC bezel. Attempt to free the stuck control by
pushing or turning it several times. The system should be serviced if the problem
persists.

GSR 56 MESSAGE ADVISORIES
Message
GSR1 FAIL – GSR1 has failed.
MANIFEST – GSR1 software mismatch,
communication halted.

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Comments
A failure has been detected in GSR1. The system should be serviced.
The GSR1 has incorrect software installed. The system should be serviced.

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

571

APPENDIX A
GDL 59 MESSAGE ADVISORIES
Message
GDL59 CONFIG – GDL 59 config error. Config
service req’d.
GDL59 FAIL – GDL 59 has failed.
GDL59 SERVICE – GDL 59 needs service.
Return unit for repair.
GDL59 RTR FAIL – The GDL 59 router has
failed.
REGISTER CONNEXT – Data services are
inoperative, register w/Connext.
GDL59 MANIFEST – GDL59 software
mismatch, communication halted.

Comments
GDL 59 configuration settings do not match those of backup configuration
memory. The system should be serviced.
A failure has been detected in the GDL 59. The receiver is unavailable. The
system should be serviced.
A failure has been detected in the GDL 59. The system should be serviced.
A failure has been detected in the GDL 59 router. The system should be serviced.
The GDL 59 is not registered with Connext Services, or its current registration data
has failed authentication.
The GDL 59 has incorrect software installed. The system should be serviced.

GDR 66 VHF DATALINK TRANSCEIVER SYSTEM MESSAGES
System Message
ATC MESSAGE – .
CPDLC – CPDLC is available.
CPDLC – CPDLC connection lost. Establish new
connection.
CPDLC – CPDLC facility logon failed.
CPDLC – CPDLC data link available. Logon is
still required.
GDR TEMP – GDR over temp. Reducing
transmitter power.
GDR FAIL – GDR is inoperative.
GDR TX FAIL – GDR transmitter is inoperative.
GDR PTT – GDR push-to-talk key is stuck.

GDR RMT XFR – GDR remote transfer key is
stuck.
GDR SERVICE – GDR needs service. Return unit
for repair.
GDR CONFIG – GDR config error. Config
service req’d.
GDR MANIFEST – GDR software mismatch,
communication halted.
GDR AUX MANIFEST – GDR AUX software
mismatch, communication halted.

572

Comments
Message has been received from ATC via CPDLC.
Logon successful. Data link is available for use.
Data link connection has been lost.
Logon failed. Check pertinent entries for accuracy.
The data link is ready for use, but logon to the facility has not yet taken place.
The system has detected an over temperature condition in the GDR. The
transmitter operates at reduced power. If the problem persists, the system should
be serviced.
A failure has been detected in the GDR. The system should be serviced.
The system should be serviced.
The GDR push-to-talk switch is stuck in the enable (or “pressed”) position. Press
the PTT switch again to cycle its operation. If the problem persists, the system
should be serviced.
The GDR transfer switch is stuck in the enabled (or “pressed”) position. Press the
transfer switch again to cycle its operation. If the problem persists, the system
should be serviced.
The GDR should be serviced when possible.
GDR configuration settings do not match those of backup configuration memory.
The system should be serviced.
The GDR has incorrect software installed. The system should be serviced.
The GDR secondary processor has incorrect software installed. The system should
be serviced.

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

APPENDIX A
GDL 69A SATELLITE DATALINK RECEIVER SYSTEM MESSAGES
System Message
Comments
GDL69 CONFIG – GDL 69 config error. Config GDL 69 configuration settings do not match those of backup configuration
service req’d.
memory. The system should be serviced.
GDL69 FAIL – GDL 69 has failed.
A failure has been detected in the GDL 69. The receiver is unavailable. The system
should be serviced.
GDL69 MANIFEST – GDL69 software
The GDL 69 has incorrect software installed. The system should be serviced.
mismatch, communication halted.

GWX 70 AIRBORNE COLOR WEATHER RADAR SYSTEM MESSAGES
Message
GWX CONFIG – GWX config error. Config
service req’d.
GWX FAIL – GWX is inoperative.

GWX SERVICE – GWX needs service. Return
unit for repair.
GWX MANIFEST – GWX software mismatch,
communication halted.
WX ALERT – Possible severe weather ahead.

Comments
GWX configuration settings do not match those of the GDU configuration. The
system should be serviced.
The GDU is not recieving status packet from the GWX or the GWX is reporting a
fault. The radar system should be serviced.
A failure has been detected in the GWX. The GWX may still be usable.
The GWX has incorrect software installed. The system should be serviced.
Possible severe weather detected within +/- 10 degrees of the aircraft heading at a
range of 80 to 320 nm.

GMA 36 REMOTE AUDIO CONTROLLER SYSTEM MESSAGES
System Message
GMA1 FAIL – GMA1 is inoperative.
GMA2 FAIL – GMA2 is inoperative.
GMA1 CONFIG – GMA1 config error. Config
service req’d.
GMA2 CONFIG – GMA2 config error. Config
service req’d.
GMA XTALK – GMA crosstalk error has
occurred.
DIG GMA1 MANIFEST – DIG GMA 1
software mismatch, communication halted.
DIG GMA2 MANIFEST – DIG GMA 2
software mismatch, communication halted.
GMA1 AUDIO MANIFEST – GMA1 audio
software mismatch, communication halted.
GMA2 AUDIO MANIFEST – GMA2 audio
software mismatch, communication halted.

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Comments
The audio controller has detected a failure. The audio controller is unavailable. The
system should be serviced.
The audio controller configuration settings do not match backup configuration
memory. The system should be serviced.
The GMA Audio Controllers are not communicating with each other. The system
should be serviced.
The digital audio controller has incorrect software installed. The system should be
serviced.

The audio system has incorrect software installed. The system should be serviced.

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

573

APPENDIX A
System Message
GMA1 AUX MANIFEST – GMA 1 AUX
software mismatch, communication halted.
GMA2 AUX MANIFEST – GMA 2 AUX
software mismatch, communication halted.
GMA1 SERVICE – GMA1 needs service.
Return unit for repair.
GMA2 SERVICE – GMA2 needs service.
Return unit for repair.

Comments
The digital audio controller has incorrect software installed. The system should be
serviced.
The audio controller self-test has detected a problem in the unit. Certain audio functions may still be available, and the audio controller may still be usable. The system
should be serviced when possible.

GMC 715 AFCS CONTROLLER SYSTEM MESSAGES
System Message
GMC CONFIG – GMC Config error. Config
service req’d.
GMC FAIL – GMC is inoperative.
GMC MANIFEST – GMC software mismatch.
Communication halted.
GMC KEYSTK – GMC [key name] key is stuck.

Comments
Error in the configuration of the GMC.
A failure has been detected in the GMC. The GMC is unavailable.
The GMC has incorrect software installed. The system should be serviced.
A key is stuck on the GMC bezel. Attempt to free the stuck key by pressing it
several times. The system should be serviced if the problem persists.

MISCELLANEOUS SYSTEM MESSAGES
System Message
FPL WPT LOCK – Flight plan waypoint is
locked.

Comments
Upon power-up, The system detects that a stored flight plan waypoint is locked.
This occurs when an aviation database update eliminates an obsolete waypoint.
The flight plan cannot find the specified waypoint and flags this message. This can
also occur with user waypoints in flight plans that are deleted.
Remove the waypoint from the flight plan if it no longer exists in any database, or
update the waypoint name/identifier to reflect the new information.
FPL WPT MOVE – Flight plan waypoint
The system has detected that a waypoint coordinate has changed due to a new
moved.
navigation database update. Verify that stored flight plans contain correct waypoint
locations.
TIMER EXPIRD – Timer has expired.
The system notifies the pilot the timer has expired.
DB CHANGE – Database changed. Verify user This occurs when a stored flight plan contains procedures that have been manually
modified procedures.
edited. This alert is issued only after a navigation database update. Verify the usermodified procedures in stored flight plans are correct and current.
DB CHANGE – Database changed. Verify
This occurs when a stored flight plan contains an airway that is no longer consistent
stored airways.
with the navigation database. This alert is issued only after a navigation database
update. Verify use of airways in stored flight plans and reload airways as needed.
FPL TRUNC – Flight plan has been truncated. This occurs when a newly installed navigation database eliminates an obsolete
approach or arrival used by a stored flight plan. The obsolete procedure is removed
from the flight plan. Update flight plan with current arrival or approach.
WPT ARRIVAL – Arriving at waypoint - [xxxx] Arriving at waypoint [xxxx], where [xxxx] is the waypoint name.
STEEP TURN – Steep turn ahead.
A steep turn is 15 seconds ahead. Prepare to turn.

574

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

APPENDIX A
System Message
INSIDE ARSPC – Inside airspace.
ARSPC AHEAD – Airspace ahead - less than
10 minutes.
ARSPC NEAR – Airspace near and ahead.
ARSPC NEAR – Airspace near – less than 2
nm.
APR INACTV – Approach is not active.

Comments
The aircraft is inside the airspace.
Special use airspace is ahead of aircraft. The aircraft will penetrate the airspace
within 10 minutes.
Special use airspace is near and ahead of the aircraft position.
Special use airspace is within 2 nm of the aircraft position.

The system notifies the pilot the loaded approach is not active. Activate approach
when required.
SLCT FREQ – Select appropriate frequency for The system notifies the pilot to load the approach frequency for the appropriate
approach.
NAV receiver. Select the correct frequency for the approach.
SLCT NAV – Select NAV on CDI for approach. The system notifies the pilot to set the CDI to the correct NAV receiver. Set the CDI to
the correct NAV receiver.
UNABLE V WPT – Can’t reach current vertical The current vertical waypoint can not be reached within the maximum flight path angle
waypoint.
and vertical speed constraints. The system automatically transitions to the next vertical
waypoint.
VNV – Unavailable: Unsupported leg type in The lateral flight plan contains a procedure turn, vector, or other unsupported leg
flight plan.
type prior to the active vertical waypoint. This prevents vertical guidance to the
active vertical waypoint.
VNV – Unavailable: Excessive cross-track
The current crosstrack exceeds the limit, causing vertical deviation to go invalid.
error.
VNV – Unavailable: Excessive track angle
The current track angle error exceeds the limit, causing the vertical deviation to go
error.
invalid.
VNV – Unavailable: Parallel course selected. A parallel course has been selected, causing the vertical deviation to go invalid.
BARO MISMATCH – Correct baro mismatch
Altimeter setting is not the same on PFD1 and PFD2. Synchronize settings for VNAV
for VNAV guidance.
guidance.
NON WGS84 WPT – Do not use GPS for
The position of the selected waypoint [xxxxx] is not calculated based on the WGS84
navigation to [xxxx]
map reference datum and may be positioned in error as displayed. Do not use GPS
to navigate to the selected non-WGS84 waypoint.
TRAFFIC FAIL – Traffic device has failed.
The system is no longer receiving data from the traffic system. The traffic device
should be serviced.
FAILED PATH – A data path has failed.
A data path connected to the GDU or the GIA has failed.
MAG VAR WARN – Large magnetic variance. The GDU’s internal model cannot determine the exact magnetic variance for
Verify all course angles.
geographic locations near the magnetic poles. Displayed magnetic course angles may
differ from the actual magnetic heading by more than 2°.
USER MAG VAR – User magnetic variation
User entered magnetic variation is being used for system calculations.
is active.
SCHEDULER [#] – .
Message criteria entered by the user.
SVT DISABLED – Out of available terrain
Synthetic Vision is disabled because the aircraft is not within the boundaries of the
region.
installed terrain database.
SVT DISABLED – Terrain DB resolution too
Synthetic Vision is disabled because a terrain database of sufficient resolution (9
low.
arc-second or better) is not currently installed.
TERRAIN DISABLED – Terrain Awareness DB TAWS is disabled because a terrain database of sufficient resolution (9 arc-second
resolution too low.
or better) is not currently installed.

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

575

APPENDIX A
System Message
TRN AUD FAIL – Trn Awareness audio source
unavailable.
TERRAIN AUD CFG – Trn Awareness audio
config error. Service req’d.
CHECK CRS – Database course for LOC1 /
[LOC ID] is [CRS]°.
CHECK CRS – Database course for LOC2 /
[LOC ID] is [CRS]°.
[PFD1, PFD2, or MFD1] CARD 1 REM –
[PFD1, PFD2, or MFD1] card 1 was removed.
Reinsert card.
[PFD1, PFD2, or MFD1] CARD 2 REM – Card
2 was removed. Reinsert card.
[PFD1, PFD2, or MFD1] CARD 1 ERR –
[PDF1 or MFD1] card 1 is invalid.
[PFD1, PFD2, or MFD1] CARD 2 ERR –
[PFD1 or MFD1] Card 2 is invalid.
[PFD1, PFD2, or MFD1] CARD 3 REM – Card
3 was removed. Reinsert card.
[PFD1, PFD2, or MFD1] CARD 3 ERR –
[PDF1 or MFD1] card 3 is invalid.
DATA LOST – Pilot stored data was lost.
Recheck settings.

Comments
TAWS is disabled because an aural alert audio source is unavailable.
TAWS is disabled because the audio configuration is invalid. The system should be
serviced.
Selected course for LOC1 differs from published localizer course by more than 10
degrees.
Selected course for LOC2 differs from published localizer course by more than 10
degrees.
The SD card was removed from the top card slot of the PFD or MFD. The SD card
needs to be reinserted.
The SD card was removed from the bottom card slot of the PFD or MFD. The SD
card needs to be reinserted.
The SD card in the top card slot of the PFD or MFD contains invalid data.
The SD card in the bottom card slot of the PFD or MFD contains invalid data.
The internal SD card was removed from the PFD or MFD. The system should be
serviced.
The internal SD card in the PFD or MFD contains invalid data. The system should be
serviced.
The system was unable to save pilot data. Verify settings.

FLIGHT PLAN IMPORT/EXPORT MESSAGES
In some circumstances, some messages may appear in conjunction with others.
Flight Plan Import/Export Results
‘Flight plan successfully imported.’

Description
A flight plan file stored on the SD card was successfully imported as a stored flight
plan.
‘File contained user waypoints only. User
The file stored on the SD card did not contain a flight plan, only user waypoints. These
waypoints imported successfully. No stored waypoints have been saved to the system user waypoints. No flight plans stored in
flight plan data was modified.’
the system have been modified.
‘No flight plan files found to import.’
The SD card contains no flight plan data.
‘Flight plan import failed.’
Flight plan data was not successfully imported from the SD card.
‘Flight plan partially imported.’
Some flight plan waypoints were successfully imported from the SD card, however
others had errors and were not imported. A partial stored flight plan now exists in the
system.
‘File contained user waypoints only.’
The file stored on the SD card did not contain a flight plan, only user waypoints. In
addition, one or more of these waypoints may not have imported successfully.
‘Too many points. Flight plan truncated.’
The flight plan on the SD card contains more waypoints than the system can support.
The flight plan was imported with as many waypoints as possible.

576

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

APPENDIX A
Flight Plan Import/Export Results
‘Some waypoints not loaded. Waypoints
locked.’
‘User waypoint database full. Not all
loaded.’

‘One or more user waypoints renamed.’
‘Flight plan successfully exported.’
‘Flight plan export failed.’

Description
The flight plan on the SD card contains one or more waypoints the system cannot find
in the navigation database. The flight plan has been imported, but must be edited
within the system before it can be activated for use.
The flight plan file on the SD card contains user waypoints. The quantity of stored user
waypoints has exceeded system capacity, therefore not all the user waypoints on the
SD card have been imported. Any flight plan user waypoints that were not imported
are locked in the flight plan. The flight plan must be edited within the system before it
can be activated for use.
One or more imported user waypoints were renamed when imported due to naming
conflicts with waypoints already existing in the system.
The stored flight plan was successfully exported to the SD card.
The stored flight plan was not successfully exported to the SD card. The SD card may
not have sufficient available memory or the card may have been removed prematurely.

PILOT PROFILE IMPORT/EXPORT MESSAGES
The following messages may be displayed when importing and exporting Pilot Profiles.
Pilot Profile Import/Export Results
‘No pilot profile plan files found to import.’
‘Overwrite existing profile?’
‘Profile name invalid. Enter a different
profile name.’
‘All available pilot profiles in use. Delete a
profile before importing another.’
‘Pilot profile import failed.’
‘Pilot profile import succeeded.’
‘Overwrite existing file?’
‘Pilot profile export failed.’
‘Pilot profile export succeeded.’

Description
Displayed if the SD card does not have one or more valid pilot profile filenames.
Displayed if the profile name matches the name of existing profile.
Displayed if the profile name is invalid.
Displayed if the maximum number for pilot profiles has been reached.
Displayed if the importing operation fails for any other reason.
Displayed if the importing operation succeeds.
Displayed if the filename matches the name of an existing file on the SD card.
Displayed if the export operation fails.
Displayed if the export operation succeeds.

TAWS-A ALERTS
Annunciations appear on the PFDs and the Touchscreen Controllers. Pop-up alerts appear only on the
Touchscreen Controllers.
PFD/MFD
Touchscreen Controller
TAWS-A
Display
Pop-Up Alert
Annunciation

Alert Type
Reduced Required Terrain Clearance Warning
(RTC)
Imminent Terrain Impact Warning (ITI)
Reduced Required Obstacle Clearance Warning
(ROC)

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Voice Message
“Terrain, Terrain; Pull Up, Pull Up”
“Terrain, Terrain; Pull Up, Pull Up”
“Obstacle, Obstacle; Pull Up, Pull Up”

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

577

APPENDIX A
PFD/MFD
Touchscreen Controller
TAWS-A
Display
Pop-Up Alert
Annunciation

Alert Type

Voice Message

Imminent Obstacle Impact Warning (IOI)

“Obstacle, Obstacle; Pull Up, Pull Up”

Excessive Descent Rate Warning (EDR)

“ Pull Up”

Excessive Closure Rate Warning (ECR)

“ Pull Up”

Reduced Required Terrain Clearance Caution
(RTC)
Imminent Terrain Impact Caution (ITI)

“Caution, Terrain; Caution, Terrain”
“Caution, Terrain; Caution, Terrain”

Reduced Required Obstacle Clearance Caution
(ROC)

“Caution, Obstacle; Caution, Obstacle”

Imminent Obstacle Impact Caution (IOI)

“Caution, Obstacle; Caution, Obstacle”

Premature Descent Alert Caution (PDA)

“Too Low, Terrain”

Excessive Descent Rate Caution (EDR)

“Sink Rate”

Excessive Closure Rate Caution (ECR)

“Terrain, Terrain”

Negative Climb Rate Caution (NCR)

“Don’t Sink”

Flight Into Terrain High Speed Caution (FIT)

“Too Low, Terrain”

Flight Into Terrain Gear Caution (FIT)

“Too Low, Gear”

Flight Into Terrain Flaps Caution (FIT)

“Too Low, Flaps”

Flight Into Terrain Takeoff Caution (FIT)

“Too Low, Terrain”

Glide Slope/Glide Path Deviation Caution (GSD)
(depends on approach type)
Altitude Voice Callout (VCO)

None

“Glide Slope”
or
“Glide Path”
“Five-Hundred”
“Four-Hundred”
“Three-Hundred”
“Two-Hundred”
“One-Hundred”

TAWS-A SYSTEM STATUS ANNUNCIATIONS
Additional
TAWS-A Page
Annunciation

Voice Alert

TAWS System Fail, Terrain or Obstacle database
unavailable or invalid, invalid software configuration,
system audio fault
GPWS System Fail

TAWS FAIL

“TAWS System Failure”

None

“GPWS System Failure”

System Test in progress

TAWS TEST

None

“TAWS System Test OK”

Alert Type

System Test pass

578

PFD/MFD
TAWS-A Page
Annunciation

None

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

APPENDIX A

Alert Type
MFD Terrain or Obstacle database unavailable or invalid.
TAWS operating with PFD Terrain or Obstacle databases
GPWS System Fail, Radar Altimeter invalid, Altitude or
Vertical Speed unavailable

PFD/MFD
TAWS-A Page
Annunciation

Additional
TAWS-A Page
Annunciation

Voice Alert

None

TERRAIN DATABASE
FAILURE

None

“GPWS System Failure”

NO GPS
POSITION

“TAWS Not Available”

None

“TAWS Not Available”

None

“TAWS Not Available”
“TAWS Available” when
aircraft enters database
coverage area.

No GPS position
Excessively degraded GPS signal, Out of database
coverage area
Out of database coverage area

TCAS II ALERTS AND ANNUNCIATIONS
PFD Mode
Annunciation

Traffic Map Pane Mode
Annunciation

TCAS II System Test In
Progress

None

TEST
(‘TEST MODE’ also shown in white on top
center of pane)

Traffic Advisory and
Resolution Advisory (TA/RA)

None

TA/RA

Mode

TA ONLY

Traffic Advisory Only (TA Only)

TCAS II Standby

Traffic Display Status Icon
(Other Map Displays)

o Or:
*

STANDBY
(shown in white in center of pane on ground,
yellow in the air)
FAIL

TCAS II Failed
* Annunciation appears in yellow while in the air.

TCAS II Modes

Traffic Map Page
Annunciation
NO DATA
DATA FAILED
FAILED

Description
Data is not being received from the TCAS II unit
Data is being received from the TCAS II unit, but the unit is self-reporting a failure
Incorrect data format received from the TCAS II unit
TCAS II Failure Annunciations

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

579

APPENDIX A
Traffic Status Banner
Annunciation
RA OFF SCALE
TA OFF SCALE
RA X.X ± XX ↕

TA X.X ± XX ↕
TRFC FAIL
NO TCAS DATA

Description
A Resolution Advisory is outside the selected display range*. Annunciation is removed when traffic
comes within the selected display range
A Traffic Advisory is outside the selected display range*.
Annunciation is removed when traffic comes within the selected display range.
System cannot determine bearing of Resolution Advisory**.
Annunciation indicates distance in nm, altitude separation in hundreds of feet, and altitude trend
arrow (climbing/descending).
System cannot determine bearing of Traffic Advisory**.
Annunciation indicates distance in nm, altitude separation in hundreds of feet, and altitude trend
arrow (climbing/descending).
TCAS II unit has failed (unit is self-reporting a failure or sending incorrectly formatted data)
Data is not being received from the TCAS II unit

*Shown as symbol on Traffic Map Page
**Shown in center of Traffic Map Page
TCAS II Traffic Status Annunciations

580

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

APPENDIX B

DATABASE MANAGEMENT
CAUTION: Never disconnect power to the system when loading a database. Power interruption during the

database loading process could result in maintenance being required to reboot the system.
The system uses Secure Digital (SD) cards to load and store various types of data. For basic flight operations,
SD cards are required for database storage as well as Jeppesen navigation and ChartView database updates. Not
all SD cards are compatible with the Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300. Use only SD cards supplied by Garmin or
the aircraft manufacturer.
CAUTION: When downloading updates to the Jeppesen Navigation Database, copy the data to an SD card

other than a Garmin Supplemental Data Card. Otherwise, data corruption can occur.
NOTE: When loading database updates, the ‘DB Mismatch’ message will be displayed until database

synchronization is complete, followed by turning system power off, then on. Synchronization can be
monitored on the Avionics Status Screen on the Touchscreen Controller.
NOTE: Loading a database in the system prior to its effective date will result in the expiration date on the

power-up screen and the effective date on the Avionics Status Screen being displayed in yellow.
NOTE: Garmin requests the flight crew report any observed discrepancies related to database information.

These discrepancies could come in the form of an incorrect procedure; incorrectly identified terrain, obstacles
and fixes; or any other displayed item used for navigation or communication in the air or on the ground. Go
to FlyGarmin.com and select “Aviation Data Error Report.

JEPPESEN DATABASES
The Jeppesen navigation database is updated on a 28-day cycle. The ChartView database is updated on a
14-day cycle. If the ChartView database is not updated within 70 days of the expiration date, ChartView will
no longer function. Both of these databases are provided directly from Jeppesen.
The ChartView database should be copied to the Garmin supplied Supplemental Data Card which will reside
in the bottom card slot on the MFD. The navigation database must be installed from the Jeppesen or user
supplied SD data card. Contact Jeppesen (www.jeppesen.com) for subscription and update information.
NOTE: After the navigation database is installed, the card may be removed.

Updating the active Jeppesen navigation database (not using the Dual Navigation Database or
Automatic Database Synchronization Features):
1) With the system OFF, insert the SD card containing the new navigation database version into the top card slot of the
display (PFD1, PFD2, or MFD) to be updated (label of SD card facing left).
2) Turn the system ON. A prompt is displayed in the upper left corner of the display:

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

581

APPENDIX B

Figure B-1 Standby Navigation Database Prompt

3) Press the NO Softkey to proceed to loading the active database.
4) A prompt similar to the following is displayed. Press the YES Softkey to update the active navigation database.

Figure B-2 Database Update Confirmation

5) After the update completes, the display starts in normal mode.
6) Turn the system OFF and remove the SD card from the top card slot.
7) Repeat steps 1 through 6 for the remaining displays (PFD1, PFD2, or MFD).
8) Apply power to the system and press the right most softkey to acknowledge the startup screen.
9) From the Home Screen on the Touchscreen Controller, touch Setup > Avionics Status.
10) Touch the Database Tab.
11) Touch the PFD1 Button. Check the active navigation database information to verify the database has been
updated.
12) Touch the Back Button.
13) Touch the PFD2 Button. Check the active navigation database information to verify the database has been
updated.
14) Touch the Back Button.
15) Touch the MFD1 Button. Check the active navigation database information to verify the database has been
updated.
16) Touch the Back Button.
17) Touch the GTC1 Button. Check the database information to verify databases have been updated.

582

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

APPENDIX B
DUAL NAVIGATION DATABASE FEATURE
The dual navigation database feature allows each display to store an upcoming navigation database on the
bottom SD card so that the system can automatically load it to replace the active database when the new
database becomes effective (the next cycle becomes available seven days prior to its effective date).
If a navigation database loader card is inserted into the top SD card slot of a display, and an SD card is in the
bottom slot, the system will prompt the user (upon on-ground power up) as to whether the database should
be stored on the bottom SD card as the standby database. If the user responds affirmatively, the system will
copy the navigation database from the top SD card to the bottom SD card. As long as the bottom SD card
remains in the card slot, this standby navigation database will be available for the system to use as the active
database as soon as it becomes effective.
The system checks the active and standby databases upon (on-ground only) power-up. If the standby
database is current and the active database is out of date, the display will upload the standby database into the
active internal database location. Uploading the standby database to the active location takes approximately
45-55 seconds. The pilot is alerted that the update is complete by a system alert message, ‘NAV DB UPDATED’.
Loading a standby navigation database:
NOTE: After the navigation database is loaded or copied, the top SD card may be removed.

1) With the system OFF, insert the SD card containing the new navigation database version into the top card slot of
the MFD.
2) Verify that an SD card is inserted in the bottom slot of each PFD and the MFD.
3) Turn the system ON. A prompt is displayed.

Figure B-3 Standby Navigation Database Prompt

4) Press the YES Softkey. The navigation database is copied to the SD card in the bottom card slot of the MFD.
5) After the navigation database files are copied to the bottom SD card, press any key to continue, as instructed.

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

583

APPENDIX B

Figure B-4 Standby Navigation Database Update Complete

6) Again, press any key to continue as instructed on the display.

Figure B-5 Navigation Database Verification Prompt

7) Press the NO Softkey. The display now starts in normal mode. Since the database effective date is not yet valid, it
should not be loaded as the active database. The display now starts in normal mode. Do not remove power while
the display is starting.

Figure B-6 Active Navigation Database Prompt

8) Press the right most softkey to acknowledge the startup screen.
9) From the Home Screen on the Touchscreen Controller, touch Utilities > Setup > Avionics Status.
10) Touch the Database Tab.
11) Touch the PFD1 Button. Verify the PFD1 Database screen indicates the standby navigation database is synchronizing.
When synchronization has finished, ‘Complete’ is displayed. Check the standby navigation database information
to verify database have been updated.
12) Touch the Back Button.

584

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

APPENDIX B
13) Touch the PFD2 Button. Verify the PFD2 Database screen indicates the standby navigation database is synchronizing.
When synchronization has finished, ‘Complete’ is displayed. Check the standby navigation database information
to verify database have been updated.
14) Touch the Back Button.
15) Touch the MFD1 Button. Check the standby navigation database information to verify the database has been
updated.
16) Touch the Back Button.
17) Touch the GTC1 Button. Check the standby navigation database information to verify databases have been
updated.

NOTE: During the synchronization process, version differences between standby navigation databases will exist.
This will result in the system displaying a ‘DB Mismatch’ alert for the standby navigation databases. This alert will
remain until the next power cycle.

18) Turn system power OFF.
19) Remove the SD card from the top card slot of the MFD.
20) Turn system power ON.
21) Acknowledge the Power-up Display agreement by pressing the right most softkey as indicated on the display.
22) From the Home Screen on the Touchscreen Controller, touch Setup > Avionics Status.
23) Touch the Database Tab.
24) Touch the PFD1 Button. Check the standby navigation database information to verify database have been
updated.
25) Touch the Back Button.
26) Touch the PFD1 Button. Check the standby navigation database information to verify database have been
updated.
27) Touch the Back Button.
28) Touch the MFD1 Button. Check the standby navigation database information to verify the database has been
updated.
29) Touch the Back Button.
30) Touch the GTC1 Button. Check the standby navigation database information to verify databases have been
updated.

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

585

APPENDIX B

AUTOMATIC DATABASE SYNCHRONIZATION FEATURE
When updating the active navigation database, the automatic database synchronization feature automatically
transfers the navigation database from a single SD Card to the internal memory of all GDUs and GTCs. When
updating all other databases (including the standby navigation database) the data is transferred from a single
SD card to the remaining SD cards on each GDU, as well as the internal memory of each GTC. After power-up,
the system compares all copies of each applicable database. If similar databases do not match, the most recent
valid database is automatically copied to each card in the system that does not already contain that database.
The following databases are checked and synchronized: Navigation, Basemap, Safetaxi, Terrain, Obstacle,
FliteCharts, ChartView, and Airport Directory.
NOTE: The terrain database may take as long as 100 minutes to synchronize using this method. Therefore

the user may want to transfer the data using a PC, or connect the system to a ground power source while
performing the database synchronization.
The synchronization progress may be monitored on the Database Status Screen on the Touchscreen Controller
(Figure B-7). This screen shows the synchronization status of each applicable database as follows:
• ‘Sync in Progress’ with percent complete and time remaining
• ‘Sync Complete’
• ‘Sync Error’
While database synchroniztion is occurring, ‘Sync in Progress’ is displayed along with percent complete and
time remaining. When the synchronization is complete for the selected GDU or GTC Database Status Screen,
the status is listed as ‘Sync Complete’ (Figure B-8). The synchonization status is only present when a sync is
occurring or has occurred on the current power-up.
An indication of ‘Sync Complete’ still requires a power cycle before the synchronized databases will be used
by the system.
To view database status:
1) From the Home Screen on the Touchscreen Controller, touch Utilities > Setup > Avionics Status.
2) If necessary, touch the Database Tab. The Touchscreen Controller shows a list of displays on which databases reside.
3) Touch a button from the list to view database information associated with that display (MFD1, PFD1, PFD2, GTC1,
GTC2).
4) Scroll through the database information to view database status.

Synchronization
In Progress

Synchronization
Complete
Figure B-7 Avionics Status Screen,
Database Information Window,
Navigation Database Sync in Progress

586

Figure B-8 Avionics Status Screen,
Database Information Window,
Navigation Database Sync Complete

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

APPENDIX B
If an error occurs during the synchronization, ‘Sync Error’ is displayed in the synchronization status field
(Figure B-9). If synchronization completes for one GDU or GTC, but an error occurs for another, the error
message will be displayed on the Database Status Screen for the affected GDU or GTC. When an error message
is displayed, the problem must be corrected before the synchronization can be completed. A power cycle is
required to restart synchronization.

Synchronization
Error
Figure B-9 Synchronization Error Message

GARMIN DATABASES
The following databases are stored on Supplemental Data Cards provided by Garmin:
• Expanded basemap

• SafeTaxi

• Terrain

• FliteCharts

• Airport Directory
(AOPA or AC-U-KWIK)

• Obstacle
After subscribing to the desired database product, these database products will be downloaded and ultimately
stored on three Supplemental Data Cards. A Supplemental Data Card resides in the bottom card slot of each
GDU, as shown in Figure B-10.

PFD1

MFD

PFD2

Figure B-10 Correct Database Locations

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

587

APPENDIX B
Databases residing on Supplemental Data Cards are not stored internally in the displays (except for the
Touchscreen Controllers), therefore, a Supplemental Data Card containing identical database versions must be
kept in the bottom card slot each GDU.
The basemap database contains data for the topography and land features, such as rivers, lakes, and towns.
It is updated only periodically, with no set schedule. There is no expiration date.
The terrain database contains the terrain mapping data. This database is updated periodically and has no
expiration date.
The obstacle database contains data for obstacles, such as towers, that pose a potential hazard to aircraft.
Obstacles 200 feet and higher are included in the obstacle database. It is very important to note that not all
obstacles are necessarily charted and therefore may not be contained in the obstacle database. This database is
updated on a 56-day cycle.
NOTE: The data contained in the terrain and obstacle databases comes from government agencies. Garmin

accurately processes and cross-validates the data, but cannot guarantee the accuracy and completeness of
the data.
The SafeTaxi database contains detailed airport diagrams for selected airports. These diagrams aid in following
ground control instructions by accurately displaying the aircraft position on the map in relation to taxiways,
ramps, runways, terminals, and services. This database is updated on a 56-day cycle.
The AOPA or AC-U-KWIK Airport Directory provides data on airports and heliports throughout the U.S., and
offers detailed information for over 5,300 U. S. airports, along with the names and phone numbers of thousands
of FBOs. These databases are updated every 56 days.
The FliteCharts database contains procedure charts for the United States only. This database is updated on a
28-day cycle. If not updated within 180 days of the expiration date, FliteCharts will no longer function.
The Garmin database updates can be obtained by following the instructions detailed in the ‘Aviation
Databases’ section of the Garmin website (fly.garmin.com). Once the updated files have been downloaded
from the website, a PC equipped with an appropriate SD card reader is used to unpack and program the new
databases onto an existing Supplemental Data Card. Equipment required to perform the update is as follows:
• Windows-compatible PC computer (running Windows XP, Vista, or Windows 7)
• SD Card Reader: SanDisk SDDR-93, SanDisk SDDR-99, Verbatim #96504, or equivalent
• Updated database obtained from the Garmin website
• Existing Supplemental Database SD Cards (010-00474-44) from both PFDs and MFD
In some cases it may be necessary to obtain an unlock code from Garmin in order to make the database
product functional. It may also be necessary to have the system configured by a Garmin authorized service
facility in order to use some database features.
After the data has been copied to the appropriate data card, perform the following steps:
1) With system power OFF, remove the MFD database card from the bottom card slot of the MFD.
2) Update the Garmin databases on the MFD card.

588

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

APPENDIX B
3) Insert the MFD database card into the bottom card slot of the MFD.
4) Apply power to the system, check that the databases are initialized and displayed on the power-up screen
(Figure B-11). When updating the terrain and FliteCharts databases, a ‘Verifying’ message may be seen. If this
message is present, wait for the system to finish loading before proceeding to step 5.

Figure B-11 Database Information on the Power-up Screen

5) From the Home Screen on the Touchscreen Controller, touch Setup > Avionics Status.
6) If necessary, touch the Database tab.
7) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the System Status Page.
8) Monitor the Sync Status in the Database Window. Wait for all databases to complete synching, indicated by
‘Complete’ being displayed as seen in Figure B-8.
9) Remove and reapply power to the system.
10) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the AUX Page group on the MFD.
11) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the System Status Page.
12) Press the Display Database Selection Softkey to show database information for each display (MFD1 DB, PFD1
DB, PFD2 DB). Verify the correct database cycle information is shown for each database for each display.

Unselected

MFD1 DB Selected PFD1 DB Selected

Figure B-12 Display Database Softkey

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

589

APPENDIX B
MAGNETIC FIELD VARIATION DATABASE UPDATE
The Magnetic Field Variation Database is loaded as part of the navigation database, but is copied to, and
resides within each AHRS (GRS1 and GRS2). At startup, the system compares the MV DB within the navigation
database to that presently residing in each AHRS (GRS1 and GRS2). When a new navigation database is loaded,
the system may determine the newly loaded MV DB within the navigation database is newer than that residing
in each AHRS. In this case, the system will prompt for an update. This prompt is displayed on the Touchscreen
Controller (GTC), as shown in Figure B-13. Note, in this example, GRS1 is the first AHRS to indicate an update
is available. In actuality, this is dependent on which AHRS is the first to report status to the system. GRS2 may
be displayed before GRS1. The order is not important, only that both AHRS be updated.

Figure B-13 GRS1 Magnetic Field Variation Database Update Prompt (Touchscreen Controller)

590

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

APPENDIX B
Loading the Magnetic Field Variation Database update:
1) With the MV DB prompt displayed, as shown in Figure B-13, touch the OK Button. A progress monitor is
displayed as shown in Figure B-14.

Figure B-14 Uploading Database to GRS1

2) When the upload is complete, the prompt for the next GRS upload is displayed, as seen in Figure B-15. A
database mismatch message, as seen in Figure B-16, indicates the second GRS has not yet been updated.

Figure B-15 GRS2 Magnetic Field
Variation Database Update Prompt

Figure B-16 Database Mismatch Message is
Annunciated Before Second GRS is Updated

3) Touch the OK Button. A progress monitor for the next GRS is displayed as in step 1. When the upload is
complete, the system is ready for use.

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

591

APPENDIX B

Blank Page

592

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

APPENDIX C

GLOSSARY
ACC accuracy
ACT, ACTV
active,
activate,
Altitude
Compensated Tilt
ADC
air data computer
ADF
Automatic Direction Finder
ADI
Attitude Direction Indicator
AF
Arc to fix
AFCS
Automatic Flight Control System
AFM
Airplane Flight Manual
AFMS
Airplane Flight Manual Supplement
AFRM airframe
AGL
Above Ground Level
AHRS
Attitude and Heading Reference
System
AIM
Aeronautical Information Manual
AIRMET
Airman’s Meteorological Information
ALRT alert
ALT altitude
ALT, ALTN
alternator
AMPS amperes
ANNUNC annunciation
ANT antenna
AP autopilot
AP DISC
autopilot disconnect
APR approach
APT
airport, aerodrome
ARINC
Aeronautical Radio Incorporated
ARSPC airspace
ARTCC
Air Route Traffic Control Center
ARV arrival
AS airspeed
ASB
Aviation Support Branch
ASOS
Automated Surface Observing
System
ATC
Air Traffic Control
ATCRBS
ATC Radar Beacon System
ATIS
Automatic Terminal Information
Service
ATK along-track
AUTOSEQ
automatic sequence
AUX auxiliary
AWOS
Automated Weather Observing
System
B ALT
barometric altitude
BARO
barometric setting
BATT battery
BC backcourse

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Bearing

The compass direction from the
present position to a destination
waypoint
BFO
beat frequency oscillator
BKSP backspace
BRG bearing
C
center runway
ºC
degrees Celsius
CA
Course to Altitude
CALC calculator
Calibrated Airspeed Indicated airspeed corrected for
installation and instrument errors.
CD
Course to DME distance
CDI
Course Deviation Indicator
CDU
Control Display Unit
CF
Course to Fix
CHT
Cylinder Head Temperature
CHKLIST checklist
CHNL channel
CI
Course to Intercept
CLD cloud
CLR clear
cm centimeter
CNS
Communication, Navigation, &
Surveillance
CO
carbon monoxide
COM
communication radio
CONFIG configuration
COOL coolant
COPLT co-pilot
Course
The line between two points to be
followed by the aircraft
Course to Steer
The recommended direction to steer
in order to reduce course error or
stay on course. Provides the most
efficient heading to get back to the
desired course and proceed along
the flight plan
CPDLC
Controller
Pilot
Datalink
Communications
CR
Course to Radial
CRG
Cockpit Reference Guide
CRNT current
Crosstrack Error
The distance the aircraft is off a
desired course in either direction, left
or right
CRS course
CRS
Course to Steer
CRSR cursor

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

593

APPENDIX C
CTA
Control Area
CTRL control
Cumulative
The total of all legs in a flight plan.
CVR
Cockpit Voice Recorder
CVRG coverage
CWS
control wheel steering
CYL cylinder
D ALT
density altitude
DB, DBASE
database
dBZ
decibels ‘Z’ (radar return)
DCLTR, DECLTR
declutter
DEC FUEL
decrease fuel
deg degree
DEIC, DEICE
de-icing
DEP departure
Desired Track
The desired course between the
active “from” and “to” waypoints
DEST destination
DF
Direct to Fix
DFLT default
DGRD degrade
DH
decision height
Dilution of Precision A measure of GPS satellite geometry
quality on a scale of one to ten (lower
numbers equal better geometry,
where higher numbers equal poorer
geometry)
DIR direction
DIS distance
Distance
The ‘great circle’ distance from the
present position to a destination
waypoint
DME
Distance Measuring Equipment
DOP
Dilution of Precision
DP
Departure Procedure
DPRT departure
DR
dead reckoning
DSBL disabled
DTK
Desired Track
E
ECU
Efficiency

empty, east
Engine Control Unit
A measure of fuel consumption,
expressed in distance per unit of fuel
EGNOS
European Geostationary Navigation
Overlay Service
EGT
Exhaust Gas Temperature
EIS
Engine Indication System
ELEV elevation

594

ELEV elevator
EMERGCY emergency
EMI
Electromagnetic Interference
ENDUR endurance
Endurance
Flight endurance, or total possible
flight time based on available fuel on
board
ENG engine
ENGD engaged
ENR enroute
Enroute Safe Altitude The recommended minimum altitude
within ten miles left or right of the
desired course on an active flight
plan or direct-to
EPE
Estimated Position Error
EPU
Estimated Position Uncertainty
ERR error
ESA
Enroute Safe Altitude
ESP
Electronic Stability and Protection
Estimated Position Error A measure of horizontal GPS position
error derived by satellite geometry
conditions and other factors
Estimated Time of Arrival The estimated time at which the
aircraft should reach the destination
waypoint, based upon current speed
and track
Estimated Time Enroute The estimated time it takes to reach
the destination waypoint from the
present position, based upon current
ground speed
ETA
Estimated Time of Arrival
ETE
Estimated Time Enroute
EXPIRD expired
ºF
degrees Fahrenheit
FA
Course From Fix to Altitude
FAA
Federal Aviation Administration
FADEC
Full Authority Digital Engine Control
FAF
Final Approach Fix
FAIL failure
FC
Course From Fix to Distance
FCC
Federal Communication Commission
FCST forecast
FD
Course From Fix to DME Distance
FD
flight director
FDE
Fault Detection and Exclusion
FFLOW
fuel flow
FIS-B
Flight Information ServicesBroadcast
FISDL
Flight Information Service Data Link
FL
flight level

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

APPENDIX C
FLC
FM

Flight Level Change
Course From Fix to Manual
Termination
FMS
Flight Management System
FOB
Fuel On Board
FPL
flight plan
fpm
feet per minute
FREQ frequency
FRZ freezing
FSS
Flight Service Station
ft foot/feet
Fuel Flow
The fuel flow rate, expressed in units
of fuel per hour
Fuel On Board
The total amount of usable fuel on
board the aircraft
G/S, GS
glideslope
GA go-around
gal, gl
gallon(s)
GBOX gearbox
GDC
Garmin Air Data Computer
GDL
Garmin Satellite Data Link
GDU
Garmin Display Unit
GEA
Garmin Engine/Airframe Unit
GCS
Ground Clutter Suppression
GEO geographic
GFC
Garmin Flight Control
GIA
Garmin Integrated Avionics Unit
GLS
Global Navigation Satellite Landing
System
GMA
Garmin Audio Panel System
GMT
Greenwich Mean Time
GMU
Garmin Magnetometer Unit
GND ground
gph
gallons per hour
GPS
Global Positioning System
Grid MORA
Grid Minimum Off-Route Altitude;
one degree latitude by one degree
longitude in size and clears the
highest elevation reference point in
the grid by 1000 feet for all areas of
the grid
Groundspeed
The velocity the aircraft is travelling
relative to a ground position
Ground Track
see Track
GRS
Garmin Reference System
GS
Ground speed
GTC
Garmin Touchscreen Controller
GTX
Garmin Transponder

190-01537-00 Rev. B

HA
Hold Terminating at Altitude
HDG heading
Heading
The direction an aircraft is pointed,
based upon indications from a
magnetic compass or a properly set
directional gyro
HF
Hold Terminating at Fix
HFOM
Horizontal Figure of Merit
Hg mercury
HI high
HI SENS
High Sensitivity
HM
Hold with Manual Termination
Horizontal Figure of Merit A measure of the uncertainty in the
aircraft’s horizontal position
hPa hectopascal
HPL
Horizontal Protection Level
hr hour
HSDB
High-Speed Data Bus
HSI
Horizontal Situation Indicator
HT heat
HUL
Horizontal Uncertainty Level
Hz Hertz
I
Inner Marker
IAF
Initial Approach Fix
IAT
Indicated Air Temperature
IAU
Integrated Avionics Unit
ICAO
International Civil Aviation
Organization
ICS
Intercom System
ID
Identification/Morse Code Identifier
IDENT, IDNT
identification
IF
Initial Fix
IFR
Instrument Flight Rules
IG
Imperial gallon
ILS
Instrument Landing System
IMC
Instrument Meteorological
Conditions
in inch
INACTV inactive
INC FUEL
increase fuel
IND indicated
Indicated
Information provided by properly
calibrated and set instrumentation
on the aircraft panel
INFO information
in HG
inches of mercury
INT intersection(s)
INTEG
integrity (RAIM unavailable)
IrDA, IRDA
Infrared Data Association

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

595

APPENDIX C
KEYSTK
key stuck
kg kilogram
kHz kilohertz
km kilometer
kt knot
L
left, left runway
LAT latitude
LBL label
lb pound
LCD
Liquid Crystal Display
LCL local
LED
Light Emitting Diode
Left Over Fuel On Board The amount of fuel remaining on
board after the completion of one or
more legs of a flight plan or directto
Left Over Fuel Reserve The amount of flight time remaining,
based on the amount of fuel on
board after the completion of one or
more legs of a flight plan or directto, and a known consumption rate
Leg
The portion of a flight plan between
two waypoints
LIFR
Low Instrument Flight Rules
LNAV
Lateral Navigation
LO low
LOC localizer
LOI
loss of integrity (GPS)
LON longitude
LPV
Localizer Performance with Vertical
guidance
LRU
Line Replacement Unit
LT left
LTNG lightning
LVL level
M
Middle Marker
m meter
MAG Magnetic
MAG VAR
Magnetic Variation
MAHP
Missed Approach Hold Point
MAN IN
manifold pressure (inches Hg)
MAN SQ
Manual Squelch
MAP
Missed Approach Point
MASQ
Master Avionics Squelch
MAX maximum
MAXSPD
maximum speed (overspeed)
MDA
barometric minimum descent
altitude

596

MET
manual electric trim
METAR
Meteorological Aviation Routine
MEPT
manual electric pitch trim
MFD
Multi Function Display
MFW
Multi Function Window
MGRS
Military Grid Reference System
MHz megahertz
MIC microphone
MIN minimum
Minimum Safe Altitude Uses Grid MORAs to determine a
safe altitude within ten miles of the
aircraft present position
MKR
marker beacon
MOA
Military Operations Area
MOV movement
mpm
meters per minute
MSA
Minimum Safe Altitude
MSAS
Multi-functional Satellite
Augmentation System
MSG message
MSL
Mean Sea Level
MT meter
mV millivolt(s)
MVFR
Marginal Visual Flight Rules
N north
NAV navigation
NAVAID
NAVigation AID
NDB
Non-directional Beacon
NEXRAD
Next Generation Radar
nm
nautical mile(s)
NPT
NRST nearest
O
Outer Marker
OAT
Outside Air Temperature
OBS
Omni Bearing Selector
OFST offset
OXY oxygen
P ALT
pressure altitude
PA
Passenger Address
PA
Proximity Advisory
PASS passenger(s)
PC
personal computer
PFD
Primary Flight Display
PI
Procedure Turn to Course Intercept
PIT, PTCH
pitch
POSN position
PPM
parts per million

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

APPENDIX C
P. POS
Present Position
PRES, PRESS
pressure
PROC
procedure(s), procedure turn
psi
pounds per square inch
PT
Procedure Turn
PTK
parallel track
PTT Push-to-Talk
PWR power
QTY quantity
R
right, right runway
RAD radial
RAIM
Receiver Autonomous Integrity
Monitoring
RAM
random access memory
REF reference
REM
remaining (fuel remaining)
REQ required
RES
reserve (fuel reserve entered by
pilot)
REV
reverse, revision, revise
RF
Constant Radius Turn to Fix
RMI
Radio Magnetic Indicator
RMT remote
RNG range
RNWY runway
ROL roll
ROM
read only memory
rpm
revolutions per minute
RST FUEL
reset fuel
RSV
reserve (fuel reserve entered by
pilot)
RT right
RVRSNRY reversionary
RX receive
S south
SA
Selective Availability
SAT
Static Air Temperature
SBAS
Satellite-Based Augmentation
System
SCIT
Storm Cell Identification and
Tracking
SD
Secure Digital
sec second(s)
SEL, SLCT
select
SELCAL
Selective Calling
SFC surface

190-01537-00 Rev. B

SIAP

Standard Instrument Approach
Procedures
SID
Standard Instrument Departure
SIGMET
Significant Meteorological
Information
Sim simulator
SLP/SKD slip/skid
SMBL symbol
SPD speed
SPI
Special Position Identification
SPKR speaker
SQ squelch
SRVC, SVC
service
STAL stall
STAR
Standard Terminal Arrival Route
STATS statistics
STBY standby
STD standard
STRMSCP Stormscope
SUA
Special Use Airspace
SUSP suspend
SVS
Synthetic Vision System
SW software
SYS system
T true
TA
Traffic Advisory
TACAN
Tactical Air Navigation System
TAF
Terminal Aerodrome Forecast
TAS
True Airspeed
TAS
Traffic Advisory System
TAT
Total Air Temperature
TAWS
Terrain Awareness and Warning System
TCA
Terminal Control Area
TCAS
Traffic Collision Avoidance System
TEL telephone
TEMP temperature
TERM terminal
TF
Track Between Two Fixes
TFR
Temporary Flight Restriction
T HDG
True Heading
TIS
Traffic Information System
TIT
Turbine Inlet Temperature
TKE
Track Angle Error
TMA
Terminal Maneuvering Area
TMR/REF Timer/Reference
TOLD
Takeoff and Landing Data
Topo topographic

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

597

APPENDIX C
Track

Direction of aircraft movement relative
to a ground position; also ‘Ground
Track’
Track Angle Error
The angle difference between the
desired track and the current track
TRG target
TRK track
TRSA
Terminal Radar Service Area
TRUNC truncated
TTL total
TURN
procedure turn
TX transmit
UNAVAIL unavailable
USR user
UTC
Coordinated Universal Time
UTM/UPS
UniversalTransverse Mercator/ Universal
Polar Stereographic Grid

VS
VSI
VSR
VTF

vertical speed
Vertical Speed Indicator
Vertical Speed Required
vector to final

W
watt(s), west
WAAS
Wide Area Augmentation System
WGS-84
World Geodetic System - 1984
WPT waypoint(s)
WW
world wide
WX weather
XFER, XFR
transfer
XPDR transponder
XTALK cross-talk
XTK cross-track

V, Vspeed
velocity (airspeed)
VA
Heading Vector to Altitude
VAPP
VOR approach
VAR variation
VD
Heading Vector to DME Distance
Vdc
volts, direct current
VERT vertical
Vertical Figure of Merit A measure of the uncertainty in the
aircraft’s vertical position
Vertical Speed Required The vertical speed necessary to
descend/climb from a current
position and altitude to a defined
target position and altitude, based
upon current groundspeed
VFOM
Vertical Figure of Merit
VFR
Visual Flight Rules
VHF
Very High Frequency
VI
Heading Vector to Intercept
VLOC
VOR/Localizer Receiver
VM
Heading Vector to Manual Termination
VMC
Visual Meteorological Conditions
VNAV, VNV
vertical navigation
VOL volume
VOR
VHF Omni-directional Range
VORTAC
very high frequency omnidirectional
range station and tactical air
navigation
VPL
Vertical Protection Level
VPROF
VNV profile, vertical profile
VPTH
VNV path, vertical path
VR
Heading Vector to Radial

598

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

APPENDIX D

FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS
If a particular aspect of the Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 operational capability is not addressed by these
commonly asked questions or in the index, contact Garmin (see the copyright page or back cover for contact
information) or a Garmin-authorized dealer. Garmin is dedicated to supporting its products and customers.

What is SBAS?
The Satellite Based Augmentation System (SBAS) uses a system of ground stations to correct any GPS signal
errors. These ground stations correct for errors caused by ionospheric disturbances, timing, and satellite
orbit errors. It also provides vital integrity information regarding the health of each GPS satellite. The signal
correction is then broadcast through geostationary satellites. This correction information can then be received
by any SBAS-enabled GPS receiver.
SBAS is designed to provide the additional accuracy, availability, and integrity necessary to enable users to rely
on GPS for all phases of flight.
There are several SBAS systems serving different parts of the world. The Wide Area Augmentation System
(WAAS) is currently available in the United States, including Alaska and Hawaii. The European Geostationary
Navigation Overlay Service (EGNOS) offers coverage of Europe, parts of the middle east and northern Africa. The
Multi-functional Satellite Augmentation System (MSAS) covers mainly Japan and parts of northern Australia.

How does SBAS affect approach operations?
Both LNAV/VNAV and LPV approaches use the accuracy of SBAS to include vertical (glide path) guidance
capability. The additional accuracy and vertical guidance capability allows improved instrument approaches to
an expanded number of airports throughout the U.S.
The implementation of LPV approaches further improves precision approach capabilities. LPV approaches
are designed to make full use of the improved GPS signal from the SBAS. This approach combines the LNAV/
VNAV vertical accuracy with lateral guidance similar to the typical Instrument Landing System (ILS). LPV
approaches allow lower approach minimums.

What is RAIM and how does it affect approach operations?
RAIM is an acronym for Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring. RAIM is a GPS receiver function that
performs the following functions:
• Monitors and verifies integrity and geometry of tracked GPS satellites
• Notifies the pilot when satellite conditions do not provide the necessary coverage to support a certain phase
of flight
• Predicts satellite coverage of a destination area to determine whether the number of available satellites is
sufficient to satisfy requirements
NOTE: If RAIM is not predicted to be available for the final approach course, the approach does not become

active, as indicated by the “RAIM not available from FAF to MAP” message and the LOI annunciation
flagging on the HSI.

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

599

APPENDIX D
For RAIM to work correctly, the GPS receiver must track at least five satellites. A minimum of six satellites is
required to allow RAIM to eliminate a single corrupt satellite from the navigation solution.
RAIM ensures that satellite geometry allows for a navigation solution calculation within a specified protection
limit (2.0 nm for oceanic and en route, 1.0 nm for terminal, and 0.3 nm for non-precision approaches). The
system monitors RAIM and issues an alert message when RAIM is not available (see Appendix A). Without
RAIM, GPS position accuracy cannot be monitored. If RAIM is not available when crossing the FAF, the pilot
must fly the missed approach procedure.

Why might there be no approaches available for a flight plan?
Approaches are available for the final destination airport in a flight plan or as a direct-to (keep in mind some
VOR/VORTAC identifiers are similar to airport identifiers). If a destination airport does not have a published
approach, the system indicates “NONE” for the available procedures.

What happens when an approach is selected? Can a flight plan with an approach, a departure, or an
arrival be stored?
When an approach, departure, or arrival is loaded into the active flight plan, a set of approach, departure,
or arrival waypoints is inserted into the flight plan, along with a header line showing the title of the selected
instrument procedure. The original enroute portion of the flight plan remains active, unless the instrument
procedure is activated. This may be done either when the procedure is loaded or at a later time.
Flight plans can also be stored with an approach, a departure, or an arrival. Note the active flight plan is
erased when the system is turned off. Also, the active flight plan is overwritten when another flight plan is
activated. When storing flight plans with an approach, a departure, or an arrival, the system uses the waypoint
information from the current database to define the waypoints. If the database is changed or updated, the
system automatically updates the information, provided the procedure has not been modified. Should an
approach, departure, or arrival procedure no longer be available, the flight plan becomes locked until the
procedure is deleted from the flight plan.

Can “slant Golf” (“/G”) be filed using the Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300?
“/G” may be filed for a flight plan. GPS approaches are not to be flown with an expired database. See
the approved Airplane Flight Manual (AFM) as well as the Aeronautical Information Manual (AIM) for more
information.

What does the OBS Softkey do?
The OBS Softkey is used to select manual sequencing of waypoints. Activating OBS mode sets the current
active-to waypoint as the primary navigation reference and prevents the system from sequencing to the next
waypoint in a flight plan. When OBS mode is cancelled, automatic waypoint sequencing is continued, and
the system automatically activates the next waypoint in the flight plan once the aircraft has crossed the present
active waypoint.

600

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

APPENDIX D
Normal (OBS not activated)
• Automatic sequencing of waypoints

OBS
• Manual sequencing - ‘holds’ on selected
waypoint

• Manual course change on HSI not possible

• Manually select course to waypoint from
HSI

• Always navigates ‘TO’ the active waypoint

• Indicates ‘TO’ or ‘FROM’ waypoint

• Must be in this mode for final approach
course

• Cannot be set for final approach course or
published holding patterns

Why might the Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 not automatically sequence to the next waypoint?
The system only sequences flight plan waypoints when automatic sequencing is enabled (i.e., no ‘OBS’ or
‘SUSP’ annunciation on the HSI). For automatic sequencing to occur, the aircraft must also cross the bisector of
the turn being navigated. The bisector is a line passing through the waypoint common to two flight plan legs
at an equal angle from each leg.

When does turn anticipation begin?
The system smooths adjacent leg transitions based on a normal 15° bank angle (with the ability to roll up to
30°) and provides three pilot cues for turn anticipation:
• A waypoint alert (‘Next DTK ###° in # seconds’ or ‘Next HDG ###° in # seconds’) appears on the PFD 10
seconds before the turn point and flashes as it counts down to zero.
• A flashing turn advisory (‘Turn [right/left] to ###° in # seconds’) appears on the PFD 10 seconds before the
turn and flashes as it counts down to zero. ‘Turn [right/left] to ###° now’ or ‘Next [DTK/HDG] to ###° now’
is displayed when the pilot is to begin the turn and the HSI (GPS mode) automatically sequences to the next
DTK or HDG value.
• The To/From indicator on the HSI flips momentarily to indicate the midpoint of the turn has been crossed.

When does the CDI scale change?
Once a departure is activated, the system Course Deviation Indicator (CDI) full scale deflection is set to 0.3
nm. The CDI scale changes to 1.0 nm (terminal mode) then ramps up to 2.0 nm (enroute mode) at 30 nm
from the departure airport. When 31 nm from the destination, the CDI scale smoothly transition from 2.0 nm
back to 1.0 nm (terminal mode). At 2.0 nm before the FAF during an active approach, the CDI scale transitions
down further based on the type of approach activated (LNAV, LNAV/VNAV, LPV). When a missed approach is
activated, the CDI is set to 0.3 nm. See the Flight Instruments Section for more details on CDI scaling.

Why does the HSI not respond like a VOR when OBS mode is active?
Unlike a VOR, the CDI scale used on GPS equipment is based on the crosstrack distance to the desired
course, not on the angular relationship to the destination. Therefore, the CDI deflection on the GPS is constant
regardless of the distance to the destination and does not become less sensitive when further away from the
destination.

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

601

APPENDIX D
How do I activate a Missed Approach Procedure?
To comply with TSO specifications, the system does not automatically sequence past the MAP. The first
waypoint in the missed approach procedure becomes the active waypoint when the SUSP Button is selected
after crossing the MAP. All published missed approach procedures must be followed, as indicated on the
published approach.
To execute the missed approach procedure prior to the MAP (not recommended), touch the PROC Button on
the Home Screen or the Active Flight Plan Screen. Touch the Activate Missed Approach Button to activate
the missed approach portion of the procedure.

After a missed approach, how can the same approach be re-selected? How can a new approach be
activated?
NOTE: Do not attempt to reactivate the current approach prior to crossing the missed approach point

(MAP). If an attempt to do so is made, an alert message “Are you sure you want to discontinue the current
approach?” appears. The system directs the pilot back to the transition waypoint and does not take into
consideration any missed approach procedures, if the current approach is reactivated.
After flying the missed approach procedure, the pilot may reactivate the same approach for another attempt
by touching the PROC Button on the Home Screen, followed by the Activate Approach Button. The system
provides navigation along the desired course to the waypoint and rejoins the approach in sequence from that
point.
To activate a new approach for the same airport, select the new procedure by touching the PROC Button,
then touch the Approach Button to access the Approach Selection Screen. Then touch the Approach Button.
The Touchscreen Controller displays a list of approaches as buttons. Scroll as needed and touch the desired
approach button, then touch a transition button. The Touchscreen Controller returns to the Approach Selection
Screen. To activate the selected approach, touch the Load & Activate Button.
To activate a new approach to a different airport, touch the Direct To Button to access the Direct To Screen.
Then touch the waypoint point and enter the desired airport using the keypad or large and small right knobs.
Touch the Enter Button or push the Right Knob to accept the selected airport, then follow the steps in the
preceding paragraph to select an approach for the new airport.

602

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

APPENDIX E

MAP SYMBOLS
AIRPORTS

BASEMAP
Item

Item

Symbol

Unknown Airport

Interstate Highway

Non-towered, Non-serviced Airport

State Highway

Symbol

US Highway

Towered, Non-serviced Airport

National Highway

Non-towered, Serviced Airport

City
Towered, Serviced Airport
State/Province Border
Restricted (Private) Airport

International Border

Heliport

Road
Railroad

NAVAIDS
Item

Symbol

Latitude/Longitude

Intersection
LOM (compass locator at outer marker)

AIRSPACE BOUNDARIES

VOR

Item
ICAO Control Area
Class B Airspace

VOR/DME

Mode C Tower Area

NDB (non-directional radio beacon)

VOR/ILS
VORTAC
TACAN

Symbol

Warning Area Prohibited Area
Alert Area
Restricted Area
Caution Area Training Area
Danger Area
Unknown Area
Class C
Terminal Radar Service Area
Mode C Area
Military Operations Area (MOA)

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

603

APPENDIX E
HAZARD AVOIDANCE FEATURES
Feature

TRAFFIC

Symbol

Item

Terrain Proximity/TAWS display enabled

Non-threat Traffic

Traffic display enabled

Proximity Advisory

NEXRAD display enabled

Traffic Advisory, Out of Range

Cloud Top display enabled

Symbol

Traffic Advisory

Echo Top display enabled

MISCELLANEOUS

XM Lightning display enabled

Item
Cell Movement display enabled

Symbol

ARTCC Frequency or FSS Frequency

SIGMETs/AIRMETs display enabled
METARs display enabled

Map Pointer (when panning)
Elevation Pointer
(on Topography Scale when panning)

City Forecast display enabled
Surface Analysis display enabled

Measuring Pointer
Wind Vector

Freezing Levels display enabled
Winds Aloft display enabled

Overzoom Indicator

County Warnings display enabled

User Waypoint

Cyclone Warnings display enabled

Vertical Navigation Along Track Waypoint

Loss of hazard avoidance feature
(loss of GPS position)

Parallel Track Waypoint
Unanchored Flight Path Waypoint
Top of Descent (TOD)
Bottom of Descent (BOD)
Navigating using Dead Reckoning

604

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

APPENDIX E
OBSTACLE DATABASE
Unlighted Obstacle
Lighted Obstacle
< 1000’ AGL > 1000’ AGL < 1000’ AGL > 1000’ AGL

Obstacle Location
Red obstacle is above or within 100 ft
below the aircraft altitude
Yellow obstacle is between 100 ft and
1000 ft below the aircraft altitude
Gray obstacle is more than 1000 ft
below aircraft altitude

Table F-1 Obstacle Colors

TAWS-A COLORS AND SYMBOLS

Figure 6-138 Terrain Altitude/Color Correlation for TAWS-A

Figure F-2 TAWS-A Potential Impact Points

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

605

APPENDIX E

Blank Page

606

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

INDEX
A
AAirport Directory----------------------------------- 587, 588
Abnormal engine operations------------------------------129
Activate a Flight Plan---------------------------------------274
Active database-------------------------------------- 582, 583
Active frequency
ADF---------------------------------------------------------159
AC-U-KWIK------------------------------------------- 587, 588
ADF
ADF mode------------------------------------------ 159, 162
ANT mode-------------------------------------------------162
Volume-----------------------------------------------------159
ADF/BFO-----------------------------------------------------162
ADF frequency tuning--------------------------------------160
Advisories, CAS--------------------------------------- 555–556
AFCS status box---------------------------------------------- 62
AHRS---------------------------------------- 36, 569, 570, 574
Airborne Color Weather Radar----------------------------373
Aircraft symbol----------------------------------------------- 68
Air Data Computer-----------------------------------------559
Airport Directory--------------------------------------------588
Airport Hot Spots-------------------------------------------482
Airport Signs------------------------------------ 85, 86, 87, 93
Airspace Alerts----------------------------------------------247
Airspeed bug------------------------------------------------442
Airspeed Indicator------------------------------------------- 64
Airspeed Reference-------------------------62, 65, 444–445
Airspeed Reference Bug------------------------------------ 62
Alerts
Arrival------------------------------------------------------- 50
Audio voice------------------------------------------------ 50
Alerts, Aircraft-----------------------------------------------552
Along Track Offset----------------------------------- 278, 279
ALT------------------------------------------------------------338
Altimeter---------------------------------------------62, 69–70
Altimeter barometric setting------------------------------- 70
Altitude alerting---------------------------------------------101
Altitude capture---------------------------------------------449
Altitude constraints-----------------------------------------293
Altitude Hold Mode----------------------------------------441
Altitude Hold Mode (ALT)----------------------------------441
Altitude Reference------------------------------------------449
ANT/BFO-----------------------------------------------------162
Antenna stabilization------------------------------- 391, 392
Antenna tilt--------------------------------------------------387
AOPA-------------------------------------------------- 587, 588
AOPA airport directory-------------------------------------481
AOPA Airport Directory------------------------ 503, 504, 505
Approach-----------------------------------------------------600
Activating------------------------------------------ 303, 304
ILS----------------------------------------------------------473
Loading--------------------------------------------- 271, 303
Missed-----------------------------------------------------476

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Removing--------------------------------------------------304
WAAS------------------------------------------------------474
Approach Mode, AFCS------------------------------ 473, 474
Approach Mode (GPS, VAPP, LOC)-----------------------459
Arrival procedure------------------ 254, 269, 325, 327, 337
Attitude and Heading Reference System (AHRS)-1, 4, 36–37
Attitude & Heading Reference System-------------------559
Attitude indicator------------------------------ 62, 66, 66–67
Attitude Indicator-------------------------------------------421
Audio Controller fail-safe operation---------------------188
Audio controls
SPKR-------------------------------------------------------169
Aural alerts--------------------------------------------------562
Automatic Flight Control System (AFCS)------ 2, 431–480
Alerts and annunciations------------------------ 478–479
Controls-------------------------------------------- 433–434
Example procedures------------------------------ 464–471
Automatic squelch------------------------------------------147
Automatic Thrust Reserve (ATR)------------------- 112–113
Autopilot----------------------------------------431, 461–463
Autopilot Disconnect---------------------------------------434
Auto-tuning--------------------------------------------------157
Auto Zoom---------------------------------------------------196
Aviation Symbols------------------------------------- 207, 254

B
Barometric Altimeter Setting------------------------------- 62
Barometric setting, Altimeter------------------------------- 70
Basic Empty Weight----------------------------------------307
Basic Operating Weight------------------------------------307
Battery indications----------------------------------- 111, 115
Bearing information windows----------------------------- 63
Bearing pointer----------------------------------------------- 77
Bearing source----------------------------------------------- 77

C
Calibrated Airspeed-----------------------------------------312
Cargo---------------------------------------------------------308
CAS Window-------------------------------------------------- 63
Cautions, CAS---------------------------------------- 553–555
CDI---------------------------------- 300, 316, 327, 336, 340
Chart Not Available---------------------------------- 489, 498
ChartView--------------------------------------- 481, 486, 492
ChartView database----------------------------------------493
Checklists--------------------------------------------- 546–547
CLD TOP Softkey--------------------------------------------359
Closest Point-------------------------------------------------285
COM frequency box--------------------------------- 136, 149
COM Frequency Box----------------------------------------- 62
COM Frequency Tuning------------------------------------139
Command Bars----------------------------------------------437
Comparator--------------------------------------------------558
COM tuning failure-----------------------------------------187

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

I-1

INDEX
Controls
PFD/MFD--------------------------------------------------6–7
Control Wheel Steering (CWS)--------------------- 434, 462
Copy a Flight Plan------------------------------------------275
Course deviation indicator (CDI)-------------------------- 62
Course Deviation Indicator (CDI)--------------------- 78–82
Changing scale-------------------------------------------601
Course To Altitude------------------------------------------306
Crew Alerting System (CAS)------------------------ 128–132
Messages------------------------------------------- 128–132
Cruise Speed Control (CSC)-------------------------------115

D
Data Bar fields, MFD------------------------------------49, 50
Databases-------------------------------------------------4, 581
Database Synchronization-------------------------- 581, 586
Data entry------------------------------------------------ 30–31
Data Link Receiver--------------------2, 481, 530, 549, 550
Datalink receiver troubleshooting------------------------549
Data Logging----------------------------------------- 481, 544
Day/Night views-------------------------------------- 489, 498
Day view--------------------- 489, 490, 491, 498, 499, 500
DB Mismatch----------------------------------------- 581, 585
Dead Reckoning---------------------------------------------105
Decision Height---------------------------------------------- 63
Decision Height (DH)---------------------------------------102
Declutter, display--------------------------------------------106
Delete Flight Plans------------------------------------------275
Density Altitude---------------------------------------------314
Departure procedure--------------------267, 281, 296, 298
Departure Time----------------------------------------------312
Dilution of Precision (DOP)--------------------------------- 39
Direct-to--------- 248, 250, 251, 252, 289, 290, 327, 340
Display controls------------------------------------------- 6–13
DME
HOLD mode-----------------------------------------------163
NAV1 mode-----------------------------------------------163
NAV2 mode-----------------------------------------------163
Tuning mode--------------------------------------- 159, 163
DME information--------------------------------------------- 77
Dual navigation database---------------------------------583

E
ECHO TOP Softkey------------------------------------------358
Electrical indications--------------------------------- 115, 123
Electronic checklists-------------------- 481–482, 546, 547
Emergency frequency---------------------------------------187
Engine Airframe Unit------------------------------------------ 1
Engine failure------------------------------------------------129
Engine fire---------------------------------------------------129
Engine Indication System (EIS)--------------------- 111–118
Engine maintenance----------------------------------------127
Engine rotation speeds----------------------------- 111, 113

I-2

Entering Flight ID-------------------------------------------164
Entertainment audio---------------------------------------534
Entertainment inputs---------------------------------------179
Environmental Control System (ECS)------------- 121–122
Estimated Landing Fuel----------------------------- 309, 310
Estimated Position Error (EPE)----------------------------- 39
Excess Fuel Weight---------------------------- 309, 310, 311
Excessive Descent Rate Alert------------------------------408

F
Fan speed----------------------------------------------------388
Field of view------------------------------85, 89, 90, 96, 217
Field of View (SVS)------------------------------------------217
Flap Indicator----------------------------------------- 111, 118
Flight director-----------------------------------431, 435–436
Pitch modes---------------------------------------- 439–445
Roll modes----------------------------------------- 454–456
Switching------------------------------------------- 432, 436
Flight ID------------------------------------------------------168
Flight instruments--------------------------------------- 61–76
Flight Level Change Mode---------------------------------444
Flight Level Change Mode (FLC)------------------ 469, 471
Flight Path Marker----------------------------- 85, 87, 91, 92
Flight plan
Closest point to reference------------------------------285
Storing-----------------------------------------------------600
Flight plan data fields:-------------------------------------278
Flight plan import/export messages---------------------576
Flight timer------------------------------------------------55, 56
FliteCharts®----------------------- 481, 495, 500, 501, 502
FliteCharts expiration--------------------------------------501
FPA----------------------------------------------------- 292, 333
FPM--------------------------------------------------------91, 92
Frequency
Nearest----------------------------------------------------244
Frequency spacing------------------------------------------146
Frequently asked questions--------------------------------599
Fuel
Efficiency--------------------------------------------------314
Endurance-------------------------------------------------314
Remaining-------------------------------------------------314
Required---------------------------------------------------314
Fuel indications-------------------------------- 111, 115, 124
Fuel on Board---------------------------------------- 309, 314
Fuel Statistics------------------------------------------------314
Full Mode-------------------6, 7, 27, 28, 29, 30, 33, 34, 35

G
Garmin Flight Data Services-------------------------------481
Garmin SVT™------------------------------------------ 85, 481
GFC 700------------------------------------------------------431
Glidepath-----------------------------------------------------338
Glidepath indicator------------------------------------------ 63

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

INDEX
Glidepath Indicator------------------------------------------ 72
Glidepath Mode (GP)-------------------------- 450, 459, 474
Glideslope----------------------------------------------------338
Glideslope Indicator----------------------------------------- 72
Glideslope Mode (GS)------------------------------- 452, 473
Global Positioning System (GPS)
Navigation----------------------------------------- 248–344
Receiver information--------------------------------- 38–40
Go Around Mode-------------------------------------------453
Go Around Mode (GA)------------------------------ 476–477
GTX 33 Transponder----------------------------------------164

H
Heading Bug-------------------------------------------------- 62
Heading indicator-------------------------------------------- 62
Heading Select Mode (HDG)----------------------- 456, 465
HI SENS-------------------------------------------------------159
Horizon Heading------------------------------- 85, 86, 87, 92
Horizontal scan--------------------------------------- 386, 387
Horizontal situation indicator (HSI)----------------------- 62
Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI)------------------ 74–84
HSI double green arrow------------------------------------151
HSI magenta arrow-----------------------------------------151
HSI single green arrow-------------------------------------151

I
IDENT function----------------------------------------------168
ID indicator--------------------------------------------------156
ILS approach-------------------------------------------------473
Indicated airspeed------------------------------------------- 64
Indicated Altitude-------------------------------------------312
Inset map----------------------------------------------------- 63
Integrated Avionics Unit (IAU)------------------------------- 1
Intersection
Information---------------------------------------- 227–228
Interstage Turbine Temperature (ITT)-------------- 111, 129
Inverting a flight plan--------------------------------------274
IOI------------------------------------------------------ 405, 578
Iridium-------------------------------------506, 510, 511, 512
Iridium satellite network---------------------- 506, 510, 518

J
Jeppesen aviation database-------------------------------581

L
Landing Field Elevation (LFE)-----------------------------116
Landing gear status--------------------------------- 111, 117
Land Symbols------------------------------------------------206
LNAV----------------------------------------------------------316
Log File-------------------------------------------------------545
LO SENS------------------------------------------------------159
Low Altitude Annunciation--------------------------------102
Low speed data---------------------------------------------506

190-01537-00 Rev. B

LPV----------------------------------------------------- 316, 340
LPV approach------------------------------------------------464

M
Mach number------------------------------------------------ 64
Mach number indicator------------------------------------- 62
Magnetometer----------------------------------------------- 37
Map Panning------------------------------------------------198
Map symbols------------------------------------------------603
Marker beacon----------------------------------------------158
Marker Beacon Annunciations----------------------------100
Measurement units, changing displayed-------------42, 45
Message advisories----------------------563, 569, 573, 574
Metric display, Altimeter------------------------------- 69–70
MFD Data Bar fields-------------------------------------49, 50
MFD/PFD Control Unit--------------------------------- 30–31
Minimum Anti-Ice N1 Bug-------------------- 113, 114, 126
Minimum Descent Altitude--------------------------------- 63
Minimum Descent Altitude (MDA)-----------------------102
MISCOMP----------------------------------------------------558
Missed Approach----------------- 254, 305, 316, 340, 476
Mode S-------------------------------------------------------164
Mode S Transponder
TCAS II Transponder Controls--------------------------164
TCAS II Transponder Mode Selection------------------165
Morse code identifier---------------------------------------156
Multi Function Display (MFD)
Controls---------------------------------------------------6–7
Music 1-------------------------------------------------------179

N
N1 gauge---------------------------------------113–114, 129
N1 Transient Limit-------------------------------------------113
N2 indications-----------------------------------------------113
National Weather Service----------------------------------368
NAV1 audio--------------------------------------------------152
NAV2 audio--------------------------------------------------152
NAV frequency box-----------------------------------------133
Navigation database---------------------------------------293
Navigation Map---------------------------------------------251
Navigation Mode, AFCS----------------------------- 467–468
Navigation mode selection--------------------------------151
Navigation Mode (VOR, GPS, LOC, BC)-----------------457
Navigation source-------------------------------------- 78–80
Nav radio selection-----------------------------------------151
NAV Receiver Tuning---------------------------------------152
Nearest
Airports--------------------------------------------- 244–247
VOR------------------------------------------------- 244–245
nearest airport--------------------- 225, 229, 232, 235, 239
Nearest Airport-------------- 225, 226, 229, 232, 235, 239
Minimum Runway Length----------------------- 225, 226
Surface Matching----------------------------------------226

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

I-3

INDEX
NEXRAD Softkey--------------------------------------------355
Night view-------------------------------------------- 489, 498
NO COMP----------------------------------------------------558
Non-path descent------------------------------448, 471–472
Normal display operation----------------------------------- 32
NOTAMs------------------------------------------------------486

RVSI---------------------------------------------------- 334, 335
RX Indicator-------------------------------------------------138

SafeTaxi®-------------------------- 481, 482, 483, 484, 485
SafeTaxi database-------------------------------------------485
Satellite Radio---------------------------------- 530, 531, 532
O
SBAS----------------------------------------------------------599
OBS Mode----------------------------------------------- 83–84
Scheduler----------------------------------------481–482, 535
Obstacles---------------------------------------------- 565, 566
SD card-------------------------------------------------------- 59
Odometer-------------------------------------------------55, 57
Sector scan---------------------------------------------------390
Oil, engine-------------------------------------------- 111, 113
Secure Digital (SD) card------------------------------------581
Omni Bearing Selector (OBS)----------------------- 600–601
Selected Altitude------- 62, 101, 443, 444, 445, 449, 464
Other Statistics--------------------------------------- 312, 314
Selected altitude bug---------------------------------------- 62
Outside Air Temperature (OAT)---------------------------112
Selected Altitude Capture Mode------------------- 441, 443
Selected Altitude Capture Mode (ALTS)-----------------446
P
Selected Altitude Intercept Arc----------------------------218
Selected course----------------------------------------------- 63
Parallel Track------------------------------------------ 279, 281
Selected Course-------------------------------------- 457, 460
Passenger address------------------------------------------176
Selected heading-----------------------------------------63, 74
Passenger(s)-------------------------------------------------308
Selected Heading-------------------------------------------433
PA system----------------------------------------------------176
Selecting a COM radio------------------------------ 136, 149
Pathways-------------------------------86, 87, 88, 89, 90, 91
Sensor--------------------------------------------------------559
PFD mode switch-------------------------------------------- 32
Sequencing, automatic-------------------------------------601
Pilot and Stores Weight------------------------------------307
Sequencing waypoints, suspend--------------------------- 84
Pitch Hold Mode (PIT)--------------------------------------440
Servos------------------------------------------------------------ 2
Pitch indication----------------------------------------------- 66
Servos, AFCS-------------------------------------------------431
Pitch modes, flight director------------------------- 439–445
Simultaneous COM Operation----------------------------178
Pitch Reference----------------------------------------------440
SiriusXM
Power-up, system---------------------------------------------- 4
Radio-------------------------------------------------------346
Pressure, oil------------------------------------------- 111, 113
Receiver troubleshooting-------------------------------549
Pressurization-----------------------------------------------116
SiriusXM Weather----------------------------------------346
Primary Flight Display (PFD)
NEXRAD---------------------------------------------------355
Controls---------------------------------------------------6–7
XM Satellite Weather
Procedure examples, AFCS------------------------- 464–471
Activating-------------------------------------------------346
SiriusXM radio entertainment-----------------------------179
R
SiriusXM radio volume-------------------------------------534
RA-------------------------------------------------------------420
SiriusXM Satellite Radio-------------------------------------- 2
Radar altitude-----------------------------------------------103
SiriusXM Weather
RAIM----------------------------------------------------------300
AIREPs-----------------------------------------------------372
Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring (RAIM)-4 0 – 4 1 ,
Icing--------------------------------------------------------370
599
PIREPs-----------------------------------------------------372
Removing Flight Plan Items-------------------------------276
Turbulence------------------------------------------ 370, 371
Required Vertical Speed------------------------------------334
Slip/Skid indicator----------------------------------------62, 67
Required Vertical Speed Indicator------------------------334
Softkeys------------------------------------------------------- 63
Reversionary Mode------------------------------------ 85, 107
Speaker-------------------------------------------------------169
Reversionary sensor----------------------------------------559
Speed brake status---------------------------------- 111, 117
Reversionary Sensor Window------------------------------ 63
Split Mode--------------------------6, 27, 28, 32, 33, 34, 35
ROC---------------------------------------------- 405, 577, 578
Standby frequency
Roll Hold Mode (ROL)--------------------------------------455
ADF---------------------------------------------------------159
Roll modes, flight director-------------------------- 454–457
Standby Navigation Database----------------------------583
Roll Reference-----------------------------------------------455
Static air temperature (SAT)----------------------------63, 97
Runway----------------------------------------------- 85, 93, 94
Stereo headsets---------------------------------------------169
Minimum length------------------------------------------- 45

I-4

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

INDEX
Stuck microphone-------------------------------------------187
Sunrise--------------------------------------------------------313
Sunset--------------------------------------------------------313
SVT------------------------------------------------------------575
SVT troubleshooting----------------------------------------107
Symbols, map------------------------------------------------603
Synoptics---------------------------------------------- 119–126
Synthetic vision (SVT)--------------------------------------- 85
System alerting----------------------------------------------100
System annunciations--------------------------------------560
System ID----------------------------------------------------506
System power-up---------------------------------------------- 4
System Status Page------------------------------------------ 52
System time--------------------------------------------------- 62

T
TA-------------------------------------------------------------420
Takeoff Mode------------------------------------------------453
TAS------------------------------------------------------------569
TAS Traffic
Non-Threat Traffic----------------------------------------419
PA----------------------------------------------------------419
Proximity Advisory---------------------------------------419
TAWS--------------------------------------101, 418, 577, 578
TAWS-A------------------------------------------------------578
TAWS Annunciation----------------------------------------- 63
TAWS-B-------------------------------------------------------399
TCAS II Traffic
Operation--------------------------------------------------425
TCAS II Alerts---------------------------------------------420
Telephone------------------------------------ 2, 481, 506, 510
Temperature, oil-------------------------------------- 111, 113
Temperature, Outside Air (OAT)---------------------------112
Terrain-------------------------------------405, 565, 577, 578
Color indications-----------------------------------------605
Terrain Awareness and Warning System-----------------399
Terrain Awareness and Warning System (TAWS)-------100
Text message----------------------------------------- 518, 523
Thrust rating-------------------------------------------------114
Timer
Flight-------------------------------------------------------- 58
Timer, PFD generic------------------------------------------- 55
TOD---------------------------------------------------- 333, 334
Top of Descent--------------------------------------- 333, 334
Total air temperature (TAT)-----------------------------62, 97
Track----------------------------------------------------------- 74
Track indicator--------------------------------------------62, 74
Traffic
Voice alerts------------------------------------------------100
Traffic annunciation----------------------------------- 63, 100
Traffic symbols------------------------------------------------ 92

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Transponder code entry------------------------------------166
Transponder data box--------------------------------------133
Transponder standby mode-------------------------------165
Transponder status box------------------------------------- 62
Trend Vector
Turn Rate--------------------------------------------------- 76
Trend vector, airspeed--------------------------------------- 64
Trim Indicator----------------------------------- 111, 118, 131
Trip Planning------------------------------307, 312, 313, 314
Trip Statistics------------------------------------------ 313, 314
True Airspeed------------------------------------------------314
True airspeed (TAS)------------------------------------------ 62
Turn anticipation--------------------------------------------601
Turn Rate Indicator--------------------------------------62, 76
TX indicator--------------------------------------------------138

U
Unable to display chart----------------------------- 489, 498
Updating Jeppesen databases----------------------------493

V
VDI----------------------------------------------------- 334, 335
Vertical deviation-------------------------------------------448
Vertical deviation guidance-------------------------------293
Vertical Deviation Indicator-------------------------------334
Vertical Deviation Indicator (VDI)-------------------------- 72
Vertical navigation------------------------------------------293
Direct-to---------------------------------------------------291
Vertical Navigation (VNV)
Flight control--------------------------------------- 445–449
Vertical Path Tracking Mode (VPTH)--------446–447, 470
Vertical speed guidance-----------------------------------293
Vertical Speed Indicator-------------------------- 62, 63, 421
Vertical speed indicator (VSI)------------------------------ 71
Vertical Speed Mode---------------------------------------443
VNV---------------------------------------------------- 333, 598
VNV guidance
Enabling---------------------------------------------------290
VNV indications, PFD---------------------------------------- 99
VNV Target Altitude--------------------------------- 446–449
VNV Target Altitude Capture Mode (ALTV)-------------449
Voltmeter, battery------------------------------------ 111, 115
Volume level
ADF---------------------------------------------------------159
VOR
Nearest--------------------------------------------- 244–245
VOR selection------------------------------------------------151
VSI-------------------------------------------------------------335
Vspeeds----------------------------------------------63, 65–66
VS TGT--------------------------------------------------------292

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

I-5

INDEX
W
WAAS--------------------------------------316, 464, 566, 599
WAAS precision approach---------------------------------474
WATCH-------------------------------------------------------392
Waypoint
Automatic sequencing----------------------------------601
Weather Attenuated Color Highlight--------------------392
Wi-Fi------------------------------------------ 2, 481, 506, 527
Wind--------------------------------------------------- 193, 215
Wind data----------------------------------------------------- 63
Wings level--------------------------------------------------455

Z
Zero Pitch Line-------------------------------------------87, 92
Zoom
Auto--------------------------------------------------------196

I-6

Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide

190-01537-00 Rev. B

Garmin International, Inc.
1200 East 151st Street
Olathe, KS 66062, U.S.A.
p:913.397.8200
f:913.397.8282
www.garmin.com

Garmin AT, Inc.
2345 Turner Road SE
Salem, OR 97302, U.S.A.
p:503.391.3411
f:503.364.2138

Garmin (Europe) Ltd.
Liberty House, Bulls Copse Road
Houndsdown Business Park
Southampton, SO40 9RB, U.K.
p:44/0870.8501241
f:44/0870.8501251

Garmin Corporation
No. 68, Jangshu 2nd Road
Shijr, Taipei County, Taiwan
p:886/02.2642.9199
f:886/02.2642.9099

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.6
Linearized                      : Yes
Create Date                     : 2013:03:13 11:36:57-05:00
Creator                         : Adobe InDesign CS6 (Windows)
Modify Date                     : 2013:03:18 08:09:13-05:00
Tagged PDF                      : No
XMP Toolkit                     : Adobe XMP Core 5.2-c001 63.139439, 2010/09/27-13:37:26
Metadata Date                   : 2013:03:18 08:09:13-05:00
Creator Tool                    : Adobe InDesign CS6 (Windows)
Version ID                      : 1
Instance ID                     : uuid:9aa02f1f-d9dd-4114-b87e-0d55d47398e4
Original Document ID            : adobe:docid:indd:003478a2-fcdf-11df-8355-f60fc831470b
Document ID                     : xmp.id:34334524FC8BE211BA10CF0D780068FC
Rendition Class                 : proof:pdf
Derived From Instance ID        : xmp.iid:30334524FC8BE211BA10CF0D780068FC
Derived From Document ID        : xmp.did:773358B3F48BE211867DE00F2421569D
Derived From Original Document ID: adobe:docid:indd:003478a2-fcdf-11df-8355-f60fc831470b
Derived From Version ID         : 1
Derived From Rendition Class    : default
History Action                  : converted
History Parameters              : from application/x-indesign to application/pdf
History Software Agent          : Adobe InDesign CS6 (Windows)
History Changed                 : /
History When                    : 2013:03:13 11:36:57-05:00
Format                          : application/pdf
Producer                        : Adobe PDF Library 10.0.1
Trapped                         : False
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines
Page Count                      : 628

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

Garmin Software Version 1633 A7

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation